Category Archives: Teachers’ Resources

Latest KCSE exams Revision Predictions Exams

KCSE exams Revision Predictions Exams 2023/2024 Free

KCSE KIS PREDICTIONS 2023.pdf
KCSE CRE PREDICTIONS 2023.pdf
KCSE GERMAN PREDICTIONS .pdf
KCSE HIST PREDICTIONS 2023.pdf
KCSE MATH PREDICTIONS 2023.pdf
KCSE CHEM PREDICTIONS 2023.pdf
KCSE GEO PREDICTIONS 2023.pdf
KCSE ENG PREDICTIONS 2023.pdf
KCSE FRENCH PREDICTIONS 2023.pdf
KCSE PHY PREDICTIONS 2023.pdf
KCSE BIO PREDICTIONS 2023.pdf
KCSE AGRI PREDICTIONS 2023.pdf
KCSE I.R.E PREDICTIONS 2023.pdf
KCSE COMP PREDICTIONS 2023.pdf
KCSE HOMESCIENCE PREDICTIONS 2023.pdf
KCSE BUS PREDICTIONS 2023.pdf

PHYSICS LESSON PLANS IN PDF

FORM 4

TERM 1

SUBJECT: PHYSICS.

TOPIC 4: ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM.

TEACHER’S NAME: …………………………………………       TSC NO: …………….    

SCHOOL/ INSTITUTION  : ……………………………………………………………….

FORM: 4                                                     TERM: 1                          YEAR……………..

NUMBER OF STUDENTS…….                    SUBJECT:  PHYSICS

TOPIC: ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM.

SUB-TOPIC: THE ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM

WEEK: ……..                                                 LESSON NUMBER: ……..

DATE: ……..                                                  TIME: ……….

OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;

-Describe a complete electromagnetic spectrum.

LESSON PRESENTATION

TIME CONTENT LEARNING ACTIVITIES RESOURCES REFERENCE
5 MINUTES INTRODUCTION

Define electromagnetic spectrum.

Discussion.

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Golden tips Physics pages 174
30 MINUTES BODY DEVELOPMENT

-Discussions on the charge in wave length of electromagnetic radiations

explanations

-Discussions on the charge in wave length of electromagnetic radiations

explanations

charts showing the components of the electromagnetic spectrum -Secondary physics KLB students book 4 page 79

-Principles of physics (M.Nelkon) pages 345

-Golden tips Physics pages 174

5 MINUTES CONCLUSION

Giving assignment on the sub-topic.

 

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Golden tips Physics pages 174

 

SELF-EVALUATION:­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

TEACHER’S NAME: …………………………………………       TSC NO: …………….    

SCHOOL/ INSTITUTION  : ……………………………………………………………….

FORM: 4                                                     TERM: 1                          YEAR……………..

NUMBER OF STUDENTS…….                    SUBJECT:  PHYSICS

TOPIC: ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM.

SUB-TOPIC: PROPERTIES OF ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES.

WEEK: ……..                                                 LESSON NUMBER: ……..

DATE: ……..                                                  TIME: ……….

OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;

-State the properties of electromagnetic waves

LESSON PRESENTATION

TIME CONTENT LEARNING ACTIVITIES RESOURCES REFERENCE
5 MINUTES INTRODUCTION

Review the previous lesson.

Discussion.

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Principles of physics (M.Nelkon) pages 345

 

30 MINUTES BODY DEVELOPMENT

Explaining the properties of each component of the electromagnetic spectrum

Explaining the properties of each component of the electromagnetic spectrum Charts showing the properties of electromagnetic waves -Secondary physics KLB students book 4 page 80-81

-Principles of physics (M.Nelkon) pages 345

-Golden tips Physics pages 175

5 MINUTES CONCLUSION

Giving assignment on the sub-topic.

 

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Principles of physics (M.Nelkon) pages 345

 

 

SELF-EVALUATION:­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

TEACHER’S NAME: …………………………………………       TSC NO: …………….    

SCHOOL/ INSTITUTION  : ……………………………………………………………….

FORM: 4                                                     TERM: 1                          YEAR……………..

NUMBER OF STUDENTS…….                    SUBJECT:  PHYSICS

TOPIC: ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM.

SUB-TOPIC: DETECTION OF ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM.

WEEK: ……..                                                 LESSON NUMBER: ……..

DATE: ……..                                                  TIME: ……….

OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;

-Describe the methods of detecting electromagnetic radiations

LESSON PRESENTATION

TIME CONTENT LEARNING ACTIVITIES RESOURCES REFERENCE
5 MINUTES INTRODUCTION

Review the previous lesson.

Discussion.

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Golden tips Physics pages

175-176

30 MINUTES BODY DEVELOPMENT

Demonstrating and explaining how to detect electromagnetic radiations

Demonstrating and explaining how to detect electromagnetic radiations Radiation detectors

Charts showing detectors of electromagnetic radiation

-Secondary physics KLB students book 4 page 81

-Golden tips Physics pages

175-176

5 MINUTES CONCLUSION

Giving assignment on the sub-topic.

 

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Golden tips Physics pages

175-176

 

SELF-EVALUATION:­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

TEACHER’S NAME: …………………………………………       TSC NO: …………….    

SCHOOL/ INSTITUTION  : ……………………………………………………………….

FORM: 4                                                     TERM: 1                          YEAR……………..

NUMBER OF STUDENTS…….                    SUBJECT:  PHYSICS

TOPIC: ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM.

SUB-TOPIC: APPLICATIONS OF ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION.

WEEK: ……..                                                 LESSON NUMBER: ……..

DATE: ……..                                                  TIME: ……….

OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;

-Describe the applications of electromagnetic radiations including greenhouse effect

LESSON PRESENTATION

TIME CONTENT LEARNING ACTIVITIES RESOURCES REFERENCE
5 MINUTES INTRODUCTION

Outline some of the applications of electromagnetic radiations.

Discussion.

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Golden tips Physics pages 175-176
30 MINUTES BODY DEVELOPMENT

Discussions of application of electromagnetic radiations

Discussions of application of electromagnetic radiations Pictures and chart on application of electromagnetic radiations -Secondary physics KLB students book 4 page 82

-Principles of physics (M.Nelkon) pages 336

-Golden tips Physics pages 175-176

5 MINUTES CONCLUSION

Answering questions from the learners.

 

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Golden tips Physics pages 175-176

 

SELF-EVALUATION:­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

TEACHER’S NAME: …………………………………………       TSC NO: …………….    

SCHOOL/ INSTITUTION  : ……………………………………………………………….

FORM: 4                                                     TERM: 1                          YEAR……………..

NUMBER OF STUDENTS…….                    SUBJECT:  PHYSICS

TOPIC: ELECTROMAGNETIC SPECTRUM.

SUB-TOPIC: PROBLEMS ON C=FX.

WEEK: ……..                                                 LESSON NUMBER: ……..

DATE: ……..                                                  TIME: ……….

OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson the learner should be able to;

-Solve numerical problems involving C=fx

LESSON PRESENTATION

TIME CONTENT LEARNING ACTIVITIES RESOURCES REFERENCE
5 MINUTES INTRODUCTION

Ask probing questions.

Discussion.

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Secondary physics KLB students book 4 page 80
30 MINUTES BODY DEVELOPMENT

-Problem solving

-Discussions

-Explanations

-Questions and answers

 

-Problem solving

-Discussions

-Explanations

-Questions and answers

 

-Questions and answers exercises -Comprehensive secondary physics students book 4 pages 45

teachers book 34pages 20-21

-Secondary physics KLB students book 4 page 80

5 MINUTES CONCLUSION

Giving assignment on the whole topic.

 

Questions and answers.

 

-Chalk board/white board.

-A piece of chalk/ marker pen.

 

-Secondary physics KLB students book 4 page 80

 

SELF-EVALUATION:­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GEOGRAPHY UPDATED SCHEMES OF WORK FORM 4 FREE

SCHEME OF WORK               FORM FOUR  GEOGRAPHY               TERM ONE 201  

WK

NO

L/

NO

TOPIC/

SUBTOPIC

LESSON / SPECIFIC
OBJECTIVES
TEACHING / LEARNING
ACTIVITIES
MATERIALS

/

RESOURCES

REF. REM.

1

1

STATISTICAL METHODS OF PRESENTING DATA

 

Age- sex pyramids.

 

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

 

 

Define the term cohort.

Recall steps for constructing an age-sex pyramid.

 

 

 

 

 

Q/A: review previously studied statistical methods of presenting data.

Examine population census results of age and sex.

Teacher explains construction of an age-sex pyramid.

 

 

 

 

Census results.

 

 

 

KLB BOOK IV

 

Pg 1-2

 

2

Age- sex pyramids.

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Construct an age-sex pyramid.

 

 

Supervised practice;

Written exercise.

Tabulated data. Pg 2-3  

3

4

Analysis and interpretation of age-sex pyramids.

 

Advantages and disadvantages of age-sex pyramids

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Analyse and interpret age-sex pyramids.

State advantages and disadvantages of presenting data in form of age- sex pyramids.

 

  Charts – types of age- sex pyramids.

 

 

Pg 2-3  

5

Dot maps/ Distribution maps.

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Explain factors taken into consideration when constructing a dot map.

 

 

Expository approach:

Teacher explains significance of dot value, dot size and dot location.

Simple calculations.

 

  Pg 3-4  

2

1-2

Constructing dot maps.

 

By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

Construct dot maps.

Exposition of steps for constructing dot maps.

Practical activity- making dot maps.

Supervised practice.

Calculators, tabulated data. Pg 4-5  

3

Advantages & disadvantages of dot maps.

State advantages & limitations of dot maps. Review previous assignment.

Brief discussion on construction of dot maps.

Assignment.

  Pg 5  

4

Choropleth maps.

Draw a choropleth map. Teacher exposes and explains new concepts related to choropleth maps.

Written exercise.

  Pg 6-7  

5

Advantages & disadvantages of choropleth maps.

State advantages & disadvantages of chloropleth maps.

 

Probing questions;

Brief discussion.

  Pg 7  

3

1

LAND RECLAMATION

Introduction.

Irrigation schemes in Kenya.

 

 

Define the terms land reclamation and land rehabilitation.

Identify various irrigation schemes in Kenya.

 

 

 

Probing questions related less useful land;

Brief discussion.

 

 

Map: distribution of irrigation schemes in Kenya.

Pg 9-10  

2

Mwea-Tebere irrigation scheme.

State factors influencing location of the scheme.

Describe establishment of the scheme.

 

 

Probing questions;

Detailed discussion on case study.

  Pg 10-11  

3

Perkerra irrigation scheme. State factors influencing location of the scheme.

Describe establishment of the scheme.

 

Probing questions;

Detailed discussion on case study.

  Pg 11-12  

4

 

 

 

5

Significance of irrigation farming in Kenya.

Problems associated with irrigation farming in Kenya.

Outline significance of irrigation farming in Kenya.

 

 

Outline the problems associated with irrigation farming in Kenya.

Q/A & brief discussion.

 

 

 

Brain storming;

Q/A & brief discussion.

 

 

 

Pg 12-13  

4

1

Methods of land reclamation.

 

Irrigation.

Outline types of irrigation.

 

 

Exposition of new concepts;

Brief discussion.

 

 

Pg 14-15  

2

Drainage of swamps & pest control.

Describe drainage of swamps, control of floods & pest control as methods of land reclamation.

 

Detailed discussion with probing questions.

 

  Pg 13,15  

3

Other methods of land reclamation.

Explain other methods of land reclamation.

 

Exposition of new concepts;

Probing questions;

Brief discussion.

 

  Pg 16-18  

4-5

Land reclamation in the Netherlands.

Outline methods of land reclamation in the Netherlands.

Describe land rehabilitation in the Netherlands;

State the benefits of the Zuyder Zee  project.

 

Expository approach & case studies on Zuyder Zee  project.

 

Brief discussion on benefits of the projects.

World map: location of the Netherlands. Pg 18-19  

5

1-2

Land reclamation in the Netherlands.

Highlight features of Delta Plan project.

State the benefits of the Delta Plan project.

Expository approach & case studies on Delta Plan project.

Brief discussion on benefits of the project;

Topic review questions.

 

  Pg 20-21  

5

3

FISHING

Factors influencing fishing.

 

 

Define the terms fishing and fish-farming.

Outline factors influencing fishing.

 

Q/A and brief discussion on influence of presence of planktons, ocean currents, nature of coastline, capital, market and transport.

Assignment.

 

 

Map- ocean currents of Africa.

Pg 22-23  

4,

5

Types of fish

&

Methods of fishing.

 

Identify types of fish.

Outline methods of fishing.

State advantages & disadvantages of specific methods of fishing.

 

Teacher exposes and explains new concepts related to types of fish and fishing methods.

Probing questions on advantages & disadvantages of each method.

 

  Pg 25-28  

6

1

Major fishing grounds in the world.

– Atlantic fishing grounds.

 

Account for the extensive and highly developed fish farming in the Atlantic fishing grounds.

 

Discussion on Atlantic fishing grounds.

 

Illustrative maps. Pg 28-32  

2-3

– Pacific fishing grounds. Account for the extensive and highly developed fish farming in the Pacific fishing grounds.

 

Discussion on Atlantic fishing grounds;

N.E. Asia, West America.

 

Illustrative maps. Pg 32-33  

4

Fishing grounds in Africa. Identify major fishing grounds in Africa. Descriptive approach.

 

Assignment method.

Illustrative maps – fishing grounds in Africa.

 

 

Pg 33-35  

5

Fishing in Kenya. Describe marine fishing and inland fishing in Kenya.

 

Q/A & brief discussion.

 

Superficial case studies.

 

 

Map: drainage system in Kenya. Pg 35-38.

 

 

7

1-2

Fish farming in Kenya. Cite significance of fish farming in Kenya and reasons why it should be encouraged.

State advantages & disadvantages of fish farming compared to other farming methods.

Describe establishment of fish farming in Kenya.

 

Brain storming,

 

Brief discussion.

  Pg 38-40  

3

Problems associated with fishing industry in Kenya. Identify problems associated with fishing industry.

Suggest possible solutions to the problems.

Brain storming,

 

Brief discussion.

  Pg 44-47  

4,5

TEST & MID –TERM BREAK        

8

1

Management and conservation of fisheries in Kenya.

Outline some measures involved in the management and conservation of fisheries in Kenya. Brief discussion on management and conservation measures.

 

 

     

2

Fishing in Tanzania. Describe marine fishing and inland fishing in Tanzania.

 

Q/A & brief discussion.

 

Superficial case studies.

Map: drainage system in Tanzania. Pg 40-41  

3

Fishing in Uganda. Describe marine fishing and inland fishing in Uganda.

 

Q/A & brief discussion.

 

Superficial case studies.

Map: drainage systems in Uganda. Pg 41-43  

4-5

Fishing in Japan. Account for establishment and development of fishing in Japan. Case study. Map showing location of Japan. Pg 47-48  

9

1

WILDLIFE AND TOURISM

 

Distribution of wildlife in East Africa.

 

 

 

 

 

Explain the factors influencing distribution of wildlife in East Africa.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Detailed discussion.

 

Q/A and brief discussion.

 

 

 

 

Map: distribution of major game parks in East Africa.

 

 

 

 

Pg 50-52

 

2

Game Parks in East Africa.

Identify major national parks, national reserves and game sanctuaries in East Africa. Locating Game Parks in East  Africa on the map;

Discuss distribution of the Game Parks.

 

  Pg 52-53  

3

Significance and problems facing Wildlife in East Africa.

 

Outline the significance of wildlife in East Africa.

Outline problems facing wildlife in East Africa.

Suggest possible solutions to the problems.

 

Oral questions;

Explanations and open discussion.

  Pg 54-57  

4-5

Management and conservation of wildlife in East Africa.

 

Highlight some of the measures being taken to conserve wildlife in East Africa. Probing questions & discussion. Newspaper cuttings. Pg 57-59  

10

1

Tourism:

Introduction.

 

Factors of tourism in Kenya.

Define the terms tourism, eco-tourism, domestic tourism and international tourism.

Explain factors influencing tourism in Kenya.

 

Probing questions;

Exposition of new terms.

 

Detailed discussion.

  Pg 59-64  

2

Tourist attractions in Kenya. Identify tourist attractions in Kenya. Give specific examples of tourist attractions.   Pg 64-69  

3

 

4

Significance of tourism.

Problems associated with tourism.

Outline benefits of tourism to Kenya.

 

Identify problems associated with tourism.

Give specific examples of tourism benefits.

Give specific examples of problems associated with tourism.

Newspaper extracts. Pg 69-73  

5

Tourism in Switzerland.

Account for development of tourism industry in Switzerland. Superficial case study. Map: location of Switzerland. Pg 71  

11

1

ENERGY

 

Renewable sources of energy.

 

 

 

Identify renewable sources of energy.

 

 

 

 

Probing questions;

 

Brief discussion.

  Pg 75-80  

2

Non- renewable sources of energy Identify non- renewable sources of energy. Brain storming;

 

Brief discussion.

  Pg 80-82  

3-4

H.E.P. stations & geothermal stations in Kenya.

 

 

Describe establishment and development of H.E.P. & geothermal stations in Kenya.

 

Brain storming;

 

Brief discussion.

 

Map: HEP stations in Kenya. Pg 83-85  

5

H.E.P. stations in Uganda.

 

 

Describe establishment and development of H.E.P. stations in Uganda.

 

Brief discussion.

 

 

 

Map: HEP stations in Kenya. Pg 85-86  

12-13

END  OF  TERM   ONE   EXAMINATIONS  

 

SCHEME OF WORK               FORM FOUR  GEOGRAPHY               TERM ONE 2011  

WK

NO.

L/

NO.

TOPIC/

SUBTOPIC

LESSON / SPECIFIC
OBJECTIVES
TEACHING / LEARNING
ACTIVITIES
MATERIALS

/

RESOURCES

REF. REM.

1

1

Geothermal power projects in Africa. Identify  major geothermal power sites in Africa. Brief case study on Kariba and Akosombo dams.

 

Map- HEP power projects in Africa. Pg 86-87  

2

Energy crisis.

Explain some emerging issues related to energy crisis.

 

Brief discussion & probing questions.

 

  Pg 89-90  

3-4

Management and conservation of energy.

Outline measures taken to manage and conserve energy. Brief discussion with probing questions.

Review questions.

  Pg 91  

5

INDUSTRY

 

Introduction.

Definition and importance.

 

 

Define the terms industry and industrialization.

Give reasons why industrialization is essential.

 

 

 

Brain storming;

 

Discussion.

   

 

Pg 93-97

 

2

1

Types of industries.

Describe the main types of industries in Kenya. Give examples of each type   Pg 98-102  

2

Jua kali industries.

Explain the role of jua kali industries in the growth of an economy. Oral questions, brief discussion.   103- 107  

3-4

Distribution of Agricultural industries in Kenya.

Describe the distribution of Agricultural industries in Kenya. Cite specific examples and the materials dealt in.      

5

Distribution of non-agricultural industries in Kenya.

 

Describe the distribution of non-agricultural industries in Kenya. Cite specific examples and the materials dealt in.      

3

1,2

Significance of industrialization in Kenya.

Highlight the significance of industrialization in Kenya. Oral questions, brief discussion.      

3,4

Problems facing industrialization & industries in Kenya.

Identify problems facing industrialization & industries in Kenya.

Suggest possible solutions to the problems.

 

Q/A & brief discussion.   Pg 104-5  

5

1,2

Cottage industry in India.

 

 

 

Iron & steel industry in the Ruhr region.

Describe cottage industry in India.

Explain the success of cottage industry in India.

Explain factors that have led to development of iron & steel industry in the Ruhr region of Germany.

 

Brief discussion.

 

Give examples of activities in Cottage industry.

 

Expository approach with specific examples.

Map: industrial centers of India & Germany. Pg 104-7

 

 

 

Pg 113

 

4

3,4

 

 

5

Car manufacturing &

Electronics industry in Japan.

Explain factors that have led to development of car manufacturing & electronics industry in Japan.

 

Expository approach with specific examples. Maps: Japan’s major industrial centres. Pg 116-118  

5

1-2

TRANSPORT & COMMU.NICA-

TION.

Introduction.

 

 

Road transport.

 

 

Define the terms transport, communication & tele-communication.

State advantages & disadvantages of road transport.

Identify problems facing road transport.

Suggest ways of combating these problems.

 

 

 

 

 

Brainstorming, brief discussion;

 

 

 

 

 

Pg 120-21

   

3

Railway transport.

State advantages & disadvantages of railway transport.

Identify problems facing railway transport in Africa.

 

 

 

Oral questions, brief discussion. Pg 121-2    

4

Water transport.

Cite reasons for development of water transport in Africa.

State advantages & disadvantages of water transport.

Identify problems facing water transport in Africa.

 

 

 

Q/A ,brief discussion.   Pg 123-4  

5

Air transport.

Cite reasons for development of air transport in Africa.

State advantages & disadvantages of air transport.

Identify problems facing air transport in Africa.

 

 

 

Q/A, brief discussion. Maps: major airports in Africa. Pg 124  -5  

6

1

C.A.T. & MID –TERM BREAK        

2

Pipelines, lifts & escalators.

State advantages & disadvantages of pipelines, lifts & escalators.

 

 

Brief discussion, Q/A.   Pg 126  

3

Types of communication systems.

Identify types of communication systems in Africa. Q/A, discussion & exposition of new concepts e.g. Facsimile, internet and

e-mail.

 

  Pg 127-8  

4

Major lines of transport in Africa.

Identify major lines of transport in Africa. Locate major roads, railway lines, airlines and waterways on a map. Illustrative maps. Pg 129  

5

Role of transport

           & communication.

Explain the role of transport & communication in the economic development of Africa.

 

Brainstorming, probing questions & discussion.   Pg 134-8  

7

1

Problems facing transport and communication in Africa.

Identify major problems facing transport and communication in Africa.

Highlight efforts being made to combat these problems.

 

Probing questions & discussion.   136-7  
2,3

Great Lakes and St. Lawrence Seaway.

Identify the Great Lakes of North America.

List down aims of St. Lawrence Seaway project.

 

Brief case study  on of St. Lawrence Seaway project.

 

 

Map: Great Lakes and St. Lawrence Seaway. Pg 140-1  
4-5

Great Lakes and St. Lawrence Seaway.

Enumerate benefits of the project.

Identify the role of the projects in the economies of USA and Canada.

Brief case study  on of St. Lawrence Seaway project.

 

 

  Pg 140-1  

8

1

TRADE

Types of trade.

Identify and describe types of trade. Brainstorming, probing questions and discussion on types of trade.   Pg 143-5  

2

Factors influencing trade.

Identify factors that make trade possible. Q/A & Discussion.   Pg 146-7  

3

Significance of trade to Kenya.

 

Problems facing trade in Kenya.

Explain the significance of trade to Kenya.

 

Identify major problems facing trade in Kenya.

Oral questions, brief discussion. Balance of trade charts. Pg 149-152  

4-5

Regional Trade Blocs.

Describe establishment of regional trade blocs.

Identify member countries of Regional Trade Blocs.

Highlight benefits of Regional Trade Blocs.

Identify problems facing Regional Trade Blocs.

Descriptive approach on COMESA, SADC, and AU.

 

Assignment.

  Pg 154-6  

9

1-2

Regional Trade Blocs. (contd)

Describe establishment of regional trade blocs.

Identify member countries of Regional Trade Blocs.

Highlight benefits of Regional Trade Blocs.

Identify problems facing Regional Trade Blocs.

Descriptive approach of discussing WTO, ECOWAS, AGOA   Pg 146 – 8  

3

POPULATION

Population distribution in East Africa.

 

Define the term demography.

Explain factors influencing population distribution in East Africa.

 

Brain storming.

& discussion.

  Pg 162-165  

4

Population growth.

Explain factors that influence population growth. Exposition and explanation of new terms e.g. fertility, fecundity, mortality, milieu variables, e.t.c

 

  Pg 165-6  

5

Tools of detecting population growth.

 

Identify tools of detecting population growth. Brief discussion on census and sample surveys.   Pg 166-8  

10

1

Migration.

Identify causes of migration.

Identify types of migration.

 

Q/A & discussion.   Pg 168-9  

2

Crude birth rate & crude death rate.

Define the terms crude birth rate & crude death rate.

Calculate crude birth rate & crude death rate.

Exposition of new concepts;

Worked examples;

Problem solving.

 

 

  Pg 172-3  

10

3-4

Population trends.

Explain the population transition theory.

Identify the four demographic transition phases.

Probing questions & expository approach:

Teacher exposes and explains the new concepts relating to demographic trends.

 

Chart: demographic trends. Pg 173-4  

5

Slow population growth rate.

Identify factors leading to slow population growth rate.

Highlight problems associated with slow population growth rate.

Q/A, brief discussion on effects of famine, epidemics, FP practices, emigration, etc.

 

 

  Pg 175-6  

11

1

Population growth in Kenya.

Explain factors influencing Kenya’s rapid population growth rate. Examine actual population growth figures.

Discussion and questioning.

 

 

  Pg 176-9  

2-3

Population structure in Kenya.

Describe structure of Kenya’s population. Examine population pyramids;

Discuss observations.

  Pg 178-9  

4

Consequences of Kenya’s rapid population growth rate.

 

Explain the socio-economic consequences of Kenya’s rapid population growth rate. Probing questions, open discussion. Population census results/ population fact file. Pg 180-3  

5

Distribution of population in Sweden.

Identify factors influencing distribution of population in Sweden.

Highlight factors contributing to slow growth population rate in Sweden.

 

Discussion: comparative view on Kenya’s and Sweden’s populations.

 

Assignment.

  Pg 184-5  

12-13

END OF TERM TWO ASSESSMENT TEST  

 

SCHEME OF WORK               FORM FOUR  GEOGRAPHY               TERM ONE 2011  

L/

NO.

TOPIC/

SUBTOPIC

LESSON / SPECIFIC

OBJECTIVES

TEACHING / LEARNING
ACTIVITIES
MATERIALS

/

RESOURCES

REF. REM.  

1

1

SETTLEMENT

 

Types of settlements.

 

 

Define the term settlement.

State types of settlements.

 

 

Probing questions; discussion.

  Pg 186-7    

2

Location and patterns of settlements.

Explain factors influencing location and patterns of settlements. Q/A & discussion on geographical, economical factors, cultural factors etc.   Pg 187-191    

3-4

Patterns of settlement.

Identify various patterns of settlement. Exposition & explanations on: nucleated, linear, dispersed and other complex settlement patterns.

 

  Pg 191-2    

5

Major urban centres in East Africa.

Identify categories of urban centres in East Africa; and give examples in each case.

 

Brief discussion giving specific examples. Map: major East Africa urban centers. Pg 193-4    

2

1

Growth of major urban centers in East Africa.

Explain factors influencing growth of major urban centers in East Africa.

 

Brief discussion.   Pg 195-6    

2

Thika as an industrial centre.

Kisumu as a lake port.

Outline factors favouring growth of Thika as an industrial centre.

Identify problems facing Thika as an industrial centre.

 

Outline factors favouring Kisumu as a lake port.

Identify problems facing Kisumu as a modern lake port.

 

 

Case studies.   Pg 198-9    

3

Eldoret as an agricultural collecting centre and administrative centre.

Outline factors favouring

Eldoret as an agricultural collecting centre and administrative centre.

 

Identify problems facing Eldoret as an agricultural collecting centre and administrative centre.

 

Q/A;

Case study;

Assignment.

  Pg 200-1    

4-5

Nairobi City.

Trace the growth of Nairobi to city status.

Outline factors favouring growth of Nairobi.

Identify problems facing Nairobi as a city.

 

Probing questions & brief discussion.

Case study.

  Pg 201-4    

3

1

New York City.

Outline factors influencing growth of New York city.

Identify problems facing New York City.

 

 

Probing questions & brief discussion.

Case study.

  Pg 204-7    

3

2-3

Mombasa.

Trace history and growth of Mombasa.

Outline factors influencing growth of Mombasa.

Identify problems faced by Mombasa as a city.

 

Exposition, explanations and discussion.   Pg 207-211    

4

Rotterdam.

Identify factors leading to growth of Rotterdam to an international port.

 

Exposition & explanations.   Pg 211-2    

5

Effects of urbanization.

Outline effects of urbanization. Brain storming;

Discussion.

  212-5    

4

1

MANAGEMENT

          & CONSERVA-

TION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

 

Introduction.

Environmental conservation.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Define the terms environment, social environment, ecosystem, biodiversity, and environmental management.

Give reasons for conserving the environment

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Probing questions, exposition of new concepts & explanations.

   

 

 

 

 

Pg 216-8

   

2

Specific environmental hazards.

Describe some methods of combating floods, lightning, windstorms, pests and diseases. Q/A, discussion, exposition of new concepts.   Pg 224-230    

3-4

Pollution.

Describe air pollution, water pollution and sound & land pollution.

Explain ways of combating pollution.

Examples of gases / activities leading to  pollution;

Discussion.

  Pg 230-235    

5

Environmental conservation measures in Kenya.

Outline measures carried out to manage and conserve the environment. Q/A, brief discussion on public awareness, public education, legislation, the Water Act, and other Acts etc.

 

  Pg 236-240    

MOCK K.C.S.E / REVISION

         

K.C.S.E.

         

 

WORD PROCESSORS TEACHER NOTES- MICROSOFT WORD LATEST

MICROSOFT WORD

It is a Word processing program.  It helps in creating professional-looking documents that can be printed, e.g., letters, reports, memos, essays, projects, books, etc,.

More about Ms-Word.

 

Microsoft Word is one of the components of Microsoft Office.  Microsoft Office is an integrated software with a number of interrelated programs, which include; Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel (a spreadsheet), Microsoft Access (a database management system), Microsoft PowerPoint (a presentation package), etc.  Each program allows the user to solve a variety of common computer related tasks.

 

Microsoft Office allows the user to work with programs that have the same basic structure and interface.  It also allows the users to share information quickly and easily between different programs.

 

There are several versions of Microsoft Word, the most common being Word 97, Word 2000, Word XP, and Word 2003.  These versions of Microsoft Word are found in Microsoft Office 97, 2000, XP and 2003 suites respectively.

 

Getting information about your program and computer.

 

You can check which version of the Microsoft Office XP program is installed on your computer, and determine the product ID number of your copy of the program.

 

You can also get system information and perform a test of your network connection.

 

  1. On the Help menu, click About Microsoft <Program Name>.
  2. Click the OK

 

Starting Microsoft Word.

 

There are a number of ways you can start Microsoft Word.

 

Method 1.

 

  1. Click the Start button, point to Programs (or All Programs, if you are using Windows XP), then click Microsoft Word from the programs menu.

 

Method 2.

 

Click on the Microsoft Word icon on the Microsoft Office Shortcut Bar, if it is displayed on the desktop.

 

Parts of the Microsoft Word Screen.

 

Once you start Microsoft Word, it provides you with a blank document window where you can create your document.

 

  1. Title bar.

 

A Title is mostly a blue strip at the top of the window that displays the title of the currently running application.

 

The Title bar also enables the user to move the window around the desktop.  This can be done by pointing to it, then drag using the mouse.

 

  1. Resizing buttons.

 

They include; the Minimize, Restore/Maximize, and the Close button that are found on the right of the Title bar.

 

The Minimize button – reduces a window to become a button on the taskbar.

 

The Maximize button – stretches the window to cover the entire desktop.

 

The Restore button – restores a window to its original size.

 

The Close button – is used to close and exit a window.

 

  1. Menu bar.

 

Provides a drop down list of commands that one can use to perform a task.  Examples are File, Edit, Window and Help.

 

  1. Document (Work)

 

This is the working area where you can enter text or graphical objects.

 

 

Ms-Word provides the user with a Vertical & an Horizontal ruler that helps the user position text or objects in the right position.

 

Horizontal ruler:

 

A bar marked off in units of measure (such as inches) that is displayed across the top of the document window.

 

Uses of the Horizontal ruler.

 

  • Setting tab stops.
  • Contain markers for paragraph indentation, e.g., First Line, Left indent & Hanging indent.
  • Can be used to adjust the Left and Right page margins.
  • Can be used for adjusting the column widths of a table.
  • Can be used to show column boundaries, and also adjust the size of text columns.

 

Vertical ruler:

 

A bar displayed along the left side of the document window.  The vertical ruler can be used to adjust the Top and Bottom page margins and the Row height in tables.

 

To Display the rulers.

 

  1. Click the View menu, and then choose Ruler on the drop down menu that appears.

A checkmark or tick will appear next to it showing that the ruler is displayed on the screen.

 

  1. Text cursor (Insertion Point).

 

A Cursor is a blinking underscore ( __ ) or a vertical beam ( I ) that shows where the next character to be typed will appear.

 

  1. Scroll bars, Scroll boxes & Scroll arrows.

 

Scroll bars are horizontal & vertical bars on the borders of a window.  They contain boxes that the user can drag to scroll upward, downwards, to the right or to the left of the document.

Scroll arrows are found at the end of the scroll bars, and the user can click on them.

 

  1. View buttons.

 

They are found at the left hand corner of the Horizontal scroll bar.

 

  1. Status bar.

 

This is an interactive bar or strip at the bottom of the screen that acts as a communication link between the user and the program.  It displays information about the current condition of the program, such as saving operation, the name of the file in use, the current page, cursor position, or information about the selected item.

 

Importance.

 

  • The Status bar helps the user to interact with the application because it displays the processing status of the application.

 

 

 

  • These are rows of buttons or icons that represent commands.

 

  • A Toolbar is a group of shortcut command icons arranged on a single graphical structure.

 

A Toolbar contains buttons and options that you use to carry out commands. The command buttons are shortcuts to the same commands you can access from the Menu bar.

 

Examples of toolbars in Ms-Word include;

~  Standard.                                  ~  Picture.

~  Formatting.                               ~  Tables and Borders.

~  Drawing.                                   ~  Word Count.

~  Mail merge.                               ~  Word Art, etc.

 

To select the Toolbars you want to use.

 

  1. To display a toolbar, click on the View menu, point to Toolbars.
  2. Click on the toolbars you want to use, and make sure they have are checked (have ticks or checkmarks next to them).

 

Alternatively, Right-click any toolbar, then select the toolbars required.  You can also deselect any toolbars that you do not require.

 

To Show or hide ScreenTips for the toolbar buttons.

 

  1. On the Tools menu, click Customize, then click the Options
  2. Select or clear the Show ScreenTips on toolbars

 

Customize the Toolbars.

 

Purpose.

  • Ms-Word buttons are automatically grouped into different toolbars depending on their functionality. Ms-Word allows you to create your own toolbars where you can combine your most frequently used commands.

 

  1. On the View menu, point to Toolbars, then select Customize.
  2. In the resulting dialog box, click New. In the Toolbar name box, type in a new name for your new toolbar such as ‘My Own’, then click the OK
  3. Click the Commands tab to allow you to select the buttons you need on the new toolbar.

The left side of the dialog box are the categories of commands that you can select, whereas on the right side are the commands.

  1. Drag the desired buttons onto your new toolbar.

To remove a button from any toolbar, drag it off the toolbar and drop it onto the Customize dialog box.

  1. When you have finished adding buttons to your toolbar, click on the Close

Your new toolbar should now be complete with all the buttons you dragged onto it, and the name of the toolbar should be visible.

  1. You can drag or move your new toolbar to any convenient position on the screen.

 

Review Questions 1.1

 

  1. (a). What is Microsoft Word?

(b). Under what category of applications does Microsoft Word fall in?

(c). Apart from Microsoft Word, name two other Word processing programs.

(d). What are the importance of Microsoft Word to the Market today?

(e). Name and explain any 5 parts of the Microsoft Word application window.

  1. (a). What is a Toolbar?

(b). Give Four examples of Toolbars used in Microsoft Word application.

(b). What is the function of Status bar in a Microsoft Word application window?

  1. Give FOUR uses of the horizontal ruler in Microsoft Word.
  2. What is Word wrap?

 

 

 

 

Exercise (b).

 

  1. (a). Give Two examples of modern Word processors.

(b). Give 2 advantages and 3 disadvantages of using Microsoft Word.

  1. Explain the importance of the Status bar.
  2. You have just started the Microsoft Word program and discovered that the Drawing toolbar and the Ruler are not present. Describe how you would display them.

 

CREATING A DOCUMENT.

 

Document – Whatever you create with an application, including information you type, edit, view or save.

 

Creating a document means typing text in a new document screen.

 

Creating a New Blank Document.

 

In case you are working in Ms-Word and you want to create another new document,

 

Method 1.

 

  1. Click the New Blank Document button on the Standard toolbar (or press CTRL+N).

 

Method 2.

 

  1. On the File menu, click New.
  2. Click the General tab, and then double-click the Blank Document

 

Creating documents using Templates.

 

  • A Template is a file that contain the structure & tools for shaping elements such as the style and page layout of finished files. It contains the standard text, graphics and formatting for use in all documents of this type.

 

  • A Template is a document that acts as a blueprint or outline for other documents of the same type.

 

Purpose.

 

  • Using templates helps to save time & makes creating of new documents easy.
  • It also ensures that there is consistency between the documents being created.

 

To create a New Document from a template or wizard.

 

 

Wizard – A feature that asks questions and then creates an item, such as a form or Web page, according to your answers.  A Wizard lets you choose the formatting and content options you want to apply.

 

Using Ms-Word 97 or 2000.

 

  1. Create the document on which you will base other new documents.
  • Insert all the text, graphics and formatting you want included.
  • Set the Page margins and other print layout options.
  1. On the File menu, choose Save As, then enter the filename.
  2. In the Save as type box, select Document Template, then click Save.

 

Using Ms-Word 2002.

 

  1. On the File menu, click New.
  2. In the New Document task pane, under New from template, click General Templates.
  3. Click the relevant tab depending on the type of document you want to create, then double-click the icon for the template or wizard you want.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Examples of documents that can be created using templates.

 

  • Blank Documents. è Web Pages.                        è E-Mail messages.
  • è Memos.                              è Letters.
  • è Mailing labels.                   è Envelopes.
  • è Resumes (CV).
  • Publications such as, Brochures, Manuals, Directories, Theses.

 

To create a letter,

 

  1. Click the Letters & Faxes
  2. Double-click Letter Wizard, and then follow the instructions in the Letter Wizard.

 

Create a résumé,

 

  1. Click the Other Documents
  2. Double-click Résumé Wizard, and then follow the steps in the wizard.

 

Create a calendar,

 

  1. Click the Other Documents
  2. Double-click Calendar Wizard, and then follow the steps in the wizard.

 

Create a Web Page using the Web Page Wizard,

 

  1. Click the Web Pages
  2. Double-click Web Page Wizard, and then follow the steps in the wizard, so as to provide information like the title, pages, and even the visual theme for the web page.
  3. Click on the Finish

After a few seconds, the template is presented complete with placeholders.

  1. Click on the sample text and replace it with your own text.

 

Create a folded booklet,

 

To create a booklet, start with a new blank document so that you can control the placement of text, graphics, and other elements.

 

  1. On the File menu, click Page Setup, then click the Margins
  2. In the Multiple Pages list, select Book fold.

If your document is not set to landscape orientation, Ms-Word sets it to landscape.

  1. In the Inside & Outside boxes, select the amount of space you want for the inside and outside margins.

If you need more space along the fold to accommodate binding, select it in the Gutter box.

 

  1. In the Sheets per booklet list, select the no. of pages you want to include in a single booklet.

If the no. of pages in the document exceeds those you select for a booklet, Word prints the document as multiple booklets.

  1. Select any other options you want in the Page Setup dialog box.
  2. Add text, graphics, headers or footers, and other elements to your document as usual.

 

Note.  When you select Book fold for your Page Setup, Word prints two pages on one side of the paper. When you fold the paper, it opens like a book. This option is intended for documents that have more than two pages.

 

Inserting Text into a document.

 

When you start Ms-Word, a blank document appears with a blinking vertical bar called the Insertion point (or cursor), ready for you to start typing.  The Insertion point indicates the place where text and graphics will appear when typed or inserted.

 

  1. When you get the Insertion point, start typing your text.

 

OR

  1. Position the Insertion point where you want to begin typing, then type your text.

 

 

Starting a New Paragraph.

 

When typing text in paragraphs, you don’t have to start a new line when you reach the right margin.  Ms-Word wraps the text automatically to the next line when it reaches the right margin.  This facility is known as the Word Wrap.

 

Word Wrap:

 

  • Moving a word to the beginning of a new line if it cannot fit at the end of the previous line.

When you want to end a short sentence or start a new paragraph, or when you want to leave a blank line between paragraphs, press the ENTER key.

 

Note. To move the cursor back to where it was before pressing the ENTER or to omit a space created by the ENTER key, use Backspace or Delete.

 

A Paragraph is any amount of text that ends with a paragraph mark, which is created by pressing the ENTER key.

 

CAPS Lock key.

 

  • Used to switch between Uppercase & Lowercase. When pressed on, an indicator with a green light appears on the top-right hand corner of the Keyboard, and all the text typed will appear in capital letters.  When pressed off, all the text typed will appear in small letters.

 

SHIFT key.

 

  • Used to get the Punctuation marks (comma, full-stop, etc) on top of the Number keys, or symbols in certain keys.

Press & hold down the SHIFT key, then press the key for the letter.

 

  • To produce a single capital letter.

 

Hold down the SHIFT, then press the key for the letter you want to appear as capital.

 

TAB key.

 

It is used to move the text cursor or a certain text at set intervals on the same line to the required position on the screen, e.g., 10mm, 20mm, etc.

 

 

Note.  To move back the text or cursor after using the TAB, press SHIFT+TAB keys or press BACKSPACE key.

 

SPACEBAR.

 

  • Used to separate every two words or sentences from each other.

 

To leave a blank space between words, after a comma or a semi-colon; press the Spacebar once.  To leave a blank space between sentences; press the Spacebar twice.

Moving the Insertion point within a document.

 

To move the cursor                                                                        press

 

  • 1 character to the left             Left arrow
  • 1 character to the right Right arrow
  • Down 1 line Down arrow.
  • Up 1 line Up arrow.
  • To the beginning of the current line HOME.
  • To the end of the current line END.
  • To the beginning of a document                         CTRL+Home
  • To the end of a document CTRL+End
  • To the page above the one displayed on the screen         Page Up.
  • To the next page (page below the one displayed) Page Down.

 

 

 

Scrolling through a document.

 

Scrolling:

 

  • Scrolling is the movement of text document on the screen up, down, left and right.

 

  • To move forward or backward through a no. of lines in a file being displayed on a CRT screen.

 

Scrolling is done either using the Up or Down arrow keys, Page Up or Page Down keys, or using the Mouse in Windows based word processors.

 

To scroll:                                                                                Click.

Up 1 line                                                                                 Up scroll arrow.

Down 1 line                                                                            Down scroll arrow.

 

Right                                                                                       Right scroll arrow.

Left                                                                                         Left scroll arrow.

 

Up 1 screen                                                                             Above the scroll box.

 

Down 1 screen                                                                        Below the scroll box.

 

To a specific page                                                                   Drag the scroll box.

 

After scrolling, click where you want to start typing.

 

Tip.  To scroll more slowly, use the Arrow keys, Page Up or Page Down on the Keyboard.

 

Correcting a document.

 

  1. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the position of the correction.
    • If you had left out a character, type it. Ms-Word will insert the character to the immediate right of the cursor.
    • If you had typed a wrong character, you can delete it by positioning the cursor on the immediate left of the character, then press the Delete key on the Keyboard.

 

VIEWING DOCUMENTS.

 

Ms-Word provides different ways to view your work, depending on the task at hand.

 

Normal view.

 

Normal view is convenient for most typing, editing and formatting tasks.  It shows text formatting and a simplified layout of the page so that you can type and edit quickly.

 

To switch to Normal view, click Normal on the View menu.

 

Print Layout View.

 

Displays how a document or other object will appear when printed.  It shows how text, graphics, headers, footnotes, columns, textboxes and other elements will be positioned on the printed page.

 

This view is useful for editing headers and footers, for adjusting margins, and for working with columns and drawing objects.

 

To switch to print layout view, click Print Layout on the View menu.

 

Print Preview.

 

A view of a document as it will appear when printed.

 

In this view, you can see page breaks & watermarks and you can make editing or formatting changes before printing the document.

 

To switch to print preview, click Print Preview on the File menu.

 

Web layout view.

 

Shows how a document will appear in a Web browser.  In Web layout view, the document appears as one long page (without page breaks), while text and tables wrap to fit in the window.

 

To switch to Web layout view, click Web Layout on the View menu.

 

Full Screen mode.

 

In this mode, Ms-Word removes distracting screen elements, such as toolbars and scroll bars so that it displays as much of your document as possible on the screen.

 

To switch to full-screen mode, click Full Screen on the View menu.

 

Tips.

 

  • To choose menu commands in full-screen mode, rest the pointer at the top of the screen. The Menu bar will appear.
  • To turn off full-screen mode and switch to the previous view, click Close Full Screen on the Full Screen toolbar, or press ESC.

 

Zoom in or out of a document.

 

You can “zoom in” to get a close-up view of your document or “zoom out” to see more of the page at a reduced size.

 

  1. Click the arrow next to the Zoom box on the Standard toolbar (or click Zoom on the View menu).
  2. Click the zoom setting you want from the drop-down list.

 

SAVING DOCUMENTS.

 

Purpose.

 

  • You save a document in order to use it at a later time, perhaps a few hours or even years later.
  • If done periodically, say after every 1 minute, saving helps to prevent data loss in case of power failure.

 

Using the ‘Save’ command.

 

The Save command can be used when you are saving a new document for the first time or when saving changes to an open document.

 

Using the ‘Save As…’ command.

 

Save As can be used if you want to:

  • Name and save a new document or template.
  • Save a document or template on a different disk drive or in a different folder.
  • Make a copy of an existing document or template with a new name, leaving the original document unchanged.

 

To name and save a new document for the first time.

 

  1. On the File menu, select Save or Save As (or press CTRL+’S’) to display the Save As dialog box.
  2. In the File name box, type a name for the document.
  3. To store the document in a different folder or drive, select a different location to save in by clicking the down facing arrow next to the Save in list box.
  4. To save the file in a different format or type, click the down arrow on the right of Save as type list box, and choose a file type.
  5. Click the Save button.

 

After you name and save a document once, the Save & Save As commands function differently.

 

To save changes to an existing document.

 

  1. Click Save on the Standard toolbar (or on the File menu or press CTRL+S).

 

Save a copy of a document with a new name or in a different location.

 

  1. Open the document you want to make a copy of.
  2. On the File menu, click Save As.
  3. In the File name box, enter a new name for the file.

To save the copy in a different folder or drive, click a different location in the Save in list.

  1. Click on the Save button.

Note. Changing a document’s name or location using Save As creates a new copy of the document, so two copies of the same document exist: one with the old name or location and one with the new. The copies are completely separate, and the work you do on one document has no effect on the other.

 

Saving files automatically when you are working.

 

Purpose.

 

  • You can set up Ms-Word so that it saves your files at the frequency that you specify in order to safeguard against accidental loss of a file due to power failure.

 

  1. On the Tools menu, choose In the resulting dialog box, click the Save tab, then select the Save AutoRecover info every checkbox.
  2. In the Minutes box, enter the interval for how often you want to save files.

The more frequently your files are saved, the more information is recovered if there is a power failure or similar problem while a file is open.

 

Note.  AutoRecover is not a replacement for regularly saving your files. If you don’t save the recovery file after opening it, the file is deleted and your unsaved changes are lost.

 

Tip.  You can speed up saving a file by turning on fast saves,

 

  1. On the Tools menu, click Options, then click the Save
  2. Select the Allow fast saves checkbox, and then continue to save as you work on the file.

 

Protecting a document using a Password.

 

  • A Password is a secret word or phrase by which you protect or lock your document so that no one will be able to open or print the file without knowing the password.

 

  • A Password is a combination of characters that prevents other users from opening and changing a document without permission.

 

Use of Passwords is a security method used to restrict access to computer systems and sensitive files that may be confidential in nature.  Otherwise, if a document is protected by a password, only the person who knows the password can open the document or edit it.

 

For example, Passwords can be used to:

 

  • Prevent unauthorized users from opening a document at all.
  • Allow other users to open the document but only make changes to it. If someone makes changes to a password-protected document, that person can save the document only by giving it a different file name.

 

  • A password can contain any combination of letters, numerals, spaces, and symbols, and it can be up to 15 characters long.
  • As you type the password, Ms-Word displays an asterisk (*) for each character that you type to ensure confidentiality.

 

  1. Create or open the document you want to protect with a password.
  2. On the File menu, click Save As to display the Save As dialog box.
  3. Click the down arrow on the Tools button, click Security Options.
  4. Under the File sharing options for this document section, type a password under Password to open. This prompts the user to enter password when opening a document.
  5. If you wish, type in another password under Password to modify. This prevents the user from making changes to a document unless the user enters the correct password.
  6. Click OK.

Ms-Word prompts you to confirm the password.  Re-type the password again, then click OK.

  1. To save the document, choose OK.

 

 

Notes.

 

  • After creating a password, write it down and keep it in a secure place. If the password is lost, you cannot open or gain access to the password-protected file.
  • If you protect a document with a password, you must provide the correct password each time you open the file.
  • Passwords are case-sensitive, so if you vary the capitalization when you assign the password, then you must type the same capitalization when entering the password.

 

FILE PROPERTIES

 

Document properties are details about a file that help to identify it — e.g. a descriptive title, the author name, the subject, and keywords that identify topics or other important information in the file, such as file size and the dates when the files were created & last modified.

 

Setting document properties for the active document,

 

  1. On the File menu, click Properties.
  2. Click on the Summary tab, then edit the values for standard properties, such as Title and Author.

 

Note.  If you want to be reminded to set document properties for every file you create, you can have Ms-Word automatically display the Properties dialog box when you save files for the first time.

 

  1. On the Tools menu, choose Options, then click the Save
  2. Select or clear the Prompt for document properties

 

Troubleshoot saving documents

 

  • When I try to save a document, I get a message that my file is too large.

 

If a document is too large to save, divide it into smaller parts, i.e., cut part of the document & paste it into a new document, then save each part individually.

 

  • When I try to save changes to a document, I get a message that the document is read-only.

 

You can’t make changes to a read-only document. To save any changes made, save the document with a new name or use the same name but save the document in a different folder.

 

  • When I save a document, the file is saved with an additional file name extension.

 

When you save a document with a file name extension other than the default extension for that type of file, Ms-Word adds the default extension to your file name — e.g. an Ms-Word document file name may appear as Budget.abc.doc.

 

The extension is used to identify the type of file and which program should be used to open the file.

 

  • The file I saved contains two periods in the file name.

 

When you save a document with a file name that ends with a period — e.g. Sales. — Ms-Word adds a period and the default file name extension to your file name. E.g. a Word document file name may appear as Sales..doc.

 

To save a document with the default extension for that file type, do not type the period following the file name. The period is automatically added when you save the file.

 

  • I saved changes by using AutoRecover, and I don’t see them in the recovery file.

 

AutoRecover had not yet have saved the changes to the recovery file before Ms-Word unexpectedly shut down.

 

The amount of new information that the recovery file contains depends on how frequently Ms-Word saves the recovery file. E.g., if the recovery file is saved every 15 minutes, up to 15 minutes of work can be lost if a power failure or similar problem occurs.

 

 

Closing a document.

 

Closing a document means unloading the current active document from memory so that the user can create or open another without necessarily exiting from Ms-Word.

 

  1. On the File menu, click

 

OPENING A SAVED DOCUMENT.

Purpose.

You open a saved document (i.e., a document stored on a floppy disk or on the hard disk of the computer) if you want to:

√  Continue working on it, if it was saved before completion.

√  View the data it contains.

√  Update it, if the data it contains represents information that changes periodically.

E.g., a Weekly report.

√  Print the data it contains.

 

  1. Click Open on the File menu or on the Standard toolbar (or press CTRL+O) to display the Open dialog box.
  2. In the Look in list, click the drive or folder where the document was saved.
  3. Click the filename from the File list box, then click Open (or double-click the document you want to open).

 

Tip. To open a document you’ve used recently, click the filename at the bottom of the File menu.  In case the list of recently used documents isn’t displayed, you can Show or hide it;

 

To Show or hide the list of recently used documents,

 

  • On the Tools menu, click Options, then click the General
  • Select or clear the Recently used file list

 

Exiting / Quitting from Microsoft Word.

 

  • When you have finished working with Microsoft Word, you exit from it.

To exit from Word, make sure all open documents are saved.

 

Method 1.

 

  1. Click the Close button on the top right hand corner of the Title bar.

 

Method 2.

 

  1. On the File menu, click

 

Method 3.

 

  1. Press ALT+F4.

 

Method 4.

 

  1. Double-click the Control Box of the Microsoft Word program.

 

Review Questions 1.1

 

  • Define the following terminologies as far as a Word Processor is concerned.
    • Word wrap.
    • Creating a document.
    • Document Template.
  1. (a). What are the advantages of using a template to create a document?

(b). List 5 types of documents where you would use a template.

  1. Explain the functions of the following keys in Word processing.
    1. Describe TWO procedures of creating a new document using Microsoft Word.
    2. Explain the use of any THREE shortcut keys.
    3. What keystrokes would you use to accomplish the following?
      • Move your cursor to the beginning of a line.
      • Move your cursor to the end of your document.

 

Exercise (b).

 

  1. Identify 2 uses of the SHIFT key in Word processing.
  2. (a). Describe the use of each of the following commands in saving a document.
  • Save As.

(b). Outline the steps followed when saving a new document in a 3.5-inch floppy disk.

  1. Explain how you can protect a document from unauthorized opening or altering.
  2. How can you save a document with a file type different from the one of your Word processor.
  3. Give Three reasons why you would open a saved document.
  4. Briefly distinguish between the following:
  • Full screen mode and Page Layout view.
  • Status bar and Title bar.
  1. What is the function of the following combination of keys in Microsoft Word?
  • CTRL+Home.
  • CTRL+Page Up.

EDITING A DOCUMENT

 

Editing refers to making any necessary changes to an already existing document.

 

Block Operations

 

Selecting (highlighting) a block of text.

 

Blocking of text refers to selecting a group of text e.g., a word, sentence or paragraph, in order to work with it as a whole.

 

Importance.

 

  • The purpose of selecting text is to enable the user perform a number of editing or formatting operations on the selected block of text.

 

Some of the operations that may need blocking include:  moving, copying, deleting, inserting and overtyping, formatting.

 

Ms-Word provides a number of ways of selecting a block of text.  You can either select a block of text using the Mouse or Keyboard.

 

Select text and graphics using the Mouse.

 

  • To select a graphic, click the graphic.
  • To select any amount of text, drag over the text.

 

  • To select a word, Double-click the word.

 

  • To select a line of text, move the pointer to the left of the line until it changes to a right-pointing arrow, and then click.

 

  • To select a sentence, hold down CTRL, then click anywhere in the sentence
  • To select a paragraph, Triple-click anywhere inside the paragraph.

 

  • To select multiple paragraphs, Triple-click anywhere in the paragraph, then drag up or down.
  • To select an entire document, on the Edit menu, click Select All.

 

  • To select a vertical block of text, hold down ALT, then drag over the text.

 

Select text using the Keyboard.

 

  1. Move the cursor to the start or end of the text, word, sentence or paragraph.

 

Press                                                               To select

 

SHIFT + Right arrow                                     1 character to the right

SHIFT + Left Arrow                                      1 character to the Left

SHIFT + CTRL+ Right arrow                      1 word to the right

SHIFT + CTRL+ Left arrow                        1 word to the left

SHIFT + HOME                                            To the beginning of a line

SHIFT + END                                                To the end of a line

 

SHIFT + Up arrow                                         1 line up

SHIFT + Down arrow                                    1 line down

 

SHIFT + Page Up                                          1 screen up

SHIFT + Page Down                                     1 screen down

 

SHIFT + CTRL+ Home                                To the beginning of a document

SHIFT + CTRL+ End                                   To the end of a document      

 

CTRL+A                                                        To select the entire document at once

 

DELETING TEXT.

 

BACKSPACE Key.

 

It has a backward arrow () marked on it.

  • Used to erase characters to the left of the cursor.

When pressed, it makes the cursor move one space backwards and the immediate letter / number is erased.

 

  1. To delete a character from the right to the left, place the insertion point on the right of the word, then press the Backspace
  2. To erase one word to the left of the cursor, press CTRL+ Backspace.

 

DELETE Key.

 

  • Erases characters to the right of the cursor.

 

  1. To delete a character to the right of the cursor position, place the insertion point on the left of the word, then press the Delete

 

To delete a block of text.

 

  1. Highlight (select) the text to be deleted, then press the Delete

 

Restoring deleted text.

 

To restore text that has just been deleted, click Undo from the Edit menu (or on the Standard toolbar).

 

TYPING OVER EXISTING TEXT.

 

Typing Modes.

 

There are 2 typing modes in a word processor that assist the user in typing or editing text documents.  These are;

 

  • Insert mode.
  • Overtype (Type over) mode.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Insert mode

 

This is the default typing mode in most word processors.  In Insert mode, Ms-Word inserts characters as you type, and any new text you enter in the middle of a line is inserted between existing texts, characters or words.

 

The Insert mode pushes existing text away as new characters are inserted at the location of the cursor without replacing it.

 

Overtype mode

 

To Overtype is to replace existing characters as you type.

 

Therefore, if Overtype mode is turned on, tying new text between existing words or characters automatically replaces the existing text by deleting it.

 

Overtype mode deletes the current text at the cursor position and replaces the existing characters with new text.

 

Methods of switching between Overtype & Insert mode.

 

Method 1.

 

Double-click the OVR label on the Status bar to turn Overtype on or off.

 

Method 2.

 

Press the INSERT (Ins) key on the Keyboard to switch between Insert & Overtype mode.

 

Method 3.

 

On the Tools menu, click Options, then click the Edit tab.  Select or clear the Overtype mode checkbox.

COPYING OF TEXT AND OBJECTS.

 

Copying text means making a duplicate of the text or object.

 

Importance.

 

  • Copying reduces the effort & time taken to repeat the same information in other parts of the document.

If a section is repeated several times in the document, you can save time by copying the first occurrence of the text rather than typing it over again.

  • If the section appears several times but with a few differences, you can copy it and then make minor changes to each copy, rather than type everything all over again.
  • Facilitates the transfer of information between different Ms-Word files.
  • Facilitates the transfer of information between Ms-Word and other Windows applications.

 

  1. Select the text or item you want to copy.

 

To copy multiple items that aren’t next to each other; select one item, hold down CTRL, then click the other items.

 

  1. Click Copy on the Standard toolbar or Edit menu (or press CTRL+C).

Ms-Word places a copy of the selection in the Clipboard.

 

  1. Click where you want the copy of the text to appear. To copy the item to another document, switch or open the document.
  2. Click Paste on the Standard toolbar or Edit menu (or press CTRL+V).

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

MOVING TEXT & GRAPHICS WITHIN A DOCUMENT.

 

Moving of text means relocating text from one place in a document to another (or changing the position of text or an object in a document).

 

Purpose.

 

  • After typing in a document, you may need to shift some text or paragraphs to other locations in the document in order for the document to be more logically organized.

 

Method 1: Drag-and-Drop editing.

 

  1. Select the text you want to move.
  2. Point to the selection, press & hold down the left mouse button.
  3. While still holding down the left mouse button, move the mouse pointer to the required location.

The dimmed insertion point that moves in the document shows you the position to which the selected text will be transferred when you release the left mouse button.

  1. Then release the mouse button.

 

Note. Drag-and-drop editing is suitable when you are moving text over a short distance, e.g., within one page.  It is clumsy to use when moving text across several pages.

 

Method 2: Cut and Paste.

 

To move text to a distant page, say from page 1 to page 50, use the Cut and Paste method.

 

  1. Select the text you want to move.
  2. Click Cut on the Standard toolbar or Edit menu (or press CTRL+X).

 

Ms-Word will place whatever you had selected into a temporary storage area within the computer called the ‘Clipboard’ from where it is available to any application in Windows.

 

  1. Click where you want the cut text to be placed. To move the item to another document, open or switch to the document.
  2. Click Paste on the Standard toolbar or Edit menu (or press CTRL+V).

Ms-Word inserts the contents of the clipboard at the position of the cursor.

 

Note.  In Moving, all the selected text is transferred to a new location, while in Copying, the original text is left intact.

 

Question.  Explain how a paragraph can be moved from one place to another using a Word processor.

FINDING & REPLACING TEXT IN A DOCUMENT.

 

The Find and Replace features are used to search for a specific word or phrase that you want to review or edit and automatically replace with other text.

 

When you need to search for a word or phrase in a large document, use the Find command.  In case you wish to replace a word or phrase, use the Replace option.

 

Importance of using Find and Replace.

 

  • Enables you to change a particular word or phrase throughout a document.

E.g., an outdated product name in a brochure can be changed to its new name easily using Find and Replace.

  • The Find and Replace feature is efficient and exact.
  • It is also easy to use and saves time compared to reading through the document (in search of the text) and making the changes manually.

 

Search (Find) text.

 

  1. On the Edit menu, click Find (or press CTRL+F).
  2. In the Find what box, type the text that you want to search for. Select any other search options that you want.
  3. Click on the Find Next or Find All button.

This will start the search and the first occurrence of the word will be highlighted.

  1. Click OK when a message appears telling you that Ms-Word has finished searching the document. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

 

You can click the More button to display and specify search options.

 

  • Match case: Identifies only text that has the same case with that typed in the Find What box, e.g., it will not find the word DEEN if you typed deen and selected the Match Case option.

 

  • Whole Word: Searches for a word or phrase that is whole.  If it is part of another word, it will not be found, e.g., the word ever will not be found in words like however, whenever, etc during the search.

 

  • Use wildcards: Wildcards are special symbols such as * and ? that are used to represent a set of words that have some similar characteristics.

E.g., names like Jeff, Joe, Jane can be represented using a wildcard as J*, which means all names starting with J.

 

  • Like: Searches for words which are similar in pronunciation, e.g. Fare and Fair.

 

To Find and Replace text at the same time.

 

  1. On the Edit menu, click Replace (or press CTRL+H).
  2. In the Find what box, enter the text that you want to search for or replace.
  3. In the Replace with box, enter the replacement text. Select any other options that you want.
  4. If you want to replace only some occurrences of the text, click on the Find Next button, then click Replace.  This changes the selected text in the Find What box, then finds the next occurrence.

However, if you want to replace all occurrences of the text in the Find What box at once, click the Replace All button.

 

Using the Go To feature.

 

This feature is used when you want to quickly go to a specific item in a document, e.g., page, line, graphic, footnote, table, etc.

 

  1. Click the Go To tab in the Find and Replace dialog box.

 

OR

On the Edit menu, click Go To (or press CTRL+G).

 

  1. Under the Go to what section, specify the item you want to locate, e.g. Page.

Type the page number, or section number in the Enter box.

  1. Click the Go To button.
  2. Close the dialog box.

INSERTING SYMBOLS & SPECIAL CHARACTERS.

You can display on the screen, and also print Symbols and special characters that are not on your Keyboard.

For example, you can insert symbols such as fractions (¼) and ©, special characters such as an ellipsis (), international characters such as (Ç, ë), and international monetary symbols (£, ¥) depending on the available fonts.

 

  1. Click where you want to insert the symbol or the special character.
  2. On the Insert menu, click Symbol, then click the Symbols or the Special Characters
  3. In the Font box, click the font that you want.
  4. Double-click the symbol or character that you want to insert, then click Close.

 

Note. To quickly insert a recently used symbol, in the Symbol dialog box, click a symbol in the Recently used symbols list, then click Close.

 

 

 

INSERTING DATE & TIME.

 

Insert the current date and time in a document.

 

  1. Click where you want to insert the date or time.
  2. On the Insert menu, click Date and Time.
  3. In the Available formats box, click a date or time format.
  • To insert the date and time as a field that will automatically be updated when you open or print the document, select the Update automatically

 

  • To insert a date or time that will remain as originally inserted, clear the Update automatically

 

Exercise (a).

 

  1. What is meant by the term Editing a document?
  2. Define the following terminologies as far as a Word Processor is concerned.
  • Blocking text.
  1. Give the sequence of commands to delete the following.
  • A Word.
  • A Paragraph.
  1. (a). Distinguish between copying and moving text.

(b). Briefly describe how you can move or copy a picture from MUTI.doc to

  CHESTER.doc, giving the relevant precautions taken.

  1. (a). What is the disadvantage of drag-and-drop editing?

(b). To overcome the disadvantage above, what feature in Ms-Word are you supposed to

 use?

  1. (a). When is the Find and Replace command used?

(b). What is a wildcard?  How can it be used to search for a word that starts with the letter

 “O” in a document?

  1. What is the purpose of the following keystrokes?
  • Backspace and Delete.
  • SHIFT+Arrow keys.
  • CTRL+Arrow keys.

 

Exercise (b).

 

  1. Give a brief description of each of the following terms as used in Word processing:
  • Selecting text.
  • Shortcut menu.
  1. Describe Four (4) ways of selecting text in Microsoft Word.
  2. Explain the difference between Type over and Insert mode in word processing.
  3. Name TWO keys used to delete a text in a document.
  4. What is the function of the following combination of keys in Microsoft Word?
  • Ctrl+Z. (b). Ctrl+Y.
  • Ctrl+A. (d). Ctrl+P.
    • CTRL+B. (f). CTRL+E.
  1. Outline the steps you would follow to move a line of text from one paragraph to another within a document in Microsoft Word.
  2. You have a one-paragraph document that you would like to print three times on one page. How would you achieve this efficiently?

 

 

 

 

 

PROOFREADING.

Proofreading refers to checking whether the document has typographical or grammar errors.

Importance.

√  To remove mistakes and improve document wording selections.

Ms-Word provides the following tools for proofreading a prepared document; Spelling and grammar checker, Thesaurus, AutoComplete and AutoCorrect.

CHECKING SPELLINGS & GRAMMAR IN A DOCUMENT.

Ms-Word has the ability to check spellings within your document as you type or edit the document.

 

The Spelling and grammar checker is an inbuilt tool that helps the user to correct spelling errors and incorrect grammar structures.  The words you type in are compared to those in its dictionary.  However, the checker can only recognize errors of those words whose correct spelling is in its dictionary.  This implies that, a correctly spelt word used wrongly cannot be detected.

 

For example; if you mistype a word but the result is not a misspelling (e.g., typing “from” instead of “form” or “there” instead of “their”), the spelling checker will not mark the word. To identify those types of problems, the document should be carefully proof-read just before and after printing.

 

Importance.

 

 

  • The grammar checker provides a quick & convenient way to find many common grammatical errors.
  • It also identifies mistakes in your document and offers suggestions that could be more effective, and user-friendly. In some cases, the grammar checker offers suggestions on how you can rewrite sentences.

 

Ms-Word uses wavy red underlines to indicate possible spelling mistakes & wavy green underlines to indicate possible grammatical mistakes.

 

Check spelling & grammar automatically as you type.

 

  1. Make sure automatic spelling and grammar checking are turned on.
  2. Type in the document.

When the spelling checker encounters a word it doesn’t recognize, it determines the words in its dictionary that are similarly spelled and displays a list of those words with the most likely match highlighted.

  1. Right-click a word with a wavy red or green underline, to get a list of correct alternative words to choose from.
  2. From the list, click the correct command or the spelling alternative you want.

 

Turn on or off automatic spelling & grammar checking.

 

  1. On the Tools menu, click Options, then click the Spelling & Grammar
  • To turn automatic spelling checking on or off, select or clear the Check spelling as you type
  • To turn automatic grammar checking on or off, select or clear the Check grammar as you type

 

Check spelling & grammar all at once.

 

You can choose to check the spelling & grammatical errors at once, and then confirm each correction.  This option is useful if you want to proofread the whole document after you have finished typing or editing it.

 

  1. Click Spelling and Grammar button on the Standard toolbar (or Press F7).

 

-OR-

On the Tools menu, select Spelling and Grammar.

 

When Ms-Word finds a possible spelling or grammatical problem, it highlights it and then displays a list of similarly spelled words.

 

  1. Choose a button in the Spelling and Grammar dialog box to make your changes.

 

  • Change – accepts the current selection in the Suggestions

 

When the selected error is a repeated word, this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word.

 

  • Change All – corrects all the occurrences of the misspelled word.

 

  • If the intended word is not in the Suggestions box, you can correct spelling and grammar directly in the document while the Spelling and Grammar dialog box is still displayed. Click in the document & type your correction, and then click Resume to continue checking the spelling and grammar.

 

  • Ignore Once – Leaves the highlighted error unchanged (if the highlighted word is a valid word) & finds the next spelling or grammar error.

 

This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to make a change in the document.

 

  • Ignore All – retains all the occurrences of the same word or phrase in the document from another language, e.g., a Kiswahili.

 

  • Add – Adds the highlighted word in the Suggestions box to the Custom dictionary.

 

  • Explain – gives a detailed explanation of a grammar flag.

 

 

  • Ignore Rule –Leaves all instances of the highlighted error unchanged throughout the document and continues to check the document.

 

 

  1. When the Spelling and grammar check is complete, Ms-Word displays a message to that effect. To return to your document when you finish checking on grammar, click OK.

 

Note.  There are two types of dictionaries that are used by a spell checker program:

  • Main (Standard) dictionary.
  • Custom dictionary.

 

LOOKING UP FOR WORDS USING THESAURUS.

 

Purpose.

 

  • Thesaurus is an editing tool that provides the user with a list of synonyms (words that have similar meaning) & sometimes antonyms (words that have opposite meaning) to the selected word.

It also provides lists of related words and different forms of the selected word.

 

  1. Select or type the word you want to look up.
  2. On the Tools menu, choose Language, then click Thesaurus (or press SHIFT+F7).

 

The Thesaurus dialog box appears, and highlights the word that is closest to what you have typed.

 

 

  1. To replace the word with a synonym, click the replacement word from the list.

 

To replace a word or phrase with an antonym, select the word or phrase enclosed in brackets.

  1. Click the Replace

 

  1. To look up alternatives for a particular word, click it in the Replace with synonyms box, then click the Look Up button that will enable you search through a wide range of synonyms and related words until you find exactly the word you want.

 

Note. It is not possible to replace all occurrences of a word using the Thesaurus.  One would have to select each word individually and choose a synonym for it.

 

 

 

AutoComplete feature.

 

The AutoComplete feature displays a complete word when the user types the first few characters of the word.

This enables the user to type faster/quickly by completing a word that the user has already started typing automatically.

To accept the suggested word (if indeed he/she intended to type it), simply press the ENTER key and continue typing other words or phrases.

To turn AutoComplete on or off.

 

  1. On the Insert menu, point to AutoText, then click AutoText from the dropdown list that is displayed.
  2. Select or clear the Show AutoComplete suggestions
  3. Type in an Auto text in the Enter AutoText entries here textbox, then click Add.
  4. Click Close.

 

AutoCorrect feature

 

Importance.

 

  • The AutoCorrect feature can be used to automatically detect and correct wrongly spelled words, and replace them with the correct ones as set by the user.

E.g. if you type teh plus a space, AutoCorrect replaces it with “the.”, or if you type This is theh ouse plus a space, AutoCorrect replaces it with “This is the house.”

 

  • AutoCorrect can also be used to quickly insert symbols that are included in the inbuilt list of AutoCorrect entries. E.g., type (c) to insert ©.

 

  • AutoCorrect can automatically detect and correct incorrect capitalization. It can also capitalize the first word in a sentence, the names of days of the week, the first letter of text in a table cell, etc.

 

To automatically correct text as you type,

 

  1. Turn on the AutoCorrect options you want.

 

To turn on or off the AutoCorrect options you want.

 

  • On the Tools menu, click AutoCorrect Options, then select or clear the Replace text as you type
  • To turn the spelling checker corrections on or off, select the Replace text as you type checkbox, then select or clear the Automatically use suggestions from the spelling checker
  • Click OK to close the dialog box.

 

  1. Type the text you want to correct, followed by a space or other punctuation.

 

Add an entry during a spelling check.

 

  1. Right-click a word with a wavy red underline.
  2. Point to AutoCorrect on the shortcut menu, then click the correction you want.

Question: Distinguish between the AutoComplete and the AutoCorrect feature in word processing.

AutoComplete – helps a person to type quickly by completing a word that the user has already started to be type automatically.

AutoCorrect – automatically replaces mistyped words with the correct ones as set by the user.

UNDO, REDO AND REPEAT ACTIONS.

 

Purpose.

 

  • Undo is used to reverse changes you make in a document, such as editing, formatting, checking spelling, inserting breaks, footnotes and tables.

This is useful when you make changes and then realize that these changes were a mistake.

 

Undo mistakes.

 

  1. To quickly undo/reverse recent actions one at a time, click Undo on the Standard toolbar or on the Edit menu (or press CTRL+Z).

 

To undo several actions at once, click the down arrow next to the Undo button on the Standard toolbar, and select the actions you want to undo from the list.  Ms-Word reverses the selected action and all actions above it.

 

Note. If you later decide that you didn’t want to undo an action, click the Redo button on the Standard toolbar (or press CTRL+Y).

E.g., you can choose the Undo command to remove a bold formatting you had applied.  To reapply the bold formatting, choose the Redo command.

 

Repeat your last action.

 

  1. On the Edit menu, click Repeat (or press CTRL+Y).

 

If the action cannot be repeated, the Repeat command changes to Can’t Repeat.

WORD COUNT

Word Count assists a person to know how many words, pages, paragraphs, lines, no. of characters, are in your document including spaces.

 

  1. On the Tools menu, click Word Count.

 

If you want to recount as you make revisions without reopening the dialog box, click Show Toolbar. The Word Count toolbar will open in your document.  Click Recount (or press ALT+C) at any time to update the count any time you want.

 

Note.  You can also view the no. of words & lines in a document by clicking Properties on the File menu, then click the Statistics tab.

 

Exercise.

 

  1. (a). Explain the importance of proofreading a document.

(b). Give two methods of proofreading a prepared document.

  1. Give two types of dictionaries that are used by the spell-checker program. Which one is likely to have non-English words, and Why?
  2. Name and explain the use of any FOUR buttons found in a Spell check dialog box.
  3. Explain how to do Word Count.
  4. Explain how you would look up for a word in your computer dictionary.
  5. What is a Thesaurus?
  6. Distinguish between the AutoComplete and the AutoCorrect feature in word processing.
  7. Explain the use of Undo and Redo commands.
  8. In Spelling and Grammar check, what do the following buttons do?
  • Ignore All.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

FORMATTING A DOCUMENT.

 

Formatting:

 

  • Formatting refers to applying various styles or features to enhance the appearance of a document.

 

  • It can also mean making a document attractive or enhancing the appearance of a document by bolding, italicizing, bordering, coloring, etc.

 

Importance.

 

  • To create professional documents by using different colours, and adding special effects like dropped capitals, Superscripts and Subscripts.
  • To draw attention to important words or sentences by making them Bold, Italic or Underlined.
  • To draw attention to titles and headings by making them larger and changing their font type.
  • To draw attention to some important paragraphs and text by creating additional effects with the text in a document.
  • To make the overall document appealing to the eye as you read through.

 

Note. Before you enhance a particular portion of a document, you must select the portion first.

 

TEXT FORMATTING.

 

Text formatting refers to features such as changing font types & font style, changing size of characters, changing text color, underlining, bolding, italicizing, text alignment, etc.

 

You can use the Formatting toolbar or the Format menu to change the format of a given text.

 

Applying Bold, Italics, Underline, and changing the Font type, Font Size & Color of text.

 

Bolding text:  Bolding makes the selected text appear darker than the rest of the text.

 

Underline text:  Underlining refers to placing a line at the base or bottom of a word or phrase.

 

Italicizing text:  To italicize is to make the text slant forward.

 

Font (also called typeface): A graphic design applied to numerals, symbols, & alphabetic characters.

 

Changing the font color:  Changing the color of the selected text from black to either blue, green, etc.

 

Method 1. Using the Formatting toolbar.

 

  1. Select the text you want to format.
  2. On the Formatting toolbar,
  • Click the Bold or Italic or Underline button to format selected text as bold, italics or underlined.
  • To change the font type, click the arrow next to the Font box, then click a font name.
  • To change the size of text, type (or click) a size in the Font Size E.g., type 10.5.
  • To change the text color, click the Font Color This applies the color appearing on the Font Color button.

To apply a different color, click the arrow next to the Font Color button, then select the color you want from the Color palette.

 

Method 2. Using the Format menu.

 

  1. Select the text whose format you want to change.
  2. On the Format menu, click Font, then click the Font
  • In the Font box, click a font type.
  • In the Font Style box, click Bold, Italic or Bold Italic.
  • To change the size of text, click a point size in the Font Size
  • To change the text color, click the arrow next to the Font Color box, then select a color.
  • In the Underline style list, click the style you want. In the Underline color list, click the color you want.

 

When you select a formatting option, Ms-Word displays a preview of what you have selected.

  1. Click the OK

 

To ensure that any new document you open uses the font settings you have selected, click the Default button, then choose Yes from the resulting prompt.

 

Apply Special text Effects such as embossed, engraved, outlined, or shadow formatting to text.

 

  1. Open the Font dialog box.
  2. Under Effects, select the checkbox for the options you want, then click the OK

Applying Superscript, Subscript and Small Caps.

 

Superscript: – any text that is slightly higher than other text on a line, such as a footnote reference mark.

 

Subscript: – any text that is slightly lower than other text on a line. Subscripts are often used in scientific formulas.

 

‘Small caps’ formats any selected lowercase text as capital letters and reduces their size.  Small caps do not affect uppercase letters, numbers, punctuations, or non-alphabetic characters.

 

  1. Select the text to be formatted.
  2. On the Format menu, click Font, then click the Font
  3. Under Effects, select the checkbox for Superscript, Subscript or Small Caps.

 

Superscript raises the selected text above the baseline, while Subscripts lower the selected text below the baseline.

  1. Click the OK

 

Animating text.

 

  1. Select the text you want to animate.
  2. On the Format menu, click Font, then click the Text Effects
  3. In the Animations box, click the effect you want.

 

Notes.

  • You can apply only one animation effect at a time.
  • Animated text effects are not printed. If text in your document is animated, it will print with the underlying text formatting — such as bold or italic — but the animated effects will not be printed.

 

Exercise (a).

 

  1. (a). Explain the term document formatting.

(b). Give any five document formatting features.

  1. Give at least four examples of fonts available in Microsoft Word.
  2. Differentiate between superscript and subscript
  3. In Microsoft Word, how do you do the following operations?
    • Italicize a text on typing.
    • Boldface and underline text after typing.

 

Exercise (b).

 

  1. Given a block of text, outline the steps you would use to:
  • Bold and italicize the text.
  • Double underline the text.
  • Change Font size and font name.
  1. Clearly explain the meaning of the following terms as used in Microsoft Word.

 

PARAGRAPH FORMATTING.

 

CAPITALIZATION OF TEXT.

 

You can capitalize letters by changing their case, or by creating a large letter at the beginning of a paragraph.

 

Changing the case of text.

 

When typing a text, the user can apply different cases in order to create contrast within the text.

 

They include;

 

Sentence Case: – makes the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences a capital.

Lowercase: – changes all selected text to small letters.

UPPERCASE: – changes all selected text to capital letters.

Title Case: – makes the first letter of each word in the selection a capital.

tOGGLE cASE: – changes all uppercase letters in the selection to lowercase and vice versa.

 

  1. Select the text you want to change.
  2. On the Format menu, click Change Case.
  3. Form the Change Case dialog box, click the case type you want to be applied.
  4. Click the OK

 

 

Creating a large dropped initial capital letter.

 

 

Purpose.

 

  • A Drop cap is used to attract the reader’s attention by making the first character in a sentence large, taking more space in the next line.

 

  • It also emphasizes a particular starting word in a paragraph.

 

To apply drop cap;

 

  1. If you are in a different view, switch to Print Layout view. This will allow you to view the dropped capital letter, as it appears in the document.
  2. Click in the paragraph you want to begin with a dropped capital letter. The paragraph must contain text.
  3. On the Format menu, click Drop Cap. This opens the Drop Cap dialog box.
  4. Under Position, choose Dropped or In Margin.

 

The Dropped option positions the dropped capital letter in line (flush) with the left margin, inside the main text area.

 

The In Margin option positions the dropped capital letter in the left margin.

 

  1. Select the font you want to apply to the dropped capital letter, the no. of lines to drop, and the amount of space you want to leave between the dropped capital letter and the text in the paragraph.
  2. Click the OK

 

Removing the Dropped capital letter.

 

  1. Click anywhere in the paragraph that contains the dropped capital letter.
  2. On the Format menu, click Drop Cap.
  3. Under Position, choose None, then click the OK button.

ADDING BULLETS & NUMBERS TO TEXT.

Bullets and numbers are used to mark steps in a procedure or items in a list.

 

Bullet: A dot or any other symbol placed before text, such as items in a list, in order to add emphasis.

 

Purpose.

 

  • Adding numbers or bullets to a list to make a document easier to read & understand.

 

You can add bullets or numbers to existing lines of text, or you can have Ms-Word automatically create lists as you type.

 

Adding bullets or numbers to an existing text.

 

 

Method 1.

 

  1. Select the items to which you want to add bullets or numbers.
  2. On the Formatting toolbar, click the Bullets button or Numbering button.

 

Method 2.

 

  1. Select the list.
  2. On the Format menu, select Bullets and Numbering. This displays the Bullets and Numbering dialog box.
  3. To apply bullets, click the Bulleted

To apply independent numbers, click the Numbered tab.

To apply outlined numbered list, click Outline Numbered tab.

 

  1. Select a Bullet type or Number format you want to use.

 

To adjust spacing between a bulleted or numbered list and the text.

 

  • Click the Customize button.
  • To format a bulleted list, under Bullet position and Text position, select the options you want in the Indent at
  • To format a numbered list, select the options you want under Number position and Text position.

 

  1. Click the OK

 

To use a unique symbol or a picture bullet.

 

  1. Open the Bullets and Numbering dialog box, then click the Bulleted
  2. Click the bullet style you want to modify, and then click the Customize
  • To use a different symbol, click the Character button to change the symbol.
  • To use a different picture, click the Picture button to select the picture you want.
  1. Click the OK

 

Restart numbering in the middle of a numbered list.

 

  1. Right-click the number that you want to restart with 1, then click Restart Numbering on the shortcut menu.

 

To Number lists separated by non-numbered text.

 

  1. Right-click the first no. of the list that will continue the numbering sequence, then click Continue Numbering on the shortcut menu.

 

To move an entire list to the left or the right.

 

  1. Click the first no. in the list & drag it to a new location. The entire list moves as you drag, without changing the numbering levels in the list.

 

 

 

Adding bullets or numbers to a list as you type.

 

  1. Select a Bullet or Number format in the Bullets and Numbering dialog box, and then type any text you want.
  2. Press ENTER key. Ms-Word automatically inserts the next number or bullet in the list.
  3. To finish the list, press ENTER twice, or press Backspace to delete the last bullet or number in the list.

 

Remove bullets or numbers.

 

  1. Select the text from which you want to remove bullets or numbers.
  2. On the Formatting toolbar, click the Bullets or the Numbering button.

 

Note.   To remove a single bullet or number, click the bullet or number, then press BACKSPACE.

 

TEXT ALIGNMENT

 

Text Alignment refers to how text is positioned (lined up) in a paragraph relative to the left, right, or centre of the page.

 

Types of text alignment.

 

There are 4 ways in which text can be aligned;

 

  • Left alignment.

 

This is the default alignment.

Lines of text are lined up evenly along the left margin, but unevenly at the right margin.

E.g., in a left-aligned paragraph, the left edge of the paragraph is flush with the left margin.

 

  • Right alignment.

 

Lines of text are lined up evenly along the right margin, but unevenly at the left margin.

 

  • Center alignment.

 

The lines of text are centered unevenly between the left & right margins.

 

  • Justification.

 

Lines of text are arranged evenly along the left & right margin.

 

The Justify option expands the spaces in each line so that the text is aligned evenly along both the left & right margins.

 

Aligning text to the left, right, center or justification of the text.

 

Method 1.

  1. Select the text (or paragraph) you want to align.
  2. On the Formatting toolbar, click the;
  • Align Left button – to align the text on the left.
  • Align Right button – to align the text on the right.
  • Center button – to align the text on the center.
  • Justify button – to align the text on both the right & the left margins.

 

Method 2.

 

  1. Select the text (or paragraph) you want to align.
  2. On the Format menu, click Paragraph, then click the Indents and Spacing
  3. Under General, click the arrow in the Alignment box, then click Left, Right, Centered or Justified.
  4. Click the OK

 

 

 

 

 

Changing the space between lines or paragraphs.

 

Line spacing:

 

  • Line spacing refers to the vertical distance between two lines of text in a paragraph.

 

  • The amount of space from the bottom of one line of text to the bottom of the next line.

 

Line spacing determines the amount of vertical space between two lines of text in a paragraph.   If a line contains a large text character, graphic, or formula, Ms-Word increases the spacing for that line so that it can be accommodated.

 

Types of line spacing.

 

  • Single line spacing.

 

Single line spacing accommodates the largest font in that line, leaving a small amount of extra space between the lines, which varies depending on the font used.

 

  • 5 line spacing.

 

It is 1½ times that of single line spacing.

 

  • Double line spacing.

 

It is twice that of single line spacing.

 

  • At least.

 

This is the minimum line spacing that is needed to fit the largest font or graphic on the line.

 

 

It is a fixed line spacing that Ms-Word does not adjust.

 

 

  • Multiple line spacing.

 

It is a line spacing that is increased or decreased by a % that you specify, e.g. setting line spacing to 1.2 will increase the space by 20%.

 

Paragraph spacing determines the amount of space above or below a paragraph.  When you press ENTER to start a new paragraph, the spacing is carried over to the next paragraph.  However, you can change the settings for each paragraph.

 

Changing line or Paragraph spacing.

 

 

Method 1.

 

  1. Select the paragraphs in which you want to change the spacing.
  2. On the Formatting toolbar, click the arrow next to the Line Spacing button, and then select the number that represents the line spacing you want from the list.

 

Method 2.

 

  1. Select the paragraphs in which you want to change the spacing.
  2. On the Format menu, click Paragraph, then click the Indents and Spacing
  3. Under Line Spacing, click the arrow, then select the options you want in the box.

 

If you select Exactly or At least for line spacing, enter the amount of space you want in the At box. If you select Multiple, enter the number of lines in the At box.

 

  1. Click the OK

 

Creating Paragraph Indents.

 

Indentation refers to moving the text away from the margin.

 

Page margins determine the distance (or the space) between the text & the edge of the page, while paragraph Indents and alignment determines the distance of the paragraph from either the left or right margins.

 

 

 

 

Types of paragraph indents.

 

  • Left indent.
  • Right indent.

 

  • First-line indent.

 

This is a type of indent where only the first line of the paragraph is indented.

 

  • Hanging indent.

 

This is a type of indent where the first line of the paragraph extends to the left of the paragraph, but the other lines of a paragraph are indented more than the first line (i.e., they ‘hang’ below the first line).

 

  • Negative indent (also known as an outdent): – pulls the paragraph out towards the left margin.

 

Changing the right indent of an entire paragraph.

 

  1. Select the paragraph you want to change its right indent.
  2. On the horizontal ruler, drag the Right Indent marker to the position where you want the text to end.

 

Note.  To increase or decrease the left indent of an entire paragraph, click the Increase Indent or Decrease Indent button on the Formatting toolbar.

 

Creating a First-line indent or a Hanging indent.

 

Method 1.

 

  1. Select the paragraph you want to indent.
  2. On the horizontal ruler, drag the First Line Indent marker to the position where you want the text to start.

 

Method 2.

 

  1. Select the paragraph you want to indent.
  2. On the Format menu, click Paragraph, then click the Indents and Spacing
  3. Click the arrow in the Special list box, then click First line.

To set a Hanging indent, select Hanging from the drop-down list.

  1. In the By textbox, specify how far the paragraph is to be indented from the margin.

 

  1. Click the OK

 

Create a Negative indent.

 

  1. Select the paragraph you want to extend into the left margin.
  2. On the horizontal ruler, drag the Left Indent marker to the position where you want the paragraph to start.

 

Set an indent by using the TAB key.

 

  1. To indent the first line of a paragraph, click in front of the line.

To indent an entire paragraph, click in front of any line but not the first line.

  1. Press the TAB

 

Note.   To remove the indent, press Backspace before moving the insertion point (or click Undo on the Edit menu).

 

Setting tab stops & Tab spacing.

 

Tabs are used to indent the first line of a paragraph or to create columnar data.

 

Tab spacing: – is a short distance moved by the text cursor when the Tab key on the Keyboard is pressed.  It is used to align text on the page.

 

Tab stop: – is a location on the horizontal ruler that indicates how far a certain text is indented or where to begin a column of text.

 

By default, the tab stop is set at 0.5 of an inch.

 

Importance.

 

  • Tab stops enable the user to line up text to the left, move the text to the right, or center it.
  • Tabs also allow easy entry of tabulated data.
  • The user can also automatically insert specific characters, such as periods or dashes, called Tab leaders, before the tabs.

 

Tab leaders – are characters usually dots or hyphens, that fill the space between words separated by tabs.  They are intended to draw the reader’s eye across a line, as in Tables of Contents.

 

There are 3 types of Tab leaders:

 

  • Solid leader lines (_______).
  • Dotted leader lines (…………).
  • Dashed Leader lines (——–).

 

  1. Select the paragraph in which you want to set a tab stop.
  2. On the Format menu, click Tabs. This opens the Tabs dialog box.
  3. In Tab stop position box, type the measurement for the tab stop.
  4. Under Alignment, select where the text typed at the tab stop will be aligned; Left, Center or Right.
  5. To change the spacing between default tab stops, enter the amount of spacing you want in the Default tab stops
  6. If need be, specify the Tab leader
  7. Click the Set button, then choose OK.

 

Once you no longer need the Tab stops, open the Tabs dialog box, then click the Clear All button.

 

Setting tabs using the Horizontal Ruler.

 

The easiest way to set tabs is by using the ruler.  On the left corner of the horizontal ruler (at the point of intersection between the horizontal & vertical rulers) is a tab alignment button that lets the user select the type of tab.

 

The table below shows various tab alignment buttons.

 

Button Name Purpose (explanation for each button)
Left tab Text is left aligned
Centre tab Text is centered
l Bar tab Inserts a vertical line at tab stop and align text to the right of the line
Right tab Text is right aligned

 

To set the tab using the ruler;

 

  1. Select the paragraph in which you want to set a tab stop.
  2. Click the tab button at the far left of the horizontal ruler until it changes to the required type of tab: Left, Center or Right.
  3. Set the tab stop by clicking where you want it to be on the ruler.
  4. Drag the tab stop.

 

HYPHENATION OF TEXT.

 

If a certain word is too long to fit on the end of a line, Ms-Word moves the word to the beginning of the next line.  However, you can use the hyphenation feature to insert hyphens in order to:

 

  • Give your documents a polished and professional look.
  • You can also hyphenate text to eliminate gaps in justified text or to maintain even line lengths especially when you have a document with narrow columns.

 

You can insert Optional hyphens or Non-breaking hyphens or you can let Ms-Word hyphenate all or part of a document for you.

 

Optional hyphen – A hyphen that is used to control where a word or phrase breaks.  An optional hyphen breaks a word if it falls at the end of a line.  If the word or phrase falls at the beginning or middle of a line, the hyphen doesn’t appear in the printed document.

 

Non-breaking hyphens – A hyphen that is used to prevent a hyphenated word, number or phrase from breaking if it falls at the end of a line.  For example, you can prevent 555-0123 from breaking; instead, the entire item moves to the beginning of the next line.

 

There are 2 ways of inserting hyphens into a document.  You can;

 

  • Hyphenate text manually.
  • Hyphenate text automatically.

 

 

 

  • Hyphenate a document Automatically.

 

When you turn on automatic hyphenation, Ms-Word automatically scans the whole document and inserts hyphens where they are needed.  If you later edit the document and change line breaks, Ms-Word rehyphenates the document.

 

  1. On the Tools menu, select Language, then click Hyphenation.
  2. Select the Automatically hyphenate document
  3. In the Hyphenation zone box, enter the amount of space to leave between the end of the last word in a line and the right margin.

To reduce the no. of hyphens, make the hyphenation zone wider.  To reduce the unevenness of the right margin, make the hyphenation zone narrower.

  1. Click the OK

 

  • Hyphenate a document Manually.

 

In Manual hyphenation, Ms-Word searches the document for the words to hyphenate, and then asks the user to confirm whether to include a hyphen and where to position it.

 

If you later edit the document and change line breaks, Ms-Word doesn’t rehyphenate the document but displays and prints only the optional hyphens that still fall at the ends of lines.

 

  1. To hyphenate part of document, select the text you want to hyphenate. To hyphenate the entire document, make sure no text is selected.
  2. On the Tools menu, select Language, then click Hyphenation.
  3. Click Manual.
  4. If Ms-Word identifies a word or phrase to hyphenate, and proposes a location to insert a hyphen. Click Yes to insert the hyphen in the location Ms-Word proposes.

Otherwise, to insert the hyphen in another part of the document, use the Arrow keys or Mouse to move the insertion point to that location, then click Yes.

 

To Remove Hyphenation.

 

  1. If you used automatic hyphenation, click on Tools, select Language, then click
  2. Clear the Automatically hyphenate document

 

SECTIONS & SECTION BREAKS

 

A Break is used to identify where a section, a column or a page ends and the beginning of next.  This allows the user to apply more than one paragraph or page format in the same document especially when it comes to page layout, size, different margins, etc.

 

A Section break is a mark that you insert to show the end of a section.  Section breaks divide the document into sections, and then each section is formatted as needed.

A Section is a portion of a document in which one can set certain page formatting options.

 

Types of formatting elements you can set for sections.

 

* Margins                                * Paper size or orientation      * Page numbering

* Page borders                        * Vertical alignment.              * Line numbering.

* Headers and footers.                        * Columns                               * Footnotes and endnotes

 

Types of section breaks.

 

  • Continuous – inserts a section break & starts the new section on the same page.

 

  • Next pageinserts a section break & starts the new section on the next page.

 

  • Odd page section breaks.

 

Inserts a section break & starts the new section on the next odd-numbered page.

 

 

 

  • Even page section break.

 

Inserts a section break & starts the new section on the next even-numbered page.

 

Inserting a section break.

 

  1. Click in the document where you want the section break to be inserted.
  2. On the Insert menu, click Break.
  3. Under Section break types, click the option that describes where you want the new section to begin.
  4. Click the OK

 

Note.  A section break controls the formatting of the text of the section that precedes it.  If you delete a section break, the preceding text becomes part of the following section and assumes its section formatting.

 

Delete a section break.

 

  1. Select the section break you want to delete.

 

If you’re in Print layout view and you do not see the section break, click Show/Hide on the Standard toolbar to display hidden text.

  1. Press the Delete

 

Exercise (a).

 

  1. (a). In Microsoft Word, what does the term UPPERCASE mean?

(b). Explain step by step how to convert a paragraph to All Uppercase.

  1. State one function of drop cap in a document.
  2. (a). What is Line spacing?

(b). Give and Explain any 5 types of line spacing used in Microsoft Word.

  1. (a). Give and explain any FOUR types of text alignment.

(b). What is the difference between First Line indentation and Hanging Indentation.

  1. (a). What is a tab?

(b). Why are tab stops important in a document?

(c). Give Two reasons for setting tabs.

  1. Give two ways of inserting hyphens in a document.

 

Exercise (b).

 

  1. Differentiate between the following:
  • Enter Key and Page Break.
  • Soft Page break and Hard Page break.
  1. How would you accomplish the following tasks?
  • Insert Bullets and Numbering to your document.
  • Apply a Drop cap to a paragraph in your document.
  • Apply a Hanging Indent to a paragraph in your document.
  • Change small letters into capital letters.
  • Align text to the right margin.

 

PAGE FORMATTING.

 

INSERTING PAGE BREAKS.

 

A Page break identifies the end of one page and the beginning of the next page.

 

When typing, the text cursor inserts a new page automatically when the current a page is full with text or graphics during typing.  Such a page break is referred to an “Automatic” (or Soft) page break.

 

However, if the user wants a page to begin at a particular spot (even before the end of the page), he/she can insert a page break manually.  Such a page break is referred to as a “Manual” (or Hard) page break.

When a manual page break is inserted, Ms-Word automatically adjusts the automatic page breaks that follow.

 

In Normal view, a page break is indicated by a dashed line across the page from left to right.

 

Insert a Manual Page Break.

 

  1. Click to position the Insertion point where you want to start a new page.
  2. Press CTRL+ENTER.

-OR-

On the Insert menu, click Break.

 

  1. From the Break dialog box, choose Page break, then click the OK button.

 

Ms-Word inserts a page break and adjusts the page numbers to accommodate the new page break.

 

Note. The line indicating a manual page break has ‘Page break’ written on it, unlike that of an automatic page break.

 

To Remove a Manually inserted Page break.

 

  1. In Normal view, double-click the page break you want to delete, then press Delete.

 

CREATING NEWSLETTER-STYLE COLUMNS.

 

You can quickly format text into multiple columns.  To create columns on existing text;

 

Method 1.

 

  1. In Print layout view, select the text you want to format in columns. To select an entire document, click Select All on the Edit
  2. On the Standard toolbar, click on the Columns button.
  3. Drag to the right to select the no. of columns you want, then release the mouse button.

 

Method 2.

 

  1. Select the text you want to format in columns.
  2. On the Format menu, click Columns. This opens the Columns dialog box.
  3. Under the Presets section, or in the Number of columns textbox, select the no. of columns you want.
  4. In the Width and spacing boxes, specify the column widths and space between the columns.
  5. To add vertical lines in the spaces between the columns, select the Line between The line is as long as the longest column on the page or in the section.
  6. Click the OK button, then type your text.

 

Note. In Normal view, Ms-Word displays one column at a time. In Print Preview or Print Layout view, the columns are displayed side by side (i.e. the text flows from one column to the next on the same page).

 

Forcing the start of a new column.

 

  1. Click where you want to start the new column.
  2. Press CTRL+SHIFT+ENTER.

OR

On the Insert menu, choose Break, then click Column break.

 

Ms-Word moves the text that follows the insertion point to the top of the next column.

 

Changing the Width of the text columns.

 

  1. Drag the column markers on the horizontal ruler.

 

Note.  To specify exact measurements for column widths and spacing, use the Columns command (Format menu).

 

Creating a Heading that spans the columns / removing columns.

 

Method 1.

 

 

  1. At the beginning of the leftmost column, type your heading text, press ENTER, then select the heading text. If heading text already exists, select it.
  2. Click the Columns button on the Standard toolbar, then drag to select a single column.

 

Method 2.

 

  1. In Print layout view, select the heading text (or select the text you want to remove columns from).
  2. Open the Columns dialog box.
  3. Under the Presets section or in the Number of columns box, select a single column.
  4. Click the OK

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PAGE SETUP

Page setup has options that allow the user to specify the size of the margins, paper size, and layout/appearance of a printed page.

 

Setting Page margins

Page margins are the visible blank spaces outside the printing area of a page.  They mark the distance that the text starts on a page away from the edge of the page.

 

Normally, text & graphics are inserted in the printable area inside the margins.  However, items such as headers, footers, and page numbers can be positioned in the margins.

 

Importance of setting page margins.

 

  • Adjusting Page margins provides additional space for binding, punching or stapling.
  • Setting the margins helps when printing a document on pre-printed stationery such as a Letterhead. It ensures that, your text does not overwrite the pre-printed parts of the stationery.

 

E.g., to print on a Letterhead, change the top margin so that it is slightly larger than the pre-printed part of the letterhead.

 

To set margins for a page;

 

  1. Switch to Print Layout view.
  2. Click on File, choose Page Setup, then click the Margins
  3. Under Margins, type or select the values for the Top, Bottom, Left & Right margins in the respective boxes.
  4. Click the OK

 

Types of page margins in Ms-Word.

 

  • Gutter margins

 

They are used to add extra space to the left or top margin of a document you want to bind.  It ensures that the printed text is not hidden by the binding.

 

To set Gutter margins for documents that requires binding;

 

  1. Click on File, choose Page Setup, then click the Margins
  2. In the Gutter box, enter a value for the gutter margin.
  3. In the Gutter position box, click Left or Top.

 

  • Mirror margins

 

They are used to set up facing pages for double-sided documents, such as a book or magazine.

In this case, the inside margins of the left & right page are the same width, while the outside margins are the same width.

 

To set Mirror margins for facing pages;

 

  1. Click on File, choose Page Setup, then click the Margins
  2. In the Multiple pages list, select Mirror margins.
  3. In the Inside and Outside boxes, enter values for the mirror margins.

 

  • Book fold option

 

It is used to create a menu, event program, or any other type of document that uses a single center fold.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Setting page Orientation.

 

Page orientation refers to how the text will be positioned on the printed page.  It specifies how the document on the screen will be printed on a page.

 

There are 2 types of page orientations:

 

  1. Portrait: – Text & graphics are printed with the longest side of the page vertically upright.

 

  1. Landscape: – Text & graphical objects are printed with the longest side of the page placed horizontally and the lines of text printed parallel.

 

To set the orientation;

 

  1. Click on File, choose Page Setup, then click the Margins
  2. Under Orientation, select Portrait or Landscape.
  3. Click the OK

 

Note. You cannot print in portrait and landscape orientation on the same page.

 

Selecting the correct paper size

 

  1. Click on File, choose Page Setup, click the Paper
  2. From the paper size list, select the size of the paper required, e.g., A4, then click OK.

 

Changing Page Layout

 

Page layout specifies how text will be placed on the page between the top & bottom margins.

 

To change the layout;

 

  1. Click on File, choose Page Setup, then click the Layout
  2. Under Vertical alignment, select the alignment required, e.g., Top, Center, Justified or Bottom.
  3. Click the OK

 

Note. Top usually aligns the text starting from the top margin downwards.

 

CREATING HEADERS & FOOTERS

 

Headers & footers contain standard text or information such as Page numbers, Chapter titles, or a Company logo.  They may also contain graphics.

 

A Header appears above the top margin of every page or in a section; Footer appears below the bottom margin of every page in a document.

 

Note.  Headers and footers appear only in Print layout view, and in printed documents.

 

Create the same header or footer for each page

 

  1. Click on View, then choose Header and Footer.
  2. To create a header, enter the text or graphics in the Header area. To create footer, click the Switch Between Header and Footer button on the Header and Footer toolbar to move to the Footer area, and then type your text.
  3. If necessary, format the text using the buttons on the Formatting

E.g., you can change the Font, Font size, Font style, alignment, or colour of the text.

 

  1. Click the Close button on the Header and Footer

 

Change the distance between the document text & a header or footer

 

  1. Click on File, choose Page Setup, then click the Layout
  2. Enter a new margin size in the Header box, or in the Footer

 

Note. The settings for the Header and Footer should be smaller than those of the top and bottom margins.

 

  1. Click OK.

 

 

 

 

Selecting Header or footer text

 

  1. Click on View, then choose Header and Footer. If you’re in Print layout view, double-click the header or footer text.
  2. Point to the left of the header or footer until the pointer changes to a right-pointing arrow, and then click.

 

Aligning (adjusting the horizontal position of) a header or footer

 

Normally, any text or graphic within a header or footer is automatically Left aligned.

 

To center or align a header or footer with the left or right margin;

 

  1. Click on View, then choose Header and Footer.
  2. Select the header or footer text.
  3. On the Formatting toolbar, click center, or align right.

Alternatively, press the TAB key once to center the item, or press it twice to align the item to the right.

 

Deleting a header or footer

 

  1. Click on View, then choose Header and Footer.
  2. Select the header or footer text, then press the Delete

 

Note.  If the document is not divided into sections, Ms-Word will automatically remove the header or footer throughout the entire document.

 

ADDING PAGE NUMBERS

 

Page numbers appear in the header or footer (i.e. at the top or bottom of the page).

 

  • Page numbers make it easy to locate information especially in a document that contains many pages.

 

 

Method 1.

 

  1. Click on Insert, then choose Page Numbers.
  2. In the Position box, specify whether to insert the number in the Header (top of the page) or in the Footer (bottom of the page).
  3. In the Alignment box, specify whether to position the Page number to the Left, Center, or Right relative to the left & right margins.
  4. Click the Format button, then choose the format you want in the Number format
  5. In the Start at box, enter the starting page number (e.g., 1), then click the OK

 

Method 2:  Add page numbers and other information, such as date or time.

 

  1. Click on View, then choose Header and Footer.
  2. On the Header and Footer toolbar, click the arrow next to the Insert AutoText button, then select any options you want.
  3. Click the Close

 

Selecting a Page number.

 

  1. Click on View, then choose Header and Footer.
  2. Click the page number to make a frame border appear around it.
  3. Place the pointer over the border until it changes to a 4-headed arrow, and then click to display the sizing handles.

You can then change the Font & Font size using the Formatting toolbar.

 

Removing Page numbers.

 

  1. Click on View, then choose Header and Footer.
  2. Select the page number, then press the Delete

 

 

APPLYING BORDERS & SHADINGS TO A DOCUMENT

 

Importance

√  To make the document more appealing to the eye.

√  To draw attention to important data in the document.

 

Adding a border to text, or a picture.

 

  1. Select the text, or picture you want to apply a border to.
  2. Click on Format, choose Borders and Shading, then click the Borders
  3. Under Settings, select the Border style you want, e.g. Box, Shadow or 3-D.
  4. To change the line style for the border, click a style in the Style If need be, specify the colour of the lines from the Color drop-down list.
  5. Under Apply to, click an option to indicate the placement of the border, then click the OK

 

Adding a border to a page

 

  1. Click on Format, choose Borders and Shading, then click the Page Border
  2. Under Settings, click a border option.
  3. To specify an artistic (a special) page border, select it in the Art
  4. Under Apply to, specify a particular page or section where the border will appear in.
  5. Click the OK

 

To remove the border, under Settings, click None, then click the OK button.

 

Adding shading to a text, or picture.

 

  1. Select the text or picture you want to add shading to.
  2. Click on Format, choose Borders and Shading, then click the Shading
  3. Under the Fill section, click the color you want to use for the shading.
  4. To include a background color with the pattern, click the arrow next to the Pattern box, then click the pattern style and color you want.
  5. Click the OK

 

To remove shading, under the Fill section, click No Fill.

 

ADDING BACKGROUNDS COLOURS & WATERMARKS

 

Backgrounds are used in Web layout view to create a more interesting background for online viewing.  Backgrounds are not designed for printing.

 

  1. Click on Format, point to Background, then click a color. To get additional colors, click the More Colors option.
  2. To add or change special effects, such as gradients, textures or patterns, select the Fill Effects option, then select the options you want.
  3. Click the OK

 

Note. To remove a background color, click Format, point to Background, then click No Fill.

 

Adding a watermark to a printed document.

 

Watermark is a semi-transparent text, picture or image mostly used for letters & business cards.

 

When printed, the Watermark appears either on top of or behind the existing document text.  E.g. In a currency note, a watermark is visible when you hold the note up to the light.

 

A watermark adds interest or identifies the document status, such as marking a document as a “Draft” or “Confidential”.

 

  1. Click on Format, point to Background, then click Printed Watermark.

 

  1. To insert a text watermark, click Text Watermark. In the Text box, type your own text, or click the arrow & then select one of the in-built texts.

To change text settings, such as font, size, color and layout, select the options you want.

  1. To insert a picture as a watermark, click Picture Watermark, then click Select Picture. Select the picture you want, then click Insert.

 

To change picture settings, under Picture watermark, select the options you want.

 

  1. Click the Apply button.

 

To view a watermark as it will appear on the printed page, use Print layout view.

 

To remove a Watermark;

 

Click on Format, point to Background, then click Printed Watermark.  In the resulting dialog box, click No watermark.

 

INSERTING FOOTNOTES & ENDNOTES

 

Footnotes and endnotes are used in printed documents to explain, comment on, or provide references for text in a document.

 

Footnotes Endnotes
1.      Footnotes appear either at the bottom of each page in a document or directly below the text.

2.      Footnotes can be used for detailed comments.

1.      Endnotes appear either at the end of a document or at the end of each section.

 

2.      Endnotes can be used to quote or mention sources.

 

A Footnote or Endnote consists of 2 linked parts:

 

  • The note reference mark,
  • The corresponding note text.

 

A Note reference mark is a number or a character that indicates that additional information is contained in a footnote or endnote.

 

  1. In Print layout view, click the word you want to explain or comment on.
  2. Click on Insert, point to Reference, then click Footnote.
  3. In the resulting dialog box, select Footnotes or Endnotes, then click an option to indicate where the Footnote or Endnote will be placed.
  4. In the Number format box, click the number format you want to use. In the Start at box, click 1.

If you want to use a Custom mark, click the Symbol button, choose the desired symbol, then click OK.

  1. Click the Insert button.

The window will be divided into two parts.  In the lower portion of the window, type the text of the footnote or endnote.

  1. When you finish, click in the document and continue typing.

 

Note.  After inserting the first footnote or endnote, Ms-Word will automatically number the subsequent footnotes and endnotes with the format you have chosen.

 

Changing the number format of footnotes or endnotes.

 

  1. Click on Insert, point to Reference, then click Footnote.
  2. In the Number format box, click the format you want, then click the Apply button.

 

Changing the placement of footnotes and endnotes.

 

In the printed document, Footnotes appear at the bottom of each page, while Endnotes appear at the end of the document or section.  However, you can change the placement of footnotes or endnotes.

 

  1. Click on Insert, point to Reference, then click Footnote.
  2. Under Location, select Footnotes or Endnotes.
  3. In the Footnotes or Endnotes box, click the option to indicate where you want to place them, then click the Apply button.

Viewing Footnotes & Endnotes in an Ms-Word document.

 

  1. In Print Layout view, rest the pointer on the note reference mark. The note text appears above the mark in a ScreenTip.

 

Deleting a Footnote or an Endnote.

 

  1. In the document, select the reference mark of the footnote or endnote you want to delete, then press DELETE

 

Review Questions

 

  1. Explain the meaning of the following terms as used in Word processing.
  • Page margin.
  1. Name and describe the TWO types of paper orientation in Word processing.
  2. Why is it necessary to specify the correct paper size before printing a document?
  3. How would you insert Footer to your document?
  4. (a). Explain the importance of page numbers in a document.

(b). How can you insert page numbers in a multipage document when working with Microsoft Word?

  1. Explain how you would achieve the following:
  • Increase or reduce the margins of a document.
  • Change the paper orientation of your document from Portrait to Landscape.

 

CREATING MS-WORD TABLES.

 

A Table is a feature in Ms-Word made up of rows & columns which intersect to form cells that the user can enter text and graphics.

 

  • A Cell is a box formed by the intersection of a row & column in a worksheet or a table, in which the user can enter information.

 

  • A Row is a horizontal arrangement of cells; a Column is a vertical arrangement of cells.

 

Importance of creating tables.

 

  • Tables are used to organize and enhance the display of information such as timetables.
  • Tables make it easier to read & understand information that would otherwise have to be written in a repetitive and lengthy fashion.

 

Note.  To perform calculations in a table, the table cells must be referenced as A1, A2, B1, B2, etc, with the letter representing the column & the number representing a row.

 

Methods of creating a new table.

 

Method 1: Using the Insert Table button on the Standard toolbar.

 

  1. Click where you want the table to be created.
  2. Click the Insert Table button on the Standard toolbar,. A grid appears below the button.
  3. Drag over the grid to select the number of Rows & Columns you want, then release the Mouse button.

 

Method 2: Using the Insert – Table command on the Table menu.

 

  1. Click on Table, point to Insert, then click Table.
  2. Under Table size, specify the number of Columns & Rows.
  3. Under AutoFit behavior, choose an option to adjust the table size.
  4. To use an in-built table format, click the AutoFormat button, then select a table style.
  5. Click the OK

 

 

 

Method 3:  Using the Draw Table tool for creating more complex tables.

 

  1. Click on Table, then choose Draw Table.

The Tables and Borders toolbar appears, and the Mouse pointer changes to a Pencil.

  1. Drag the pointer to draw the outline of the table. g., to define the outer boundaries for the table, draw a rectangle.
  2. Draw the column and row lines inside the rectangle.

 

After creating the table, click in a cell and start typing text.

 

  • To move the text cursor from one cell to the next in the same row, press the TAB
  • To move text cursor one column to the left in the same row (to move to the previous cell), press SHIFT + TAB.

 

Inserting text before a table.

 

  1. If you had already inserted the table, click in the upper-left cell in the first row of the table.
  2. Press the ENTER

 

Selecting parts of a Table.

 

To select:

 

  • A cell – point to the left edge of the cell, and then click.

 

  • A row – click to the left of the row.

 

  • A column – click the column’s top border.

 

  • Multiple cells, rows, or columns – drag across the cell, row, or column.

 

  • The entire table – click the table move handle.

 

  • Text in the next cell – press TAB key.

 

  • Text in the previous cell – press SHIFT+TAB keys.

 

Note.  To select a cell, row, column or the entire table; 

 

  1. Click in the cell, row, column or table.
  2. Click on Table, point to Select, then click Table, Column, Row or Cell.

 

Changing the width of a Column in a Table.

 

Change the width of a column enhances the appearance of the table, e.g., if the cells are wider than the text they contain.

 

  1. Point on the boundary of the column whose width you want to change until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow.
  2. Drag the boundary to the right or left until the column is the width you want.

 

Making the columns in a table automatically fit the contents.

 

  1. Click in the table.
  2. Click on Table, point to AutoFit, then click AutoFit to Contents.

 

Changing the Height of a Row in a table.

 

In Ms-Word documents, the height of each row in a table depends on the contents of the cells in that row and the paragraph spacing before or after text.

In addition, pressing the ENTER key when the text cursor is in a cell will increase the height of the row.

 

  1. Point on the boundary of the row whose height you want to change until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow, and then drag the boundary.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Making multiple columns or rows the same size.

 

  1. Select the columns or rows you want to make the same size.
  2. On the Table menu, point to AutoFit, then click Distribute Columns Evenly or Distribute Rows Evenly.

 

Changing the column width or row height to a specific measurement.

 

  1. Click a cell in the column or row.
  2. Click on Table, click Table Properties, then click the Column tab or Row
  3. In the Size section, select the preferred column or height.

Adding Rows and Columns to a table.

You can add more rows and/or columns to an existing table.

To insert Rows;

 

  1. Select the same number of rows as the number you want to insert, e.g., to insert 3 new rows, select 3 existing rows.
  2. Click on Table, point to Insert, then click Rows Above or Rows Below.

 

Tip.  To quickly add a row at the end of a table, click in the last cell of the last row, then press the TAB key.

To insert Columns;

 

  1. Select the same number of columns as the number you want to insert.
  2. Click on Table, point to Insert, then click Columns to the Right or Columns to the Left.

 

Adding a column to the right of the last column in a table;

 

  1. Click in the last column.
  2. Click on Table, point to Insert, then click Columns to the Right.

 

Clearing the contents of a table.

 

Clearing cells removes the cell contents (formulas and data), or number formats leaving the cells on the table blank.

 

  1. Select the cells, rows or columns whose contents you want to clear, then press DELETE

Deleting cells, rows, or columns from a table.

 

You can delete any no. of adjacent cells, rows, or columns from a table if you do not need the information in them.

 

Deleting removes the cells, rows and columns from the document and shifts the surrounding cells to fill the space.

  1. Select the cells, rows, or columns you want to delete.
  2. Click on Table, point to Delete, then click Columns, Rows, or Cells.

If you are deleting cells, the Delete Cells dialog box appears.

 

Select: To:
Shift cells left Move cells from the right of the selected cells to replace the cells being deleted.
Shift cells up Move cells from below the selected cells to replace the cells being deleted.
Delete entire row Delete the row(s).
Delete entire column Delete the column(s).

 

Deleting a table and its contents.

 

Deleting removes the cell contents together with the cells themselves.

 

  1. Click inside the table.
  2. Click Table, point to Delete, then click Table.

 

Displaying or hiding table Gridlines.

 

Gridlines are the thin lines that indicate the cell boundaries in a table. Gridlines do not print when you print a document.

 

  1. On the Table menu, click Show Gridlines or Hide Gridlines.

 

Adding Borders & Shading to table cells.

 

You can apply your own borders and shading to a table.  This is because Ms-Word does not print the gridlines that divide the table cells on your screen.

 

  1. Selecting the table cells you want to apply borders around.
  2. Click on Format, then choose Borders and Shading.
  3. In the resulting dialog box, click the Borders tab or the Shading tab, and then select the options you want.
  4. In the Apply to: box, select Table or Cell.
  5. Click the OK

 

Note.  To apply in-built/automatic table formats (borders) around table cells;

 

  1. Click in the table.
  2. Click on Table, then choose Table AutoFormat.
  3. In the Table styles box, click the table format you want.
  4. Under Apply special formats to and Formats to apply, select the options you want, then click the Apply button.

 

Merging of cells in a table.

Merging of cells refers to combining 2 or more cells in the same row or column to form a single cell.

 

Importance.

 

  • You can merge several cells horizontally to create a table heading that spans several columns.
  • To create larger cells in a table without increasing the height or width of existing cells.

 

  1. Select the cells you want to merge. This can be adjacent rows or adjacent columns.
  2. Click on Table, then choose Merge Cells.

 

Note.   When you merge several cells in a column to create a vertically oriented table heading that spans several rows, you can change the orientation of the heading text.

 

  1. Select the heading text that you want to span several rows.
  2. On the View menu, point to Toolbars, then click Tables and Borders.
  3. Click the Change Text Direction button.

 

Splitting a cell into multiple cells in a table.

 

This refers to subdividing one or more cells into parts.

 

  1. Click in a cell, or select multiple cells that you want to split.
  2. Click on Table, then choose Split Cells.
  3. In the resulting dialog box, specify the no. of Rows and/or Columns that the selected cells will be split into.
  4. Click the OK

 

 

 

 

Numbering the cells in a table.

 

  1. Select the cells you want to number.

 

To number the beginning of each row, select only the first column in the table by clicking the column’s top border.

 

  1. Click on Format, then choose Bullets and Numbering.
  2. Click the Numbered tab, then select a number format from the list.

 

Aligning a table on a page.

 

You can change the horizontal placement of a table within a page, e.g., center a table between the left & right page margins.

 

  1. Select the table.
  2. Click on Table, choose Table Properties, then click the Table
  3. Under Alignment, select Left, Center or Right.
  4. Click the OK

Splitting a table into parts.

 

When a long table falls within a page break, Ms-Word allows the page break to divide the row between the two pages.

 

You can adjust the table to make sure that the information appears as you want it to when the table spans multiple pages.

 

 

To split a table into 2 parts;

 

  1. Click the row that you want to be the first row of the second table.
  2. Click on Table, then choose Split Table.

Converting a Table into lines of Text.

 

  1. Select the entire table, or the rows and columns you want to convert to text.
  2. Click on Table, point to Convert, then click Table to Text.

A dialog box is displayed that requires you to specify how the text will be separated after conversion.

  1. In the Separate text with: box, select the character to be used as a separator, i.e., Paragraph marks, Tabs, or Commas.
  2. Click the OK

Converting lines of Text into a Table.

 

  1. Select the text you want to convert to a table.
  2. Click on Table, point to Convert, then click Text to Table.

A dialog box is displayed that requires you to specify the number of rows and columns.

  1. In the Separate text at: box, specify whether the table will be defined by Paragraphs, Tabs, or Commas.
  2. Click the OK

 

PERFORMING ARITHMETIC CALCULATIONS IN A MS-WORD TABLE.

It is possible to perform mathematical calculations such as Sum, Product, and Count, if a table has numerical figures.

 

  1. Click in the cell in which you want the result to be placed.
  2. Click on Table, then choose Formula. A formula dialog box is displayed.
  3. If Ms-Word proposes a formula that you do not want to use, delete it from the Formula box, making sure that you don’t delete the equal sign.

 

 

  1. In the Paste function box, click a function. A Function is a mathematical formula that accomplishes calculations in a table.

 

E.g., to add numbers, click SUM.

 

  1. To refer to the contents of a cell in the formula, type the cell references in the parentheses. Use a Comma to separate references to individual cells, or a Colon to separate the first & the last cells in a selected range.

 

Examples;

 

  • To add the numbers in cells A1, A3 & C2, type: =SUM(a1, a3,c2)
  • To find the average of values in cells A1, A2, B1, B2, C1 & C2, type: =Average(a1:c2)
  1. In the Number format box, enter a format for the numbers, e.g., to display the numbers as a decimal percentage, click 00%.
  2. Click the OK

Sorting in tables.

Sorting refers to arranging of text, numbers or data in a list or table according to some predetermined sequence.

 

  1. Click on any cell in the table you want to sort.
  2. Click on Table, then choose Sort. The entire table is automatically selected, and the Sort dialog box appears.
  3. Select the type of data to be used when sorting, i.e., Text, Number or Date.
  4. Under Sort By, select the column number corresponding to the column you want to use as the basis for sorting.
  5. Select the Ascending or Descending option button.

 

Ascending will sort in increasing order (lowest to highest or A–Z); Descending will sort in decreasing order (highest to lowest or Z–A).

  1. If you want to use additional columns for sorting, enter the column in the Then by
  2. Click the OK

Review questions

 

  1. Define a Cell, Row and Column while working with tables?
  2. Identify two importances of creating tables in Microsoft Word.
  3. Differentiate between:
  • Drawing and inserting a table in a document.
  • Deleting a table and Clearing a table.
  1. What would happen to the cursor in a table when the following actions are done:
  • Pressing the TAB key.
  • Pressing the SHIFT+TAB key.
  • Pressing the ENTER key.
  1. (a). Define the term “Merging of cells” as used in tables.

(b). Give a reason why it may be necessary to merge cells in a table.

  1. Describe how would you do the following:
    • Insert a blank row in your table.
    • Insert borders around your table.
    • Delete two rows from your table.
  2. Explain how you can convert some typed text into a table using Microsoft Word.
  3. What is a Function when working with calculations in word processing?
  4. Define the term sorting text.

 

 

 

 

CREATING & PRINTING AN ENVELOPE

 

  1. Click on Tools, point to Letters and Mailings, then click Envelopes and Labels.
  2. In the resulting dialog box, click the Envelopes
  3. In the Delivery address box, type the mailing address (i.e., the address of the receiver).
  4. In the Return address box, type the return address. Otherwise, select the Omit checkbox to omit the return address (in case the envelopes have a pre-printed return address).

 

Formatting an envelope address,

 

  1. In the Envelopes and Labels dialog box, click the Options button, then click the Envelope Options tab.

 

  1. To select an envelope size, click the size you want in the Envelope size box.

 

  1. To change the font, font Style, Size, font Colour, and Effects for the envelope addresses,

 

Under the item you want to adjust, click the Font button.

 

  1. Click the OK

 

Printing the envelope.

 

After creating the envelope, you can print it.

 

  1. Switch to the Envelopes Options dialog box, then click the Printing Options
  2. Insert an envelope in the printer as shown in the Feed In the Envelopes Options dialog box, click the Print button.

 

MAIL MERGING

 

Mail merging is the process of generating personalized letters or documents by combining a standard document, e.g., a letter, with a list of addresses, and producing several copies of the standard document, but addressed to different recipients.

 

The standard document (letter) is referred to as the ‘Main Document and the list of addresses is referred to as the ‘Data Source.

 

Importance of mail merging.

 

  • Mail merge enables the user to send out the same document to several recipients at once.
  • Combining of letters saves time when printing.
  • The mailing list used in a Mail merge can be re-used on another document (unlike Copy & Pasting).

 

The Mail merge process.

 

The Mail merge process consists of 4 main steps:

 

  1. Create the Main document or Open an existing Main document.

 

Main document is the common document or letter that is to be sent to all the people on the mailing list.  It is sometimes known as the Form letter.

 

The Main document contains the text & graphics that are the same for each version of the merged document, e.g., the return address or salutation.

 

  1. Create the Data source or Open an existing Data source, with individual recipient information.

 

Data source (or Addresses file) is a file of data records of the people that will receive the form letter.

The Data source contains the information or data that varies in each copy of a merged document.  E.g., the list of names & addresses you want to use in a mail merge.

 

  1. Add Merge fields in the main document.

 

Merge field is a placeholder that you insert in the main document.  It helps Ms-Word insert the name or information that is stored in a particular data field.

  1. Merge or combine data from the Data source with the Main document to create a new, merged document.

 

Therefore, in a mail merge, there are three files created:

 

  1. The primary file (Main document).
  2. The secondary file (Data source).
  3. Merged file.

Creating & printing of Form letters using Word 97/2000.

 

Creating the Main document.

 

  1. Retrieve or type the letter that you want to use as the main document.
  2. Click on Tools, then choose Mail Merge. The Mail Merge Helper dialog box appears.
  3. Under Main document, click the Create button, then select the type of document needed, e.g., Form letter
  4. To use the on-screen document as your main document, click Active Window.

 

Creating a Data source.

 

  1. Under Data source, click Get Data.
  2. To use an existing list of names and addresses, click the Open Data Source button, select the file that contains your data source, then click OK.

 

To create a new list of names & addresses, click Create Data Source, then choose the required fields from the Create data source box.

  • To rearrange the field names, select a field name, then click the Move arrows (ÇorÈ) until the field name is in the correct position.

 

  • To delete a field name that you don’t require in your data source, click the field name, then choose Remove Field Name.

 

  • To add a new field name to the data source, type the new field in Field Name box, then click Add Field Name.

 

  1. When you finish, click the OK button, then save the record structure of the new data source.
  2. In the Save As dialog box, type a name for the data source, then click OK.
  3. In the message box that appears, click Edit Data Source, then type the names & addresses of the recipients in the Data Form dialog box.

To add a new address, click the Add New button after each full entry.  When you finish adding the required information, click OK.

 

  1. If a message is displayed, click Edit Main Document. In the Main document, type the text you want to appear in every form letter.

 

Inserting Merge fields into the Main document.

 

  1. In the Main document, place the text cursor where you want to insert the merge fields (i.e., the information from the data source).
  2. On the Mail Merge toolbar, click the Insert Merge Field button, then select the merge fields that you want to insert.
  3. After you have inserted all of the merge fields, save the Main Document.

 

Merging the Data source with the Main document.

 

After inserting merge fields from the data source into the main document, you can now merge them.

 

There are 4 ways of merging a document with its data source:

 

  • Merge to new document.
  • Merge to Printer.
  • Merge to E-mail.
  • Merge to Fax.

 

  • To merge to a new document;

 

Click the Merge to new document button on the Mail Merge toolbar.

 

  • To merge to Printer;

 

Click the Merge to Printer button.  The Printer option sends the resulting merged documents directly to the Printer.

 

Note.  Before you merge to a printer, you can preview the appearance of the merged documents (i.e., display the merged data in the main document)

 

  1. With the main document displayed, click the View Merged Data (ABC) button on the Mail Merge
  2. Click the Arrow buttons to move from one data record to the other.

 

  • Send merged documents by E-mail or by Fax;

 

  1. Click the Merge button on the Mail Merge
  2. In the Merge to: box, select E-mail or Fax.
  3. Click the Setup button to specify the e-mail addresses or faxing number.
  4. Then click on the Merge

 

The Internet Connection wizard starts, and if your computer is properly configured, the mail merged document will be sent.

Creating & printing of Form letters using Word 2002.

 

Creating the Main document.

 

  1. Open or type the document that you want to use as the main document.
  2. Click on Tools, point to Letters and Mailings, then click Mail Merge Wizard.
  3. Under Select Document type, click Letters.
  4. Under Select document, click Use the current document, if you want to use the open document as your main document.

 

Creating a Data source.

 

  1. Under Select Recipients, choose Type a new list, then click Create. This will display the New Address List dialog box where you can create a new list of names & addresses.

 

To add a new address, click the New Entry button after each full entry.

 

  1. When you finish, click the Close button, and then save the new data source.
  2. On the Mail Merge Recipients dialog box, click Edit, make changes to your addresses, then click OK.

 

Inserting Merge Fields into the main document.

 

  1. In the Main document, click where you want to insert the information from the data source.
  2. On the Mail Merge toolbar, click the Insert Merge Field button, then select the merge fields that you want to insert.
  3. After you have inserted all of the merge fields, click the Close button, then save the Main Document.

 

Merging the Data Source with the main document.

 

  1. On the Mail Merge toolbar, click Merge to Printer, Merge to New Document, Merge to Email or Merge to Fax.
  2. Click Merge.

 

If you choose Merge to Printer, Ms-Word displays the Merge to Printer dialog box.  Select the records to be printed, then click the OK button.  This takes you to the Print dialog box, where you can select the printing options that your printer will use.

 

 

 

 

Review questions.

 

  1. Describe the procedure of creating an envelope heading. Show how you can make it bold & size 12.
  2. (a). What is the meaning of the word Mail merging?

(b). Give two advantages of Mail merging.

  1. Define each of the following:
    • Main document / Form letter.
    • A Data source.
  2. Explain the THREE basic steps required to Mail merge a document.
  3. List four ways of merging a document with its data source.

 

GRAPHICS & DIAGRAMS IN MICROSOFT WORD

 

The term Graphics refers to non-text images or objects generated by a computer.  They include; photographs, pictures, drawings, and graphs.

 

Importance.

 

  • Information presented graphically is easy to understand, e.g., if you have a lot of information, representing it graphically is more effective than using text only.

 

  • Graphics & drawings can be used to enhance Ms-Word documents, e.g., one can use arrows to draw attention to certain data.

 

  • A well-placed picture can help illustrate a point clearly, and can transform a plain looking document into an interesting document.

 

Types of Graphics.

 

There are 3 basic types of graphics that you can use to enhance your Ms-Word documents:

 

  1. Drawing objects
  2. Pictures
  3. Charts

 

Drawing objects.

 

A Drawing object is any graphic that is drawn or inserted into a document, and can be changed or improved.

Drawing objects include AutoShapes and WordArt.

 

AutoShapes is a group of ready-made graphic images or shapes.  AutoShapes usually have predefined shapes, and the user can draw by selecting it, then dragging its size on the screen.  Examples of AutoShapes are; rectangles, circles, Lines, Connectors, Block arrows, Flowchart symbols, Stars, etc.

 

Pictures.

 

A Picture is a graphic that was created from another file.  They include Photographs, Scanned pictures, Bitmaps, and ClipArt.

 

A Bitmap is a picture made from a series of small dots. When stored as files, bitmaps usually have the extension “.bmp”.

 

Chart.

 

A Chart is a graphical presentation of data in a table.  Charts are used to summarize data in a document in a pictorial way.

Sources of graphics that can be used in Ms-Word.

 

There are 4 sources of graphics that can be used in Ms-Word.  You can insert a graphical object;

 

  1. From the Microsoft Clip gallery.
  2. From a Scanner.
  3. By using the Drawing tools available in Ms-Word.
  4. Import from file.

 

DRAWING OF OBJECTS (AUTOSHAPES) IN MS-WORD

 

Ms-Word provides the user with basic drawing tools such as Polygons, Arrows, Lines, circles, Stars and Banners, Callouts, etc, which can be found on the Drawing toolbar.

 

To display the toolbar, click on View, point to Toolbars, then click Drawing.

 

Drawing a line, an arrow, a rectangle, or a circle;

 

  1. Click on the appropriate shape button in the Drawing The pointer changes to a plus sign.
  2. Place the pointer where you want to draw the shape, and drag to the required size.

 

  • To create a perfect square or a circle, hold down SHIFT as you drag the AutoShape.
  • Holding down the SHIFT as you draw a line will lock it into an angle of 450, 600, 900, etc.

 

Drawing an object using the AutoShapes;

 

  1. In the Drawing toolbar, click the arrow next to AutoShapes.
  2. From the menu displayed, point to the category of shapes you want to insert, e.g. Lines, Connectors, Basic shapes, Block Arrows, Flowcharts, Stars and Banners, etc, then select the object you wish to draw.
  3. Place the pointer where you want to draw the shape, and then drag the mouse.

 

Inserting text in an AutoShape.

 

  1. Click to select the AutoShape.
  2. Right-click the shape, choose Add Text from the shortcut menu displayed, then type the text.

 

Inserting a Text Box.

 

A Text Box is a container used for text or graphics that can be moved and resized.

 

  1. Click on Insert, then choose Text Box (or, on the Drawing toolbar, click the Text Box button).

 

  1. Using the cross-shaped cursor, drag out a shape. The Insertion point is placed inside the textbox.
  2. Type in your text inside the Text Box.
  3. Format the text as you want, e.g., change the size of text, font style, alignment, etc.
  4. Drag and position the Text Box to the part of the document in which you want it to be.

 

Formatting the Text Box.

 

  1. Select the Text Box by clicking the outside borders to display the sizing handles.
  2. Click on Format, then select Text Box (or, double-click the Text Box),

 -OR-

Right-click the Text Box, then choose Format Text Box.

 

This displays the Format Text Box dialog box.

 

  1. To change the size of the Text Box using exact measurements, click the Size
  2. To fill the Text Box with colour, click the Colors and Lines Under Fill, select a color.
  3. Select any other options you want, then click OK.

 

 

 

 

Changing the text direction in a drawing object, Text Box or table cell.

 

This makes the text to be displayed vertically or horizontally.

 

  1. Click the drawing object or table cell that contains the text you want to change.
  2. Click on Format, choose Text Direction, then click the required orientation.

 

Aligning text in an AutoShape or Text Box.

 

  1. Click the AutoShape or Text Box that contains text you want to align.
  2. On the Formatting toolbar, click Align Left, Center, Align Right, or Justify

 

Moving a drawing object in front of or behind text.

 

  1. Select the picture, or drawing object.
  2. On the Drawing toolbar, click Draw, point to Order, then click Bring in Front of Text or Send Behind Text.

 

Formatting or editing a Picture, Drawing object or AutoShape

 

Method 1:

 

  1. Click the picture to select it.

 

Ms-Word will display the Picture editing toolbar.  Incase it is not, click on View, point to Toolbars, then select Picture.

 

  1. Use the buttons on the Picture toolbar to adjust the brightness and contrast, change the picture to black and white or grayscale, and crop the image.

 

Cropping refers to hiding the unwanted details so that they do not come out when printing.

 

Method 2:

 

  1. Click the AutoShape you want to format.
  2. Click on Format, then choose AutoShape (or, right-click the AutoShape, then choose Format AutoShape).

 

-OR-

 

Double-click the AutoShape.

 

  1. Use the tabs on the Format Picture dialog box to enhance the appearance of the object.

 

Filling a drawing object with a color or decorative effects.

 

To enhance an AutoShape, Textbox, or WordArt with colors, patterns, borders, and other effects;

 

  1. Double-click the object.
  2. On the Format Picture dialog box, click the Colors and Lines
  3. Under Fill, click the arrow in the Color box, then select a colour from the palette.
  4. To apply special effects or a decorative fill to the object, click Fill Effects, then click the Gradients

Under Color, choose Preset.  In the Preset Colors box, select an option, then choose a shading style.

To change the patterns and texture of your object, use the Texture or Patterns tab.

 

Gradient is a gradual progression of colors and shades, usually from one color to another color, or from one shade to another shade of the same color.

 

 

  1. Click the OK

 

To remove a graphic color or fill, click the arrow next to Fill Color, then click No Fill.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Changing the Weight, Color and Style of a Line.

 

  1. Select the object whose line weight, color or style you want to change.
  2. Click on Format, select AutoShape, then click the Colors and Lines
  3. Select a line from the Style To use a dashed line, then select it under Dashed.
  4. Use the Up & Down arrows in the Weight box to adjust the line weight.
  5. To apply a different color to the line, select it from the Color drop-down list.
  6. Click OK.

 

Callouts

 

These are special AutoShapes into which you can add text.  They can be used to draw attention to an important point or to highlight information that you want to emphasize.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Adding WordArt to a document.

 

WordArt is a text object that can be created with ready-made effects, and to which additional formatting options can be applied.

 

  1. Click on Insert, point to Picture, then click WordArt.
  2. In the WordArt Gallery dialog box, click the WordArt effect you want, then click OK.
  3. In the Edit WordArt Text dialog box, type the text you want.
  4. To change the font type, select a font in the Font To change the font size, select a size in the Size list.  To make text bold or italic, click the Bold or Italic button.
  5. Click OK.

 

Changing the text in WordArt.

 

  1. Double-click the WordArt object you want to change.
  2. In the Edit WordArt Text dialog box, type the new text, then click OK.

 

Formatting WordArt text.

 

  1. Click the WordArt, click on Format, then choose WordArt (or, right click the WordArt, then choose Format WordArt).
  2. Use the tabs on the Format WordArt dialog box to change the WordArt text.

 

INSERTING A CLIPART (PICTURE) FROM THE MICROSOFT CLIP GALLERY

 

The Microsoft Clip Organizer contains a variety of useful drawings, photographs, sounds, videos, and other media files called clips that you can insert and use in presentations, publications, and other Microsoft Office documents.

 

Inserting a clip from the Clip Organizer.

 

A Clip is a single media file including art, sound, animation, or movies.

 

 

  1. Position the insertion point where you want your clip to be inserted.
  2. Click on Insert, point to Picture, then click Clip Art.
  3. At the bottom of the Insert Clip Art task pane, click Clip Organizer. Use the Clip Organizer to browse through Microsoft Office clip collections.
  4. Click the Pictures In the Categories list box, select the category of Clip Art pictures you want, e.g., Plants.  A preview of images appears for that category.
  5. In the Results box, click the media clip you want to insert, then drag it into your open document.

 

INSERTING AN IMAGE FROM A SCANNER.

 

A Scanner is a data capture device that transforms a hardcopy or real graphical object into digital form.

 

To scan an object;

 

  1. The computer must be connected to a Scanner.
  2. Position the insertion point where you want your picture to appear.
  3. Click on Insert, point to Picture, then click From Scanner or Camera.
  4. To scan, follow the instructions that come with your scanner.
  5. When the image appears on the screen, edit or format it as required the same way you would with a ClipArt.

 

INSERTING A PICTURE FROM ANOTHER FILE.

 

  1. Position the insertion point where you want the picture to be placed.
  2. Click on Insert, point to Picture, then click From File.
  3. Locate the file that contains the image you want to insert, e.g., from a floppy disk, CD, etc.
  4. Select the object you want to insert, then click the Insert
  5. When the image appears on the screen, edit or format it as required the same way you would with a ClipArt.

 

Changing the size of a graphic.

 

After you insert a picture, you may find that it is too big or too small for your needs.

 

To change the size of the object;

 

Method 1:

 

  1. Select the graphic, then drag the sizing handles away from or toward the center until the object is the shape and size you want.

 

Sizing handles are the small circles or squares that appear at the corners and sides of a selected object.

 

Method 2:

 

  1. Select the graphic.
  2. Click on Format, select Picture, then click the Size
  3. Under Size and rotate, adjust the sizes in the Height and Width
  • To resize the picture by a specific percentage, under Scale, enter the percentages you want in the Height and Width

 

  • To maintain the ratio between the height & width of the object when resizing, select the Lock aspect ratio

 

  1. Click OK.

 

Rotating an AutoShape, a picture, or a WordArt.

 

  1. Select the drawing object you want to rotate.
  2. To rotate the object to any angle, drag the Rotate handle (P) on the object in the direction you want to rotate it, then click outside the object to set the rotation.

 

  1. To rotate the object 900 to the left or the right,

 

  • On the Drawing toolbar, click Draw, point to Rotate or Flip, then click Rotate Left or Rotate Right.

 

Deleting a drawing object, Text Box or WordArt.

 

  1. Click to select the object you want to delete, then press the Delete

 

 

 

 

Create a mirror image of an object.

 

  1. Click the AutoShape, picture, Clip Art, or WordArt you want to duplicate.
  2. Click on Edit, click Copy, and then click Paste.
  3. On the Drawing toolbar, click Draw, point to Rotate or Flip, then click Flip Horizontal or Flip Vertical.
  4. Drag and position the duplicate object so that it mirrors the original object.

 

Importing objects into a word processor.

 

Importing refers to getting ready-made objects and text from other applications into a word processor.

 

Difference between Object Linking and Embedding.

 

In Linking, the object imported can only be edited in the original application from which it was created; In Embedding, the object imported becomes part of the current application, and can be edited there.

 

Review questions

 

  1. Define the term Graphic.
  2. List any three sources of graphics that can be used in Microsoft Word.
  3. What is an AutoShape?
  4. Explain how you would do the following tasks.
    • Enter text in an AutoShape.
    • Insert a WordArt.
    • Insert a ClipArt picture into your document.
    • Fill a drawing object or an AutoShape with colour.
    • Change the brightness of a graphic.
    • Change the thickness of an AutoShape outline.
  5. Give two advantages of using a Text Box to write the text in an advertisement.
  6. Explain the concept of importing objects into a word processor.
  7. (a). What is the difference between object linking and embedding.

(b). Describe how you would increase the size of a ClipArt that is embedded in a document.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PRINTING A DOCUMENT

 

Previewing a document (Display each page as it will look when printed).

 

Before you print a document, it is important to make sure that it will be printed the way you want it.

Previewing a document enables you to see exactly the way the pages will appear when printed, and where necessary, make any changes to the document.

 

Advantages of previewing a document before printing.

 

  • To confirm that no details are outside the printable area, and that the page layout is okay.
  • To go through the document before printing.
  • To save printing papers & printer toner because; errors on printouts that may require reprints will be minimal.

 

  1. Click on File, then choose Print Preview (or, click the Print Preview button on the Standard toolbar). The mouse pointer changes into a symbol that resembles a magnifying glass.
  2. Click inside the document to increase or reduce the size of the view.
  3. Use the buttons on the Print Preview toolbar to look over the page or make adjustments before printing.

 

To: Do this:
Display one page at a time Click the One Page button.
Display two or more pages at a time Click the Multiple Pages button, then drag over the grid to select the number & configuration of pages.
Magnify an area of a given page Point to the location you want to view, and then click the Magnifier button.  To return to the original magnification, click the mouse button again.
Reduce or enlarge the page(s) displayed Click the down arrow next to the Zoom box, then select a magnification.
Hide all screen elements except the displayed page(s) & the Print Preview toolbar. Click the Full Screen button.  To return the hidden elements to the screen, click the Mouse button again, or press ESC.

 

  1. To exit Print preview, click the Close button.

Actual printing of the active document.

Method 1:

  1. To print the document using the default settings, click the Print button on the Standard

Method 2:

  1. Click on File, choose Print (or, press CTRL+P).

 

This opens the Print dialog box in which you can set the printing options, such as;

 

  • The type of the printer installed in your computer.
  • Whether to print the whole document or a range.
  • Number of copies to print per page.

 

To print a range of pages.

 

  1. Under Page range, click an option to specify what you want to print, e.g., All or Current page.

 

  • To print a portion of the document, select the portion, then click the Selection
  • To print specific pages;

 

  1. Under Page range, click the Pages checkbox.
  2. In the Pages box, enter the page numbers or ranges you want to include.

 

Example

 

To print Noncontiguous pages, type the page nos. with commas between them.  Use a hyphen to separate the starting and ending numbers in the range.  E.g. to print pages 2, 4, 5, 6, and 8; type 2, 4 – 6, 8

 

To print only odd or even pages.

 

  1. In the Print box, click either Odd pages or Even pages.

 

Printing more than one copy at a time.

 

  1. In the Number of copies box, enter the no. of copies you want to print per page.
  2. Select the Collate checkbox, if you want a complete copy of the document to be printed before the first page of the next copy is printed

If you want to print all copies of the first page and then print all copies of subsequent pages, clear the checkbox.

 

Specifying the Print quality, Paper orientation, Paper Type or Paper Size that your printer will use.

 

 

  1. In the Print dialog box, click the Properties

 

  • Under Print Quality, select the Normal, Best, or FastDraft.

 

Note.  When you print a document in draft quality, Ms-Word does not print formatting or most graphics.  This makes the document print faster.

 

  • Under Orientation, select the Portrait, or Landscape.
  • Under Paper Type, select the Plain/inkjet, Transparency or Photo Paper.
  • Click the arrow next to the Paper Size box, then a paper size.

 

  1. Click OK to take you back to the Print dialog box.

 

Printing a folded booklet.

 

  1. Set up your document as a booklet.
  2. Click on File, click Print, then set options for printing on both sides of the paper.

 

If you’re using a duplex printer (one that automatically prints on both sides of the paper),

 

 

  1. Click the Properties button, set the page orientation to Landscape.
  2. Set the duplex options, and flip the document on the short edge or side.

 

If you are not using a duplex printer,

 

  1. In the Print dialog box, select the Manual duplex checkbox.

Ms-Word will print all the pages that appear on one side of the paper, and then prompt you to turn the stack over and feed the pages again.

 

  1. Select the page range you want to print.

 

If you click Current page or Pages, Word prints the page you indicate, plus the three other pages that belong on the same sheet of paper.

 

Review questions

 

  1. Give two advantages of previewing a document before printing.
  2. Explain the difference between printing of multiple pages and printing of multiple copies.

 

 

 

GETTING HELP AS YOU WORK IN MS-WORD

 

Purpose of the Help facility.

 

  • To get a step-by-step guide on how to perform tasks.
  • To get access to more information about features in Ms-Word while you are working.

 

There are several ways/resources that you can use to get help while you work in Ms-Word.

 

  1. Using the Office Assistant.
  2. From the Help
  3. From the Office Update Web site (if one is connected directly to the Internet).

 

Using the ‘Ask a Question box’.

 

Type questions in the Ask a Question box on the Menu bar to quickly find the answers you need.

 

Note.  For best results, type a complete sentence or question, not just a single word or a phrase.

E.g. to find Help on how to print more than one copy of a file at a time, type print more than one copy at a time instead of typing print.

Using the Office Assistant.

 

When you have a question about Ms-Word, you can ask the Office Assistant.

 

  1. To turn on the Office Assistant at any time, click Show the Office Assistant on the Help menu (or click the Microsoft Word Help (?) button on the toolbar).
  2. Click the Office Assistant, and then type what you want help on. g., to get help about how to create a table, type How do I create a table in the Office Assistant message box.
  3. Click on the Search The Office Assistant will then provide options on the question you have asked.

 

The Office Assistant Help topics.

 

The Office Assistant automatically provides Help topics and tips on tasks you perform as you work – before you even ask a question.  E.g. when writing a letter in Ms-Word, the Office Assistant automatically displays topics that can help you create and format a letter.

 

Office Assistant ScreenTips.

 

ScreenTips are notes that appear on the screen to provide information about a toolbar button, comment or to display a footnote or endnote.

 

The Office Assistant displays ScreenTips on how to use the features in the Microsoft Office programs more effectively. To display tips, click the Light bulb next to the Office Assistant.

 

For example,

 

  • To get information about a menu command, toolbar button, or screen region, on the Help menu, click What’s This? then click the area for which you want help.

 

  • To know more about an option in a dialog box, click the question marks in the dialog box, then click the option.

 

  • To see the name of a toolbar button, or to view information about items such as comments, hyperlinks in Ms-Word, rest the pointer over the item.

Show or hide ScreenTips.

 

  1. On the Tools menu, click Options, then click the View
  2. Under Show, select or clear the ScreenTips

 

To turn the Office Assistant off.

 

  1. On the Options tab, clear the Use the Office Assistant

 

Select a different Office Assistant.

 

  1. Click the Office Assistant, choose Options, then click the Gallery
  2. Click the Back or Next button until you see the Assistant you want, then click OK

Turn the Office Assistant sound on or off.

 

To hear sound from the Office Assistant, you must have a sound card installed on your computer.

 

  1. On the Options tab, select or clear the Make sounds check box.

 

Note. The Assistant is shared by all Office programs.  Therefore, any options you change will also apply to the Assistant in your other Office programs.

 

Using the Help menu.

 

 

  1. On the Help menu, click Microsoft Word Help (or press F1).
  • Click the Contents tab, and then scroll to view the table of contents for Help. Click on the topic you need information on.

 

OR

  • Click the Index tab to search for specific words or phrases, or choose from a list of keywords.  Type the words you want to search for, and click the Search button.

 

Review Questions

 

  1. List three ways in which one can invoke the Help facility in Ms-Word.

 

CBC Grade 6 Physical and Health Education Schemes of Work Free Editable Word, PDF Downloads

CBC Grade 6 Physical and Health Education Schemes of Work Free Editable Word, PDF Downloads

GRADE 6 KLB PHYSICAL AND HEALTH EDUCATION

SCHEMES OF WORK TERM 3

Week Lesson  Strand Sub strand Specific learning outcomes Learning experiences Key inquiry questions  Learning resources Assessment Reflection
1 1 Gymnastics Elbow stand By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Use digital device to watch a video clip on elbow stand and observe the placement of the hands.

·        Draw the picture on learner’s book that show the elbow stand.

·        Discuss the benefits of an elbow.

·        Appreciate the benefits of an elbow.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Use digital device to watch a video clip on elbow stand and observe the placement of the hands.

-Draw the picture on learner’s book that show the elbow stand.

-Discuss the benefits of an elbow.

What is an elbow? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 198-199 Value based sports channels,Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
2 Gymnastics Elbow stand By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Identify warm up activities.

·        Practice warm up and cool down activities such as bear crawl and Cross-Body shoulder stretch.

 

·        Appreciate the spirit of sports through dedication and commitment

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Identify warm up activities.

-Practice warm up and cool down activities such as bear crawl and Cross-Body shoulder stretch.

How do you perform warm up activity in elbow stand? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 199-201 Value based sports channels,Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  3 Gymnastics Elbow stand By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:
  • Describe the placement of the forearm during the elbow stand.
  • Demonstrate the elbow stand balance
  • Practice elbow stand kicks.
  • Have fun practising elbow stand.
The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Describe the placement of the forearm during the elbow stand.

 

-Demonstrate the elbow stand balance.

 

-Practice elbow stand kicks.

What is the other name for the elbow stand? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 201-204 Value based sports channels,Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  4 Gymnastics Dive forward roll into squat stand By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain the meaning of dive forward roll into squat stand.

 

·        Use digital device to watch a video clip and observe the body position, arm and leg movement.

 

·        Practice warm up activities.

 

·        Appreciate feedback from the teacher and others

 

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Explain the meaning of dive forward roll into squat stand.

 

-Use digital device to watch a video clip and observe the body position, arm and leg movement.

 

-Practice warm up activities

 

What is dive  forward roll into squat stand? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 205-207 Value based sports channels,Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  5 Gymnastics Dive forward roll into squat stand By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe the dive forward roll squat stand.

 

  • Demonstrate a dive forward roll into squat stand.

 

  • Practice dive roll, tuck forward roll and handstand forward roll.

 

  • Have a desire to uphold integrity during sporting competitions.

 

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Describe the dive forward roll squat stand.

 

-Demonstrate a dive forward roll into squat stand.

 

-Practice dive roll, tuck forward roll and handstand forward roll.

When can you use the dive forward roll in real life situations? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 207-209 Value based sports channels,Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
2 1 Gymnastics Fence vault By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define a fence vault.

·        Use digital device to watch a video clip on fence vault and observe the body position, arm and leg movement.

·        Practice the warm up and cool down activities.

·        Appreciate the importance of following safety instructions.

 

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Define a fence vault.

 

-Use digital device to watch a video clip on fence vault and observe the body position, arm and leg movement.

 

-Practice the warm up and cool down activities.

 

 

What is a fence vault? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 210-211 Value based sports channels,Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
2 Gymnastics Fence vault By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Outline the drills used to practice the fence vault.

·        Demonstrate the fence vault.

·        Practice side vault, box top and fence vault.

·        Have fun and enjoy practising the fence vault gymnastic movement.

 

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Outline the drills used to practice the fence vault.

 

-Demonstrate the fence vault.

 

-Practice side vault, box top and fence vault.

When can you use a fence vault in everyday life? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 212-214 Value based sports channels,Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  3 Gymnastics Partner balances By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain the meaning of partner balances.

  • Describe the physical activities taking place on learner’s book.

 

  • Use digital device to watch a video clip on partner balances and observe the different types of partner balances.

·        Display the character of a sport person.

 

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Explain the meaning of partner balances.

 

-Describe the physical activities taking place on learner’s book.

 

-Use digital device to watch a video clip on partner balances and observe the different types of partner balances.

 

What is partner balance? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 214-215 Value based sports channels,Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  4 Gymnastics Partner balances By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain the meaning of counter balance.

  • Practice warm up and cool down activities such as side reach and torso twists.
  • Display an attitude of receiving feedback positively from teachers and peers.
The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Explain the meaning of counter balance.

 

-Practice warm up and cool down activities such as side reach and torso twists.

 

 

What is counter balance? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 216-217 Sports channels,Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  5 Gymnastics Partner balances By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        State the safety measures to observe when performing the counter balance and the counter tension.

·        Demonstrate pair and trio balances.

·        Practise trio partner balances.

 

·       Display an attitude to work in a team

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-State the safety measures to observe when performing the counter balance and the counter tension.

 

-Demonstrate pair and trio balances.

 

-Practise trio partner balances

What is counter tension? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 218-220 Sports channels,Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
3 1 Gymnastics Six action sequence By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Describe each of the six actions in the sequence on learner’s book.

  • Use digital device to watch a video clip on gymnastic sequences and observe the sequence of several gymnastics’ actions.
  • Practice warm up and cool down activities.
  • Appreciate feedback from their partner
The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Describe each of the six actions in the sequence on learner’s book.

 

-Use digital device to watch a video clip on gymnastic sequences and observe the sequence of several gymnastics’ actions.

 

-Practice warm up and cool down activities.

 

What is six  action sequence? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 220-222 Sports channels,Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  2 Gymnastics Six action sequence By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Outline the drills to perform six action sequence.

  • Demonstrate a six action sequence.
  • Have fun and enjoy practicing six action sequence.

 

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Outline the drills to perform six action sequence.

 

-Demonstrate a six action sequence.

 

Which gymnastics actions are combined to come up with a six action sequence? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 222-223 sports channels,Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  3 Health and Fitness Speed By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define speed.

  • Use digital device to watch a video clip on how to improve speed.
  • Practice warm up and cool down activities such as collect tails.
  • Appreciate the benefits of speed.

 

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Define speed.

 

-Use digital device to watch a video clip on how to improve speed.

 

-Practice warm up and cool down activities such as collect tails.

What is speed? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 226-227 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  4 Health and Fitness Speed By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Name the components of health fitness that are taken care of by activities for developing speed.

  • Demonstrate the drills to perform to enhance speed.
  • Have fun and enjoy performing different drills.
  • Display the character of a sport person.
The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Name the components of health fitness that are taken care of by activities for developing speed.

 

-Demonstrate the drills to perform to enhance speed.

 

Why is speed important in games? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 227-229 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  5 Health and Fitness Speed By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        List games and sports in which speed is very important.

·        Perform the interval sprints, jumping jacks and weight running.

·        Have fun and enjoy performing speed drill games.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-List games and sports in which speed is very important.

 

-Perform the interval sprints, jumping jacks and weight running.

 

 

How do you improve speed? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 229-232 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
4 1 Health and Fitness Power By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define power.

·        State the importance of power in games and sports.

·        Practice warm up and cool down activities.

·        Appreciate the importance of power in games and sports.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Define power

State the importance of power in games and sports.

 

-Practice warm up and cool down activities.

 

What is power?

 

What is the importance of power in games and sports?

KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 232-233 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  2 Health and Fitness Power By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        List three sports where athletes need a lot of power.

·        Create drills that improve power.

·        Practice and perform physical exercise to enhance muscular strength.

·        Appreciate the importance being physically fit.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-List three sports where athletes need a lot of power.

 

-Create drills that improve power.

 

-Practice and perform physical exercise to enhance muscular strength.

Which activities can help you develop power at home? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 233-238 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  3 Health and Fitness Co-ordination By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define co-ordination.

·        Discuss ways to improve co-ordination.

·        Practice warm up and cool down activities.

·        Respect each other’s opinion.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Define co-ordination.

 

-Discuss ways to improve co-ordination.

 

-Practice warm up and cool down activities.

What is co-ordination? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 238-239 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  4 Health and Fitness Co-ordination By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Outline the drills to practice to improve co-ordination.

·        Practice and perform different drills that help improve co-ordination.

·        Appreciate feedback from the teacher and others.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Outline the drills to practice to improve co-ordination.

 

-Practice and perform different drills that help improve co-ordination.

Why does an athlete need to be agile? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 239-240 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
5 1 Outdoor Activities Leadership styles By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify types of leadership styles in sports.

 

·        State the qualities of a good leader.

 

·        Role play the scenario on learner’s book.

 

·        Appreciate different kinds of leadership.

 

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Identify types of leadership styles in sports.

 

-State the qualities of a good leader.

 

-Role play the scenario on learner’s book.

 

What are the qualities of a good leader? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 244-247 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  2 Outdoor Activities Lightning the camp fire By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define firewood.

·        Discuss importance of stones around a fire place.

·        State the precautions to observe when starting a camp fire.

·        Draw the picture on learner’s book.

·        Appreciate importance of observing precautions when starting a camp fire.

 

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Define firewood.

 

-Discuss importance of stones around a fire place.

 

-State the precautions to observe when starting a camp fire.

 

-Draw the picture on learner’s book.

What precautions should you take when starting a camp fire? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 247-248 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  3 Outdoor Activities Lightning the camp fire By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify the materials that can be used to light a camp fire.

·        Demonstrate how to arrange firewood for a better camp fire during a camping activity.

·        Appreciate the importance of lightning a camp fire.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Identify the materials that can be used to light a camp fire.

 

-Demonstrate how to arrange firewood for a better camp fire during a camping activity.

 

How can you manage a camp fire during an outdoor activity? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 248-250 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  4 Outdoor Activities Choosing and constructing shelter By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define shelter.

 

·        Discuss why it is necessary to know how to make a shelter during an outdoor activity.

·        Practice warm up and cool down activities such as jog on the spot.

·        Appreciate the importance of making a shelter during an outdoor activity.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Define shelter.

 

-Discuss why it is necessary to know how to make a shelter during an outdoor activity.

-Practice warm up and cool down activities such as jog on the spot.

 

What is a shelter?

Why is it  necessary to know how to make a shelter during an outdoor activity?

KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 251-252 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  5 Outdoor Activities Choosing and constructing shelter By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain the factors needed to consider when choosing a site for setting up a shelter.

·        Model a simple shelter they would use in a camp.

·        Have fun and enjoy modelling a simple shelter.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Explain the factors needed to consider when choosing a site for setting up a shelter.

-Model a simple shelter they would use in a camp.

 

What are the factors to consider when choosing a site for setting up a shelter? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 252-255 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
6 1 Sports related injuries Fainting By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define fainting.

·        Identify causes of fainting.

·        Practise warm up and cool down activities.

·        Appreciate positive ways of coping with stress in daily life.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Define fainting.

 

-Identify causes of fainting.

 

-Practise warm up and cool down activities.

Have you ever felt dizzy?

 

What are the causes of fainting?

KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 256-257 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  2 Sports related injuries Fainting By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        State the safety procedures to observe when attending to a person who has fainted.

·        Practise how to assist a person who has fainted.

·        Appreciate the importance of learning first aid of fainting.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-State the safety procedures to observe when attending to a person who has fainted.

 

-Practise how to assist a person who has fainted.

 

What should you do if you start experiencing the signs and symptoms of fainting? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 257-259 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  3 Sports related injuries Insect bites and stings By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain how an insect bite occurs.

·        Practice the warm up and cool down activities of an insect bites and stings.

·        Appreciate the teacher’s feedback.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Explain how an insect bite occurs.

 

-Practice the warm up and cool down activities of an insect bites and stings.

 

How does an insect bite occurs? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 259-260 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  4 Sports related injuries Insect bites and stings By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify the signs and symptoms of insect bites and sting.

·        Draw insects that are common in their locality.

·        Have fun discussing the observations with their classmates.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Identify the signs and symptoms of insect bites and sting.

 

-Draw insects that are common in their locality.

 

What are the signs and symptoms of insects bites and stings? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 260-262 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  5 Sports related injuries Insect bites and stings By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        State the difference between an insect bite and a sting.

·        Demonstrate how to take care of an insect bite.

·        Practise first aid procedure for insect bite and stings.

·        Appreciate importance of learning first aid of bites and stings.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-State the difference between an insect bite and a sting.

 

-Demonstrate how to take care of an insect bite.

 

-Practise first aid procedure for insect bite and stings.

 

What is the difference between an insect bite and a sting? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 269-263 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
7 1 Sports related injuries Snake bite By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define poisonous and non-poisonous snakes.

·        List down traditional ways in their locality that were used to care for snakes.

·        Demonstrate how to care for a snake bite.

·        Practise how to assist a casualty of a snake bite.

·        Advocate the importance of learning first-aid.

 

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Define poisonous and non-poisonous snakes.

 

-List down traditional ways in their locality that were used to care for snakes.

 

-Demonstrate how to care for a snake bite.

 

-Practise how to assist a casualty of a snake bite.

How would you tell if you have been bitten by a snake? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 263-265 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  2 Sports related injuries Bandages and dressings By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain the meaning of dressing a wound.

·        Define bandage.

·        Identify the different types of bandages and dressing first aid.

·        Draw the things found in a first aid box.

·        Appreciate the use of a first aid box.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Explain the meaning of dressing a wound.

-Define bandage.

-Identify the different types of bandages and dressing first aid.

 

-Draw the things found in a first aid box.

What is a bandage?

 

How to identify different types of bandages?

KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 266-267 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  3 Sports related injuries Bandages and dressings By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define a triangular bandage.

·        List the materials used to make a triangular bandage.

·        Practice how to use the triangular bandage.

·        Appreciate the importance of using a triangular bandage.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Define a triangular bandage.

 

-List the materials used to make a triangular bandage.

 

-Practice how to use the triangular bandage.

How do you use a triangular bandage? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 268-270 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  4 Sports related injuries Slings and splints By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define slings and splints.

·        State the functions of a splints and a sling in first aid.

·        Practice warm up and cool down activities.

·        Appreciate the functions of a splints and a sling in first aid.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Define slings and splints.

 

-State the functions of a splints and a sling in first aid.

 

-Practice warm up and cool down activities.

 

 

What are the functions of a  splints and a sling in first aid? KLB Visionary Physical and HealthEducation Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 270-271 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  5 Sports related injuries Slings and splints By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        List the materials required to improvise a sling.

 

·        Practise how to tie the reef knot on a triangular bandage.

·        Have fun and enjoy practising tie the reef knot.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-List the materials required to improvise a sling.

 

-Practise how to tie the reef knot on a triangular bandage.

 

What materials do you require to improvise a sling at home? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 272-273 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
8 1 Sports related injuries Two and four-handed seat By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Explain two-handed seat carry.

·        Differentiate between the two-handed seat carry and four handed seat carry.

·        Demonstrate the two and four handed seat carry method.

·        Display positivity in accepting feedback from the teacher.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Explain two-handed seat carry.

 

-Differentiate between the two-handed seat carry and four handed seat carry.

 

-Demonstrate the two and four handed seat carry method.

What is two and four handed seat carry? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 274-276 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  2 Sports related injuries Two and four-handed seat By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify situations whereby the two-handed seat carry may be used.

·        Outline the steps to carry two and four-handed seat.

·        Practise the four handed seat carry.

·        Advocate social justice by respecting and appreciating the abilities of others.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Identify situations whereby the two-handed seat carry may be used.

 

-Outline the steps to carry two and four-handed seat.

 

-Practise the four handed seat carry.

How do you perform two-and four handed seat? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 276-278 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  3 Sports related injuries Bone fractures and dislocation By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define a bone fracture.

·        Identify causes of fractures.

·        Practice warm up and cool down activities such as tag game.

·        Display respect for others opinion when discussing bone fractures and dislocation.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Define a bone fracture.

 

-Identify causes of fractures.

 

-Practice warm up and cool down activities such as tag game.

 

What is a bone fracture?

 

How do you identify a broken bone?

KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 279-280 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  4 Sports related injuries Bone fractures and dislocation By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Identify the signs and symptoms of fractures.

·        Draw human skeleton and the areas prone to dislocation.

·        Appreciate the teacher’s feedback

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

 

-Identify the signs and symptoms of fractures.

-Draw human skeleton and the areas prone to dislocation.

Where do dislocation occur in the human body? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 280-282 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
  5 Sports related injuries Bone fractures and dislocation By the end of the lesson, the learner should be able to:

·        Define dislocation.

·        Identify symptoms of dislocation.

·        Demonstrate how to splint a fractures arm for first aid.

·        Appreciate the importance of learning bone fracture and dislocation first aid.

The learner is guided individually or in groups to:

-Define dislocation

Identify symptoms of dislocation.

 

-Demonstrate how to splint a fractures arm for first aid.

What is the difference between a fracture and a dislocation? KLB Visionary Physical and Health Education Learner’s Book 6 Pg. 282-284 Observation Peer assessment and feedback Self – assessment and feedback

Practical’s  Written Tests Portfolio

 
9                  ASSESSMENT          

 

 

Free Grade One CBC Rationalized Schemes of Work

KCSE Mokasa Biology Paper 2 Joint Exams and Marking Schemes Free Access

NAME ……………………………………………………………………ADM.NO…………

 SIGN …………………………INDEX NO ………………… ………STREAM……………

231/2

Biology Paper 2

(Theory)

Time: 2 Hours

 MOKASA II JOINT EVALUATION EXAMINATION

Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education

  • Write your name, Index Number in the spaces provided above
  • Write the date of examination in the space provided above
  • Answer ALL the questions in section A in the spaces provided below each question in the question paper
  • In section B, answer question 6(Compulsory) and either question 7 or 8

 

FOR EXAMINER’S USE ONLY

Section Question Maximum Score Candidate’s Score
 

 

A

1 08  
2 08  
3 08  
4 08  
5 08  
 

B

6 20  
7 or 8 20  
  TOTAL 80  

 

 

 

  1. a) Disease X is caused by a recessive gene located only on Y sex chromosome.  A man suffering from the disease X got married last year, 2022.  Using a punnet square show the probability of their 3rd born child suffering from the disease XUseletter N to represent the gene for disease X.          (4 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) An individual has XXX sex chromosome is formed as a super female.  Explain how this condition comes about.                                                  (2 mark)

 

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. c) A mother at Kenyatta National Hospital gave birth to triplets and were separated at birth and brought up under different conditions.  The table below gives information about them when they met after 20 years.

 

Features Alice Grace Aby
Weight 70kgs 69kgs 64kgs
Height 1.82m 1.86m 1.7m
IQ 120 120 122
Blood group B O B
Tongue rolling Non roller Non-roller Non-roller

 

  • Which of the triplets are likely to have been identical (1 mark)

 

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  • Give a reason for your answer                               (1 mark)

 

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. a) Describe the process of fertilization in humans                     (3 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. b) What determines primary sexual characteristics and secondary sexual characteristics (2 marks)

Primary

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

Secondary

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. c) Urethra is an organ involved in two organ systems in the body. Name the organ systems                                                               (1 mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. d) Give the functions of the following cells in seminiferous tubules of male reproductive system (2 marks)

(i)       Sertoli cells

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

(ii)      Interstitial cells

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

 

 

  1. The graph below depicts the concentration of two antibodies from a patients’ blood sample: one in response to injection with antiserum against snake bite and the other in response to injection with a toxoid vaccine.

 

 

a)Account for the shape of the curves of injection with toxoid vaccine(2marks).

 

………………………………………………………………………………………

 

………………………………………………………………………………………

 

………………………………………………………………………………………

 

………………………………………………………………………………………

 

b)Name the type of immunity conferred to the patient when;           (2 marks)

 

  1. Given second injection of antiserum against snakebite

 

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. ii) Given first injection with a toxoid vaccine

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. c) A farmer was attacked by a swarm of bees and died. Explain how the bee sting caused death.                                                                  (3 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. d) State how monocytes destroy pathogens (1 mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. The figure below shows the iris and pupil subjected to different environmental conditions.

 

 

  1. Identify the parts labeled A and B

 

A …………………………………………………………………… (1 mark)

B …………………………………………………………………… (1 mark)

 

  1. Describe the event that leads to the appearance of B in diagram Z.

(2 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. (i)What is the importance of the event occurring in (b) above (1 mark)

 

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Identify one cause of hypermetropia (1 mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Distinguish between Rods and Cones           (2 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. The diagram below shows a section through the skin of a polar bear.

 

 

 

 

a)i)     Name the part labeled D.                                                     (1 mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. ii) Explain the thermoregulatory function of D named in a (i) above. When the body temperature is below optimum                                         (3 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. b) What is the effect of bleaching creams to the part labeled C (1 mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. c) Name two homeostatic roles of the skin (2 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. d) Describe how part labeled A adapts the organism to its habitat (1 mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. The table below shows the growth of two types of animals. Animal A and animal B from the time they were hatched for a period of 60 days.  The growth was measured in millimeters after every week for a period of nine weeks.  The two animals were provided with adequate space, food and optimum temperature

 

Time (weeks)   1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Body length Animal A 3 3 10 11 23 23 32 33 42
(mm) Animal B 2 3 4 20 35 70 92 95 102

 

 

 

  1. Plot the growth curve of the body length against time of the two animals on the same axis. (7 marks)

 

 

 

  1. Name the growth pattern represented by;
  • Graph of animal A (1 mark)

 

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  • Graph of animal B (1 mark)

 

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Account for the growth pattern of the animal A (3 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  1. Account for the shape of the graph for animal B between;
  • Week 1 – week 3 (3 marks)

 

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  • Week 3 – week 7 (3 marks)

 

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

 

 

 

  1. Name two hormones responsible for the increase in length of the animal A.

(2 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  1. a) Discuss various ways in which man has artificially used plant growth hormones in agriculture and horticulture                                         (8 marks)

 

  1. b) Describe how xerophytesare adapted to conserve water (12 marks)

 

  1. a) Describe the process of digestion of skimmed milk along the alimentary    canal                                                                                  (10 marks)

 

  1. b) Discuss the practical applications of Anaerobic respiration   (10 marks)

 

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………

FREE GRADE 9 SOCIAL STUDIES NOTES

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

SOCIAL STUDIES AND CAREER DEVELOPMENT

 

PATHWAY CHOICES

 

A career is the professional journey that one chooses to follow to purse one’s interest and achieve one’s goal in work life

 

Career paths

  1. Health care
    • Doctor

 

  • Pharmacist

 

  • Nurse

 

  • Medical researcher

 

  1. Business and finance
    • Entrepreneur

 

  • Marketing manager

 

  • Accountant

 

  • Business consultant

 

  1. Education
    • Teacher

 

  • School principal

 

  • Special education teacher

 

  • Education administrator

 

  1. Law and legal services
    • LAWYER

 

  • Judge

 

  • Legal consultant

 

  • Legal secretary

 

  1. Environmental and sustainability

 

 

 

  1. Communication and media
    • Journalist

 

  • Content writer

 

  • Social media manager

 

  • News anchor

 

  1. Hospitality and tourism
    • Travel agent

 

  • Tour guide

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Identifying factors to consider in the selection of a pathway

The following are factors to consider in the selection of a career pathway:

 

  1. a) Personal interests –

 

Choose a career that aligns with your passion and interests. Consider the activities or subjects you enjoy the most and explore career options related to those areas.

  1. b) Skills and abilities

 

Assess your strengths and abilities. Identify the skills you excel in and consider careers that allow you to utilise and further develop those skills.

 

  1. c) Values and motivations

 

Reflect on your values and what motivates you. Consider the type of work environment, culture and values that are important to you and find a career that aligns with those principles.

  1. d) Education and training

 

Evaluate the educational and training requirements for different career paths. Determine if you are willing and able to pursue the necessary education or training to enter your desired field.

  1. e) Networking opportunities

 

Research the networking opportunities available in different fields. Consider the importance of professional connections and how they can contribute to career growth.

  1. f) Personal fulfillment

 

Aim for a career that provides a sense of purpose and allows you to make a positive impact in the areas that matter to you.

 

Requirements for social sciences pathway at senior school

 

To pursue a career in the field of Social Sciences in senior school requires the following requirements:

 

  1. a) Learning areas or educational subjects

 

relevant courses in Social Studies, History, Psychology, Sociology, Economics, and Geography. These subjects provide a solid foundation for understanding human behaviour, societies and the broader Social Sciences.

 

  1. b) Research and critical thinking –

 

develop research skills and critical thinking abilities by engaging in class projects, independent research or participating in academic competitions. These experiences can enhance your problem-solving skills, which are valuable in Social Science careers.

 

  1. c) Writing and communication skills

 

Work on improving your writing and communication skills, as Social Science careers often involve presenting ideas, conducting research and writing reports or essays.

 

  1. d) Extracurricular activities –

 

Participate in extracurricular activities related to Social Sciences, such as joining a Social Science club, volunteering for community organisations or attending lectures and workshops. These activities can demonstrate your passion for the field and provide practical experiences. e) Networking

 

Build connections with teachers, mentors and professionals in the Social Sciences. Attend career fairs or workshops to meet individuals working in the field and learn from their experiences.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Appreciating the need for choosing a pathway in senior school

The following is the need for choosing a pathway in senior school.

 

  1. It helps you to focus on subjects and activities that genuinely interest you. It gives you a clear direction for your academic journey.

 

  1. By selecting a pathway, you get a chance to discover your passions and talents.

 

  1. It allows you to set goals and work towards achieving them. It gives you a sense of purpose and motivation to strive for success in your chosen field.

 

  1. It offers specialised knowledge and skills related to a specific area. It helps you gain a deeper understanding of subjects you enjoy and prepares you for future studies.

 

  1. It encourages personal growth and development. It allows you to challenge yourself, learn new things and become more confident in your abilities.

 

  1. It helps you to align your studies with your future career. By focusing on subjects relevant to your chosen field, you build a strong foundation and gain valuable skills for future success.

 

g)It provides you with guidance and support from teachers and mentors who specialise in that area. They can offer valuable guidance and help you in your academic journey.

 

 

Pre career support systems

 

Exploring the importance of different support systems for holistic development in a school community

 

Meaning of support systems in a school community

 

  • A support system is a group of people and resources in school that help learners succed in any challenges they may face while in school

 

  • They provide encouragement, guidance and resources to help learners reach their goals and overcome challenges

 

The following are examples of support systems in a school community:

 

  1. School administration – the head teacher, deputy principals, teachers and other school staff work closely to help ensure a safe, productive learning environment for students. They work with the community to address any issues or concerns that arise in the school community.

 

  1. Guidance and Counseling – school counsellors provide academic, social-emotional and career guidance to learners. The school counsellors meet with learners individually or in small groups to help them develop important life skills, cope with personal challenges, and plan for their future.

 

  1. School nurse’s office – this is an important resource for learners who become sick or get injured while in school. The nurse can provide first aid, administer medications and connect learners and families with additional medical resources if needed.

 

 

 

 

  1. Parent-teacher meetings – these are regular meetings between parents and teachers that allow for open communication about a learner’s progress, strengths, and areas for improvement. These meetings help to ensure that everyone is working together to support the learner’s academic and personal growth.

 

 

The significance of pre career mapping for individual growth

 

  • A pre career is the process of discovering yourself and possible career paths before you decide on specific future career

 

Significance Explanation
Reducing regrets  
   
Adaptability  
   
Continuous learning  
   
Practice approach  
   
Informed decisions  
   
Clarity and direction  
   
Goal setting  
   
Skill development  
   

 

The following are importance of pre-career mapping to individual growth.

 

  • Helps discover interests by helping individuals to explore their interests and passions, allowing them to choose a career path that they truly enjoy.

 

  • Set clear and specific goals for their future careers, giving them a sense of direction and purpose.

 

  • Guides decision-making where individuals can make informed decisions about education, training, and skill development, ensuring they are on the right track to reach their desired career.

 

  • Increases motivation by making one more determined to work towards their career goals.

 

  • Promotes self awareness by encouraging self reflection, helping individuals understand their strengths, weakness and values, leading to better career choices

 

 

Using support systems for pre career development in the school community

 

A career support system helps learners in development of careers in schools through the following ways

 

  • Provide guidance on career options and helps to eplore different paths based on their skills and interest and prepares them for job applications and college admissions

 

 

 

  • Alumni connect learners with graduates who can share their career experiences, offer mentorship and provide insights into specific industries or universities.

 

  • Connects learners with experienced professionals who offer career advice and provide emotional support.

 

  • Mentors can be role models, they help learners develop professional skills and offer networking opportunities.

 

  • Provides a safe space for learners to discuss personal challenges, explore values and meaning-making and offer spiritual guidance.

 

  • Chaplains can help learners overcome personal anxieties related to career choices, fostering a sense of well-being that impacts career focus.

 

  • Provides support for learners facing socio-economic challenges for example, food insecurity and housing instability that can impact their ability to focus on career development.

 

  • Provides resources for learners to manage stress, improve mental and physical health and develop healthy habits that contribute to overall well-being.

 

  • Provides health resources for learners to manage stress, improve mental and physical health and develop healthy habits that contribute to overall well-being.

 

 

 

 

 

Designing solutions to challenges arising from use of support systems Challenges arising from use of support systems

 

Pre-career support systems are there to help, but they can also present some challenges. The following are examples of challenges from pre-career support systems.

 

  1. Limited resources – schools may have limited funding or staffing for pre-career support systems, which can result in a lack of career counsellors or limited access to career exploration materials and tools.

 

  1. High learner-to-counsellor ratio – schools may have a high number of students per career counsellor making it challenging for counsellors to provide individualised guidance and support to each student.

 

  1. Lack of parental involvement – parents play an important role in supporting their children’s career development. However, pre-career support systems may struggle to engage parents effectively, leading to limited parental involvement in career planning discussions and activities.

 

  1. Limited scope – programs might focus on specific industries or job types, which might not be ideal if you are undecided or have a unique career path.

 

  1. Passive participation getting – the most out of support systems often requires your initiative. If you are shy or unsure what to ask for, it can be hard to benefit fully.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Designing solutions to challenges arising from use of support systems

Challenges arising from    Solutions

use of support systems

 

Passive participation

 

Accessibility

 

Limited scope

 

Feeling overwhelmed

 

General guidance

 

 

The following are some solutions to challenges arising from the use of support systems:

 

  1. Be clear about your goals: Knowing what you want to achieve will help you find the most relevant programs and resources.

 

  1. Do not be afraid to ask questions: Advisors and mentors are there to help you navigate the pre-career process.

 

  1. Seek out diverse resources: Look beyond your school or a single program to find support that fits your specific needs.

 

  1. Take initiative: Do not wait for opportunities to come to you. Research companies, network with professionals, and actively participate in programs.

 

  1. Focus on what works for you: There is no one-size-fits-all approach. Experiment and find the support systems that benefit you the most.

 

Values of support systems in career development

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

6

 

 

 

COMMUNITY SERVICE LEARNING

Community service learning project

 

Identifying a problem or a gap in the community

 

We can use different methods or ways to gather information from community members about issues affecting them. These methods or ways include:

  • Carrying out physical or online interviews with the community members,

 

  • Holding community gatherings or public barazas,
  • Issuing out questionnaires to community members for them to fill,
  • Carrying out case studies in the community,
  • Co-hosting community radio and television programmes where
  • Community members can share the issues affecting them.

 

 

Designing solutions to the identified problem

Problem – ACCIDENTS INVOLVING MOTORCYCLES

 

Communities can work together to reduce accidents involving motorcycles, protect road users and promote responsible and safe behaviour on roads by implementing the following comprehensive road safety solutions:

  1. Road safety measures:

 

  1. Implement speed limits and strict enforcement.
  2. Maintain roads regularly.

 

  1. Construct modern roads with separate lanes for motorcycles.

 

  1. Education and training for road users:
  1. Compulsory education for motorcyclists.

 

  1. Enforce strict licensing requirements.

 

  1. Public awareness campaigns:
  1. Focus on motorcycle safety.

 

  1. Highlight the risks of reckless riding.
  2. Promote responsible behavior on roads

 

  1. Educate car and truck drivers on sharing the road safety with motorcyclists

 

 

Planning to implement the proposed solutions

 

  • When planning for CSL project, resources should be sourced beforehand to ensure the smooth flow of the project.

 

  • It is encouraged that locally available materials should be used s resources for the CSL project

 

 

Implementing the proposed solutions.

  1. Seeking for permission to carry out the CSL project

 

  1. Implementation of the CSL project

 

  1. Reflection on the concluded project

 

  1. Writing a eport on the project

 

7

 

 

 

 

PEOPLE AND RELATIONSHIP

Socio Economic Practices of early Humans

  • Early humans did not have the improved technology and systems we have today.

 

  • Their socio economic practices were based on their basic needs and resources available to them.

 

  • Early human had a simple basic socio economic system on meeting their basic needs.

 

  • This was done through

 

  1. Hunting

 

  1. Gathering
  2. Communal cooperation

 

 

Describing the socio economic practices of early humans in Africa during the stone age The stone age period

 

  • The stone age period refers to a period of time when early humans made tools and weapons from stones.
  • The tools and weapons were used for different purposes

 

  • The Stone Age period is divided into three different periods. These periods are:

 

  1. a) The Early Stone Age period –

 

It refers to the earliest stage of human history characterised by the use of simple stone tools. The Early Stone Age represents the beginning of human technological and cultural development.

  1. b) The Middle Stone Age period –

 

It follows the Early Stone Age. It is characterised by improved tool technology, cultural developments and shifts in human behaviour.

 

  1. c) The Late Stone Age period –

 

It follows the Middle Stone Age. It is characterised with development in agriculture. The Late Stone Age period represents a time of significant cultural and technological developments for early human societies.

 

NB

 

The Stone Age Period

 

The Stone Age period began 2 million years ago. It is divided into three stages, Early Stone Age, Middle Stone Age and Late Stone Age. Each stage represents development in civilisation of man.

 

The Early Stone Age period marks the beginning of human culture and technological development. During this age, most Homo Habilis emerged. Because of their increased brain size compared to Australopithecus, they used stones which were found in nature for hunting. The stones already had a cutting edge. The humans in this age used tools such as scrapers, blades and arrowheads.

 

The Middle Stone Age period is mainly characterised by the invention of fire. During this stage, humans started to sharpen their stone tools such as scrapers, blades and arrowheads which they used for hunting and fishing. Humans learnt how to cultivate and made farm tools using sharpened stones and wood. They used these tools to till land. They also used stone mortars and pestles to grind their cereals and grains.

 

 

 

 

8

 

 

 

 

 

The Late Stone Age is the last stage of the Stone Age period. Humans developed more refined tools, including finely crafted blades and specialised tools for specific tasks. These tools were often made from materials such as bones showcasing increased skill in craftsmanship.

 

The Stone Age is said to have ended with the beginning of metalworking and the Bronze or Iron Age.

 

 

Socio economic practices refer to the ways in which societies organize and conduct economic activities within a social and cultural context.

Examples of socio economic practices include

 

  1. Agriculture
  2. Trading

 

  1. Pastoralism

 

Early Stone Age

  1. Invented and made tools from stones.

 

  1. Walked naked.
  2. Slept on top of trees.

 

Middle Stone Age

  1. Made improved tools such as scrappers.

 

  1. Lived in caves and rock shelters.

 

  1. Wore animal skin.

 

Late Stone Age

  1. Made improved stone tools such as bone needles and arrowheads.

 

  1. Lived in shelters and houses made using tree branches and grass.
  2. Cultivated crops and reared animals.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

9

 

 

 

 

 

Examining/ illustrating different types of tools used by early humans during stone age period

 

TOOL HOW IT WAS USED
a) Hand axe a) It was used for cutting, chopping and
  butchering animal carcasses.
b) Scraper b) It was used for separating the meat from the
  bones and removing the skin or fur from the
  animal carcass after hunting.
c) Arrowhead c) Early humans attached the arrowhead to the
  arrow where the sharp point of the arrowhead
  was used to penetrate the animal’s flesh
  ensuring a successful hunt.
d) Grinding stone d) It was used to grind grains, seeds, nuts and
  other plant materials into flour, meal or paste.
e) Hammerstone It was used as a pounding tool for example to
  pound roots or tubers. It was also used to break
  open nuts, shape other stones and perform
  various tasks that required force.
f) Digging stick The early humans used a digging stick made
  from wood to loosen and turn over the soil for
  planting seeds and digging up tubers.

 

 

Africa as the birth place of human technology

 

Fossil record – Africa is the origin of the earliest known hominid species, including Homo habilis and Homo erectus, who demonstrated the use of tools. The discovery of early stone tools in Africa provides concrete evidence of early humans’ technological abilities.

 

Archaeological sites – Various archaeological sites across Africa, such as Olduvai Gorge in Tanzania and Sterkfontein in South Africa, have yielded significant findings related to early human technology.

 

Rock art – Africa is home to some of the oldest rock art sites in the world, for example, Drankesberg Rock Art in South Africa and Brandberg Mountain in Namibia. These art sites showcase early humans’ creativity and ability to express themselves through visual representation.

 

Oral traditions – African oral traditions often contain narratives and stories that refer to the use of tools, technologies, and the transmission of knowledge through generations. They provide valuable information into Africa’s technological past.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

10

 

 

 

 

Indigenous Knowledge Systems in African Societies

 

  • Indigenous knowledge systems in Africa societies refer to the diverse knowledge practices, belief and traditions that have been developed and passed down through generations within Africa communities.

 

  • These knowledge systems are deeply rooted in the cultural, social and environmental contexts of different African societies

 

Identifying forms or types of indigenous knowledge systems in African societies Indigenous knowledge systems is the knowledge, practices, beliefs and wisdom that have been developed and passed down over generations

 

ln African societies, indigenous knowledge systems are made up of various forms of knowledge and practices. These systems include:

 

  1. Medicine – traditional healers such as herbalists, diviners and spiritual practitioners possess deep knowledge of medicinal plants, rituals and holistic healing methods. These practices are connected to African beliefs about the interconnectedness of humans and nature.

 

  1. Religion – indigenous African religions are deeply intertwined with cultural practices, rituals and belief systems. They include a diverse range of spiritual traditions and the worship of natural elements.

 

  1. Agriculture – African communities have developed sustainable agricultural practices such as intercropping and terracing that are adapted to local environments and climates. These practices also promote soil fertility in farming systems.

 

  1. Climate – indigenous communities in Africa possess knowledge of seasonal changes and weather prediction. This is done by observing activities like migration patterns of wildlife.

 

  1. Technology – indigenous technological knowledge in Africa includes craftsmanship, tool making and construction techniques. Traditional methods of pottery, weaving, basketry and metalwork display the skills and knowledge passed down through generations.

 

  1. Education – indigenous education in Africa involves oral traditions and storytelling. Elders pass down knowledge through storytelling, proverbs and folktales thereby preserving cultural values and history.

 

  1. Environmental conservation – African indigenous communities have developed sustainable practices for conserving natural resources. This includes the protection of sacred natural sites such as trees, hills and mountains, rotational farming and controlled burning.

 

  1. Astronomy – indigenous African communities possess detailed knowledge of stars, lunar cycles and heavenly body navigation. Astronomy plays an important role in agricultural practices, seasonal calendars and cultural ceremonies, reflecting the indigenous knowledge systems.

 

 

 

11

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Arts – Indigenous arts, such as music, dance and visual arts, often display cultural symbols and spiritual concepts reflecting the interconnectedness between art, people and community.

 

 

Explaining how the indigenous systems were used for sustainability of life

 

  • Indigenous knowledge is deeply rooted in the environment and cultural cohesion of indigenous communities.

 

  • Indigenous knowledge has helped communities to maintain sustainable use and management of natural resources to protect their environments.

 

  • The indigenous knowledge systems play a role in nature conservation, food production and management of forestry and land.

 

 

Using indigenous and modern knowledge to manage peer influence in the society

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Application of Indigenous Knowledge Systems in Africa in Day-to-Day Life

 

  1. Indigenous farming techniques, seed preservation and knowledge of local crops contribute to sustainable agriculture and food security in African communities.

 

  1. Indigenous knowledge of medicinal plants and healing practices continues to play an important role in healthcare, especially in rural areas where access to modern medicine may be limited.

 

  1. Indigenous knowledge about weather patterns and seasonal indicators helps communities to adapt to climate change and manage natural resources sustainably.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

12

 

 

 

 

Poverty Reduction

 

  • Poverty reduction is a global goal aimed at improving the lives of people living in poverty and ensuring that everyone has access to basic necessities and opportunities for a better future.

 

  • It involves efforts to reduce poverty by addressing its root causes and implementing strategies to uplift individuals, families and communities out of poverty.

 

  • Poverty is when someone is unable to meet the minimum they require to live a comfortable and healthy life.
  • It means not having enough food, clothes or a safe place to live.

 

  • It can also mean not being able to go to school or get medical care

 

 

Causes of poverty in Africa

The following are some causes of poverty in Africa.

 

  1. Limited access to quality education – this hinders individuals’ ability to acquire the necessary skills and knowledge for better jobs and economic opportunities.

 

  1. Unemployment – this contributes to low incomes and limited economic growth, leading to widespread poverty.

 

  1. Agricultural challenges – the majority of Africans rely on agriculture for their livelihoods, but factors such as limited access to modern farming techniques, unpredictable weather patterns and land degradation can hinder agricultural productivity and lead to poverty.

 

  1. Political instability and conflict – this disrupts economic activities, damage infrastructure, displace populations, and divert resources away from poverty alleviation efforts.

 

  1. Limited access to credit and financial services – those in rural areas have limited access to credit and banking services, making it difficult for them to start businesses, invest or save for the future.

 

 

Exploring home grown practical solutions to poverty reduction

 

  • Home grown solutions refer to locally developed and implemented strategies and plans that are used to address specific challenges and needs within a community or region

 

  • Home-grown solutions to poverty reduction in Africa are solutions that we generate ourselves to help reduce poverty.
  • Examples of these solutions include lowering population growth rate.

 

  • A high population means a high dependency ratio which reduces investment leading to poverty.

 

  • To control population growth, we must discourage child marriages and at the same time increase female education.

 

  • This will open opportunities for the girl-child for greater empowerment and eventually, population growth will slow down.

 

  • Increasing food production to feed the population, there should be provision of credit to farmers and extension services to help increase crop production. By doing this, farmers

 

13

 

 

 

 

 

will purchase farm inputs and benefit from advice and eventually increase production on their land, hence more food on the table.

 

  • People must also adopt smart climate agriculture that not only increases food production but also checks environmental degradation.

 

Effects of over exploitation of natural resources on poverty in Africa

The following are some effects of over exploitation of natural resources on poverty in Africa.

 

  1. Loss of livelihoods – over exploitation of resources such as forests, fisheries and minerals often leads to the loss of livelihoods for communities dependent on these resources leading to poverty.

 

  1. Food insecurity – unsustainable agricultural practices such as exploitation of land and water resources, can result in reduced crop yields and food scarcity which can lead to poverty among communities that rely on agriculture.

 

  1. Environmental degradation – over exploitation of natural resources contributes to environmental degradation, including deforestation, soil degradation and desertification, soil erosion and water pollution. This makes it difficult for communities to engage in sustainable agriculture practices, access clean water or benefit from ecosystem services hence leads to poverty

 

Sustainable use of resources in the community

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Importance of poverty reduction in the society

 

  • To ensure that all members of the society have access to adequate food, clean water, shelter, healthcare, education and other basic needs.

 

  • To create a more equal society, where everyone has equal opportunities to grow and succeed irrespective of their socio-economic background.
  • To create safer and more stable environments.

 

14

 

 

 

 

Population structure

 

  • Population structure is the composition, distribution and characteristics of a population in a given region.

 

  • Population structure includes various factors such as the number of individuals, their age distribution, gender distribution, ethnic or racial composition, educational levels, employment status and other demographic characteristics.

 

Identifying sources of population data in Kenya and Germany The following are sources of population data in Kenya and Germany

 

  1. Government agencies which are:

 

  1. Kenya National Bureau of Statistics (KNBS) – This is the primary government agency responsible for collecting, publishing and sharing statistical data in Kenya.

 

  1. Federal Statistical Office of Germany (Destatis) – This is the central authority responsible for collecting, processing and sharing official statistical data in Germany.

 

  1. Population and household census – a population census counts the entire population and housing information such as social and economic status.

 

  1. Household sample survey – various surveys are conducted by research institutions and private organizations of a country. These surveys focus on specific population groups or topics such as migration or health.

 

  1. Administrative records – government agencies and departments in Kenya and Germany maintain administrative records such as births, marriages, taxation records and migration of people.

 

Factors determining population structure in Kenya and Germany

  1. The population structure in Kenya has been influenced by the following factors:

 

  • High birth rate: refers to a situation where the number of births within a population is relatively high over a specific period. It indicates a higher rate of population growth due to the increase in the number of newborns.

 

  • High death rate: refers to a situation where the number of deaths within a population is relatively high over a specific period.

 

  • High fertility rate: refers to a situation where the average number of children born to women within a population is relatively high over a specific period. It indicates a higher rate of childbearing and population growth.

 

  • Low life expectancy: refers to a situation where the average number of years a person is expected to live is relatively short within a specific population or region. It indicates a higher mortality rate and shorter overall lifespan compared to other time periods.

 

  1. The population structure for Germany has been influenced by the following factors:

 

  • Low birth rate: refers to a situation where the number of births within a population is relatively low over a specific period. It indicates a lower rate of population growth due to a decrease in the number of newborns.

 

 

 

 

15

 

 

 

 

 

  • Low death rate: refers to a situation where the number of deaths within a population is relatively low over a specific period. It indicates a lower rate of mortality and a longer overall lifespan compared to other areas or time periods.

 

  • Low fertility rate refers to a situation where the average number of children born to women within a population is relatively low over a specific period. It indicates a lower rate of childbearing and a decrease in population growth potential.

 

  • High life expectancy refers to a situation where the average number of years a person is expected to live is relatively long within a specific population or region. It indicates a lower mortality rate and an extended overall lifespan compared to other areas or time periods.

 

  • Immigration refers to the act of individuals or groups moving from one country or region to another with the intention of settling permanently. Therefore, the population structure for Germany has a relatively higher ageing population than the young population.

 

  1. The population structure of a country determines the shape of the population pyramid (age-sex pyramid).

 

 

Constructing age sex population pyramids of Kenya and Germany

 

  1. A population or age-sex pyramid is a graph that represents the population structure of a country.

 

  1. It has the following features:
  2. A title at the top

 

  1. Age-groups
  2. The females on the right and males on the left

 

  1. Population figures at the bottom
  2. Horizontal bars representing the number of males and females in different age groups.

 

  1. The population pyramid of a developing country has a broad base while that of a developed country has a narrow base.

 

Pupils activity

Page 83-87

 

 

Significance of population structure in distribution of national resources in a society Pupils activity

 

Page 88

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

16

 

 

 

 

Compare and contrast the population structure of Kenya and germany

The following are among the similarities between the population structures of Kenya and

 

Germany:

  1. Migration patterns – each country has experienced or continues to experience both internal

 

and international migration. Germany has attracted immigrants for employment while in Kenya, there is a significant internal migration from rural to urban areas, leading to population growth in cities. There is also significant migration of Kenyans to other countries for further studies and work.

 

  1. Gender imbalance – while the extent may vary, all three countries face some degree of gender imbalance in their population structures.

 

The following are the differences between population structures in Kenya and Germany:

KENYA GERMANY
It has a low urban population It has a high urban population
It has a lower life expectancy compared to It has a relatively high life expectancy
Germany  
It has a large population of youthful population It has a high aging population with a growing
  proportion
It has high birth rates compared to Germany It has been experiencing low birth rates for
  several years .
  This has resulted in a declining population
  growth rate

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

17

 

 

 

 

Peaceful conflict resolution

 

PEACEFUL CONFLICT RESOLUTION is a process that emphasizes dialogue, understanding and cooperation to reach mutually beneficial solutions.

It promotes non violence, empathy and respect for all parties involved.

 

Types of peace for sustainable social interactions The following are types of peace in the society.

 

  1. Personal peace – refers to an individual’s state of inner calm, harmony and absence of conflict or violence in their personal life. Personal peace promotes good relationships between a person and other people.

 

  1. Interpersonal peace – refers to positive and conflict-free relationships between individuals, including friends, community members and family.

 

Conflicts in the community

Conflict is a strong disagreement between people or groups that results in angry arguments.

 

  1. Intra-personal (within a person) – it could be a conflict of goals to be achieved, frustrations when goals are not achieved or having to carry out many roles.

 

  1. Inter-personal (between two people) – brought about by different, cultures, education levels, experience, values and family background.

 

  1. Inter-group (between different groups) – could be a conflict between ethnic groups or clans within the same community brought about by unequal distribution of resources such as land.

 

Identifying Barriers to peaceful conflict resolution in day to day life

The following are examples of barriers to peaceful conflict resolution in day-to-day life.

 

  1. Poor or ineffective communication. When people don’t express their needs, concerns or emotions clearly, misunderstandings and conflicts can intensify.

 

  1. Strong emotions such as anger, frustration or fear can hinder conflict resolution.

 

  1. Failing to understand and empathise with the opinions and emotions of others can hinder conflict resolution.

 

  1. Differences in cultural backgrounds or values can create barriers to conflict resolution.

 

The following are some of the ways of overcoming barriers to peaceful conflict resolution.

 

  1. Improving communication skills by enhancing active listening, effective expression and clarity in communication.

 

  1. Developing conflict resolution skills to encourage collaborative problem-solving.

 

  1. Creating a safe and non-judgemental space where individuals feel comfortable expressing their opinions and concerns without fear of judgement.

 

 

 

 

18

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Practising patience and flexibility to promote a mindset that values collaboration and finding common ground.

 

Ways of managing emotions in promotion of peace in the community

 

  1. Peace walks or rallies – organizing peaceful walks or rallies where community members come together to express their commitment to peace can promote peace in the society.

 

  1. Community dialogues – holding community dialogues where community members can engage in open and respectful conversations about issues affecting the community.

 

  1. Community service projects – engaging community members in service projects that promote peace and harmony.

 

 

Embracing peace initiatives and agreements at the community level for harmonious living

 

Pupils’ activity

Page 100-101

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

19

 

 

 

 

Healthy relationship

 

  • Sustaining healthy relationships means nurturing relationships, understanding each other’s needs and working together to overcome challenges.

 

  • Learning how to sustain healthy relationships is a lifelong skill that can bring us happiness and fulfilment.

 

  • We can sustain healthy relationships with our parents, siblings, friends, schoolmates or neighbours.

 

Ways of sustaining relationships in the community

The following are some of the ways of sustaining healthy relationships in the community.

 

  1. Actively engaging with others in meaningful conversations by asking questions and showing genuine interest in other people’s lives. This helps to create a stronger connection that promotes a sense of belonging.

 

  1. Setting and respecting boundaries. Communicating boundaries clearly and respectfully helps to establish mutual respect and ensures that everyone feels comfortable and valued.

 

  1. Practising empathy by putting yourself in other people’s shoes helps to create a supportive and understanding environment in a relationship hence sustains healthy relationships.

 

  1. Being reliable and trustworthy is important in sustaining healthy relationships by keeping confidence and demonstrating integrity in your actions and words.

 

  1. Showing appreciation and gratitude helps to strengthen relationships hence sustaining healthy relationships. This includes small gestures such as saying thank you.

 

Barriers to harmonious relationship

The following are among the barriers to harmonious relationships:

 

  • Misunderstandings: Sometimes, people may not understand each other’s feelings, thoughts, or actions, leading to conflicts or confusion.

 

  • Poor communication: When people do not talk or listen to each other, it becomes challenging to understand each other’s needs and resolve conflicts peacefully.

 

  • Lack of empathy: If someone does not understand or consider how others feel, it can create distance and make it hard to build positive connections.

 

  • Unfairness: When people are treated unfairly or when there are unequal opportunities, it can create barriers to harmonious relationships.

 

  • Lack of respect: When people do not show respect for others’ opinions, boundaries, or differences, it can make it challenging to promote harmonious relationships.

 

Using strategies to overcome barriers to healthy relationship

Pupil’s activity

Pages 105-107

 

 

 

 

 

 

20

 

 

 

 

 

NATURAL AND HISTORIC BUILT ENVIRONMENT TOPOGRAPHICAAL MAPS

 

  • Topographical maps provide a detailed representation of the Earths;s surface, showcasing its natural and natural and man made features.

 

  • These maps use contour lines symbols and colours to show the physical characteristics and human activities of an area

 

Human activities on topographical maps

 

  • A human activity is an activity that is carried out by human. Examples of human activities are crop cultivation, transportation, animal rearing and education among others.

 

Human activities can be divided into:

 

  1. Social activities – these are activities that are associated with people living together and providing services that make life comfortable. Such activities include medical services, provision of education, human settlements as well as administration.

 

  1. Economic activities – these are activities carried out by human beings in order to earn a living. These may include crop cultivation, cattle rearing, fishing, transport and lumbering among others.

 

  • Human activities in topographical maps are ways in which human beings have made use of the land represented on a map.

 

Using creative and critical thinking skills to enlarge and reduce parts of topographical maps

Pupil’s activity

 

Page 112

 

Enlarging parts of topographical maps

  • The enlargement of a map extract is an activity in which the size of the map is increased.

 

  • When enlarging a given map extract, you multiply the length and width of the map by the given factor, say by 2.

 

  • A map can also be enlarged by dividing the scale of the original map. When enlarging the map, you divide the denominator of the scale of the original map by the given factor.

 

  • For example, if the scale of the original map is 1: 50,000 and the map is enlarged by 2, then you divide the denominator of the scale by 2 to give you 1:25,000.
  • An enlarged map shows more details than the original map.

 

When enlarging a part of a topographical map:

  • Identify the part that you intend to enlarge,
  • note the eastings and northings within which the area is enclosed,

 

  • measure the length and width of the map using a ruler and write down the measurements in your notebook,

 

  • Convert the measurements you have recorded by multiplying with the enlargement factor, for example, multiply the length and width by 2 and note down the new measurements,

 

  • If the length of the map extract was 4 cm, it then becomes 8 cm. Likewise, if the width of the map extract was 3 cm, it then becomes 6 cm.

 

21

 

 

 

 

Reducing parts of topographical maps

  1. The reduction of a map extract is an activity in which the size of the map is made smaller.

 

  1. When reducing a given map extract, divide the length and width of a map by the given factor, say by 2.

 

  1. A map can also be reduced by multiplying the scale of the original map.

 

  1. Multiply the denominator of the scale of the original map by the given factor.

 

  1. For example, if the scale of the original map is 1:50,000, and the map is reduced by 2, then you multiply the denominator of the scale by 2 to give you 1:100,000.

 

  1. A reduced map shows fewer details than the original map.

 

When reducing a part of a topographical map:

  1. Identify the part that you intend to reduce.
  2. Note the Eastings and Northings within which the area is enclosed.

 

  1. Measure its length and width using a ruler and write down the measurements in your notebook.

 

  1. Convert the measurements you have recorded by dividing with the reduction factor, for example, divide the length and width by 2 and note the new measurements.

 

  1. If the length of the map extract was 12 cm, it then becomes 6 cm. Likewise, if the width of the map extract was 8 cm, it becomes 4 cm.

 

  1. Draw on a graph paper a map with a length of 6 cm and a width of 4 cm.
  2. Insert the features shown in the original map within the new frame in their exact places.

 

  1. Appropriately, indicate the Eastings and Northings enclosing the original map.

 

Illustrating cross section from topographical maps

 

  • A cross section is a diagram drawn from topographical map showing the nature of landscape from one identified point to another

 

  • A cross section across the land from one point to the other

 

Pupil’s activity

Page 118-124

 

The following procedure is used when drawing a cross-section:

  1. Identify the map from where you are to draw the cross-section.

 

  1. Identify the points between which you are to draw the cross-section using the given grid references or letters and mark them on the map.

 

  1. Join the two points using a pencil line.
  2. Pick a blank piece of paper and place it along the line you have drawn.

 

  1. On the blank piece of paper, mark the grid references of the start and end points.

 

  1. Along the edge of the paper, mark the contours, noting where they rise and where they descend.

 

  1. Note the highest and the lowest contour along your section.

 

22

 

 

 

 

  1. Along the same edge, mark the position of the required physical and human features.
  2. Once completed, remove the piece of paper, fold the map and put it aside.

 

  1. Pick a piece of graph paper and on it:

 

  1. indicate the title of the cross-section, for example, “A cross-section of Kabe Area from point C to D”,

 

  1. place your piece of paper on the graph paper and mark the starting and end points using the grid references,

 

  1. indicate the heights on the grid using dots,

 

  1. join up the dots with a curved line,
  2. indicate the required features where they appear on the map.

 

Note: A cross-section should have:

 

  1. a title,
  2. labeled y-axis indicating the unit of height given, for example, “Height in metres”,

 

  • the correct trend indicating the nature of the landscape,
  1. the required physical and human features named along the section,

 

  1. the starting and finishing points indicated using their respective heights at the two ends of the curve.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

23

 

 

 

 

Internal land forming process

 

  • Internal land forming process are process that occur within the earths crust and shape the landforms on its surface.

 

  • These process are caused by forces originating from the earth, such as heat, pressure and the movement of molten rock,

 

  • Internal land forming process include volcanic activity, folding, faulting and uplifting

 

Types and causes of earth movements in the environment

 

  • Earth movements refer to the displacement that cause changes in the Earth’s crust and surface features. These movements are mainly caused by internal forces within the earth and cause the adjustment of crustal rocks.

 

There are two types of earth movements. These are:

 

  1. Horizontal movements – they are also called lateral movements. They are caused by forces that operate horizontally within the earth’s crust. The forces involved in horizontal movements of the earth’s crust are tensional, compressional and shear forces.

 

  1. Vertical movements – these movements are caused by forces that operate vertically, at a right angle to the earth. They result into raising, lowering or breaking of the earth’s crust.

 

Tensional Forces

 

  1. They are stretching or pulling forces. They pull away the crustal rocks in opposite directions.

 

  1. When tensional forces are applied to the earth’s crust, they cause the rock to break, forming lines of weakness called faults.

 

  1. More tensional forces make the land between the fault lines to sink

 

  1. The land that sinks forms the rift vally. The steep sides left after the sinking form an escarpment

 

Compressional forces

  1. These are forces that push against a section of the crust from directly opposite sides.

 

  1. This may result in the breaking of the crustal rocks. While the outer blocks remain stationary, the middle block may be uplifted by vertical forces as shown in the diagrams.

 

  1. This leads to the formation of landforms such as fault mountains.

 

Shear forces

  1. These are forces that push against adjacent blocks of the crust.

 

  1. They lead to sliding of adjacent blocks of the crust against or over each other.
  2. Shearing forces may twist or tear up the crust.

 

Cause of earth movements in the environment

The following are among the causes of earth movements in the environment:

 

  1. Volcanic activity – vents or cracks, called magma, comes out. When the pressure builds up inside the earth, the magma can burst out, causing a volcanic eruption and the movement of crustal rocks.

 

 

 

 

 

24

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Plate tectonics – the earth is made up of giant puzzle pieces called tectonic plates. These plates are always moving, although very slowly. Sometimes, they bump into each other, move apart or slide past each other, causing earth movements.

 

  1. Gravitational force – this causes landslides when rocks, soil, or debris move down a slope due to gravity. Heavy rain or human activities can weaken the stability of the slope, making it easy to slide. Gravity pulls the loose material downhill, causing a landslide.

 

  1. Earthquakes – they happen when there is a sudden release of energy in the Earth’s crust. This energy is built up over time due to the movement and interaction of tectonic plates. When the stress becomes too great, the rocks break and move, causing the ground to shake.

 

  1. Isostatic adjustment – this happens due to erosion when natural forces, like wind and water, wear away the Earth’s surface over time. It can also be caused by human activities, such as deforestation. Erosion can lead to changes in the landscape, including the formation of valleys.

 

 

Theories of continental drift and plate tectonics in the formation of continents The Continental Drift theory

 

  • The Continental Drift theory explains the formation of the continents and their present locations.

 

  • It states that originally, there was one super continent called Pangaea.
  • Pangaea was surrounded by a large water body called Panthalassa.

 

  • Due to convectional currents within the mantle, Pangaea broke into two huge continents, Laurasia in the northern hemisphere and Gondwanaland in the southern hemisphere. They were separated by a sea called Tethys.

 

  • Later, Laurasia broke up to form Europe, North America and Asia.
  • Gondwanaland broke up to form Africa, South America and Australia.
  • The continents then drifted to their current positions.
  • The drifting of the continents continues even today.

 

Plate Tectonics theory

 

  • The Plate Tectonics theory explains the formation of the continents and their current positions.

 

  • It states that the earth’s crust is divided into semi-rigid blocks called tectonic plates.
  • The plates float on the molten magma in the mantle.
  • The plates have distinct boundaries.

 

  • The plates move, relative to each other, either away from each other, towards each other or alongside each other.

 

  • Each plate either carries a continent or an ocean.

 

Differentiating various types of faults in the environment

  • Faulting is the breaking or fracturing of crustal rocks.
  • It occurs within crustal rocks due to earth’s movement

When crustal rocks are under pressure, they break in different ways depending on:

 

25

 

 

 

 

  1. The amount of pressure.
  2. The direction of movement of the force.

 

The breaking of crustal rocks occurs differently depending on the forces affecting the crustal rocks. It occurs due to the following:

  1. When the rocks are subjected to tensional forces pulling crustal rocks in different directions.

 

  1. When the rocks are subjected to shear forces acting horizontally on the rocks.

 

  • When the rocks are subjected to compressional forces pushing towards each other and squeezing the rocks.

 

  1. When crustal rocks are subjected to vertical forces exerting a strain on the rocks which eventually break.

 

Type of fault

  1. Normal fault

 

It is formed when the forces acting on crustal rocks are tensional forces. They pull the crustal rocks in different directions, causing them to break.

 

  1. Reverse fault

 

It is formed when the forces acting on crustal rocks are compressional forces. They push towards each other causing crustal rocks to break. One block of crustal rocks may be pushed over the opposite block.

 

  1. Thrust fault

 

It is formed when the forces acting on crustal rocks are compressional forces. Unlike in reverse faults, they cause the crustal rocks to break at a very low angle. The block on the left-hand side rides over the block on the right-hand side.

 

  1. Vertical fault

 

It is formed when the forces on which the crustal rocks are subjected to are acting vertically within the crustal rocks. They push one block upwards or downwards as the other one remains stationary

 

  1. Shear or transform fault

 

It is formed when the forces acting on the crustal rocks are acting horizontally within the crustal rocks. They push the two blocks of crustal rocks alongside each other.

 

 

Illustrating the formation of selected features due to faulting in the environment The formation of the following features due to faulting in the environment.

 

  1. a) Rift valley

The rift valley was formed in three different ways:

 

  1. By tensional forces where the crustal rocks were subjected to tensional forces. This led to the formation of normal faults. The crustal rocks broke with the middle block sinking to form depression. This depression, bordered by steep slopes, is a rift valley.

 

  1. By compressional forces where the crustal rocks were subjected to compressional forces. The crustal rocks broke forming two reverse faults. The outer blocks were thrust over the middle block. When the overhanging blocks finally broke up, they exposed a valley which is called rift valley as shown

 

 

 

 

26

 

 

 

 

 

  1. By anticlinal arching where flexible crustal rocks were subjected to compressional forces. The crustal rocks bent upwards and eventually broke to form a series of faults. Later, the rocks subsided along the fault lines to form a depression called a rift valley

 

  1. A fault scarp

Is also known as an escarpment. It is formed by both tensional and compressional forces.

 

  1. Tensional forces. – The crustal rocks were subjected to tensional forces. They broke to form a normal fault. When subsidence occurred, one block subsided down to expose a steep slope along the fault. The steep slope is known as a fault scarp, as shown in the diagrams.

 

  • Compressional Forces – When crustal rocks were subjected to compressional forces, a reverse fault was formed. One block thrusted over the other one, hanging on top of it. When the hanging masses of rock were destroyed and collapsed, they exposed a steep slope. This is known as a fault scarp

 

  1. c) Fault steps

 

Are formed when multiple faults were formed by tensional forces. When subsidence of the crustal rocks happened, the blocks sunk to different levels along the faults. This formed a series of faults. These are called fault steps

 

  1. Faulting occurs due to the following forces acting on crustal rocks:

 

  1. Tensional forces
  2. Compressional forces

 

  • Shear forces iv) Vertical forces
  1. Thrust forces

 

  1. Different types of faults are formed when faulting occurs. These are:
  2. Normal faults

 

  1. Reverse faults
  • Thrust faults

 

  1. iv) Anticlinal faults
  2. Shear faults

 

  1. When faulting occurs, the following features are formed in the environment:
  2. A rift valley
  3. Fault scarp

 

  • Fault steps
  1. iv) Depressions which may be occupied by lakes

 

  1. Fault blocks

 

Significance of faulting to human activities

The following are the significance of faulting to human activities:

 

  1. Understanding faulting helps scientists and engineers make buildings and structures that can withstand earthquakes, keeping people safe.

 

 

 

 

27

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Faulting creates unique landscapes and features on the Earth’s surface, such as mountains and valleys. These features attract tourists to the countries where they are located hence earning the country foreign exchange.

 

  1. Some faults provide opportunities for generating clean energy, such as hydroelectric power from rivers along the fault lines.

 

  1. Scientists study faulting to learn more about the Earth’s history and how it changes over time, helping us understand our planet better.

 

Recognising internal land forming processes in shaping the landscape and their influence on human activities

 

  • There are four internal land forming processes. These are faulting, folding, vulcanicity and earthquakes.

 

  • They have their origin in the interior of the earth. When they take place, many features are formed on the surface of the earth. These include mountains, hills, valleys and depressions.

 

  • The mountains formed are tourist attractions which earn revenue to the countries where they are located.

 

  • High rainfall on the windward side of the mountains promotes agriculture and settlement. Lower rainfall on the leeward side of the mountains encourages livestock farming.

 

  • The hills formed are at times a hindrance to transport. Constructing a road in hilly areas is slow and expensive.

 

  • The soils formed when volcanic rocks are deposited on the surface, break down and are rich in minerals, promoting agriculture.

 

  • Rivers flowing from volcanic mountains are big and permanent, providing water for domestic use, fishing, irrigation and generation of hydroelectric power.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

28

 

 

 

 

Multipurpose river projects in Africa

 

Multi purpose river projects Involve the construction of dams, reservoirs canal and hydraulic structures to manage water resources and maximize their utlisation for various socio economic benefits

 

Identifying selected multi purpose river projects on a map of Africa

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

29

 

 

 

 

 

Outlining the conditions that led to the establishment of multi purpose river projects along river tana

 

The following are conditions that led to the establishment of multi-purpose river projects along River Tana.

 

  1. Energy demand – As Kenya’s population and economy grew, so did the demand for energy. River Tana’s water flow and hydroelectric potential made it a main source for generating clean and renewable energy, helping to meet the country’s increasing energy needs.

 

  1. Flood control – seasonal flooding along the River Tana posed risks to infrastructure and human life. Constructing dams and reservoirs as part of the projects aimed to regulate water flow and control flooding.

 

  1. Water availability – River Tana is a major source of water in Kenya, making it an attractive option for development projects. The availability of water along the river provided the foundation for irrigation, thus increasing food security.

 

  1. Water scarcity – downstream areas of River Tana faced water scarcity issues, affecting both communities and agriculture. The establishment of river projects aimed to regulate the river’s flow, ensuring a consistent water supply for domestic use.ning the economic

 

Examining the economic importance of multi purpose river projects in Africa

The following are some economic importance of multi-purpose river projects in Africa:

 

  • Electricity generated at the power stations saves the countries in Africa a lot of foreign exchange. It is an alternative to thermal power produced from imported diesel.

 

  • The lake formed by Aswan High Dam is an important tourist attraction, earning the country’s foreign exchange.

 

  • Electricity from the river projects has enabled countries in Africa to expand the manufacturing industries. This has created employment opportunities which has helped to improve the living standards of people.

 

  • The projects have led to the development of towns in Africa such as Aswan Town in Egypt as the people were attracted there by the availability of water and social amenities. Lake Nasser has therefore promoted urbanisation in the region, creating settlements for the people.

 

  • Irrigation of arid land in Egypt has led to the production of large amounts of crops like cotton, maize, millet, rice, dates and beans which are exported to other countries and also ensure food security.

 

Assessing challenges facing multi-purpose river projects in Africa The following are challenges facing multi-purpose river projects in Africa.

 

  1. Pollution – multi-purpose river projects often suffer from pollution due to industrial waste, agricultural runoff and improper disposal of garbage and sewage. This pollution can harm aquatic life and degrade water.

 

  1. Resettlement and displacement – constructing dams and reservoirs may require moving people from their homes, which can be disruptive and challenging to the affected communities.

 

30

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Water management – balancing the needs of various users such as agriculture, industry and communities can be difficult, especially in regions with limited water resources.

 

  1. Climate change – changing weather patterns and water availability due to climate change can affect the reliability and sustainability of multi-purpose river projects.

 

 

Designing solutions to challenges facing multi purpose river projects in Africa

 

The following are the possible solutions to challenges facing multi-purpose river projects in Africa.

 

  1. Regulating the amount of water used depending on crop needs and climate to address water scarcity.

 

  1. Planting trees can address deforestation in water catchment areas or river sources which will also help to reduce soil erosion.

 

  1. Use of organic fertilisers that will raise yields without destroying the soils in areas that initially depended on silt from the river to supply required nutrients.

 

  1. Governments and project developers conducting comprehensive resettlement planning to address the issue of displacement of people.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

31

 

 

Management and Conservation of the Environment

 

  • The management and conservation of the environment involves efforts and strategies aimed at protecting, preserving and sustainably utilising natural resources and ecosystems.

 

  • It consists of a wide range of actions and practices that address environmental issues such as reducing waste generation and promoting the efficient use of resources.

 

Distinguishing between management and conservation of the environment Management of the environment is the control of human effects on the environment. It involves the following:

 

  1. Coming up with policies on the environment.
  2. Planning the activities to be carried out.

 

  • Implementing the policies.
  1. Evaluating to see whether the policies are working.

 

  1. Reviewing the policies to make them effective.

 

Conservation of the environment is the practice of preserving and protecting the natural environment and its resources from destruction for use by the present and future generations.

 

The differences between management of the environment and conservation of the environment.

Management of the environment Conservation of the environment
a) It involves planning and implementing a a) It involves the protection or preservation of
plan to ensure effective and proper utilization available resources for the future.
of available resources in the environment.  
b) It focuses on short to medium-term goals, b) It focuses on long-term goals to protect
often driven by economic considerations and natural resources and biodiversity for future
immediate needs. generations.
   

 

FACTORS that lead to degradation of the environment in the community Degradation of the environment is the destruction decline or negative modification of the natural environment and its components due to various human activities and natural process

  • The following are factors that can lead to degradation of the environment.

 

  1. Pollution – various forms of pollution such as air pollution, water pollution and soil pollution can have negative effects on the environment.

 

  1. Deforestation – clearing of forests for agriculture, urbanisation, logging and fuelwood collection contributes to deforestation. This destroys habitats and disrupts ecosystems leading to soil erosion, climate change and loss of natural resources.

 

  1. Industrial activities – industries that engage in the production of goods and services can have negative effects on the environment such as over exploitation of raw materials.

 

 

 

 

32

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Agricultural practices – excessive use of pesticides, fertilisers and monocropping can lead to soil degradation and water pollution.

 

The effects of environmental degradation in the community

The following are among effects of environmental degradation in the community.

 

  1. Health risks – degraded environments can lead to significant health risks to the community. Air pollution, water pollution and contaminated soil can lead to respiratory problems and other illnesses.

 

  1. Water scarcity – degradation of water bodies such as rivers, lakes and groundwater can lead to water scarcity in the community.

 

  1. Soil erosion – unsustainable land practices such as deforestation and improper agricultural techniques contribute to soil erosion. This leads to the loss of fertile land and reduced agricultural productivity in the community.

 

  1. Climate change impacts – greenhouse gas emissions and deforestation contributes to climate change. Climate change, in turn, leads to more frequent and extreme weather events, such as floods.

 

 

Designing measures to manage and conserve the environment for sustainability

  1. Plant trees to protect the soils from erosion and reduce global warming

 

  1. Avoid careless disposal of waste
  2. Use terraces while farming on steep slopes.

 

  1. Walk over short distances, cycle or use electric cars to reduce the use of vehicles as their fumes contaminate the air.

 

  1. Re-cycle materials like paper to reduce the cutting down of trees.
  2. Sensitise the people on the need to manage and conserve the environment.

 

Importance of managing and conserving the environment.

The following are some of the importance of managing and conserving the environment.

 

  1. Preservation of biodiversity- the environment is home to countless species of plants, animals, and microorganisms.

 

  1. Climate regulation- forests, oceans, and other natural environments absorb and store carbon (IV) oxide, a greenhouse gas responsible for climate change. By protecting and restoring these ecosystems, we can reduce the effects of climate change.

 

  1. Human health and well-being- by managing and conserving the environment, we can reduce exposure to harmful pollutants as well as improve access to clean water and sanitation.

 

  1. Economic benefits- many industries rely on natural resources and ecosystem services for their operations, including agriculture, fishing, forestry, and tourism. By conserving the environment, long-term sustainability of these industries is ensured such as job creation and economic stability.

 

 

 

 

33

 

 

 

 

World heritage sites in Africa

  • World heritage sites are globally recognized places of outstanding value.

 

  • They are considered to be treasure of humanity and are preserved for future generations to appreciate and learn from.

 

  • They can include

 

  1. Archaeological sites

 

  1. Historic monuments
  2. Natural parks

 

  1. Unique land formations

 

Locating the selected world heritage sites in Africa

 

  1. A world heritage site is a unique place in the world that is considered extremely important and valuable. It can be a beautiful natural area, like a forest, a coral reef, a nature reserve, a national park or a man-made structure, like an ancient temple or a historic city.

 

  1. World heritage sites are chosen because they have something unique or amazing about them, like their history, culture or how they look.

 

WORLD HERITAGE SITE WHERE IT IS LOCATED
Rock hewn churches Etthiopia
Robben island South Africa
Seregenti national park Tanzania
Victoria falls Zambia
Valle de mai nature reserves Seychelles
Pyramids of Giza Egypt
   

 

Importance of the selected world heritage sites in promoting cultural heritage

 

The following are the importance of the selected world heritage sites in promoting cultural heritage.

 

  1. They serve as reminders of our past, allowing us to maintain a connection with our ancestors and our traditions.

 

  1. They offer an understanding of different cultures, traditions and historical periods.

 

  1. They attract tourists hence promoting economic development of the local communities.

 

  1. They provide a tangible link between generations. They enable the transmission of cultural knowledge, traditions and values from older to younger generations.

 

Measures to conserve the selected world heritage sites

 

  1. Raise awareness about the importance of world heritage sites and their conservation among local communities, schools and visitors.

 

  1. Promote sustainable tourism practices such as encouraging responsible tourist behaviour.

 

 

34

 

 

 

 

  1. Engage local communities in the conservation efforts of world heritage sites.

 

  1. Support initiatives that focus on the preservation and restoration of world heritage sites.

 

  1. Encourage public engagement through events and cultural activities that promote the appreciation and conservation of world heritage sites.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

35

 

 

 

 

 

POLITICAL DEVELOPMENTS AND GOVERNANCE The Constitution of Kenya

 

A constitution is a set of agreed principles and rules which state the structure and powers of government and relationship between the rulers and the ruled.

 

Identifying stages in the constitution making process in Kenya The stages of the constitution-making process in Kenya

  1. Debating over controversial issues.

 

  1. Collection of public views.
  2. Civic education.

 

  1. Convening of constitutional conferences.
  2. Drafting of the constitution.

 

  1. Enacting or passing of the constitution.

 

  1. Promulgation of the constitution.

 

The following are the stages in the constitution-making process in Kenya:

 

  • Debate over controversial issues. Issues like the establishment of section 2A in the independence constitution in 1991 raised concerns among involved parties and groups. The issue of whether to include the position of Prime Minister or not has also been debated for many years.

 

  • Collection of public views. Public views are collected by the Constitution of Kenya Review Commission (CKRC).

 

  • Civic education. The public is sensitized and educated on the Bill.

 

  • Convening of constitutional conferences. For example, the 2002 National Constitution Conference at Bomas of Kenya came up with the Bomas Draft.

 

  • Drafting of the constitution. This involves both local and international experts who draft the constitution which was the case between 2000 and 2010.

 

  • The referendum. The draft constitution is subjected to a referendum where people give their views on a specific question presented to them through voting.

 

  • Enacting or passing of the constitution. The National Assembly passes the Bill.

 

  • Promulgation of the constitution. The constitution is adopted and made effective.

 

Examining the role of parliament in constitution making process

The following are some of the roles of the parliament in the constitution-making process in

 

Kenya:

  1. Debates the content of the constitution.

 

  1. Passes the laws setting up the process of constitution-making.

 

  1. Appoints members of the constitution-making commission.

 

36

 

 

 

 

  1. Approves the necessary funds for the constitution-making process.
  2. Supports the implementation of the constitution through legislation.

 

Exploring the role of citizens in constitution-making process

The following are among the roles of citizens in the constitution making process in Kenya

 

  1. Providing their opinions, suggestions and feedback during public constultation in the constitution making process

 

  1. Educating themselves about the constitution-making process, the content of the proposed constitution and its potential effects.

 

  1. Exercising their right to vote during a referendum which directly influences the outcome of the referendum and the fate of the proposed constitution.

 

  1. After the adoption of a new constitution, citizens have an ongoing role in monitoring its implementation and holding elected officials accountable.

 

Participating in the constitution making process as a responsible citizen Pupil’s activity

 

Page 184-186

 

 

Defending and promoting the constitution of Kenya

The following are ways to defend and promote the constitution of Kenya

  1. Participating in the election

 

  1. Reporting corruption
  2. Promoting gender equality

 

  1. Engaging in activities that protect and preserve the environment

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

37

 

 

 

 

Civic engagement in governance

 

  • Civic engagement is the active participation of citizens in their communities, societies and the democratic process.

 

  • It involves individuals and groups taking an active role in addressing public issues, promoting social change and contributing to the well being of their communities

 

Identifying individual and collective civic engagement activities in Kenya

 

  • Civic engagement refers to the active involvement and participation of individuals in their communities and societies as a whole. It involves participating in activities and actions that contribute to the betterment of society.

 

  • Civic engagement activities include volunteering in community service activities, participating in voting and attending public meetings and being informed about and discussing public affairs.

 

Individual and collective civic engagement activities in Kenya

 

  • Volunteering to local organisations or community projects such as cleaning and mentorship activities in the community.
  • Joining support campaigns focused on social, environmental or human rights issues.

 

  • Promoting awareness of rights, responsibilities and civic processes among community members.

 

  • Engaging in activities that promote environmental sustainability such as tree planting, waste management or energy conservation initiatives.

 

Exploring the basic constitutional requirements for political parties

The following are the basic constitutional requirements for political parties as stipulated in

Article 91 of the Constitution of Kenya. They should:

  • Have a national outlook,

 

  • Have a democratically elected governing body,

 

  • Promote and uphold national unity,

 

  • respect the right of all people to participate in the political process,

 

  • Abide by the democratic principles of good governance, promote and practice democracy through regular, fair and free elections within the party,

 

  • respect and promote human rights and fundamental freedoms, gender equality and equity,

 

  • Promote the objectives and principles of the constitution.

 

Illustrating the role of political parties in democratic governance

The following are the roles of political parties in democratic governance:

  1. They formulate policies and programmes on how to run the government.

 

  1. They mobilize people to participate in important public affairs.
  2. They link the government and the people.

 

  1. They act as a training ground for political leadership.
  2. Opposition parties take part in decision-making.

 

Outlining positions vied for in a general election in Kenya

  1. President

 

  1. MCA – member of county assembly

 

38

 

 

 

 

  1. MP – member of national assembly
  2. Senator

 

  1. Governor
  2. Women representative

 

Exhibiting values that promote ethical civic engagement in the community

The following are among values that promote ethical civic engagement in the community:

 

  1. Social justice – this promotes fairness, equality and inclusivity within the community. By upholding social justice, individuals and communities strive to address systemic inequalities and work towards creating a more equitable society.

 

  1. Integrity – this value emphasizes honesty and transparency. Ethical civic engagement requires making ethical choices, taking responsibility for one’s actions and upholding the highest standards of honesty and integrity.

 

  1. Peace – this promotes non-violence, cooperation and harmony within the community. Ethical civic engagement involves actively seeking peaceful resolutions to conflicts, promoting understanding and empathy

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

39

 

 

 

 

Kenya’s bill of rights

 

The Bill of Rights in the Constitution of Kenya acknowledges and protects the fundamental rights and freedoms of every individual in the country.

 

Exploring Kenya’s Bill of Rights for mutual well-being

 

  • The Bill of Rights is a document that spells out the rights of the people in a country in relation to their government.

 

  • It recognises and protects human rights and fundamental freedoms in order to preserve

 

the dignity of individuals and communities.

 

The Bill of Rights in Kenya is found in Chapter Four of the Constitution, specifically Articles 19 to 59.

 

  1. Right to life, dignity and protection from torture and cruel, inhuman, or degrading treatment.

 

  1. Protection of privacy, including the right not to have one’s home or personal property searched or invaded without a just cause.

 

  1. Equality and freedom from discrimination on various grounds, such as race, gender, religion, ethnicity and disability.

 

  1. Economic and social rights, including the right to education, healthcare, housing and social security.

 

  1. Rights of children, including protection from child labour, exploitation and abuse.

 

  1. Rights of marginalised groups, including indigenous communities, persons with disabilities and the elderly.

 

Examining human rights of special groups for promotion of social justice and inclusivity

 

  • Special groups in society can refer to various disadvantaged or populations at risk who may face specific challenges or require targeted support.

 

  • Examples of special groups in society include refugees, the elderly, migrants, persons

 

with disabilities and ethnic and racial minorities among others.

Human rights of elderly

 

  1. Right to fully participate in community affairs
  2. Right to pursue their personal development

 

  1. Right to receive reasonable care and assistance from family and state

 

Human rights of refugees

  1. Freedom of movement

 

  1. Right access medical care

 

Human right of migrants

  1. Right to equality before the law.

 

  1. Freedom from discrimination
  2. Right to protection from torture

 

40

 

 

 

 

Application of the Bill of rights for harmonious living

The following are some ways of applying the bill of rights for harmonious living.

 

  1. Encouraging people to express them selves freely while they respect the rights of others.
  2. Ensuring all individuals are equal before the law and forbid discrimination.

 

  1. Protecting the freedom of assembly and association

 

  1. Ensuring equal access to quality education for all individuals, promoting knowledge, understanding and the development of critical thinking

 

Cultivating empathy and solidarity with special groups in society for mutual social responsibility

 

  • Empathy is the ability to emotionally understand what other people feel, see things from their point of view and imagine yourself in their place.

 

  • Solidarity is an awareness of shared interests, objectives, standards and sympathies creating a psychological sense of unity of groups or classes

 

  • The following are some of the ways of cultivating empathy and solidarity with special groups in society for mutual social responsibility

 

  1. Encouraging individuals and community organization to actively engage in volunteer work and community service that directly benefits special groups.

 

  1. Increasing public awareness and understanding of challenges faced by special groups through educational campaigns, workshops and community events.

 

  1. Organizing cultural exchange programmes that facilitate dialogue and understanding between different groups in society.

 

  1. Support organizations and initiatives that champion the rights and well being of special groups.

 

Embracing respect for human rights in society

Pupil’s activity

Page 206-207

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

41

 

 

 

 

Cultural Globalisation

 

  • Cultural globalization is the interconnectedness and exchange of cultural ideas, values, practices and products on a global level.

 

  • Cultural globalization is influenced by factors such as the development of communication and transportation technologies, the spread of media and entertainment and migration

 

Identifying cultural elements and practices that have acquired a global recognition status.

 

  • Cultural globalization refers to the process of cultural exchange and interconnectedness that occurs on a global level.

 

  • It involves the spread and diffusion of cultural practices, ideas, values and products across different countries and regions.

 

Examining African cultural practices in promoting a common humanity

 

  1. African socialism is a socio-political system that promotes social justice, collective ownership and equal distribution of resources in African societies. It emphasizes the welfare of the community over individual gain, striving to address poverty, inequality and underdevelopment.

 

  1. Ujamaa is a socio-economic policy that emphasizes collective work, cooperation and shared responsibility within a community. It promotes the idea of equal distribution of resources. It also promotes a sense of unity and interdependence among community members. Ujamaa seeks to uplift disadvantaged individuals in the society and create a society where everyone contributes to and benefits from the collective efforts.

 

  1. The term Ubuntu originates from several Bantu languages spoken in Southern Africa and is often translated as, “humanity towards others” or “I am because we are”.

 

  1. Ubuntu consists of a set of values and principles that promote compassion, empathy, respect and communal harmony.

 

The following are among the elements of African socialism, Ujamaa, and Ubuntu that promote a common humanity:

 

  1. Social justice. This promotes a sense of common humanity by recognising the fundamental worth and dignity of every person.

 

  1. Compassion and empathy. It contributes to building harmonious relationships and promoting the well-being of all community members.

 

  1. Communal ownership and cooperation. This cooperative mindset promotes common humanity by emphasising the idea that everyone’s well-being is interconnected.

 

  1. Equal distribution of resources. T

 

Exploring ways of preserving cultural elements that promote responsible global citizenship The following are some of the actions to be taken to preserve cultural elements which promote responsible global citizenship.

 

  1. Cultural awareness and education. Educating people on their cultural heritage as well as different cultures around the world.

 

 

 

42

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Volunteering and community engagement. Getting involved in community activities that promote cultural preservation and responsible global citizenship. For example, cleaning and maintaining cultural heritage sites.

 

  1. Environmental stewardship. Promoting sustainable practices that respect and protect cultural sites, natural landscapes and ecosystems that are key to cultural traditions and practices.

 

  1. Language preservation. Making efforts to learn, use and teach your native language. Preserve and promote linguistic diversity by supporting language exchange programmes and initiatives that document endangered languages.

 

 

Factors that promote healthy cultural relationship and global interconnectedness

 

Reasons for interconnectedness.

  • Better medical
  • Peacekeeping
  • Sports reasons.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

43

 

 

 

ENGLISH FORM 4 EXAMS PP1 WITH ANSWERS

NAME……………………………………….. INDEX NO…………………………………

Candidate’s signature………………..

Date: ………………………………

101/1

ENGLISH

PAPER I

(Functional Skills)

Time: 2 Hours

GATUNDU SOUTH FORM 4 EVALUATION EXAMINATION

Instructions to candidates:

  • Write your name and index number in the spaces provided above.
  • Sign and write the date of examination in the spaces provided above.
  • Answer all the questions in this question paper.
  • All your answers must be written in the spaces provided in this question paper.

FOR EXAMINER’S USE ONLY.

 

QUESTION

MAXIMUM SCORE CANDIDATE’S MARKS
1 20  
2 10  
3 30  
  TOTAL SCORE  

QUESTION 1 20MKS

The school football and volleyball teams have qualified for the Regional ball games competition. The teams are due to go to Nyeri for  the Competition. Write an internal memo to the participants asking them to attend a meeting for the practice programme and the trip. Emphasize that the practice is mandatory. Ensure that the memo is copied to the principal and head of games department. Remember to quote the reference number.

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Question 2

CLOZE TEST 10MKS

Eat healthy to care for your Kidneys. The Kidney (1)___________one of the most vital organs of our bodies that (2)___________ impaired each can affect a person’s quality of life,  (3)__________when no treatment or nutrition intervention is sought.

The (4)____________is involved in many functions which include removal of (5)____________waste products from the blood and (6)_________ the amount of fluid in the body. Human beings have two kidneys but can survive with (7)______________kidney that is healthy as it is capable of functioning optimally and can rid the body of all )8)________________waste products from the body.

Having a (9)__________________lifestyle and eating well reduce the chance of compromising your kidneys as many kidney conditions are caused by our unhealthy (10)_____________or eating habits.

Question 3(A)

ORAL SKILLS (30MKS)

Read the poem below and answer the questions that follow.

Lambs that learn to walk in snow

When bleating clouds the air

Meet a vast unwelcome, know

Nothing but a sunless glare

 

Newly stumbling to and fro

All they find outside the fold

Is a wretched width of cold

As they wait beside the ewe

Her fleeces wetly caked, there lies

 

Hidden around them, waiting too,

Earth’s immeasurable surprise.

They could not grasp it if they knew

What so soon will wave and grow

Utterly unlike snow

 

  • Describe the rhyme scheme of the poem and comment on the effect (2mks)

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

  • How else has the poet achieved rhythm in this poem? Illustrate your answer. (2mks)

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

  • How would you say the last line and why? (2mks)

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

  • Which words would you stress in line 13 and why? (2mks)

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

  • Give any two non-verbal cues you would employ in performing this poem. (2mks)

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

  1. (B) Underline the silent letter (3mks)
  • Rendezvous

 

  • Isle

 

  • Dumb

 

  1. Provide a homophone for each word (3mks)

 

  • Quay _________________________

 

  • Bail ___________________________

 

  • Ate ___________________________

 

 

  1. C) For each of the words below, write two sentences to bring out the meaning of the word as a noun and as a verb (6mks)
  1. Record
  1. Noun

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

  1. Verb

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

  1. Subject
  1. Noun

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

  1. Verb

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

  1. Conduct
  1. Noun

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

  1. Verb

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

 

Question 3D: 8mks

Read the conversation below between a student and a teacher and then answer the questions that follow.

STUDENT: (Knocking the door loudly and getting in) I am told you called me

TEACHER: (Motioning him to a seat). Please have a seat Rono and don’t be anxious.

STUDENT: (Still standing). Don’t tell me you have sum…..

TEACHER: (Interrupting) Please relax. It is not an indiscipline issue again. No cause for alarm.

STUDENT: So then, why do you want to see me?

TEACHER: Calm down Rono. On the contrary, it is a positive note.

STUDENT: (Looking a bit controlled and sliding into a seat). Sorry sir, May I know what it is all about.

TEACHER: (Smiling broadly) That’s better. I called you to discuss your good progress in academics lately.

STUDENT:  (With a lightened up face and more reassured) Yes sir.

TEACHER: Looking at your trend of performance especially in languages and mathematics, I am very impressed. (pointing at the Maths and English columns). See, from D+ to B in Maths and D to C+ in English is commendable!

STUDENT: (Rubbing his hands and slightly smiling) Thanks sir. I am grateful for your kind guidance.

TEACHER: (In an affirmative note) Yes. This is the result of change of attitude, obedience and determination.

STUDENT: (sighs) Thank you once more for your concern. I will be able to face my dad courageously now.

TEACHER: Yes, that’s how it should be. Always work to impress your parents. Never look back again. Forward ever.

STUDENT: Thanks Sir. I promise never to let you and my parents down ever again.

TEACHER: Good. You can now go back to class.

STUDENT: (Stands up and shakes hands with the teacher). Thanks once more and good day sir.

Questions

  1. How does the teacher establish good rapport with the student.( 2mks)

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

  1. What good conversational skills are displayed by:
  2. The teacher (2mks)

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

  1. The student (2mks)

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

  • Identify any two shortcomings in the student’s speech (2mks)

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________




ENGLISH PAPER 1 – MARKING SCHEME

Question 1

  • Name of institution (1mk)
  • Term internal memo (1mk)
  • From (1mk)
  • To (1mk)
  • Ref number ( ½ mk)
  • Date ( ½ mk)
  • Subject (1mk)
  • c                                                        (1mk)  (Principal)

C.C                                                         (1MK) (H.O.D Games)

Content

  • Body Date      ½ mk

Venue  ( ½  mk)

Time    ( ½ mk)

-Confirmation that         ( ½ mk)

They have qualified

Request for            (1mk)

Meeting

-Practice              (1mk)

Language (8mks)

  • (7-8) Very good
  • (5-7) Good
  • (3-4) Fair
  • (1-2) Weak

 

 

QUESTION 2

  1. is
  2. if
  3. especially
  4. kidney
  5. toxic
  6. regulating
  7. one
  8. these
  9. healthy
  10. lifestyles

QUESTION 3

A

  1. i) ababcddefgfeaa (7mks)

– Regular rhyme. ( ½ mks)

 

Effect

  • Makes it musical and memorable. (1mk)

 

  1. ii) Alliteration: will wake

Assonance lambs that

Stating  (1mk)   Illustration (1mk)

 

iii) With a falling intonation because it is a statement. (2mks)

 

  1. iv) Wave and grow

Reason: content words

Identification                     (1mk)

Illustration                          (1mk)

 

  1. v) Non verbal cues
  • Appropriate facial expression ½ mk   line 4 and 11  ½ mk
  • Appropriate gestures ½ mk  line 7, 12 and 13   ½ mk
  • Proper dramatization ½ mk line 1, 5, 8 ½ mk

Any 2 points 1mk each = 2mks.

 

3(B)

  1. 1)   rendezvous

2)  isle

3)  dumb

 

  1. ii) Homophone

1.quay      –              Key

  1. Bail – Bale
  2. ate – eight

 

  1. c)

a)Record (open answers)

Noun-kiprono holds 3000m. athletics record.

Verb – she forgot to record the marks.

b)Subject

Noun – Maths is my favourite subject.

Verb- Do not subject the children to any kind of suffering.

  1. c) conduct

Noun – Kamau is of good conduct.

Verb – All students are expected to conduct themselves responsibly.

 

  1. D
  2. i) –Asking him to relax

–  Motioning him to a seat

– Addressing him by name.

– Smiling at the student

(any 2 points  2 marks)

 

  1. ii) (a) The teacher

– Interrupting him politely (please relax)

– Being polite e.g Calm down.

– Allows turn taking

– Use of appropriate intonation

– Being appreciative (commendable)

Any 2 points 2 marks

 

iii) Student

– appreciative (says thank you).

– uses tone appropriately (raises when agitated, lowers when information is positive)

– Allows turn taking

– composed/controlled later)

(Any 2 points 2 marks)

 

  1. iv) He is impatient e.g so then why……….

– He is rude e.g Don’t tell me……..

– Indisciplined – knocks the door loudly. Says I’am told you called me.

– Suspicious/anxious e.g. don’t tell me ………….

Any 2 points 2 marks

Form 1 Maths Exams and Marking Schemes Free

Form 1 Maths Exams and Marking Schemes Free

NAME: …………………………………….…………ADM NO: …………    CLASS: …….

SCHOOL………………………………………………………………………………

JOINT EXAMINATION

TERM THREE,

FORM ONE

MATHEMATICS

Time: 2 hours 30 MINUTES

Instructions to students

  1. Write your NAME, ADMISSION NUMBER and CLASS in the spaces provided above.
  2. This paper consists of TWO SECTIONS: SECTION I and SECTION II.
  3. Answer ALL the questions in SECTION I and ONLY FIVE questions from SECTION II.
  4. All answers and working must be written on the question paper in the spaces provided below each question.
  5. Show all the steps in your calculations, giving your answers at each stage in the spaces below each question.
  6. Marks may be given for correct working even if the answer is wrong.
  7. Non-programmable silent electronic calculators and KNEC Mathematical tables may be used except where stated otherwise.

 

For Examiner’s use only

Section I (50mks)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Total
                                 

 

Section II (50mks)

 

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Total
                 
 

Grand Total

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Evaluate: (3mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Write down the following number in words .             (1mk)
    35,000,900,010

 

 

 

  1. The GCD oftwo numbers is 7 and their LCM 140. If one of the numbers is 20, find the other number.                                                                                                                   (3mks)

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Simplify the expression             (3mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) Solve for X in the equation below (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. use a number line to work out the following
  2.             (2mks)

 

 

 

 

  1.             (2mks)

 

 

  1. The length of an arc of a circle is 88cm. Find the radius of the circle if the arc substends an angle of 144  at the centre  (take   =  )                                                                    (3mks)

 

 

 

 

  1. Ten men working six hours a day take 12 days to complete a job. How long willit take eight men working 12 hours a day to complete the same job?                         (3mks)

 

 

  1. A shopkeeper made a loss of 20% by selling a trouser at sh 960. What percentage profit would he have made if he sold it at sh 1500.                                                                          (3mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. If a:b=2:3 and b:c 5:9, find the ratio a:c             (2mks)

 

 

 

  1. Express recurring decimal as a fraction.             (3mks)

 

 

 

 

  1. Three bells ring at interval ring of 40minutes 45 minutes and 60 minutes. If they ring simultaneously at 6.30am, at what time will they ring next together?.                        (3mks)

 

 

 

 

  1. The size of an interior angle of a regular polygon is while its exterior angle is

Find the value of .                                                                                                    (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) The sum of interior angles of a regular polygon is 1440 .Find the number of sides of the polygon hence name the polygon. (3mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. In the figure below, lines AB and LM are parallel. Find the values  of the angle marked a, b and c.                                                                                                                  (3mks)

 

 

  1. Simplify             (3mks)

 

 

 

 

  1. a) A school water tank has a radius of 2.1 m and a height of 4.5m. how many litres of water does it carry when full.                                                                                            (3mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) If the school uses 5000 litres of water a day approximately, how many days will the filled tank last. (3mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. A wooden block measuring 20cm by 30cm by 50cm , has a mass 60kg. Find the density of this wood in g/cm3.                                                                                                           (3mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

SECTION B

Answer any five questions only. (50marks)

  1. A floor of a room is in the shapeof arectangle 3000cm long by 300cm wide.Square tiles of length 30cm are to be fitted onto the floor
  2. Calculate the number of tiles needed for the floor.       (4mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. A dealer wishes to buy enough tiles for fifteen such rooms .the tiles are packed in cartons .Each carton containing 20 tiles. The cost of each carton is ksh 800.  Calculate;
  2. The cost of the tiles  for the fifteen such rooms.                                          (5mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. If in addition the dealer spends kshs 2,600 on transport. Calculate the total cost (1mk)

 

  1. Three towns X,Y, and Z are such that Y is 500km on a bearing of 315 from X. Z is on a bearing of 230 from X.  given that the direction between Y and Z is 800km.
  2. Using a scale of 1cm represent 100km, draw a scale diagram to show the position of the towns.                   (6mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Find the bearing of ;
  2. X from Z.       (1mk)

 

 

  1. Z from Y       (1mk)

 

 

  1. Use the scale drawing to find the distance from X to Z.       (2mks)

 

 

 

  1. (a) Solve the following simultaneous equation suing elimination method. (3mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

(b) Given that  solve the following equation.                              (3mks)

 

 

 

(c) Complete this table below and use it to  draw the graph .  given that  (5mks)

X -2   1  
Y   1   5

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Measurements of a maize field using a base line XY were recorded as shown below. (measurements are in metres)

Y

To N 160   240

200    80 to R

To M 80   120

X

  1. Using a scale of 1cm rep 40m to draw the map of the maize field.(5mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Find the area of the field in hectares.             (5mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. (a) Using a ruler and a pair of compass only. Construct a triangle ABC in which angle BAC=90 , AC =4cm and BC=5cm and draw a circle to pass through points A,B,C.                                                                                                                                     (5mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(b) Find the area of the triangle ABC.                                                                       (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

(c) Measure the radius of the circle passing through points A,B and C and use it to find its area.                                                                                                                (3mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. A) A football match lasts 90 minutes with a break of 15 minutes at half-time. If a referee allows five minutes extra for injuries and stoppage, what time did the match kick off if it ends at 4.30 pm.                                                                                                 (3mks)

 

 

 

 

(b) A services vehicle which left Mombasa for Nairobi at 1800hrs has a puncture after travelling for 4 hrs 20 minutes fixing a new tyre took 30 minutes .The vehicle then travelled for another1 hour 20 minutes to reach Nairobi. At what time did it arrive?(4mks)

 

 

 

 

(c) The table below is a matatu timetable for journeys between towns A and D via towns B and C.

time arrival departure
A

B

C

D

 

1045h

1230h

1400h

0930h

1055h

1245h

Use the table to answer the following questions

  1. What time does the matatu depart from B?.      (1mk)

 

 

 

  1. How long does it take the matatu to travel from towns A to town D?      (2mks)

 

 

 

  1. During a certain month the exchange rates in a bank were as follows;
  Buying (Ksh Selling (Ksh)
1 US dollars 91.65 91.80
1 Euro 103.75 103.93

A tourist left Kenya to the United State with Ksh 1,000,000. On the airport he exchanged all the money to US dollars and spent 190 dollars on air ticket.  While in US he spend4500 dollars for upkeep and proceeded to Europe while in Europe he spent a total of 2000 Euros.

  1. How many US dollars he had before spending on air ticket.       (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Calculate amount of money he had before proceeding to Europe in Kenya shillings to the nearest shillings.       (4mks)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. How many money in Euro’s did he remain at the end of the journey. (4mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Munyua spent ¼ of his net January salary on school fees. He spent ¼ of the remainder of electricity and water bills. He spent  of what remained on transport.  If he finally has sh 3400, calculate ;
  2. His net January salary.       (5mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Money spent on school fees.       (1mk)

 

 

 

  1. Money spent on transport .       (2mks)

 

 

 

  1. Money spent on electricity and water bills.       (2mks)

HISTORY MADE EASY (TIPS FOR PASSING KCSE EXAMS)

  1. INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES

Both paper 1%2 consists of three sections: A,B and C

Candidates are expected to answer ALL Questions in Section A in Both paper 1&2. However, in section B and C we expect candidates to answer at least three and two questions respectively.  All instructions given to candidates must be read in both paper 1&2.

  1. TIME

A History and Government candidate must strictly adhere to the set time guideline of 2 Hours and 30 Minutes as required in both paper 1&2. Failure to observe time may disorient a candidate in the last minutes to collection of scripts. It is therefore recommended that the below time guide be used by candidates to avoid last minute rush in answering questions.

 

Item Writing of Identities and Prayer Section A Section B Section C Total time
Time 5 minutes 45minutes 60 minutes 40 minutes 2:30 Min.

 

  1. COURSE OUTLINE FOR HISTORY AND GOVERNMENT

This chapter embodies a clear picture of both paper one and two from Form 1-4 with the intent of enlightening candidates on specific topics of coverage per paper. In respect to this, there are topics that do appear in both papers. Below is a table of course outline for both paper one and two.

311/1

PAPER ONE

311/2

PAPER TWO

1.Introduction to History and Govt

2.The Peoples of Kenya up to 19th Century

3.Social, Economic and Political Organization of Kenyan Communities

4.Contacts between East Africa and the outside world

5.Citizenship

6.National Integration

7.Constitutions and Constitution Making

8.Democracy and Human Rights

9.Establishment of Colonial Rule in Kenya

10.Social and Economic Developments in Kenya during colonial period

11.Political developments and the struggle for Independence in Kenya

12.Lives and Contributions of Kenyan Leaders

13.Formation, structure and functions of the Govt of Kenya

14.Social, Economic and Political Developments and challenges in Kenya since Independence

15.National Philosophies

16.Devolved Government

17.Public Revenue and expenditure

 

1.Introduction to History and Govt

2.The Early Man

3.Development of Agriculture

4.Trade

5.Transport

6.Communication

7.Development of Industry

8.Urbanisation

9.Social, Political and Economic organization of African Societies

10.Constitutions and constitution making-sources of British Constitution

11.Democracy and Human Rights

12.European invasion and the process of colonization of Africa

13.Colonial Administration

14.Rise of African Nationalism

15. World Wars 1&2

16.International Relations

17.Cooperation in Africa

18. Social, Economic and Political Developments and challenges in Africa since Independence.

19. The Electoral process, functions of governments in other parts of the World.

-Britain

-USA

-India

 

  1. ANALYSIS OF PAPER 311/1-2017

Section A (25 Marks)

In this section, ALL paper one topics are set sequentially from  Form 1-4. Candidates must have a sound knowledge of the entire paper one areas of the syllabus. All questions are structured and thus require distinctive answers.

Section B (45 Marks)

Read the following topics in preparation for this year’s Examinations.

  • The Peoples of Kenya up to 19th Century
  • Social, Economic and Political Organization of Kenyan Communities.
  • Contacts between East Africa and the outside World.—Portuguese

—Christian Missionaries

  • Social and economic developments in Kenya during colonial period—Settler Farming

—Land Policies

  • Political developments and the struggle for Independence in Kenya

—independent schools and churches

—early political associations

—role of women

Section C (30 Marks)

  • National Philosophies
  • Formation,structure and functions of the govt of Kenya:

a)Judiciary—superior courts in Kenya

—Functions of the Chief Justice KCSE 2015

—ways through which Independence of Judiciary is guaranteed KCSE 2012

—composition of Judicial Service Commission KCSE 2012

—Problems facing Judiciary  KCSE 2015

b)Executive—Powers and privileges of President

—qualifications of election as President KCSE 2014

—Functions of IEBC KCSE 2013

—-Categories of KDF  KCSE 2012 & KCSE 2016

—Challenges facing KDF

—Reasons for voting in Kenya –KCSE 2016

—Why General elections are important    kcse 2011

  1. c) Legislature—principle of separation of powers btw the three arms of govt—legislature,judiciary and executive 2016

—Functions of the National Assembly

—Functions of the Senate Assembly

—Functions of speakers of Senate and the National Assembly

  • Constitutions and constitution making —Features of the Independence constitution

–Features of the constitution of Kenya 2010.KCSE 2014

  • Social, Economic and Political Developments and challenges in Kenya since Independence—Multiparty democracy

—Achievements of multiparty democracy in Kenya

  • Devolved government—Functions of County Executive Committee

—composition of  County Executive Committee

— Challenges faced by county governments

—Funtions of governor

—functions/roles of county governments

  • National Integration
  • citizenship
  1. ANALYSIS OF PAPER 311/2-2017
  2. Section A (25 Marks)

In this section, ALL paper one topics are set sequentially from  Form 1-4. Candidates must have a sound knowledge of the entire paper one areas of the syllabus. All questions are structured and thus require distinctive answers.

  1. Section B (45 Marks)
  • Development of Agriculture—Agrarian Revolution in USA and Britain

—factors, Invention and effects

  • Trade —Trans-Atlantic trade, role of middlemen, How the trade contributed to rise of Kingdoms in West Africa/western sudan, problems of transatlantic trade, factors for the rise of transatlantic trade and finall effects.
  • Transport —Effects of various means of transport more so modern means.
  • Development of industry—Factors for the rise of urban centres. Problems facing various urban centres. Reasons for the decline of Meroe.
  • Shona—Social, Economic and political organization
  • European colonization—factors for colonization. Berlin conference. Impacts of partitioning of Africa
  • Rise of African Nationalism—Ghana, South Africa and the least expected is Mozambique.

 

  1. Section C (30 Marks)
  • Colonial Administration —Indirect Rule in Nigeria-WHY IT FAILED IN S. NIGERIA, WHY IT SUCCEEDED IN N.NIGERIA
  • Social, Economic and Political Developments and challenges in Africa since Independence—Tanzania
  • FIRST AND SECOND WORLD WARS
  • Cooperation in Africa—EAC

—ECOWAS

—COMESA

  • The Electoral process, functions of governments in other parts of the World.

-Britain

-USA

  • NON-ALLIGNED MOVEMENT

The main objective of this paper is to help candidates in their day to day preparations for KCSE. This paper is essential to teachers and students of History.

 

English Form 3 Secondary Best Notes

SECONDARY ENGLISH NOTES

FORM THREE

 LISTENING & SPEAKING FOR FORM 3

 PRONUNCIATION

STRESS AND INTONATION IN SENTENCES

STRESS

Not all syllables in a word are given equal emphasis. By the same token, not all words in a sentence are said with equal length.

The relative emphasis that may be given to certain syllables in a word, or certain words in a sentence is what we refer to as stress.

You say a syllable or a word is stressed when it is said louder or longer than the rest.

Stress is studied in two levels:

  • Word level; and
  • Sentence level.

Stress at the Word Level

A part of a certain word when said louder or longer then it is stressed.

Rules of Word Stress

  1. For two-syllable nouns and adjectives, stress the first, for example

Cloudy  carton    table

  1. For verbs with two syllables and prepositions, emphasize the second syllable, for example
  2. Words with three syllables.
  • Those ending in –er, -ly, emphasis put on the first syllable, for example,
  • Stress the first, for those ending in consonants and in –y, for example,
  • Stress the last syllable if the word ends in –ee, -ese, -eer, -ique, -ette, for example,
  • Look at the ones with the suffixes below, where stress is placed on the second,

-ary: library

Cial: judicial, commercial

-cian: musician, clinician

-tal : capital, recital

Stress is important in studying the heteronyms. A pair, or group of words is referred to as heteronym when those words are spelled the same way but have different pronunciation and meaning. We have two main categories of heteronyms:

  • Noun- verb pairs; and
  • Verb -and-adjective pairs.

We stress the first syllable if noun and the second if verb.

Examples of noun-and-verb pairs are included in the table below:

Noun Verb Noun Verb
Abuse   Graduate  
Record   Cement  
Convert   Wind  
Abuse   Sin  
Contest   Produce  
Duplicate   Excuse  
Polish   Insult  
Rebel   Permit  

 

In sentences;

  • Many factories produce the produce we import.
  • Allan became a convert after deciding to convert to christianity.

Sentence Stress

Sentence stress is accent on certain words within a sentence.

Most sentences have two basic word types:

  • Content words which are the key words carrying the sense or meaning- message.

 

  • Structure words which just make the sentence grammatically correct. They give the sentence its structure.

 

Look at the sentence below:

Buy milk feeling tired.

Though the sentence is incomplete, you will probably understand the message in it. The four words are the content words. Verbs, nouns, adjectives, are content words.

You can add words to the sentence to have something like:

Will you buy me milk since I am feeling tired?

The words: will, you, me, since, I, are just meant to make the sentence correct grammatically. They can also be stressed to bring the intended meaning.

Now let’s study the sentence below:

Joan doesn’t think Akinyi stole my green skirt.

Each word in the sentence can be stressed to bring the meaning as illustrated in the table.

Sentence Meaning
Joan doesn’t think Akinyi stole my green skirt. She doesn’t think that, but someone else does.
Joan doesn’t think Akinyi stole my green skirt. It is not true that Joan thinks that.
Joan doesn’t thinkAkinyi stole my green skirt. Joan doesn’t think that, she knows that.
Joan doesn’t think Akinyi stole my green skirt. Not Akinyi, but someone else. Probably Njuguna or Adhiambo.
Joan doesn’t think Akinyistole my green skirt. Joan thinks Akinyi did something to the green skirt, may be washed it.
Joan doesn’t think Akinyi stole my green skirt. Joan thinks Akinyi stole someone else’s green skirt, but not mine.
Joan doesn’t think Akinyi stole my green skirt. She thinks Akinyi stole my red skirt which is also missing.
Joan doesn’t think Akinyi stole my green skirt. Joan thinks Akinyi stole my green shirt. She mispronounced the word.

 

Exercise 1

 

  1. The words that follow can be nouns or verbs dependingon the stressed syllable. Use each as both the verb and noun in a single sentence.

 

  • Cement
  • Address
  • Permit
  • Content
  1. Underline the part of the word in boldface you will stress in each of the following sentences.
  • The boy has been asked to sert the de.sert.
  • My handsome cortwilles.cort me to the dance.
  • After updating my sume, I will re.sume my job search.
  • They have to testin the annual Math con.test.
  • If you vict me, I will remain a con.vict for 5 years.

Exercise 2

Each word in the sentences below can be stressed to bring the meaning. What will be the meaning when each word is stressed?

  • I love your sister’s handwriting.
  • You came late today.

 

 

INTONATION

  • It is the rise and fall of voice in speaking.
  • Intonation is crucial for communication.
  • In English there are basically two kinds of intonation: rising and
  • We can use arrows to show the intanotion – whether rising or falling. ↘ represents falling intonation while ↗ represents the rising one.

Falling Intonation

  • Falling intonation is when we lower our voice at the end of a sentence.
  • This usually happens in:
  • Statements, for example,
  • I like↘
  • It is nice working with ↘
  • She travelled to↘
  • W/H Questions
  • What is your ↘name?
  • Where do you ↘live?
  • How old are↘ you?
  • Who is this young↘ man?
  • Commands
  • Get out ↘
  • Give me the ↘
  • Close your ↘
  • Exclamatory sentences e.g.
  • What a wonderful ↘present!
  • How ↘nice of you

 

Rising intonation

  • When we lower our voice.
  • Used in:
  • General Questionsg.

Do you visit them↗ often?

Have you seen ↗her?

Are you ready to ↗start?

Could you give me a↗ pen, please?

  • Alternative questionsg.

Do you want ↗coffee or ↘tea?

Does he speak↗ Kiswahili or ↘English?

  • Before tag questionsg.

This is a beautiful ↘place, ↗isn’t it?

She knows↘ him,↗ doesn’t she?

  • Enumeratingg.

↗One, ↗two,↗ three, ↗four,↘ five.

She bought ↗bread, ↗cheese, ↗oranges, and ↘apples.

Exercise

Using an arrow, determine whether rising or falling intonation is used in the sentences.

  • This music sounds good.
  • I love watching horror movies.
  • My sister’s name is Amina.
  • Blue is my favourite colour.
  • Is that tv good?
  • Do you like that movie?
  • Are you hungry?
  • Get me my shoes.
  • Study your lessons now.
  • Are you insane?
  • How many more hours before you are done with your work?
  • Which novel is the best for you?
  • He is a little bit nervous, isn’t he?
  • You should listen to your parents’ advice.
  • Did you finish your homework?
  • Water is good for the body.
  • This is good!
  • What a crazy show.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RHYTHM IN POETRY         

  • Rhythm is the recurrence of a beat.
  • In poetry, it is the recurrence of a pattern that gives a distinct beat to a line(s) in a poem.
  • Rhythm is something that happens with regularity.
  • To create rhythm in a poem, a poet can use:
  1. Consonance which is the repetition of consonant sounds within the nearby words.
  2. Assonance which is defined as the repetition of vowel sounds within nearby words.
  • A word or phrase recurring.
  1. This is the repetition of initial consonant sounds in two or more words within a line.
  2. Rhyme which is the repetition of ending sounds, especially in two or more lines.
  • Study the poem below and identify ways in which rhythm has been achieved.

 

A sunshiny shower

Won’t last an hour.

 

Rain before seven

Clear by eleven.

 

March winds and April showers

Bring forth May flowers.

 

Wishes

Won’t wash dishes.

 

Early to bed and early to rise

Makes a man healthy, wealthy, and wise.

  • Rhyme has been used. Several pairs of words rhyme. Examples include:

Shower and hour

Seven and eleven

Showers and flowers

  • Won’t and wash are alliterative (the sound /w/.
  • Consonance in the words “healthy” and ”wealthy”

Exercise

Read the poem below and  identify how rhythm has been achieved in it.

My dog has a special twist,

She can’t go a day unkissed

 

She’s not a normal dog,

Her furs the colour of a log

 

Her tails as pointy as a stick,

She’d get a 10 from a critic.

 

Her body is as long as a telephone pole,

She’s the total opposite of a troll.

 

Her name is Roxie,

Also known as a Doxie.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ASSONANCE AND ALLITERATION IN POEMS

Assonance and alliteration are sound patterns used in the poem. While assonance makes use of vowel sounds, alliteration makes use of consonant sounds. These sounds are repeated in the words close to one another.

Now read the poem below aloud by Steven Henderson.

Path Choices

Best, Boy, Believe

That, There, Two

Placed, Possible, Paths

Willing, Wanting, Waiting

Appraising, Asking, Applying

Lessons, Learned, Leads

Compass, Chosen, Course

Fools, Find, Fate

Sin, Street, Set

Driven, Determine, Destiny

Searching, Seeking, Seeing

Offering, Openly, Often

In the poem you realize there is repetition of the beginning consonant sounds. Look at the illustrations:

  • Best, Boy, Believes – sound /b/ has been repeated.
  • Placed, Possible, Paths – sound /p/ is repeated

This repetition of initial consonant sounds is alliteration.  Illustrate other instances of alliteration in the poem.

There is also repetition of vowel sounds in the words close to each other. Examples we have seen are:

  • Seeking, seeing – the sound /i:/ has been repeated.
  • Openly, Often – the sound /e/ has been repeated.

This repetition on vowel sounds in the nearby words is assonance .

 

 

 

 

Further Practice

Pick out all the instances of assonance and alliteration in the poem that follows.

My Puppy Punched Me in the Eye

My puppy punched me in the eye

My rabbit whacked my ear

My ferret gave a frightful cry

And roundhouse kicked my rear

 

My lizard flipped me upside down

My kitten kicked my head

My hamster slammed me to the ground

And left me nearly dead

 

So my advice? Avoid regrets;

No matter what you do

Don’t ever let your family pets

Take lessons in kung Fu

 

CONSONANCE

Just like alliteration, consonance makes use of consonant sounds, only that these sounds are in in the inner parts of the words (middle or end, but not beggining).

There are illustrations for this in the two poems we have read. In the poem ‘My Puppy Punched me in the Eye’ there are the illustrations as follow.

  • rabbit, wacked – the sound /t/ has been repeated.
  • hamster slammed – there is repetition of the sound /m/

Note: Alliteration, assonance, and consonance don’t have to have the same letters – it is the sound that must be repeated.

Role Played by Alliteration, Assonance, and Consonance

  1. Provide musical rhythm.
  2. Make poem interesting.
  3. Make the poem easier to memorize.

Exercise

Read the poem below and then identify, with illustrations, instances of alliteration, assonance and consonance.

BLACK BREWRIES BRAVENES

            By John Chizuba

Black breweries braveness

In ink incorporative individualism

Those tinny tracers ticking Time

Be-little black braveness baselessly

Mirror my motion moves momentously

Directed diagonal deeply

Hurt humans heart heavy

Because better black believes

Dedication, determined destinies

Of our oddity, obviously occupied

We welcome world words with warrant

Blacks built braveness buxom butterflies

Enlightment enchanting ego enlarged

Decade braveness debut delightfully.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ETIQUETTE

APPROPRIATE CHOICE OF REGISTER

  • Register denotes the choice of language, whether that be formal or informal.
  • It is the choosing of appropriate language for the context.
  • There are factors that determine the language we use.
  • It is important to select the right language for the right situation.
  • The choice of register is affected by:
  • The setting of the speech;
  • The topic of the speech;
  • The relationship that exists between the speakers; and
  • The age.

The Setting

There are words we use depending on the field. There are those we use in the field of medicine, in the field of law etc. they are also those that we use at home when talking to family members. A chemist, for example, will ask for ‘sodium chloride’ while at the laboratory, while at home she will request for ‘salt’. At work place, people tend to use formal language while informal language at home.

Topic

  • If, for example, you want to ask for something valuable from a brother you would say: ‘I was wondering if you could lend me….’. This is a formal language even though it is your family member you are talking to.
  • When offering your boss tea or coffee, you will still use formal language for example: ‘Would you mind being served tea or coffee? ’ and to a friend you will say: ‘Tea or coffee?

Relationship

There are words you use when speaking to different people in different situations. More often than not, an intimate couple will use words like ‘darling’, ‘honey’, etc. These words cannot be used to address your colleague at work place; or even your pastor.

Age

There are ways to speak to a child and those of speaking to adults. To a baby, we use words like ‘popopoo’ while to an adult ‘long call’, etc.

The Words used in Different Fields

Field of Medicine

Some words used in the hospitals, clinics and other health stations include: X-ray, syringe, paracetamol, doctor, nurse, mortuary, patient, etc.

Police Station

Lockup, cell, bond, etc.

Airport

Aircraft, flight, air hostess, etc.

Information Technology

Computer, laptop, CPU, Monitor, software, hardcopy, hard disk, etc.

School

The words used by the teachers, students and others at school are: chalk, ruler, blackboard, senior teacher, deputy principal, dean of studies, etc.

Law

Technical terms used by lawyers and in the courts of law include: adult probation, affidavit, alimony, Amicus Curiae brief, annulment, appeal, appellant, appellee, arrest, plaintiff, defendant, dismissal, oath, revocation hearing, learned friend, etc.

Exercise

Read the conversation below and then answer question that follow.

Caller:Is this the Credex?

Receptionist:Yes, how may I be of help to you?

Caller:It’s Dorothy calling.

Receptionist:Oh, Dorothy! How is the going?

Caller: Lunch today?

Receptionist: Of course..

Caller: what time then?

Receptionist: After I have seen the deputy principal. There are packets of chalk I am supposed to deliver.

 

  • Giving the reasons, where is the Credex?
  • What is the relationship between the caller and the receptionist?
  • Explain the formality of the language the receptionist and the caller use.
  • Give illustrations for (c) above.

 

 

 

SPEECHES

Have you ever stood in front of a big group of people to present your talk? Well here we shall learn how to prepare your speech and deliver it effectively.

Preparation for Speech Delivery

There are steps any speaker should follow in preparation for presentation of speech. They include:

  1. Doing some research on the topic to present. Get the facts about the topic. If you do enough research, your confidence level will be boosted.
  2. Practice in front of a group of friends or relatives. This can also be done in front of a mirror, or videotaping your rehearsals. You will be able to correct your gestures, postures etc.
  3. Write down the points about the topic on a note pad. You can refer to them when giving the speech.
  4. Plan on how to groom and dress decently. You should appear presentable to feel confident.

Grabbing and Keeping Audience Attention

Your opening determines how long your audience will listen to your presentation. Of they are bored from the beginning; the chance that your message will effectively get across is very little.

The most commonly used methods are:

  1. Asking a question. The question should make them think about the topic. For example, ‘How many of you would like to be millionaires?’
  2. Stating an impressive fact connected to the topic of your presentation. For example: ‘About 30% of Kenyans are millionaires.
  3. Telling a story closely connected to the topic. It should neither be too long nor intended to try to glorify the speaker. For example: “Dear audience, before I begin I would like to tell you a short story about Maina Wa Kamau became a millionaire. Don’t worry, it’s not too long. …..”

Other methods of beginning a speech are:

  • Using humour
  • Starting with a quote that ties with your topic.
  • Using sound effect.

Presentation of Speech

There are various techniques of delivering speech. They are what will ensure understanding of your message. Some of these techniques include:

  1. Use gestures effectively to reinforce the words and ideas you are trying to communicate to your audience. For example, when talking about love, you can use your hands to form a cup shape to indicate how tiny something is.
  2. Make eye contact with your audience members to study their reactions to you. If you sense boredom, you need to improve and if you sense enthusiasm, it will help pump you up.
  3. Use movements to establish contact with your audience. Getting closer to them physically increases their attention and interest, as well as encouraging response if you are asking questions.
  4. Your posture should be upright. The way you conduct yourself on the platform will indicate you are relaxed and in control. Do not lean or slouch.
  5. Wear appropriate facial expressions to show feelings and emotions. Smile to show happiness, for example.
  6. Speak loud enough to be heard by all your audience members.
  7. Pronounce the words correctly and speak clearly for your message to be understood.
  8. Pause at key points to let the message sink.

Stage Fright

Almost all speakers are nervous. Even the most experienced do. Fear of addressing a group is not wrong, but how we deal with it is what is possibly not good enough. Those speakers who seem relaxed and confident have learnt how to handle anxiety.

Symptoms of Nervous Speakers

An anxious speaker can be identified in case of:

 

  • Shaking hands
  • Sweating palms
  • Dry mouth
  • Rapid heartbeat
  • Squeaky voice
  • Knocking knees
  • Facial flushes
  • Watery eyes
  • Mental confusions
  • jitters

 

Causes of Fear

  1. Past failures during presentation. Plan to succeed instead.
  2. Poor or insufficient preparation. Nothing gives you more confidence than being ready.
  3. Discomfort with your own body and movement.

Dealing with Anxiety

A speaker can try the suggestions below to deal with anxiety before and on the day of speech.

Before the day;

  1. Know your topic by doing adequate and thorough research. You will be sure of presenting accurate information and be able to answer questions asked by audience members.
  2. Practice delivering your speech several times. This helps you be sure of your organization of the main points.

On that day;

  1. Do some physical exercises like press ups, push walls, etc. to reduce anxiety.
  2. Use simple relaxation techniques like taking deep breath, tightening and relaxing your muscles, etc.
  3. Wear clothes that you feel confident in. when you feel good about of you feel, your confidence level is boosted. You don’t need to adjust your clothes or hair during your speech.
  4. Spot friendly faces in the crowd. These are people who give you positive feedback (e.g. nodding, smiling). Such faces give you encouragement to speak.
  5. Come up with ways to hide your anxiety. For example,
  • When mouth goes dry, drink some water
  • Incase of excessive sweating, wear clothes that will not allow your audience detect
  • If your hands shake, use gestures to mask the shaking.

Exercise 1

In the next three days, you are presenting a speech on the topic: Effects of HIV/AIDS.

  • Write down any three ways you would prepare for the speech delivery.
  • State the techniques you would employ to ensure your audience listens to you throughout and that they understand the message during the presentation.

Exercise 2

Makufuli is presenting his speech. Your friend, Makwere claims that Makufuli is not confident.

  • What could have warranted this claim?
  • State four reasons that could be behind Makufuli’s state?

DISCUSSION

  • Discussion is a process where exchange of ideas and opinions are debated upon in a group.
  • A group which comprises a small number of people is given a topic to discuss.

Preparation for Group Discussion

Do the following before you start the discussion:

  1. Select/choose group leaders. Choose the secretary to write the points down and the chair to lead the discussions.
  2. Research round the topic to make sure you have the points. You can get the points from the sources including:
  • Newspapers and magazines
  • Friends, relatives and teachers
  • Text books
  • Internet
  • Television
  1. Arrive early for discussions. It is advisable you do so so that you start early and finish early.
  2. Gather writing materials – pen and note book.
  3. Prepare with questions to ask.

Participating in a Group Discussion

Remember the tips below for success during the discussion:

  1. Learn to listen to each other and respond to what other people have to say.
  2. Speak with moderation. What you say is usually more important than how much you say. Quality is needed rather than the quantity.
  3. Back up each point you put across. You can explain your points in a number of ways including:
  • Providing facts or statistics to support it;
  • Quoting expert opinion;
  • Explain why said what you said; and
  • Referring to your own experience.
  1. Stay calm and polite. Use polite words like ‘May I ….?, please …, etc.’
  2. Take notes of important words and ideas.
  3. Speak clearly.
  4. Speak loud enough to be heard by all the group members.

The Common Discussion Mistakes

Having learnt what you should do during the discussion, let us now learn what under no circumstances y do. You should never:

  • Dominate the discussion;
  • Interrupt abruptly;
  • Be inaudible;
  • Carry out mini-meetings; or
  • Talk over each other.

Exercise

You and your group members have been assigned the topic: ‘Responsibilities of a Good Citizen’ by your teacher of History and Government. You are supposed to discuss this before you give the presentation in two days.

  • State three ways in which you would prepare before you start discussing the topic.
  • How would you ensure your group members and yourself benefit from this discussion?

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

READING FOR FORM THREE

ORAL LITERATURE

INTRODUCTION TO ORAL LITERATURE

ORAL LITERATURE DEFINED

  • It is a form of art verbalized, dramatized and performed.
  • Oral literature can be categorized as either fiction or nonfiction.
  • Nonfiction is informational text that deals with an actual, real-life subject.
  • Fiction is a text that deal with non factual subject.

FORMS OF ORAL LITERATURE

  • There are various genres of literature.
  • These genres include:
  1. Oral narratives
  2. Oral Poems/Songs
  3. Proverbs
  4. Riddles
  5. Tongue-twisters
  6. Puns
  • Proverbs, riddles, tongue twisters, and puns are short forms of oral literature. This is because of their length.

REASONS FOR LEARNING ORAL LITERATURE

Study of oral literature is important to a student since he/she :

  1. Is able to understand his/her culture and appreciate the culture of others.
  2. Is able to appreciate his/her history.
  3. Appreciates the creativity in oral literature as a means of understanding other African arts.

 

 

 

FIELDWORK

Definition of Fieldwork

  • It refers to the process of collecting oral literature material from the field.
  • Field study can be carried out by anyone including a student.

Importance of Fieldwork

  1. Since oral literature is a performed art, a student can witness and experience the performance. When this written, the live aspects are lost.
  2. It enables a student to have a contact with the community and the culture of that community.
  3. A student is equipped with research skills.
  4. It also enables for recording of history of a community.

Stages in Fieldwork

There are five key stages in fieldwork:

  1. Preparation

Adequate preparation should be taken in to consideration for a meaningful research. You can do the following:

  • Identify the narrator or informant.
  • Identify the location of the informant.
  • Plan when to visit the informant.
  • Plan the necessary tools for recording the materials.
  • Get the administrative permission to conduct the research.
  • Decide on the method of data collection to use.
  • Budget for the fieldwork.
  1. Material collection
  • This is where the actual information is gathered.
  • There are different methods of collecting oral literature materials:
  1. Observation
  2. Interviews
  • Participation
  1. Use of questionnaires, etc.
  • Do this carefully.
  1. Recording of information

You can record the material collected by:

  1. Writing the information;
  2. Taping the information; or
  • Filming it.
  1. Processing the information
  • In preparation for interpretation, analysis and dissemination, scrutinize the information.
  • Put down the recorded information in writing. You can do this word for word. This is called transcription.
  • You can translate it in the language you would like it to be shared. This is
  1. Analysis and Interpretation of material

At this stage:

  1. Classify the material into genres and sub-genres using particular criteria.
  2. Identify the themes.
  • Identify styles used.
  1. Identify functions of the item.
  2. Interpret the information.
  3. Draw conclusions.

Methods of Collecting Oral Literature Materials

  1. Interviews
  • An interview involves meeting the respondent face to face and verbally asking questions in order to seek the required information.

 

  1. Recording performance

First hand information on things like performance and chanting can be recorded using tape recorders, etc. during the festivals in which they are performed.

  1. Observation
  • This is a way of gathering information or data by watching behavior, events, or noting physical characteristics in their natural setting.
  • Observation can either allow one know he/she is being observed, or without him/her not being aware.
  1. Participation
  • The collector of the material can also participate in the enactment of the oral forms like dance and song, etc. if he/she has the skills to.
  • It is important to note that his/her participation should not distract him/her from her investigative roles.
  1. Administering Questionnaires
  • A questionnaire is a research instrument containing series of questions and prompt given to the informant for the purpose of gathering the information.

Methods of Recording Oral Literature Materials

  1. Memory of the Researcher. There are individuals who can remember all the information collected especially if it is not long.
  2. Use of tape recorders.
  3. Videotaping
  4. Written records. You can have writing materials to put down the information gathered.

Challenges Likely to be Encountered during the Fieldwork

  • An oral researcher can encounter problems while in the field.
  • Some of the challenges one is likely to face in an attempt to seek the required information are:
  1. Language barrier. If the researcher is unable to understand the language of the informant, and vice versa, no information is likely to be collected.
  2. Hostility of the informant community.
  3. Transport challenges.
  4. It might be expensive.
  5. The informant might ask for payments.

 

 

 

 

 

ORAL NARRATIVES

Definition of an Oral Narrative

  • A narrative is a prose that recounts events, people, and places.
  • A narrative can either be fictional (non factual) or nonfictional (factual).
  • The terms used to mean the same as a narrative are tale, folktale, or a story.
  • At its essence, an oral narrative is a story spoken to an audience.
  • An oral narrative is handed down from generation to generation by word of mouth.
  • As we learnt earlier, an oral narrative is one of the genres of oral literature.
  • A person who tells a story is known as a narrator.

Qualities of a Good Narrator

A good narrator :

  1. Is confident.
  2. Is able to use the non-verbal skills like gestures, facial expressions, etc.
  3. Uses stage well.
  4. Involves their audience in the narration.

Classification of Oral Narratives

  • Narratives are categorized into different classes.
  • These classes are:
  • Myths
  • Legends
  • Ogre or monster stories
  • Trickster stories
  • Etiological Narratives
  • Dilemma stories
  • Fables
  • Spirit tales
  • Allegory
  • Myths
  • Deal with origins.
  • There is a supernatural being involved.
  • They explain the origin of death, origin of a group of people, etc.

 Characteristics of Myths

  1. A story that is or was considered a true explanation of the natural world (and how it came to be).
  2. Characters are often non-human – e.g. gods, goddesses, supernatural beings, first people.
  3. Setting is a previous proto-world (somewhat like this one but also different).
  4. Plot may involve interplay between worlds (this world and previous or original world).
  5. Depict events that bend or break natural laws (reflective of connection to previous world).

 

  • Legends
  • A legend is a story about an outstanding person who has participated in the historical events of a community.
  • A legend is a story of a hero known to people.
  • Based on fact but also includes imagination material.
  • There is also an element of exaggeration.
  • There are also historical events.
  • Some well known legends are:
  1. Koome Njue
  2. Wangu wa Makeri
  • Mugo wa Kibiru
  1. Mekatilili wa Menza
  2. Fumo Liyongo
  3. Luanda Magere
  • The target audience of legends are usually the youth so that they can emulate the hero or heroine.

Main Features of Legends

  • There are extraordinary actions done by the hero.
  • Facts in such stories are historical.
  • Features mentioned are actual ones.
  • In some, there is an aspect of betrayal.
  • Element of exaggeration is common.
  • Birth or death is associated with some mystery.
  • Events are in the present world; the one we live in.
  • Ogre Stories
  • An ogre usually represents an evil.
  • Ogre are usually destroyed at the end.
  • They have happy ending.

Functions of Ogre Stories

  1. They warn against strangers.
  2. They caution youth against marrying the people they don’t know.
  • Trickster Stories
  • A character makes up for a physical weakness with cunning and subversive humour.
  • The trickster alternatives between:
  1. Cleverness and stupidity;
  2. Kindness and cruelty;
  • Deceiver and deceived; and
  1. Breaker of taboos and creator of culture.

 

  • Etiological Narratives
  • They explain the origin of a certain phenomenon.
  • An etiological narrative is an imaginative story triggered by question “how or why” something came to be in the world.
  • Examples are:
  1. Why rainbow appears in the sky after it rains.
  2. Why hare has a short tail.

Why Turtles Live in Water

Turtles used to live on the land, they say, until the time a clever

turtle was caught by some hunters. They brought him to their village

and placed the turtle before the Chief, who said, “How shall

we cook him?”

“You’ll have to kill me first,” said the turtle, “and take me out of

this shell.”

“We’ll break your shell with sticks,” they said.

“That’ll never work,” said the turtle, “Why don’t you throw me

in the water and drown me?!”

“Excellent idea,” said the Chief. They took the turtle to the river

and threw him into the water to drown him.

They were congratulating themselves on their success in drowning

the turtle, when two little green eyes poked up in the water and the laughing turtle said, “Don’t get those cooking pots out too

fast, foolish people!” As he swam away he said, “I think I’ll spend

most of my time from now on, safely in the water.”

And it has been that way ever since.

  • Dilemma Stories
  • A dilemma story shows a character or a group of characters faced with two or more alternatives, none of which is easy to make.
  • The conflicting situation arises for a character to choose from.
  • A dilemma story is a morally ambiguous story, thus allows the audience to comment or speculate upon the correct solution to the problem posed in the story.
  • A dilemma story has a perplexing situation, which presents different possibilities, and both of them seem practically acceptable.

Functions of Dilemma

  1. Dilemma gives the audience an insight into characters’ lives.
  2. It also creates suspense. This is because the audience will be left wondering which choice the character will make.
  • Fables
  • Feature animal characters.
  • Animals speak as human beings.
  • Now read the story below.

 

 

Once upon a time, there was a hare who loved to boast of his speed in front of the other animals. He asked the tortoise to take up the challenge in the next competition with him.

 

 

All the animals were surprised that the tortoise took up the challenge. He was known to be a very slow animal. However, a day was fixed for the great race and all the animals looked forward to it.

 

On the day of the race, no animal went to the market. No one went hunting; all the animals gathered together, excited to watch the race between the tortoise and the hare. Both animals were ready, each of them felt confident and everyone wondered why the tortoise was so confident since they felt he was no match for the hare.

 

The elephant started them off when he blew his big whistle and the sound rang across the entire jungle. Every year was alert, every eye fixed on the two competitors. Who will win the greatest animal race in history?

 

The hare darted almost out of sight at once, but soon stopped. In order to show that the tortoise was no match for him and should not have accepted his challenge in the first instance, he lay down to have a nap.

Slowly but surely, the tortoise plodded on. He had a goal, he had a focus and he never looked back. When the hare awoke from his sleep, he saw the tortoise near the finish line. He jumped up and tried to catch up with him but it was too late. The deed had been done.

 

To the amazement of all the animals, the tortoise had crossed the finish line. It was unbelievable. The hare

was humbled. He had no choice but to congratulate the tortoise and accept him as the winner. All the animals learnt a very important lesson from the tortoise.

 

  • Spirit Tales

Ghosts or spirits feature in such stories.

  • Allegory
  • Real life is represented by characters and events.
  • Though embodies real life, it is presented as if it is fictional.

Setting in Oral Narratives

  • Through a community’s oral narrative, we can learn a lot about them.
  • An oral narrative give information on the following:
  1. The physical environment. Features like lakes, mountains, forests, etc. are mentioned.
  2. Economic activities.
  • These are the activities or occupations through which the community earns its livelihood.
  • These activities include:
  • Hunting
  • Livestock keeping
  • Crop farming or cultivation
  • Bee-keeping, etc
  • the mention of products like honey, tools, sorghum, milk, etc will lead us know the economic activities of that community.
  1. Social activities

These are activities like ceremonies, religious practices and forms of entertainment.

  1. Political activities

Here we learn:

  • The power structure
  • War activities

FEATURES OF ORAL NARRATIVES

Oral narratives have many features. The main ones include:

  • Use of opening formula. This is used to indicate the beginning of a story. It also removes the audience from the world of reality and take them to the world of fantasy. A world of fantasy is where bones speak, a king is the lion, etc. some commonly used opening formula phrases are ‘ a long time ago…’, ‘once upon a time’, ‘there once was ….’, and ‘long, long ago…

Opening Formula serves the following functions:

  1. Announces the coming of a narrative.
  2. Gets the attention of the audience.
  3. Removes the audience from the world of reality.
  4. Identifies the narrator.
  • Use of Closing formula. It makes the end of a story. It also removes the audience from the world of fantasy and take them back to the world of reality. Here are examples of closing formulae:
  • And that is why …
  • And there ends my story.
  • From then onwards …
  • To come to the end of my story …

A closing formula serves such functions as:

  1. Announcing the end of the narrative.
  2. Momentarily releases the audience from concentration.
  3. Brings back the audience to the world of reality.
  4. Clears the way for the next narrative or activity.
  • Use of idiophones. There is the use of words that imitate the movement or sounds made by characters in the story. For example,
  • The bees flew buzz buzzbuzz.
  • The woman laughed hahahahaha.
  • The branch was cut kacha.
  • A word, phrase, a song, or even a sentence can occur more than once in a story. The repetition is meant to:
  1. Bring out the meaning.
  2. Emphasize a point.
  • Maintain the rhythm.
  1. Sustain the mood in the story.
  • Use of songs. Many narratives have songs. The songs perform the following functions:
  • Brings out the character traits.
  • Brings out the theme.
  • To entertain.
  • Imaginary and factually impossible things are created in the story.
  1. Familiar objects or persons well known are referred to.
  2. Complex problems are explained and clarified by referring to something the audience is familiar with, eg.
  • The bible
  • History
  • Famous people
  • Use of suspense.
  • Here the audience is left wondering what will happen next.
  • The climax is delayed.
  • There is also the use of dialogue. A character speaks directly to the other. Dialogue is used to bring out the theme, character traits as well as to develop the plot of the story.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

TECHNIQUES OF STORY TELLING

  • There are several story telling devices a narrator can decide to use when delivering an oral narrative.
  • The techniques a narrator can use include:
  • Use of gestures. Gestures are meant to reinforce the idea. For example when talking about a character going, you can stretch your arm to show that.
  • Altering your facial expressions according to the emotion and feelings in the story. Do not frown when the emotion happy.
  • Varying the tone of your voice depending on what you are saying and who is saying it. The tone should be low when for example a small animal talks, and high when a big one speaks.
  • Changing the pace of narration. There are those unimportant details that can be said faster.
  • Involving the audience in the narration. Asking them to join you when singing will be okay.
  • Use of mimicry. Here a narrator imitates the speech, action or other mannerisms of the character, for example, the walking style of a character, etc.

Read the story below and then answer questions after it.

A long time ago, there was a pregnant woman whose husband had gone to work in a distant place. The husband was a blacksmith. At the woman’s delivery, an ogre played mid-wife to her. Apart from that the ogre also assisted her in gathering firewood from the forest and also cooked her food.

Every time the ogre came back from the forest, he would pretend to offer her food saying, “wagaciari nduke tuhiuhio” (Translated as: Newly delivered mother, take this delicacy). He then munched down the food himself. He would repeat this with whenever offering her gruel saying:”Wagaciari nduke gacuru. Wrega nganywa.” And drank it himself.

This continued for a while, and while the ogre became fat and sleek, the nursing mother became very thin and weak.

During those days, women used to put castor seeds out to dry in the sun. While the seeds dried,the doves could come and steal those  seeds. One day, the woman spotted a dove and said to him:

“You dove, you have eaten all my castor seeds. Now, if I send you on an errand, will you carry it out?”

“Yes, I can,” the dove answered.

“Right, I would like you to fly to the land of blacksmiths and once you get there, pass the following message:

Muthuri uguturai blacksmith                     I say, oh you

Cangarara-il-ca                                                 Ciangarara-I-ca

Taratura narua-il                                           Hasten to finish whatever you are doing.

Cangarara-il-ca                                                  Cangarara-I-ca

Mukaguo niaachiarire-I                                your wife is with child

Cangarara-i-ca                                                Cangarara-i-ca

Agiciaithio ni irimu-I                                       An ogre is playing nurse to her

Cangarara-i-ca                                                  Cangarara-i-ca

Ekwiruo nduke tuhiuhio-I                                She is being offered food

Cangarara-i-ca                                                   Cangarara-i-ca

Na warega ngaria-I                                            But the ogre eats eats it all

Cangarara-il-ca                                                   Cangarara-i-ca

The dove delivered the message as requested. When she got to the land of the blacksmiths, she sang the song. The blacksmiths heard the dove singing and asked each other, “Whose wife is expecting a baby?”

One of them confessed he had an expectant wife and he was asked by the rest to find out what was happening at home. When he  got home, the wife told him the whole story.

All this while, the ogre was in the forest gathering firewood. The husband sharpened the knife in readiness to face  the ogre. The ogre came back and dropped the firewood with a thud,thu. He then rebuked the mother saying: “Wagaciairi urogua na mururumo ucio.” (Newly delivered mother, may you fall with the same thud!)

The nursing mother responded back, “O nawe urogu.”(You too!)

The ogre was surprised. He said, “You surprise me with your arrogance today. Could it be that the blacksmith is back?”

 

The blacksmith got angry and even before the ogre finished talking, he speared him. Shortly, before the ogre died, he cried with aloud voice saying, “It is just as I had thought. The sojourners have come back. Oh dear me I am dying because of my greed!” And with these words, he died.

There ends my story.

 

Questions

  • What features of this story qualify it as an oral narrative?
  • If you were the one narrating the story, how would you have performed the last paragraph?

 

Read the narratives below and then answer questions that follow.

Girl and the King

Long ago there was a wealthy king who started off on a journey to visit the king of a neighbouring country. On his way he was accompanied by his bodyguard and a large group of ministers. Owing to the nature of the landscape, the only means of transport was by camel. Somewhere along the way, he found a group of girls fetching water from a well. At once he was struck by the resemblance of the girls, but on closer observation he identified one girl he had fallen in love with. He at once decided that he would do something to engage her. He gave the girl his blazer, which he instructed her to wear always as a sign of identify. He further promised that once he was back in his country, he would send for her and the emissary would identify her by her jacket.

After the king’s departure, the other girls begun to envy the lucky girl and constantly begged her to let them try the blazer on, but she wouldn’t budge. Days passed into weeks and the girl still faithfully kept wearing the king’s coat. Over time she begun to wonder whether the king had forgotten his promise but still she kept wearing the coat.

One day she went to collect firewood in the company of the other girls. As she was moving about in the bush she saw a pirate monkey admiring her and she stopped to give it the time. The pirate greeted her and commented on the beauty of the blazer she was wearing. She immediately told the pirate the story behind her acquisition of the coat. The pirate then requested that she let him try it on so that she could see how beautiful it was.

The girl reluctantly agreed to let the pirate try the coat on and no sooner had it done so than it jumped into a tree and left the girl in wonder. The girl begun to climb the tree and the pirate jumped to the next tree. As the girl ran from tree to tree, the pirate kept jumping and soon disappeared from the girl’s sight. The girl returned home miserable but consoled by the thought that after all the king had forgotten his promise.

Shortly after that incident the king sent his messengers to collect the girl and reminded them that they would find several identical girls and that they would identify the bride by a blazer bearing his seal which she would be wearing When the messengers came to the village where the girls lived they were unable to identify the one they were looking for, as all of them resembled one another. The particular girl tried to explain that she was the one but the messengers did not take her because she did not have the king’s coat.

They searched the whole village without finding the girl and eventually gave up, and were on their way home when one of them spotted the pirate in the tree.

The messengers then ran after the pirate and managed to arrest it and take it home to the king.

 

  • Classify this narrative.
  • Identify the features of oral narratives present in it.

 

 

 

 

 

 

GRAMMAR  FOR FORM THREE

PARTS OF SPEECH

NOUNS

  • TYPICAL NOUN DERIVATIONS
  • Derivation is a word formation process in which there is addition of affixes to create new words.
  • A noun can be derived from the following categories:
  • verb
  • adjective
  • another noun

Deriving Nouns From Verbs

To derive a noun from a verb, add one of the following suffixes to the verb:

Verb Suffix Noun
Carry Age Carriage
Arrive Al Arrival
Dominate Ance /ence Dominance

Persistence

Write ing Writing
Manage Ment Management
Separate

Motivate

Tion Separation

Motivation

Divide Sion Division
Close Ure Closure
Defend Ant Defendant
Market Er Marketer
Sail Or Sailor
Type ist Typist
     
     

 

Deriving Nouns from Adjectives

To derive a noun from an adjective, add to that adjective, one of the following suffixes:

Adjective Suffix       Noun
Active Ion

Ity

Action

Activity

Lazy ness Laziness
Strong th Strength
     

 

Exercise 1

Create nouns from the words listed in the table below.

Word Noun
Clean  
Teach  
Advise  
Animate  
Audit  
Govern  
Operate  
Conduct  
Negotiate  
Play  
Supervise  
Determine  
Supply  
Drum  
Publish  
Observe  
Build  
Materialize  
Capture  
Move  

 

Exercise 2

Use the correct form of word in brackets to complete the sentence.

  1. Your _______________ to this job has been recognized. (commit)
  2. _______________ of this word is difficult. (pronounce)
  3. What is the ________________ of this table. (measure)
  4. There has been great ______________ in her language. (develop)
  5. I have heard this ______________ over and over. (narrate)
  6. I prefer ___________________ course to medicine. (engine)
  7. They should improve their level of __________________. (concentrate)
  8. This professor is a great _____________. (history)
  9. I will pay for this phone in ________________. (install)
  10. He can’t walk alone because of his _______________. (blind)

 

 

  • GENDER SENSITIVE LANGUAGE
  • Gender sensitive/neutral language is that which is free of stereotypes and biases.
  • Avoid using gender-specific titles like poetess. Instead use “poet”.
  • Avoid using expressions with generic term For example, don’t say “layman”. Use ‘lay’ in stead.
  • Make sure you use parallel constructions in correspondence. For example, Mr. and Mrs. Gyle, but not, Alice and Mr. Gyle.
  • The table below shows the gendered nouns and gender-neutral nouns.
Gendered Nouns Gender-Neutral Nouns
Man

Freshman

Mankind

Man-made

The common man

To man

Postman/mailman

Policeman

Steward/stewardess

chairman

Congressman

Dear sir

Cattleman

sportsman

Cowboy

Workman

Newspaperman

Businessman

Foreman

Salesman

Craftsman

Clergyman

Fisherman

Clansman

Watchman

Spokesman

headman

Person/individual

First-year student

People/human beings/humanity

Machine-made/synthetic

Average person/ordinary person

To operate

Mail carrier/letter carrier/postal worker

Police officer

Flight attendant

Chair/chairperson/coordinator

Congress person/legislator

Dear sir or madam

Cattle rancher

Sportsperson

Cowhand

Worker

Journalist

Business person

Shift boss/ foreperson/ supervisor

Salesperson

Craftsperson

Clergy/ clergyperson

Fishes folk

Clan member

Security officer/security guard

Spokesperson

Chief/ head/leader

 

 

 

With Pronouns;

  • Use sex-neutral third person as appropriate.
  • Write both pronoun options.
  • Use “she or he” or “she/he”

PRONOUNS

  • PRONOUN CASE
  • A pronoun can be effective when we use an appropriate case (form). If this does not happen, the reader may remain puzzled or distracted.
  • There are three common pronoun cases:
  • Subject pronouns (subjective case)
  • Object pronouns (objective case)
  • Possessive pronouns (possessive case)
  • Subjective Case
  • Used as the subject of a sentence or of a subordinate clause.
  • The pronouns used in this position are:
  • I
  • We
  • You
  • He
  • She
  • It
  • They
  • Also referred to “nominative case”. Examples,
  • You called me the new student.
  • We are ready for the race.
  • I like it.
  • He runs faster.
  • They never appreciate anything.
  • Objective Case
  • Pronouns in this case function as the recipients of the actions.
  • They are used as objects of verbs or prepositions.
  • The pronouns in this form include:
  • Me
  • Us
  • You
  • Him
  • Her
  • It
  • Them

Examples in sentences

  • It never rains on me.
  • Moraa bought him a flower.
  • She showed us around the town.
  • The baby has been named after you.
  • Possessive Case
  • They show who or what owns something.
  • The pronouns used in the possessive case include:
  • Mine
  • Ours
  • Yours
  • Hers
  • His
  • Its
  • Theirs

Examples in Sentences

  • The new phone is
  • Of all the songs, it is yours I enjoyed the most.
  • His son is coming soon.
  • All efforts should be made not to confuse one pronoun case with another.

Exercise

In each sentence below, replace the underlined word(s) with an appropriate pronoun form.

  • I sold my bike to Abdi.
  • I sold my bike to Abdi and Yussra.
  • I sold my bike to Abdi and Yussra.
  • The bike’s brake was bad.
  • Abdi gave the bike to Abdi and Yussra’s
  • The son promised to pay his parents for the bike.
  • The son’s girlfriend rode the bike into a fish pond.
  • The pond belongs to me and my family, and my family and I are unhappy.
  • The fish’s temper is almost as bad as my temper.
  • Abdi and Yussra have offered to pay me and my family for the damage.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS
  • To demonstrate is to show, to indicate, or to point to.
  • A demonstrative pronoun represents a thing or things:
  • Near in distance or time, for example,
  • This
  • these
  • Far in distance or time, for example,
  • That
  • Those
  • Look at the examples in sentences
  • This lasts longer.
  • Have you seen that?
  • Those were the days.
  • Look at these.

Exercise

Fill the blanks with: this, that, those, these.

  1. _____________ one here is my friend.
  2. I hate ____________ books over there. They lack so much.
  3. Could you bring me _____________ chair I left outside.
  4. ___________ bananas are sweet! Could you add me more?
  5. How could you buy a thing like __________? Get me the other one.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

VERBS

  • TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS

Transitive Verbs

  • A transitive verb has two features:
  • It is an action verb that expresses a doable activity. For example, eat, jump, click, etc.
  • It must have a direct object. A direct object is something or someone who receives the action of the verb.
  • A n indirect object can also be there but it preceds the direct object.
  • Look at the sentences below and say whether the verbs in them have direct objects.
  • Joan bought him an handkerchief.
  • Colman drew the picture.
  • I eat bananas and mangoes.
  • My wrist watch costs a lot of money.
  • Did you make coffee this morning?
  • My niece called me earlier yesterday.
  • In the sentences that follow, the direct objects are in boldface while the indirect objects are underlined.
  • We can call you Martha.
  • Our parents teach us poems.
  • Alice wrote June a love poem.
  • Bring me a cup of tea

Intrasitive Verbs

  • They can be followed by a complement.
  • The complement is usually an adjective or an adverb.
  • Study the sentences below.
  • The athletes ran fast.
  • The food tastes insipid.
  • The rain rains every morning.
  • In the three sentences above, the actions or states denoted by the verbs ‘ran’, ‘tastes’, and ‘rains’ are represented as remaining in the subjects ‘athletes’, ‘food’, and ‘rain’, and not as passing over to an object.
  • The three verbs do not require objects to complete the sense. They are called intransitive verbs.
  • An intrasitive verb is one that does not require an object to complete the sense.
  • Some verbs are used both as transitive and intrasitive. For example,
  • The bird flies. intransitive verb
  • The boy flies his kite. Transitive verb

 

Exercise

Say whether the verb(s) in the sentence are transitive or intransitive.

  1. Junior likes phones.
  2. Jenifer brushes her teeth every morning.
  3. I smile whenever I play games.
  4. Richard sleeps 8 hours a day.
  5. My boss offered me a new job.
  6. The horse runs faster.
  7. She promised me she would visit.
  8. The family works in the field everyday.
  9. Njeri cooks me dinner.
  10. The food smells good.
  11. I owe you hundred shillings.
  12. All the candidates passed the test.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • INFINITIVES
  • An infinitive is a type of verbal consisting of the word ‘to’ plus a verb. Examples are
  • To fly
  • To enter
  • To catch
  • To belong
  • To become
  • To draw
  • To stand etc
  • The verb here should be in its simplest stem form.
  • An infinitive functions as a noun, an adjective or an adverb.

Examples in Sentences

  • Everyone wanted to leave.
  • To swim is my hobby.
  • You lack the strenth to resist.
  • An infinitive has the following functions in a sentence:
  1. As a subject of a verb, for example,

To cry is what I hate most.

  1. As an object of a verb, for example,

She wants to go.

  1. As a subject complement, for example,

My dream is to fly.

  1. As an adjective, for example,

He lacks the skill to swim.

Exercise

Rewrite each of the following sentences using the verb in brackets. Be careful not to change the meaning of the sentence.

  1. I started reading. (read)
  2. He stopped smoking. (smoke)
  3. Writing is more difficult than reading. (write, read)
  4. Jogging is a good exercise. (jog)
  5. I like cycling. (cycle)
  6. I enjoy swimming. (swim)

 

 

 

  • PHRASAL VERBS
  • A phrasal verb is a verb plus a preposition or adverb, or a combination of both, and which creates a different meaning from the original verb.
  • There are transitive phrasal verbs. They are those that can be followed by an object. Example

I ran into my old friend.

“my old friend” is the object of “ran into”

  • There are also intransitive phrasal verbs. They cannot take an object. Example

Did he show up?

  • Some transitive phrasal verbs have the object placed before the preposition. Example,
  • We kept our relationship from my friends for sometime.
  • Some transitive phrasal verbs are inseparable. The object is only placed after the preposition. For example,
  • I always hand in my assignment in time.
  • She is looking forward to mid term break.
  • Some transitive phrasal verbs can take an object at both places – before and after the preposition. For example,
  • The brothers put out the fire before the firemen came.
  • The brothers put the fire out before the firemen came.

 

The Commonly Used Phrasal Verbs

  1. Ask (somebody) out – invite on a date
  2. Ask around – ask several people the same question.
  3. Add up to (something) – equal
  4. Back (something) up—reverse
  5. Back (somebody)up – offer support
  6. Blow (sth) up – explode
  7. Break down – stop working/functioning (of a machine, or a vehicle)
  8. Break down – to be upset
  9. Break (sth) down – divide it into smaller parts
  10. Break in – enter a building forcibly
  11. Break in – to interrupt
  12. Break into (sth) – enter forcibly (house, etc)
  13. Break out – escape
  14. Break out in (sth) – develop a condition (skin)
  15. Break up – end a relationship
  16. Break up – start laughing
  17. Bring (sbdy) down – cause the person to be unhappy
  18. Bring (sbdy) up – raise a child
  19. Bring (sth) up – start talking about a topic
  20. Bring (sth) up – vomit (one can bring the food up)
  21. Call around – make phone calls to several people
  22. Call (sbdy) back – return a phone call
  23. Call (sth) off – cancel
  24. Call on (sbdy) – ask for an opinion or an answer from someone
  25. Call on (sbdy) – visit someone
  26. Call (sbdy) up – phone the person
  27. Calm down – after being angry, one calms down
  28. Catch up – get to the same place/point as someone else
  29. Check in – arrive, and register at a hotel or airport
  30. Check out – leave a hotel
  31. Check out(sbdy/sth) – to look at
  32. Cheer up – become happier than before
  33. Cheer (sbdy) up – make someone happier
  34. Chip in—help
  35. Clean (sth) up – to clean, or tidy something
  36. Come across (sth) – unexpectedly find something
  37. Come apart – separate
  38. Come down with (sth) – become sick
  39. Come forward – to give evidence or volunteer do something
  40. Count on (sbdy/sth) – rely on
  41. Cross (sth) out – draw a line through
  42. Cut back on (sth) – consume less
  43. Cut (sth) down – make something fall to the ground
  44. Cut in – interrupt
  45. Cut in – start operating(engine or an electrical device)
  46. Cut (sth) off – stop providing (electricity, water, etc)
  47. Cut (sth) off – remove with something sharp
  48. Cut (sbdy) off – take out of a will
  49. Cut (sth) out – remove part of something (usually with a razorblade, or scissors)
  50. Do away with (sth) – discard
  51. Do (sth) up – close, or fasten
  52. Dress up – wear nice clothing
  53. Drop back – move back in a position
  54. Drop by/in/over – come without an appointment
  55. Drop (sbdy/sth) off – take someone/something somewhere and leave them/it there.
  56. Drop out – quit a class, school, college, etc
  57. Eat out – eat at a restaurant
  58. End up – eventually decide/do/reach
  59. Fall apart – break into pieces
  60. Fall down – fall on the ground
  61. Fall out – separate from an interior (pocket, for example).
  62. Fall out – become loose and unattached (hair, teeth, etc)
  63. Figure (sth) out – find an answer, understand
  64. Fill (sth) in– to write information in blanks (eg on a form, questionnaire)
  65. Fill (sth) up – fill to the top
  66. Find out – discover
  67. Get (sth) across/over – communicate, make something to be understood
  68. Get along/ on – like each other
  69. Get around – have mobility
  70. Get away – go on a holiday
  71. Get away with (sth) – do something without being punished
  72. Get back – return
  73. Get (sth) back – receive something you had before
  74. Get back at (sbdy) – take revenge
  75. Get back into (sth) – become interested in something again
  76. Get on (sth) – step onto a vehicle
  77. Get over (sth) – recover from an illness, loss, or difficulty
  78. Get over (sth) – overcome a problem
  79. Get together – meet (for social reasons)
  80. Get up – get out of bed
  81. Get up – stand
  82. Give (sbdy) away – reveal hidden information about someone
  83. Give (sth) away – ruin a secret
  84. Give (sth) away – give someone something for free
  85. Give (sth) back – return a borrowed thing
  86. Give in – stop fighting or arguing reluctantly
  87. Give (sth) out – give something to many people (normally for free)
  88. Give (sth) up – quit a habit
  89. Give up – stop trying
  90. Go after – follow someone
  91. Go after (sth) – try to achieve something
  92. Go against (sbdy) – compete, oppose someone
  93. Go ahead – start, proceed
  94. Go back – return to a place
  95. Go out – leave home to on a certain social event
  96. Go out with (sbdy) – date
  97. Go over (sth) – review
  98. Go over – visit somebody who is nearby
  99. Grow apart – stop being friends over a period
  100. Grow up – become an adult
  101. Grow into (sth)– grow big enough to fit
  102. Hand (sth) down– give something that has been used to someone else
  103. Hand (sth) in – submit
  104. Hand (sth) out – to distribute to a group of people
  105. Hand (sth) over – unwillingly give something
  106. Hang on – wait a short time
  107. Hang out – spend time relaxing
  108. Hang up – end a phone call
  109. Hold (sbdy/sth) back – prevent from doing or going
  110. Hold (sth) back – hide an emotion
  111. Hold on – wait a short time (formal)
  112. Hold onto (sbdy/sth) – hold firmly using hands or arms
  113. Hold (sbdy/sth) back – rob
  114. Keep on doing (sth) – continue doing
  115. Keep (sth) from (sbdy) – not tell
  116. Keep (sbdy/sth) out – prevent from entering
  117. Keep (sth) up – continue at the same rate
  118. Let (sbdy )down – disappoint, fail to help
  119. Let (sbdy) in – allow to enter
  120. Look after (sbdy/sth) – take care of
  121. Look down on – consider inferior, think less of
  122. Look for (sbdy/sth) – try to find
  123. Look forward to (sth) – be excited about the future
  124. Look into (sth) – investigate
  125. Look out – be careful, be vigilant, or take notice
  126. Look out for (sbdy/sth) – take notice
  127. Look (sth) over – check, examine
  128. Look (sth) up – search and find information about something
  129. Look up to (sbdy) – have a lot of respect for
  130. Make (sth) up – invent, lie about something
  131. Make up – forgive each other
  132. Make (sbdy) up – apply cosmetics to someone
  133. Mix (sth) up – confuse things
  134. Pass away – die
  135. Pass out – faint
  136. Pass (sth) out – give the same thing to several people
  137. Pass (sth) up – decline (normally something good)
  138. Pay (sbdy) back – return owed money
  139. Pay for (sth) – be punished for doing something bad
  140. Pick (sth) out – choose
  141. Point (sbdy/sth) out – indicate using a finger
  142. Put (sth) down – put what you are holding on a surface or floor
  143. Put (sbdy) down – insult, make someone feel stupid
  144. Put (sth) off – postpone
  145. Put (sth) out – extinguish
  146. Put (sth) together – assemble
  147. Put up with (sbdy/sth) – tolerate
  148. Put (sth) on – put clothing or accessories on your body
  149. Run into (sbdy/sth) – unexpectedly meet
  150. Run over (sbdy/sth) – drive a vehicle over a person or thing
  151. Run over/ through (sth) – rehearse, review
  152. Run away – escape, leave unexpectedly
  153. Run out – have none left
  154. Set (sth) up – arrange, organize
  155. Set (sbdy) up – trick, trap
  156. Shop around – compare prices
  157. Show off – act as though special.
  158. Sleep over – stay somewhere for the night
  159. Sort (sth) out – organize, resolve a problem
  160. Stick to – continue doing something, or limit yourself to a particular thing.
  161. Switch (sth) off – stop the energy flow, turn off
  162. Switch (sth) on – start the energy flow, turn on
  163. Take after (sbdy) – resemble a family member
  164. Take (sth) back – return an item
  165. Take off – start to fly
  166. Take (sth) off – remove something (especially clothing)
  167. Take (sth) out – remove from a place or a thing
  168. Take (sbdy) out – pay for someone to go somewhere with you
  169. Tear (sth) up – rip into pieces
  170. Think back – remember
  171. Throw (sth) away – dispose of
  172. Turn (sth) down – decrease the volume or strength (of heat, light, etc)
  173. Turn (sth) down – refuse
  174. Turn (sth) off – stop the energy flow, switch off
  175. Turn (sth) on – start the energy flow, switch on
  176. Turn (sth) up – increase the volume or strength (of heat, light, etc)
  177. Turn up – appear suddenly
  178. Try (sth) out – test
  179. Use (sth) up – finish the sipply
  180. Wake up – stop sleeping
  181. Warm (sth/sbdy) up – increase the temperature
  182. Warm up – prepare body for exercise
  183. Wear off – fade away
  184. Work out – exercise
  185. Work out – make a calculation
  186. Work out – be successful

 

Examples in Sentences

  1. I want to blow this balloon up
  2. My wife and I broke up last month.
  3. The thief broke out of the crowd without anyone noticing.
  4. We are going to a far off place so you have to dress up.
  5. We wanted to surprise her about the wedding but she found it out.

Exercise

Fill in the blank with a phrasal verb beginning with the correct form of verb in brackets.

  1. ___________ the blanks with appropriate words. (fill)
  2. His child’s teeth started to ____________ at the age of six. (fall)
  3. I would advise we _____________ this syllabus. It has lost its meaning. (do)
  4. Do not ________________ me _____________ when I am listening to the music. (cut)
  5. Kimutai ___________________ malaria last week. (come)
  6. Akinyi is trying to ___________ her point ___________ but the other students are making noise. (get)
  7. All the students have ____________ from their long December holidays. (get)
  8. She ___________ free books to young children every month. (give)
  9. The bad boy has finally ____________ drinking. (give)
  10. They __________ their dog _________ whenever the visitors come. (hold)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(d)  IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS

  1. 1.She was tickled pinkby the good news.

Made very happy

  1. You were hands downthe best player on the team.

There was no competition

  1. I’ve been feeling pretty down in the dumpslately.

Sad or depressed

  1. I’m feeling sick as a dog!

Very sick

  1. I’ve been feeling under the weather.

Not well

  1. Rise and shine!

Wake up and be happy!

  1. Close, but no cigar.

You were very close, but you did not make it.

  1. I could play outside till the cows come home.

For a very long time

9.      Acid Test:

Acid test proves the effectivenes of something.

 

10.    Cut the ground from under feet :

When you cut the ground from under someone’s feet, you do something which weakens their position.

11.   Chase your tail:

Spending a lot of time and energy doing a lot of things but actually achieving too little.

12.   Whole bag of tricks –

Means trying all the clever means to achieve something.

13.   Deliver the goods –

Do what is expected or promised.

14.   Fine-tooth comb –

Examining something carefully to not miss out any details.

15.   Explore all avenues

Trying out every possibility to get a result.

16.   Fast track something –

Rating something higher on your priority list to achieve the desired result.

17.     Get ducks in a row –

Getting your things well organized.

18.   Get the show on the road –

Putting up a plan or idea into action.

19.   Keep your fingers on the pulse –

Being constantly aware of the most recent developments.

20.   Mean business –

Being serious about what you announce.

21.   Think on your feet –

Adjusting quickly to changes and making fast decisions.

22.   Sail through something –

Being successful in doing something without difficulty.

23.   Tricks of the trade :

Meaning – Clever or expert way of doing something.

24.   Not let grass grow under feet –

Meaning – Don’t delay in getting something done.

25.   Work like a charm –

Works very well or has the desired effect.

26.   Back-room boys –

People who perform important work but have no contact with the public.

27.   Dead wood –

People or things which are no longer useful or necessary.

28.   Get the axe –

Meaning – lose the job.

Example – The projects team was undergoing a major restructuring, recruitment executives were the first to get the axe.

29.   Plum job –

Desirable position which is well-paid and considered relatively easy .

Example – This looks like a plum job but it has its own bunch of complications.

30.   Shape up or ship out –

This expression is used to warn someone that if they do not improvetheir ways, they will have to leave their job.

31.   Golden handshake –

Meaning – Big sum of money given to a person when they leave a company or retire.

32.   Separate sheep from goats –

Examining a group of people and deciding their suitability

33.   Waiting in the wings –

Waiting for an opportunity to take action, mostly to replace someone else in their job.

Examples in Sentences

  • Since the teacher is about to retire, there are five other teachers in the waiting wings to take his position.
  • At his retirement, he will be offered a golden handshake.
  • Teaching, to many, seems to be plum job to many young youths.

 

 

  1. PARTICIPLES
  • A participle is a type of verbal.
  • A verbal is a verb form that looks like a verb but does not act as the verb in a sentence.
  • A participle functions as an adjective to modify a noun or a pronoun.
  • There are three types of participles:
  • Present Participles which is the “-ing” form.
  • Past Participles. Regular verbs end in “-ed”, while irregular ones end in –en, -n, -t, or various other endings.
  • Perfect participle
  • Used to shorten or combine clauses that have the same subject.
  • One action is completed before the next one starts.

Examples in Sentences

Present Participle

  • I am running.
  • The lesson is boring.
  • He is afraid of swimming.

Past Participle

  • The door was opened.
  • I have written the letter.
  • He was really bored.

Perfect Participle

  • She bought a pen and ran to school.
  • She arrived home and ate her lunch

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ADJECTIVES

  • QUANTIFIERS
  • They are adjectives and adjective phrases that give approximate answers to the questions like:
  • How much?
  • How many?

Examples of Quantifiers

‘A few’ versus ‘A little’

  • A few (for countable nouns) and a little (for uncountable nouns) describe the quantity positively.
  • These words can be used in the following ways:
  • I have a few pens. This means perhaps not many, but enough.
  • There is a little money left. It means there is enough to live on.

Few versus Little

  • They describe quantity in a negative way.
  • They can be used in the following ways:
  • Few students visited the site last weekend. Almost none visited the site.
  • I have little money left. Almost no money

A great number of/a large number of/a large quantity of are also quantifiers.

Cardinal Numbers versus Ordinal Numbers

  • The cardinal numbers like one, three, ten, etc refer to the quantity.
  • The ordinal numbers like first, third, tenth etc refer to distribution.
  • In the sentences below, we can learn how they are used.
Number Cardinal Number Ordinal Number
3 Three days are enough.

 

We will be through by the third day.
13 Call me the thirteen girls.

 

The thirteenth girl will be punished.
33 There are thirty three students who sat for the exams. The thirty-third student will have to resit the exams.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • PREDICATIVE AND ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES
  • A predicate adjective is an adjective that follows a linking verb and the subject of the linking verb.
  • A predicate adjective contrasts with an attributive adjective, which typically sits immediately before the noun it modifies.
  • Study the two sentences below.
  • The dress is expensive.
  • The expensive dress has been bought.
  • In the first sentence, adjective ‘expensive’ comes after the linking verb “is”. It is therefore predicative.
  • In the second sentence, it sits before the verb . it has been used attributively.
  • Look at the sentences and phrases below. The adjective in boldface has been used attributively, while the one underlined, predicatively.
  • This sea is blue.
  • The blue will be visited.
  • The boys are happ
  • The happy boys are coming.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ADVERBS

  • FORMATION OF ADVERBS
  • There are rules that help one form adverbs. These rules are:
  1. Adverbs are formed by mostly adding –ly to an adjective. Examples

 

Adjective        Adverb

 

Cheap              cheaply

Slow                 slowly

Quick               quickly

  • If the adjective ends in –y, replace the “y” with “i” and add “-ly”. For example,

 

Adjective          Adverb

 

Easy                   Easily

Lucky                 Luckily

Happy               Happily

Angry                Angrily

  • If the adjective ends in –able, “-ible”, or “-le”, replace the “-e” with “-y”. examples,

 

Adjective            Adverb

 

Probable           Probably

Terrible             Terribly

Gentle                Gently

  • If the adjective ends in “-c”, add “-ally”. Examples,

 

Adjective            Adverb

 

 

Basic                  basically

Tragic                 tragically

Economic          economically

  1. Some adverbs have the same form as the adjective, for example,

Adjective            Adverb

Early                  Early

Fast                   Fast

Hard                  Hard

High                   High

Wrong              Wrong

Staright            Straight

Near                  Near

Late                   Late

Read the sentence and note whether the word has been used as an adjective or as an adverb.

  • It is a fast car.
  • The car was driven fast.
  • It is a hard assignment.
  • The assignment is hard.
  1. “Well” and “good”

Well is just an adverb correspondent of the adjective “good”.

Look at the sentences below:

  • She is a good pianist.
  • She plays piano well.
  • They are good writers.
  • They write well.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • FUNCTIONS OF ADVERBS (MODIFIERS)

 

  • Adverbs are words which describe or modify other verbs. For example,
  • The athlete ran quickly.
  • The new student acts stupidily.
  • He left
  • Adverbs also modify other adverbs. For example,
  • The student very easily wrote the answers.
  • The student behaves really
  • Adverbs also modify adjectives. For example,
  • The very beautiful girl won his heart.
  • This tea is extremely
  • An adverb can also modify prepositional phrase, for example,
  • The boy was punished just outside the staffroom.
  • An adverb at times modifies the whole sentence, for example,

Luckily, we met the man we have always wanted to see.

 

Exercise

Underline the adverbs in the sentences below and then identify how each functions in the sentence.

  1. The girl hardly ever believes what she is told.
  2. The very tall tree was cut this morning.
  3. Certainly, the man chose the wrong way.
  4. We noticed that the cow was almost in the water.
  5. The new student gladly followed all the instructions given.
  6. This wall was frantically painted.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PREPOSITIONS

DISTINGUISHING PREPOSITIONS FROM CONNECTORS AND ADVERB PARTICLES

The three are all used in joining ideas.

Connectors

  • Connectors join separate ideas in two sentences or paragraphs.
  • Connectors usually come at the start of a sentence.
  • Examples are:
  • Firstly, next, meanwhile, consequently, etc

Examples in Sentences

  1. I like dancing. Furthermore, I enjoy
  2. John was on the way to my home. Meanwhile, my son was busy preparing them dinner.

 

Conjunctions

  • They join ideas in a single sentence.
  • Examples of conjunctions are:
  • Even if
  • Because
  • Even though, etc

Example in a Sentence

I like him because he is kind to me.

Prepositions

  • They express relations between parts of a sentence.
  • The following are examples of prepositions:
  • Above
  • Against
  • Before
  • At etc

 

 

 

 

 

 

CONJUNCTIONS

CORRELATIVE CONJUNCTIONS

  • They connect two equal grammatical items.
  • They must always connect two elements that are grammatically similar, meaning same structure applies.If, for instance, a noun follows “either”, then a noun will also follow “or”. Look at these examples,
  • In the evening, Kilonzo will either wash the clothes or clean the house.
  • Neither the boy nor the girl has visited their parents in the past one week.
  • Below are some common correlative conjunctions pairs.
  • As—as
  • Both – and
  • Either – or
  • Neither – nor
  • Not only – but also
  • Whether – or
  • When using correlative conjunctions, be careful about:
  • Verb agreement;
  • Pronoun agreement ; and
  • Parallel structure.
  • Verb Agreement

The second subject must agree with the verb that follows it when you connect two subjects  with a correlative conjunction. For example,

  • Neither Kamau nor the two girls come to school late. Or
  • Neither the two girls nor Kamau comes to school late.

It is incorrect to say:

  • Neither Kamau nor the two girls comes to school late. Or
  • Neither the two girls nor Kamau come to school late.
  • Pronoun Agreement

When you connect two antecedents with a correlative conjunction, the second one must agree with the pronoun that follows it. For instance,

  • Neither Kamau nor the two girls understood why their teacher punished them. Or
  • Neither the two girls nor Kamau understood why his teacher punished them.
  • Parallel Structure
  • Maintain parallel structure when you use the correlative conjunctions. This is because the two connected elements must be balanced.
  • Most often you can correct any mismatched grammatical items that prevent parallel structure by simply adding a word to create the same type of phrase or by rearranging how a sentence is worded. The two sentences below are incorrect,
  • It was both a long name and difficult to pronounce.
  • Valentine is a time not only for exchanging flowers, but also for spending time with the loved ones.
  • When corrected they will be:
  • The name was both long and difficult to pronounce. Or

It was both a long name and a difficult one to pronounce.

  • Valentine is a time not only for exchanging flowers, but also for spending time with the loved ones.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PHRASES

ADJECTIVE PHRASES

  • An adjective phrase tells us something about the noun it is modifying.
  • The principal word in an adjective phrase is an adjective. Examples,
  • Cheap but nice
  • Unhappy with
  • So hot
  • The examples in sentences are,
  • This dress looks cheap but nice.
  • Linet is unhappy with her boss.
  • This is so hot.
  • At times, a word group work as an adjective. Read the sentences below:
  • He is a doctor with a lot of experience.
  • He is an experienced doctor.

 

  • In the first sentence, ‘a lot of experience’ is an adjective phrase. In the second, ‘experienced’ has served the same purpose as the phrase in the first.

Exercise

Replace the underlined adjective with an equivalent adjective phrase. The first one has been done for you.

  1. He has bought a metallic

He has bought a door made of metal.

  1. Husband wore a golden
  2. A white cow was slaughtered.
  3. He lives in a stone
  4. I have passed several sleepless
  5. The white used the Ugandan
  6. Heroic deeds are worth praises.
  7. Theirs was a brave
  8. It was a horrible
  9. Many Kenyans talk about English
  10. This teacher is a wealthy

 

 

 

PREPOSITIONAL PHRASES

  • A prepositional phrase will begin with a preposition and end with a noun, pronoun, gerund, or clause, which is the object of the preposition.
  • The object of the preposition usually has one or more modifiers descrbing it.
  • Below are patterns for prepositional phrases:
  • Preposition+Noun, for example, at home, on time
  • Preposition + Pronoun, for example, with him
  • Preposition + Gerund, for example, by dancing
  • Preposition + Clause, for example,

He is telling us a story about    the lion who killed my cat

Preposition Noun Clause

  • Preposition + modifier + noun/pronoun/geund/clause, for example,

Under   the   big   table

preposition modifiers          noun

  • The sentences that follow have prepositional phrases. Underline them and identify their parts.
  • I received this letter from my sister.
  • Before break, the teacher asked us to collect our books.
  • The pen on the floor is new.
  • He drove the car along the busy, two-lane

Exercise

Complete the sentences below with appropriate prepositions. From the completed sentence, write the prepositional phrase in it.

  • Do your parents live _____________ Nairobi?
  • We will go out to dinner ___________ Friday night.
  • The keys are _______________ the kitchen cupboard.
  • He drove the car __________________ excessively worrying.
  • He is stiff ____________ yesterday’s long exercise.
  • Angela has been diognosed ___________ malaria.
  • The plane touched down ____________ difficulty.
  • A matatu transported them ___________ their hotel comfortably.
  • We all laughed when Njuguna came to school ___________ his pyjamas.
  • I would rather have coffee ________________ of porridge.
  • He is standing here_________ his friend.
  • ____________ fire, use the emergency window.
  • _______________ the rains, we went out.
  • ___________ the whole, they like that teacher.
  • We are pleased with your perfomance _________ general.

 

CLAUSES

NOUN CLAUSES

  • A dependent clause that acts as a noun is the noun clause.
  • A noun clause can begin in any of the following words:

 

  • When
  • How
  • What
  • Where
  • Whoever
  • Whichever
  • Whomever
  • Whom
  • Whether
  • Whatever
  • Why

 

  • Noun clauses perform the following functions in sentences:
  1. Act as subjects, for example,
  • Whoever wishes the king death is a big fool.

in above, “whoever wishes the king death” is the noun clause and acts as the subject.

This clause contains “whoever” which is the subject, and a verb “wishes”.

  • That he is a polygamist is known to you.
  1. Act as objects of verbs. Consider the sentence below.
  • The king ordered that the man should be stoned to death.

The noun clause in boldface is the object of the verb “ordered”.

  • Remember to buy whoever loves you a flower.

The clause in bold is the indirect object.

  • Act as objects of the prepositions, for example,
  • Give the pen to whomever you like to.

It is the object of the preposition “to”.

 

Exercise 1

Underline the noun clause in each sentence.

  1. That you hate him is your own problem.
  2. You cannot rely on what David says.
  3. It is true that his father has passed on.
  4. The news that more than 100 soldiers were killed is a big lie.
  5. It was unfortunate that the terrorist escaped.
  6. He wondered whether the King learnt of the news.
  7. I will punish whoever fails this test.
  8. I can give this to whomever pleases me most.

 

 

 

 

Exercise 2

Put the words in brackets in their correct order to fill the blank space.

  1. I wonder _____________________ wait for her. (should how we long)
  2. Do you know ________________ ? (be will what weather the )
  3. He told me _________________ . (not would that go he)
  4. I don’t know _____________ . (he gone has where)
  5. Moris asked _____________ . (was my how family )
  • I wonder how long we should wait for her.
  • Do you know what the weather will be?
  • He told me that he would not go.
  • I don’t know where he has gone.
  • Moris asked how my family was.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ADJECTIVE CLAUSES

  • Also referred to as adjectival or relative clause.
  • An adjective clause must meet such requirements as:
  • It contains a subject, and a verb.
  • It begins with a relative pronoun (like who, whom, whose, that, or which) or with a relative verb (for example, when, where, or why)
  • It functions as an adjective. The adjective in this case answers the questions, ‘Which one?’, ‘How many?’, or ‘What kind?’
  • There are two patterns followed by an adjective clause:
  • Relative pronoun/adverb + subject + verb, for example,
  • Whose bag    was stolen.

relative          subject     verbs

pronoun

  • Why Kim cannot stand that smell.

relative    subject  verbs

adverb

  • Relative pronoun (which is the subject)+ verb, for example,
  • Who jumped    over the fence.

relative pronoun verb

(subject)

  • In a sentence, we can have something like,
  • Juma is the boy whose bag was stolen.
  • He is allergic to bad smell is one reason why Kim cannot stand that smell.

Punctuating an Adjective Clause

  • Before you decide to use a comma, you have to decide whether the clause is essential or nonessential.
  • Essential ones require commas while the others do not.
  • The first example has an nonessential clause, while the second, a n essential clause.
  • Transline Galaxy, which people don’t like, is often fast.
  • The new boy who everyone likes is my favourite student.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Exercise

Combine the pair of sentences to make one sentence using an adjective clause. The first one has been done for you.

  • I met Akinyi in town. Akinyi is a thief.

I met Akinyi, who is a thief, in town.

  • The man was sick. He looked very pale.
  • He was sitting in the emergency room. It was very crowded.
  • A nurse was nearby. The man called to her.
  • The nurse called the doctor. The doctor came quickly.
  • The doctor asked him to lie down. The doctor looked very worried.
  • The doctor gave the man an injection. The injection made him go to sleep.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CONDITIONAL CLAUSES

  • They are used to express that the action in the main clause can only take place if a certain condition is fulfilled.
  • There are various subordinating conjunctions used in joining the clauses. Some of them are:
  • If
  • Unless
  • Only
  • Until

“If” Clauses

  • It consists of two parts.
  • The first part is the condition. It is the half with the word “if”.
  • The other part is the action to occur if the condition is fulfilled. This half is the main clause.
  • Consider:

What will happen when you see the president?

If I see the president I will be very happy.

The action that will occur when this person sees the president is being happy.

Examples in Sentences

  • You will have to walk if you miss the 6 am bus.
  • If you find the door open, kindly close it.
  • If the Israelites had not broken the covenant, the covenant wouldn’t have been renewed.
  • If I have a problem, he always help.

 

Unless Clauses

  • Basically, it means the same thing as,”if ….not.”
  • Example in a sentence.

You will fail unless you work hard. Or

Unless you work hard, you will fail.

The first sentence means, “you will fail if you don’t work hard.”

The second means, “If you work hard, you will not fail.” Or “if you work hard, you will pass.”

More Examples

  • I will arrive at 9 unless I wake up late.
  • Unless I am very busy, I will write you a letter.
  • You will remain unhappy unless you stop seeing her.

 

 

Exercise

Use the correct form of words in brackets to complete the sentences below.

  1. She _______________ (forgive) unless you tell her the truth.
  2. We _____________ (pass) the exams if we don’t work harder.
  3. _______________(if/unless) she ____________ (take) a painkiller, she _________ (feel) much better soon.
  4. _________ (if/unless) they __________ (be) here next week, they _________ (try) to go to Warda’s party.
  5. _____________ (you/go) to the party __________ (if/unless) she __________ (send) you an invitation card?

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

DIRECT AND  INDIRECT SPEECHES

  • We often have to give information about what people say or think.
  • To give such information, one has to use direct (quoted) speech, or indirect (reported) speech.
  • Direct/Quoted Speech
  • This is the saying of exactly what someone has said.
  • What a person says is within quotation (“….”)
  • What is said is word for word. For example,
  • “I will take you out tomorrow,” Timothy said.
  • He complained, “your phone is always off.”
  • Indirect/Reported Speech
  • There is no use of quotation to enclose what the person said.
  • What is said doesn’t have to be word for word.
  • The verb usually changes when reporting. This is because we normally report something said in the past.

 

  • The past tense is used as what was originally spoken was done in the past

 

Direct Speech                                                                    Indirect Speech

She said, “It is going to rain.”                                         She said it was going to rain.

The singer said, “I have been singing since 2010.”    The singer said he had been singing since 2010.

The teacher said, “I will teach tomorrow.”                 The teacher said he would teach the next day.

 

  • Expressions of Time if Reported on a Different Day
Direct Speech Indirect Speech
This (evening/afternoon/month etc)

Today

These (days/months etc)

Now

(a day/a month etc) after

Last weekend

Here

Next (week/year etc)

Tomorrow

Day after tomorrow

Yesterday

The day before yesterday

That

That day

Those

Then

(a day/a week/ etc)Before

The weekend before or the previous weekend

There

the following

the next day/ the following day

in two days time

the day before/ the previous day

two days before


ANSWERS TO SOME GRAMMAR EXERCISES

PARTS OF SPEECH

NOUNS

  • TYPICAL NOUN DERIVATIONS

Exercise 1

Word Noun
Clean Cleaner
Teach Teacher
Advise Advisor
Animate Animator
Audit Auditor
Govern Governor/ governance /government
Operate Operator/operation
Conduct Conductor
Negotiate Negotiator/ negotiation
Play Player/play/playwright
Supervise Supervisor
Determine Determination
Supply Supplier
Drum Drummer
Publish Publisher
Observe Observant/observation
Build Builder/building
Materialize Materialism
Capture Captive
Move Movement

 

 

Exercise 2

  1. Commitment
  2. Pronunciation
  3. Measurement
  4. Development
  5. Narrative
  6. Engineering
  7. Concentration
  8. Historian
  9. Installment
  10. Blindness
  • GENDER SENSITIVE LANGUAGE

 

PRONOUNS

  • PRONOUN CASE

 

  1. I sold my bike to Abdi. him
  2. I sold my bike to Abdi and Yussra. us
  3. I sold my bike to Abdi and Yussra. it
  4. The bike’s brake was bad. its
  5. Abdi gave the bike to Abdi and Yussra’s their
  6. The son promised to pay his parents for the bike. he
  7. The son’s girlfriend rode the bike into a fish pond. his
  8. The pond belongs to me and my family, and my family and I are unhappy. Us, we
  9. The fish’s temper is almost as bad as my temper. Its, mine
  10. Abdi and Yussra have offered to pay me and my family for the damage. They, us

 

(b)DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS

  1. This
  2. Those
  3. That
  4. These
  5. That

 

VERBS

  • TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS
  1. Junior likes Transitive
  2. Jenifer brushes her teeth every morning. Transitive
  3. I smile whenever I play games.

Smile: intransitive

Play:Transitive

  1. Richard sleeps 8 hours a day. Intransitive
  2. My boss offered me a new job. Transitive
  3. The horse runs Intransitive
  4. She promised me she would visit. Transitive
  5. The family works in the field everyday. Intransitive
  6. Njeri cooks me dinner. Transitive
  7. The food smells Intransitive
  8. I owe you hundred shillings. Transitive
  9. All the candidates passed the test. Transitive

 

  • PHRASAL VERBS
  • Fill in
  • Fall out
  • Do away with
  • Cut, in
  • Came down with
  • Get, across/over
  • Gotten back
  • Gives out
  • Given up
  • Hold, back

 

  • INFINITIVES

 

  • I started reading.

I started to read.

  • He stopped smoking.

He stopped to smoke.

  • Writing is more difficult than reading.

To write is more difficult than to read.

  • Jogging is a good exercise.

To jog is a good exercise.

  • I like cycling.

I like to cycle.

  • I enjoy swimming.

I enjoy to swim.

  • PHRASAL VERBS

 

  • Idiomatic Expressions

 

  • PARTICIPLES
  1. The students worked around the clock. They completed the project.

              Working around the clock, the students completed the project.

  1. The student was frustrated by lack of progress. The student dropped out of school.

Frustrated by the lack of progress, the student dropped out of school.

The student frustrated by lack of progress dropped out of school.

  1. The dog was wounded. The dog stumbled through the muddy field.

The wounded dog stumbled through the muddy field.

Wounded, the dog stumbled through the muddy field.

  1. The man threw out the television. The television was broken.

The man threw out the broken television.

  1. Martha was listening to loud music. Martha could not hear her parent calling.

Listening to the loud music, Martha could not hear her parent calling.

  1. The man was sitting in the library. He was reading a newspaper.

Sitting in the library, the man was reading a newspaper.

  1. She walked home. She met an old friend.

Walking home, she met an old friend.

  1. The dog wagged its tail. It bit the thief.

Wagging its tail, the dog bit the thief.

  1. The technician was working in the lab. He cut his finger.

Working in the lab, the technician cut his finger.

  1. Njoroge was relaxing on his chair. Njoroge fell asleep.

Relaxing on his chair, Njoroge fell asleep.

  1. The man was disappointed. He stomped his foot and left angrily.

Disappointed, the man stomped his foot and left angrily.

 

FUNCTIONS OF ADVERBS (MODIFIERS)

  1. The girl hardly ever believes what she is told.

It modifies the adverb ‘ever’.

  1. The very tall tree was cut this morning.

It modifies adjective ‘tall’.

  1. Certainly, the man chose the wrong way.

It modifies the sentence, ‘The man chose the wrong way.’

  1. We noticed that the cow was almost in the water.

It modifies prepositional phrase ‘in the water’.

  1. The new student gladly followed all the instructions given.

It modifies the verb ‘followed’.

  1. This wall was frantically painted.

It modifies the verb ‘painted’.

PHRASES

ADJECTIVE PHRASES

  1. He has bought a metallic

He has bought a door made of metal.

  1. Her husband wore a golden

Her husband wore a ring made of gold.

  1. A white cow was slaughtered.

A cow with white skin was slaughtered.

  1. He lives in a stone

He lives in a house built of stone.

  1. I have passed several sleepless

I have passed several nights without sleep.

  1. The white used the Ugandan

The white used the railway running through Uganda.

  1. Heroic deeds are worth praises.

Deeds of heroism are worth praises.

  1. Theirs was a brave

Theirs was an act of bravery.

  1. It was a horrible

It was a movie full of horror.

  1. Many Kenyans talk about English

Many Kenyans talk about the league of England.

  1. This teacher is a wealthy

This teacher is a person of great wealth.

 

PREPOSITIONAL PHRASES

  1. In , in Nairobi
  2. On, on Friday night
  3. In, in the kitchen cupboard
  4. Without, without excessively worrying
  5. From, from yesterday’s long exercise
  6. With, with malaria
  7. Without, without difficulty
  8. To, to their hotel comfortably
  9. In his pyjamas
  10. Instead of, instead of porridge
  11. on behalf, on behalf of his friend
  12. in case of, in case of fire
  13. in spite of, in spite of the rains
  14. on, on the whole
  15. in, in general

 

CLAUSES

NOUN CLAUSES

Exercise 1

  • That you hate him is your own problem.
  • You cannot rely on what David says.
  • It is true that his father has passed on.
  • The news that more than 100 soldiers were killed is a big lie.
  • It was unfortunate that the terrorist escaped.
  • He wondered whether the King learnt of the news.
  • I will punish whoever fails this test.
  • I can give this to whoever pleases me most.

Exercise 2

  1. I wonder how long we should wait for her.
  2. Do you know what the weather will be?
  3. He told me that he would not go.
  4. I don’t know where he has gone.
  5. Moris asked how my family was.

 

ADJECTIVE CLAUSES

  • I met Akinyi in town. Akinyi is a thief.

I met Akinyi, who is a thief, in town.

  • The man was sick. He looked very pale.

The man who was sick looked very pale.

  • He was sitting in the emergency room. It was very crowded.

The emergency room, where the he was sitting, was very crowded.

  • A nurse was nearby. The man called to her.

The man called the nurse who was nearby.

  • The nurse called the doctor. The doctor came quickly.

The doctor, who was called by the nurse, came quickly.

  • The doctor asked him to lie down. The doctor looked very worried.

The doctor, who looked very worried, asked him to lie down.

  • The doctor gave the man an injection. The injection made him go to sleep.

The doctor gave the man an injection, which made him go to sleep.

CONDITIONAL CLAUSES

  1. She will not forgive you unless you tell her the truth.
  2. We will not pass the exams if we don’t work harder.
  3. If she takes a painkiller, she will feel much better soon.

Unless she takes a painkiller, she will not feel much better soon.

  1. If they will be here next week, they will try to go to Warda’s party.

Unless they will be here next week, they will not try to go to Warda’s party.

  1. Will you go to the party if she sends you an invitation card?

FORM 3 WRITING

BUILDING SENTENCE SKILLS AND PARAGRAPHING

COHESION IN PARAGRAPHS

  • Cohesion refers to how a group of sentences “hang together.”
  • Consider the paragraph below:

Some astonishing questions about the nature of the universe have been raised by scientists studying black holes in space. A black hole is created by the collapse of a dead star into a point perhaps no larger than a marble. So much matter compressed into so little volume changes the fabric of space around it in puzzling ways.

 

USING TRANSITIONAL WORDS AND PHRASES

  • Transitions are words or phrases that specify a relationship between sentences and between paragraphs.
  • They help direct the reader from one idea to another.
  • Below are some common transitional words:
To Specify Sequence again, also, and, and then, besides, finally, first . . . second . . . third, furthermore, last, moreover, next, still, too
To Specify Time after a few days, after a while, afterward, as long as, as soon as, at last, at that time, before, earlier, immediately, in the meantime, in the past, lately, later, meanwhile, now, presently, simultaneously, since, so far, soon, then, thereafter, until, when
To Specify Comparison again, also, in the same way, likewise, once more, similarly
To Specify Contrast although, but, despite, even though, however, in contrast, in spite of, instead, nevertheless, nonetheless, on the contrary, on the one hand . . . on the other hand, regardless, still, though, yet
To Specify Examples after all, for example, for instance, indeed, in fact, of course, specifically, such as, the following example, to illustrate
To Specify Cause and Effect accordingly, as a result, because, consequently, for this reason, hence, if . . . then, since, so, then, therefore, thereupon, thus, to this end
To Specify Place above, adjacent to, below, beyond, closer to elsewhere, far, farther on, here, near, nearby, opposite to, there, to the left, to the right
To Specify Concession although it is true that, granted that, I admit that, it may appear that, naturally, of course
To Specify Summary, Repetition, or Conclusion as a result, as has been noted, as I have said, as mentioned earlier, as we have seen, in any event, in conclusion, in other words, in short, on the whole, therefore, to summarize

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 PUNCTUATION

The Colon

  • The colon expands on the sentence that precedes it, often introducing a list that demonstrates or elaborates whatever was previously stated.

Examples

  • There are three things I hate: eating while walking, being late for the lesson, and being abused.
  • She brought various fruits: bananas, mangoes, guavas, and apples.
  • Your problem is one: talking too much.
  • The colon is also used to divide the hour from the minutes in writing a time in English.

Examples

  • 12:30
  • 11:10

THE SEMICOLON

  • The semicolon is somewhere between a full stop and a comma.
  • Semicolons can be used  to join phrases and sentences that are thematically linked without having to use a conjunction, for example,

I did not go out; it was raining.

Jane is tall; Albert is short.

DASHES

  • Dashes can be used to add parenthetical statements or comments in much the same way as you would use brackets.
  • In formal writing you should use the bracket rather than the dash as a dash is considered less formal.
  • Dashes can be used to create emphasis in a sentence.
Examples
  • He might emerge the winner – you can’t tell..
  • She might come to the party – you never know.

 

 

 

PERSONAL WRITING

  • REMINDERS
  • We keep track of everything we need to do.
  • Your reminder will help you get things done by including relevant information like phone numbers.
  • A reminder helps one remember important occasions and appointments.

Sample Reminder 1

                                  REMINDER                  

               APPOINTMENT WITH MR. KANJIRA

DATE: 11th February, 2016

TIME: 4.15 p.m.

PLACE: Staffroom

I will be having an appointment in the staffroom with Mr. Kanjira. To carry with me are:

·        Two pens (blue and black)

·        Notebook

I should be punctual.

 

Sample Reminder 2

                      MY REMINDER
DAY DATE TIME EVENT PLACE
Saturday 13th March 3.00 pm Pschology Lectures Room 45
Friday 19th March 2.00 pm Appointment with Dr James St Joseph’s Hospital
Monday 22nd March 8.00 am Guidance and counselling lesson College chapel
Tuesday 23rd March 4.30 pm Shopping TRM

 

  • Personal Journals

As discussed earlier.

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. SOCIAL WRITING
  • NOTES OF THANKS
  • A Thank You Note is thoughtful way to express your gratitude and appreciation for someone who has done something great for you.
  • The note doesn’t have to be long to be meaningful. Your thoughts count more.

Elements of a Thank You Note

  1. Date
  2. Salutation
  3. Personalizing the note. Think of one or two specific instances when you were helped by the person.
  4. Concluding the note. Say thank you again to the person.
  5. Sign

Sample Thank You Note

9th April, 2016

 

Dear Ms Becky:

 

I am writing to thank you for everything you did last year to help me prepare for my exams.

 

I really appreciated when you asked me to be coming to see you whenever I had difficulty in your subject. You also advised me to work harder in class. But more than that, you guided me on how to answer questions in the exams.

 

All the support you gave me helped me receive the grade I have received. I could have never received anything near this grade without you. Thank you.

 

 

Sincerely,

Murkomen Abdi

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • CONGRATULATORY NOTES
  • We always recognize the accomplishments by others.
  • Writing a congratulatory note adds warmth to the relationships.
  • We write congratulations notes incase of the following achievements:
  • Promotion(job, class)
  • Retirement
  • Graduation
  • New title
  • New job
  • Scholarship
  • Successful speech
  • Birth
  • Engagement
  • Marriage
  • Winning competition

The Dos when Writing Congratulations Note

  • Write soon after hearing the news.
  • Use the word “congratulations” early.
  • Tell the person how impressed you are.
  • Express your wishes for the person’s continued success.

Steps to Writing Congratulatory Note

STEP EXPLANATION EXAMPLE
Writing Salutation The person might like see their own name written. Dear Aliow,
Offering Congratulations ·        Done early.

·        Mention the occasion.

Congratulation on your promotion to deputy principal!
Express your happiness. Tell them how impressed you are. I was thrilled when I heard the news!
Relate the person’s achievement with something. Relate something about the person that could have led to their achievement. Ever since we worked together at Maragua Muslim Girls’ School, I knew you were one of the best. I am very glad that your passion for teaching has been recognised.
Sending wishes for continued success. ·        Assure them that there achievement is just one of the many others on nthe way.

·        Wish them the best.

Best of luck in your new position. I hope that this is just the start of the many more successes to come.
Closing ·        Add a closing remark.

·        Choose from the list:

(i)               Sincerely,

(ii)             Sincerely yours,

(iii)           Regards,

(iv)            Warm regards,

(v)             Yours Truly,

(vi)            Cordially,

(vii)          Best wishes,

·        Write your name after this

Best Wishes,

 

Fardoly Mohamed

 

Exercise

Juma Maxwel, your elser brother has just got a new job after working in another company for two years. In his new place of work he will be receiving twice the salary he used to be offered in the previous company. Write him a note congratulating him.

  • Condolences Notes
  • Writing a condolence note is not an easy thing to do. This is because we often don’t know what to say. Because of this, we may even put the task off until the time to write has seemingly passed.
  • In a condolence note, we reflect our genuine thoughts and feelings.
  • Keep your message short yet thoughtful.
  • Try as much as possible to mention a fond or funny memory of the deceased if you knew them.

Steps to Writing Condolence Note

  • Introduce your note. Example,

I was deeply saddened when I learned about Joan’s passing.

Or

I was deeply saddened by the news of Joan’s passing.

Or

We are very saddened to hear your recent loss of Joan.

  • Express your condolences, referring to the person’s death as a “loss”. For example,

Please accept my heartfelt sympathies for your loss. My thoughts are with you and your family during this difficult time.

  • Share a short story or memory you have about the deceased. It will allow the bereaved know how much their loved ones meant to you. Probably it will give them a reason to at least smile if not to laugh. If possible, tell them that the deceased will be missed. For example,

Joan was a source of inspiration to me. I will never forget her!

Or

Joan spent her time serving others. I am very grateful o have known her.

If you don’t know the person who has passed, you may say:

I will always remember your stories about…..

Or

I will always remember how much you loved ….

  • Acknowledge the cause of death especially if it comes after a long period of suffering or illness. For example,

I know Joan experienced a great deal of suffering since she was diognosed with cancer. I pray that you find comfort in knowing that she is no longer in any pain.

  • Offer some assistance. Give specific ways in which you would like to help. For example,

In this stressful moment, please let me know whether I can help in any way. I would like to ……….

  • Sum up your note using an appropriate phrase. You can choose from the list below:
  • You are in my thoughts
  • With Deepest Sympathy
  • With Heartfelt Condolences,
  • Thinking of you
  • My sincere sympathy
  • I’m praying for you

Exercise

Your friend’s sister has passed on following the road accident on the eve of the new year. That same day you spend most of the time with her before she meets her tragedy. Write a note to Angela expressing how you feel about the sudden death of Mary, her sister.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • TELEGRAMS
  • A telegram is a text message sent by wire using Morse code.
  • The codes are transcribed into language and printed.
  • Telegrams can be sent all over the world within a couple of hours.

 

  1. Wording telegrams
  • The right way of wording is economical, while the wrong way is wasteful.
  • Avoid unnecessary words—words that might be omitted without impairing the sense of the message.

 

  1. Writing figures
  • The suffixes ‘th’, ‘rd’, ‘nd’ appended to figures are counted as words.
  • Spell the words as ‘fourth’ instead of ‘4th ’etc.
  1. Get rid of small connecting words such as ‘a’, ‘the, etc’.
  2. Make use of sharp sentences and phrases.

 

 

Sample Telegram

                           KENYAN POST AND TELEGRAM

TELEGRAM

Sender’s Name: _______________________________________________-

Sender’s Address: _________________________________________________

Receipient’s Name: ________________________________________________

Receipient’s Address: ______________________________________________

 

Dear Allan,

 

HEARD YOU WERE LITTLE BIT UNDER WEATHER AT THE MOMENT [STOP]JUST REST UP AND LET THE DOCTORS DO THEIR MAGIC[STOP] YOU WILL BE UP AND ABOUT IN NO TIME

 

Exercise

Your sister who lives in Chicago, USA, has delivered of a baby girl. Write her a telegram congratulating her on arrival of the new baby.

 

 

 

 

  1. PUBLIC WRITING
  • Letters of Application
  • Also known as cover letter, a letter of application is a document sent together with your curriculum vitae to provide additional information on your skills to your prospective employer.
  • Detailed information on why you are qualified for the job should be provided.
  • This letter will let your prospective employer know what position you are applying for.

Letter of Application Format

In the table that follows, all that should be included in a letter of application are captured.

Item Explanation Example
Sender’s Address ·        Write the name(yours or an institution’s)

·        Postal address follows.

·        Write the name of the city after.

KIMITI NJERI

P.O. BOX 777 – 40400

SUNA-MIGORI

Date In full 23RD July, 2016
Receiver’s Address ·        Start with the position of the recipient.

·        Write the name of the institution.

·        Add the box number.

·        Lastly, write the town or city.

 
Salutation Let it be formal.  
In regards to (written ‘RE’)    
First Paragraph Here:

·        Mention the job you are applying for.

·        Mention where you found the listing.

 
Middle Paragraphs ·        Mention why your skills and experience are a good fit for the job.

·

 
Last Paragraph ·        Say thank you to your recipient for considering your letter.

·        Note how you will follow up.

 
Closing    
Signature ·        End your letter with your signature.

·        Write your name after it

 

 

 

Sample Letter of Application

                                                                                                           Vijana Werevu High School

P.O. Box 888 – 30200

MACHAKOS

 

31ST January, 2016

 

 

The Director

Makusudi Secondary School

P.O. Box 434 – 50000

NAIROBI KENYA

 

Dear Sir/Madam:

 

RE: ENGLISH/LITERATURE TEACHER

 

I am writing to express my interest in the position of teaching English and Literature that has arisen with your school and that was listed in the Wednesday Nation on 31st  December, 2015. I believe I am an excellent fit for this position, given a chance. Besides teaching the two, I also teach History and Physical Education. I am a 2013, diploma graduate from Nikufunze Teachers’ Training College.

 

I am a conscientious person who works hard and pays attention to details. I am also quick to learn new skills as well as to learn from others. I am keen to work for a school with a great reputation like Makusudi Secondary School. I have the enthusiasm and determination to make ensure that I make success  of the position when offered it.

 

I enjoy training students and helping them build confidence in their ability to achieve, both academically  and socially. In addition, I have computer skills that will be a great asset when developing class resources.

 

Find my curriculum vitae attached.

 

Thank you for taking the time to consider this application and I look forward to hearing from you at your earliest convenience.

 

Yours faithfully,

[sign here]

 

Seen Later

 

 

 

Exercise

A job has just been advertised. You have been a doctor for three years. When you see this advert you feel like you have to apply for the job. Write your curriculum vitae you will attached in your letter of application.

 

  1. STUDY WRITING
  • SYNOPSIS
  • Synopsis answers the question: What is the story of the novel, play, etc?
  • Just write what happens in the book.
  • Often not long, so try to capture only pertinent details.
  • Go into the detail about the setting.

The River and the Source Synopsis

THE RIVER AND THE SOURCE

 

The novel begins with the birth of a girl child.  ……….………….…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

Exercise

Assume you are the author of “Caucasian Chalk Circle”. The play has not been published. When you ask the publishers to publish it, they tell you to write the synopsis of the play before they consider publishing it. Write its synopsis.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • REPORTS
  • A report is a systematic, well organized document which defines a problem, and analyses it.
  • Reports are written following research or study on a currently trending topic.
  • There are short and long reports.
  • A report has sections, and sub sections
  • There are elements found in both the short and the long reports. They include:
  • Heading
  • Here we include things such as:
  • Date
  • Officer to whom the report is presented
  • Committee members (if done as a group)
  • Terms of reference. This is where we write the objective of the study.
  • Methods of data collection. How the information was gathered is discussed here. The different methods of collecting data are use of:
  • Questionnaires
  • Observation
  • Interviews

 

  • State what you learned.
  • Conclusions
  • State how the findings can help improve the situation.

 

  • Reports are always:
  • Accurate;
  • Concise;
  • Clear; and
  • Well structured.

Sample Report

REPORT ON WHY MOST GIRLS AT NAIVASHA CHRISTIAN SCHOOL DROP OUT OF SCHOOL

Introduction

The principal asked a group of students to find out the reasons why there is high drop out among girls at Naivasha School. The committee included:

1.      Njagi Cool

2.      Kimotho Macha

3.      Jane Kilonzo

The study started on 3rd February and ended on 10th of the same month.

 

Procedure

 The group used different methods to gather the information. The following are the methods used collect data:

(a)   Questionnaire

About five students, among them three girls were issued with questionnaires that they filled with ease. At first they were not ready to do so but when they were assured a token, they were more willing to respond. They took approximately ten minutes each to provide response to the questions and prompts.

 

(b)   Interviews

One of the committee members, Kimotho Macha, was appointed to lead in interviewing two students. The two students gave several reasons for the high drop out. One of them even wanted to have been included in the committee. The interviews were conducted at the school quadrangle.

 

(c)    Observation

One week was enough for the committee members to study the other students. It was noted, in the way they talk in small groups, why they drop out. In fact one of the female students left the school before the actual day of submitting this report.  

 

Findings

 

It was found out that:

(a)    Since most girls are idle during the weekends, they yield to pressure from the fellow students who push them into leaving the school. While at home, majority fail to get admission in other schools.

(b)   Some of the students are not satisfied with the quality of the meals cooked . They feel they don’t match the amount of money they pay.

(c)    Add other two

Conclusions

 

The committee concluded that:

(a)    Some of the girls do not know how to make use of their free time.

(b)   Some of the students value food more than education services offered at the school.

Recommendations

 

(a)    The students should be guided on how to benefit from their free time.

(b)   The quality of meals should be improved or at least provide alternative diet to those not satisfied.

Report compiled by: Amos Ngotho

Signature:

Position:  FORM 2 STUDENT

 

 

Exercise

It has been noted that students at Kinya High abuse drugs. The deputy principal calls you one day and asks you to form a committee to investigate the causes of drug abuse at your school. Write the report to contain:

  • Introduction
  • Three methods of data collection
  • Four findings
  • Four conclusions
  • Four recommendations.

 

  • ARGUMENTATIVE ESSAYS
  • The argumentative essay is a genre of writing that requires the student to investigate a topic; collect, generate, and evaluate evidence; and establish a position on the topic in a concise manner.
  • The structure of the argumentative essay is held together by the following.
  • A clear, concise, and defined thesis statement that occurs in the first paragraph of the essay.

In the first paragraph of an argument essay, students should set the context by reviewing the topic in a general way.

  • Clear and logical transitions between the introduction, body, and conclusion.

Without logical progression of thought, the reader is unable to follow the essay’s argument, and the structure will collapse. Transitions should wrap up the idea from the previous section and introduce the idea that is to follow in the next section.

  • Body paragraphs that include evidential support.

Each paragraph should be limited to the discussion of one general idea.

  • Evidential support (whether factual, logical, statistical, or anecdotal).

The argumentative essay requires well-researched, accurate, detailed, and current information to support the thesis statement and consider other points of view.

  • A conclusion that does not simply restate the thesis, but readdresses it in light of the evidence provided.

Do not introduce any new information into the conclusion; rather, synthesize the information presented in the body of the essay. Restate why the topic is important, review the main points, and review your thesis. You may also want to include a short discussion of more research that should be completed in light of your work.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. INSTITUTIONAL WRITING
  • NOTIFICATIONS OF MEETINGS
  • A notice of meeting is sent to members of a particular group to inform them of the:
  • Time of the meeting
  • Date of the meeting
  • Location of the meeting
  • Information to be discussed. This is where the agenda come.

Writing a Notice of Meeting

To write a good notice of meeting, follow the steps that follow:

  • Write the name of the organization/institution at the top of the page.
  • Write “Notice of Meeting” a few lines down. Write “Notice of Public Meeting” if your meeting will be open to the public.
  • Below write the name of the group.
  • In the body of the notice, include such things like:
  • Time of the meeting
  • Date of the meeting
  • Location of the meeting
  • Agenda of the meeting
  • Any pertinent information
  • Sign off

 

Sample Notice of Meeting

                      USHIKWAPO SHIKAMANA MIXED DAY SECONDARY SCHOOL

NOTICE OF MEETING

                                                           DRAMA CLUB

 

To All Drama Club Members:

 

RE: DRAMA CLUB MEETING

 

This is to inform all members that the club will hold a meeting on 2nd February,2016 from 4.20 p.m. at the school chapel.

The following business will be transacted during this meeting:

·        Preliminaries;

·        Confirmation of previous minutes;

·        Matters arising;

·        Rehearsals for drama festival;

·        Welcoming the trainer;

·        Raising money to buy costumes;

·        Any other business; and

·        Adjournment.

You are requested to be punctual for the meeting and to come with writing materials. Refreshments will be served.

 

Yours Sincerely

[sign here]

Kijiko Kirefu

CLUB SECRETARY

 

 

Exercise

You are the school head prefect. You want to call for the urgent  prefects’ meeting.  Notify them of the meeting.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • AGENDA
  • An agenda is the list of activities in a meeting and the order in which they should be taken up.
  • Any organized meeting requires a well written agenda.
  • If the agenda is not clearly written, the result will be that the meeting will become over-long, inefficient, or even slog.
  • Agenda is written and handed to the members participating in a meeting prior to the meeting.
  • Most secretaries prefer including the agenda in the notice of meetings.

 

Steps to Writing an Agenda

  • Write the name of the institution. If possible, have a the institution letterhead.
  • Give your agenda a title. Write “AGENDA”, “MEETING” and the name of the group to hold the meeting.
  • Include the date, time, and venue of the meeting.
  • Introduce your agenda.
  • List the items to be discussed. Start with preliminaries, then reading and confirmation of previous minutes, followed by matters arising(some people write: unfinished business), then list all the other items to be discussed. From there add “any other business” and lastly, “adjournment”.

Sample Agenda Note to Group Members

                         NIPE NIKUPE MUSLIM BOYS’ HIGH SHOOL

                                   AGENDA OF THE MEETING OF SCOUTS CLUB

DATE: 24TH JANUARY, 2016

TIME: 9.00 AM

VENUE: SCHOOL REFECTORY

 

There will be the second meeting of the year with the following items to be discussed:

·        Preliminaries

·        Reading and confirmation of previous minutes

·        Matters arising

·        Camping trip

·        Planting flowers

·        Any other business

·        Adjournment

 

Sign

Denis Benjam

CLUB SECRETARY

 

 

 

 

  • MINUTE WRITING
  • Minutes of what is discussed is written soon after the meeting.
  • During the meeting, the secretary only takes notes.
  • Minutes are the official records of a group in an organization.
  • It is crucial that they be accurate as they are legal record of the proceedings of that group.

Minutes Format

ELEMENT                  EXPLANATION
Heading The heading comprise:

·        Name of the group;

·        Date of the meeting;

·        Time of the meeting; and

·        Place where the meeting was held.

Present We write the names of all the members present here.
Not Present ·        Members who fail to attend the meeting.

·        At times they are classified first, as Absent with Apology, then, as Absent.

·        In other organizations, secretaries only write “Members Absent”. They write in brackets “Pre-Arranged” for those who send their regrets.

·        Either ways seem acceptable.

In Attendance Name(s) of people who attend the meeting but are non members of the group are written under this.
Preliminaries ·        It is the introductory remark made before the meeting.

·        Included are prayers, welcoming members by the chair, and congratulating members on being punctual.

Confirmation of Previous Minutes We include:

·        Reading of the minutes;

·        Confirmation of the minutes by a member, and seconding by another;

·        Approval of the minutes.

Matters Arising ·        Problems or questions arising from the previous meeting are discussed here.

·        It is also referred to as “unfinished business”.

New Business Key to be captured are:

·        The issue discussed as a problem.

·        The solution reached.

Any other Business Subjects that members mention after the main subjects have been discussed. Not discussed exhaustively as the main ones.
Adjournment When meeting ends. Date and time of the next meeting is usually announced.
Approval of Minutes ·        The minutes of one meeting are normally approved at the next meeting.

·        Once approved both the secretary and the chair append their signatures.

 

Sample Minutes

 

WILDLIFE CLUB MEETING HELD IN THE SCHOOL REFECORY ON 13TH FEBRUARY, 2016, AT 4.00 PM

 

 

MEMBERS PRESENT

1.      Noisemaker Awuor – Chair

2.      Beaker Laboraory – Secretary

3.      Catherine Njagi – Treasurer

4.      Sukuma Wiki – Member

5.      Kijiko Povu

6.      Jemimah Akinyi

7.      Jeremy Kanyari

MEMBERS NOT PRESENT

1.      Alot Manumu

2.      Kiny Abiro

IN ATTENDANCE

Kibaki Akello – Club Patron

MIN 1/2/2016: Preliminaries

 

Meeting was called to order at 4.01 pm by the club chair. She welcomed all members and congratulated everyone on keeping time.

 

MIN 2/2/2016: Confirmation of the Previous Minutes

 

Minutes from the meeting on 12th January, 2016 was read. It was confirmed as the true records of what was transacted by Annabel and seconded by Felix Kimutai. It was therefore approved without modification.

 

MIN 3/2/2016: Matters Arising

1.      A member wanted the date for commencing trees planting be announced.

2.      A member asked that drinks should be served whenever a meeting is held.

MIN 4/2/2016: Registration of New Members

 

It was discussed that new members was to be registered. This was a result of many students who had completed school last year. Registration was to start in a week’s time. Each new member was to pay sum of sh. 250 before being registered.

MIN 5/2/2016: Trip to Mau Forest

 

Members discussed the trip to Mau Forest scheduled for 1st March. Each registered member was requested to remit their Sh. 300 contribution through the club patron before the end of February. A member requested that the school management be asked to assist in making the trip a success.

 

Other things to carry included:

·        Toiletries

·        Snacks

·        Enough clothing

MIN 6/2/2016: Any Other Business

1.      A member asked whether new members were eligible to visit the Mau Forest.

2.      A member wanted to know when the rabbits owned by the club could be sold in order to supplement their budget for the trip.

MIN 9/2/2016: Adjournment

12th March,2016 5.00 pm and school refectory were fixed as the date, time and place for the next meeting.  There being no other business, the meeting was adjourned at 6.13 pm.

 

 

MINUTES APPROVED BY:

                                                 SECRETARY                                                            CHAIRPERSON

NAME             …………………………………………………………………….  ………………………………………………………………

SIGN                …………………………………………………………………….   ……………………………………………………………..

DATE               ……………………………………………………………………..  ………………………………………………………………

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • MEMORANDA
  • A memorandum is a brief written message sent from one person or department, to another person or a group in an organization.
  • A memo has twofold purpose:
  • It brings attention to a problem; and
  • It solves that problem.
  • They inform the reader about new information such as price increases, or by persuading them to take an action.

Memo Format

FORMAT EXPLANATION EXAMPLE
Institution/Organization’s Name If possible add the letterhead. HABA NA HABA MIXED SECONDARY SCHOOL
Heading ·        State that this is a memorandum.

·        The words “internal memo” are usually written then underlined.

Internal Memo
Reference Written differently depending on the organization. Ref 3/2015
“To” field ·        Write the job title of the person you are sending the memo. TO: All Teachers
“Cc” field ·        Indicate who will receive a “Courtesy Copy” of the memo.

·        It is directed to a person who should remain informed.

CC: Principal
“From” field Write your job title. FROM: The Deputy Principal
Date Write the complete date, spelling out the month DATE:11th January,2016 or

DATE: January 11th, 2016

“Subject” field ·        It is a line that gives the reader an idea of what the memo is about.

·        Be specific but concise.

SUBJECT: SUBMISSION OF END TERM EXAMS RESULTS
Body ·        Two issues are discussed: the problem and the solution.

·        Introduce the problem in the first paragraph.

·        Give the solution to the problem in the second paragraph. Suggest the actions that should be taken.

·        The third paragraph(normally the last) close the memo with a positive and warm summary.

As of 3rd August, 2015, only two teachers had submitted the end of term two examination results. The results were supposed to have entered into the computer by 3rd.

 

You are requested to increase your speed in marking the remaining papers. Before 7th of this month, ensure you have entered the marks.

 

We will be glad to see all that done by the newly set deadline. We wish all the best as you work towards meeting that deadline.

Signing off ·        Sign

·        Write your name

Yours Sincerely,

[signature]

Mr. Mamboga Japheth

     

 

 

English Notes, Functional Skills, Oral Literature Poetry Guides

 

INTRODUCTION TO THE ENGLISH SYLLABUS IN KENYAN SECONDARY SCHOOLS

The syllabus covers the following areas as examined in the Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (KCSE).

PAPER ONE

These are the areas examined under paper one

  1. Functional writing—this entails items or compositions written for a specific purpose; For example, applying for a job, writing minutes for meetings, writing reports, recipes, memos etc.
  2. Cloze test—this is a test on how to best choose vocabularies or words that fill blanks in the given context of the passage. It is also a test on knowledge of categories of words and functions of those categories in a sentence.
  3. Functional skills—these are language mannerisms skills. They are practical skills on how to behave in a polite, creative and effective way when using the English language. They are skills on etiquette, spellings, pronunciation, speaking, dramatisation and listening.

PAPER TWO

Paper two has the following areas

  1. Comprehension—this covers reading and comprehension skills.
  2. Extracts or excerpts from set text—this is to test the learner’s critical and analytical skills.
  3. Oral Literature—these are skills on oral stories, songs, riddles, proverbs etc that form an important part of the African culture. This area focuses on analytical and critical skills as well as morality.
  4. Poetry—The appreciation and study of poetry and poetic language.
  5. Grammar—language use, construction of sentences, linking paragraphs, paraphrasing, creating and modifying situations etc.

PAPER THREE

Paper three is about creative and critical writing.

  1. The first question is always about writing an imaginative composition or a critical essay.
  2. The second question is always based on a compulsory set book in which the candidate writes a critical essay basing illustrations on it and his or her society.
  3. The third question is always about other three set books that are usually optional so that candidate has to choose one question to answer a critical essay based on society and the book.

Writing legibly

The main aim of writing is to communicate. There is no point in writing anything illegible as information is therefore inaccessible and the purpose of wring no achieved.

So, to write legibly and coherently observe the following:

  1. a) Be neat, avoid unnecessary erasure, writing in the margin etc. And space your words.
  2. b) Give titles and subtitles or headlines to your texts.
  3. c) Divide your work into paragraphs.
  4. d) Use punctuation marks correctly.
  5. e) Write words in their proper form, for example, the small ‘i’ must always have a dot as the head.
  6. f) Use capital letters, small letters and articles well.

Debating Skills

A debate is a formal discussion on a contentious or controversial issue between two groups of people. To debate effectively, members of each group plus the hosts must understand the debating rules, schedule and skills.

The debating schedule is fixed by the hosts and indicates the time the debate is supposed to begin and the two opposing teams. The schedule also indicates the format of debate like how many members per team, how many proposers and opposers and how many minutes allocated per speaker. It is also important for the participants to know if they can use the entire stage, be fixed at the microphone or dress in a defined way.

When preparing for debate

  1. Identify the topic and prepare to support and oppose it. It is important to try both sides so that you can best present your arguments objectively and knowledgeably.
  2. Carry out a mock debate from the opposing side and proposing side and work on the use of non verbal cues.
  3. Research thoroughly on the topic from the magazines, newspapers, internet, teachers and books.
  4. Note down whatever you research that is relevant by indicating the date of events, the scholars of original information etc so that when you use the information during debates you quote books and people from whom you sourced.

During debate

  1. Share responsibilities i.e. first speaker, second speaker, conclusion, rebuttal etc.
  2. Speak in a confident and audible manner.
  3. Use intonation and other non-verbal cues to make your argument convincing.
  4. Observe time allocated
  5. Listen carefully to the other speakers so that you can find weakness in their arguments and dismiss them when your turn comes up.
  6. Maintain eye contact with the audience and judges.
  7. In situations where you forget points or you are not sure of what you are saying, maintain a straight and confident face so that the audience can believe your lie.
  8. Always observe turn taking. In case of a need to interrupt, do it through the chair’s indulgence.

Using a dictionary

All words in a dictionary are alphabetically arranged in order of all letters of the words respectively. This is for convenience of usage.

A dictionary will help he user

–Find out the correct spellings of a word.

–Identify how the word functions in a sentence e.g. a verb, conjunction, adjective etc.

–Get the meaning of the word.

–Get the correct pronunciation.

–Find the synonyms the homophones of a word.

–Identify compound nouns that can be derived from the word. E.g. Over—overcrowd, over react, overachieve, overwork etc.

Some words in a dictionary are polysemy i.e. they have several meanings depending on the context. It is therefore important when checking up the meaning of a word in the dictionary to know the context where you want to apply the meaning.  E.g. Minute can refer to time or something tiny.

Composition writing

When writing a composition consider the following:

  1. The composition should be one a quarter page long A4 size.
  2. The story must be written clearly and legibly. Avoid dirty work and erasure.
  3. A good composition would have a good and creating introduction full of description to set the mood of the story and create suspense or curiosity in the examiner.
  4. A creative composition should include a few episodes of dialogue followed by vivid description. The reader must see and experience what is happening. The story should involve at least the sense of sight, sense of touch, and sense of hearing plus thinking in the description. Let us see what the characters were wearing, how the weather was like, your environment etc. Let us feel how you felt: joy, sadness, ecstasy etc. Let us hear what you heard: the sounds, the screaming, the hollow laughers etc. Let us know what was going through your mind—your interior monologue at the time.
  5. When writing the story make sure you have a short plot that runs only for a few minutes. For example you can write a story about meeting a friend in town to close a business deal but during the negotiations, something happens, so you concentrate first on describing the meeting place, the weather, how he is dressed what are your expectations etc; so that, you set the mood and the curiosity in the reader.
  6. Be ambitious in your story. Let the examiner know that you are modern and trendy. In your story be successful, rich and even still ambitious. Show awareness of trending topics, modern technology like phones, vehicles, houses, streets in the city, TV sets, laptops etc.Research on the recent titles of phones, clothes and current affairs so that you can weave them together in your story.
  7. The setting of the story should be urbanized. Avoid going to the forest, and avoid exhausted plots like being hijacked by gigantic men, accidents and weddings. Come up with something short, unique and original if you want to score an A in composition.
  8. Make sure your punctuation is correct. Learn how to punctuate dialogue and how to paragraph dialogue in a story. Be watchful of capital and small letters when writing. Always start proper nouns with capital letters and always end your sentences with the final punctuation marks.
  9. Arrange your work in clear paragraphs and be sure to flower your work using modern terminologies, a proverb or an idiom and quotes where possible but avoid over used phrases or clichés.

Articles

Articles are very short words placed in front of nouns. They tell us whether we are referring to a noun in a specific or general way.

Definite article is the. It is definite because it is used when the speaker and the listener know what is being talked about.  E.g. The desk that you asked for is this. The man has come. The Indian Ocean. The guitar.

–It is also used when talking about nationalities because they are familiar. E.g. The Kenyan, the Briton, the American etc.

–It is also used when referring to inventions because they are known and studied. E.g. Who invented the computer, the telegram, the electricity etc.

–Use with superlative forms because they refer to unique things or people within a group who are known.  E.g. She is the tallest in our class. Mount Everest is the tallest in the world. USA is the richest country in the world.

Indefinite articles  ‘a’ and ‘an’ are used with singular nouns. ‘a’ is used with nouns that begin with consonant  sounds like a cow, a goat, a stick etc.  whereas ‘an’ is used with nouns that begin with vowel sounds like an elephant, an umbrella, an hour etc.

–The indefinite article ‘a’ and ‘an’ is mainly used when mentioning something or someone for the first time and in cases where not all parties are aware of who or what is being talked about.  E.g. I saw a man run away.  A lady came was asking for you.  I need an umbrella.

Exercise

Fill in each blank space with an appropriate article.

__man came into the room with__ woman carrying __umbrella. They took their seats and ordered tea. __ man whispered something in __ woman’s ear. She remained transfixed for a while before lurching forward and hugging him . __ umbrella which was  on the table fell.

Capitalization

A capital letter is used to

  1. a) begin a sentence. g. He is coming.
  2. b) To begin direct speech. g. “Go home my friend!” he commanded.
  3. c) To write the personal pronoun ‘I’. E.g. John and I are brave.
  4. d) To begin proper nouns. g. Ghana   Romeo and Juliet   Kenya  etc.
  5. e) Days of the week and months. g. Sunday   Monday   January   February  etc.
  6. f) Names of organisations and religious bodies g. The Catholic Church,    Undugu Society of Kenya etc.
  7. g) In abbreviations e.g. KBC , KTN,   N. Mbithi etc.

Turn taking

Turn taking involves skills in making a good conversation.

When having a conversation observe the following

a)Listen carefully when others talk.

  1. b) Show interest in what they are saying.
  2. c) Encourage them to continue by nodding your head, using interjections like wow! Eheh! Etc.
  3. d) Speak only when it your turn to do so.

You can tell when it is your turn by

1) Listening for pauses in the other party’s speech.

  1. Predict when he will come to an end.
  2. Watch the body language of the other speaker that might indicate that he is done speaking e.g. leaning backwards.
  3. Noting when a question requires your response.
  4. Noting when the other speaker begins to repeat himself needlessly using interjections like ‘you know’ ‘I mean’.
  5. Noting the other speaker’s intonation patterns e.g. the falling tone indicates finality.

Group Discussions

To effectively participate in a group discussion

  1. Select a topic—choose from those provided especially one that you can manage as a group.
  2. Choose a chairperson and a secretary.

A chairperson to

–guide the group

–to call upon individual members to contribute.

–Keep the discussion moving and guide from digression or going out of topic.

–keep emotions in check.

A secretary to

–record important points of discussion

–identify and record areas of agreement

–make a presentation of what was discussed to the rest of the class.

  1. Participants preparation for the discussion

–Research and list the points you want to make

–Arrange them in some order—preferably from the least to the most important plus their respective examples.

–Do not memorize the points as your speech might not flow naturally.

  1. When having a discussion

–listen critically to others

–show interest in their contribution

–and when it is your turn to speak do so in plain English for clarity

–do not show off for others can turn against you.

–be brief and stick to the time allocated

–be polite thoughtful and considerate

–don’t interrupt others if you disagree.

Disagreeing politely

If you are in disagreement with another person try to

–listen attentively in order to understand the other person’s point of view. Sometimes we disagree because we have not understood each other.

–put yourself in the shoes of the other person and deliberately take the other person’s point of view; try to understand that person’s position.

–Focus on the current issue. Even if you have disagreed before, do not revisit past issues. Doing so raises unnecessary tensions.

–Explain clearly what you disagree with. Do not attack the person by humiliating him or her tackle the problem.

–Exercise self-control. Use polite language that is sound and sincere.

–Remember that we can agree to disagree. Other people have a right to hold differing opinions.

When disagreeing use these expressions

I am sorry to say this…    I am afraid you are wrong on that….    please consider also….

Pardon me on this…  excuse me… I regret to admit that… I understand what you mean but…

That is probably true but…  You have a point but suppose…

This is not easy for me to say but….

Interrupting Courteously

In the course of listening, we may find it necessary to interrupt the speaker. This could happen when we feel that we have something important to add to what is being said and it cannot wait till the speaker finishes talking. We may also interrupt when we feel inclined to urgently express doubt or disbelief about a falsehood on something important being passed as a fact. Interrupting should be done only when it is absolutely necessary.

When you want to interrupt

begin with polite expressions such as excuse me, pardon me, sorry etc.

–only interject when the speaker pauses between one sentence and another, not in the middle of a sentence or a word.

–interrupt in a polite respectful manner without portraying intolerance

–do not laugh at the mistakes of others as you interrupt with your contribution

–do not wait impatiently to seize the opportunity to interrupt since this will disrupt your listening.

Using you voice effectively

To use your voice effectively on the stage, it is important to manage stage fright by

–doing thorough preparation on what you are going to present

–Learning to acquaint yourself with the audience so that you see them as a bunch of ordinary people who shouldn’t scare you.

–Standing upright when speaking

–Looking straight at the audience by establishing eye contact

–using appropriate gestures and facial expressions that tally with what you are saying.

To be able to use your voice effectively

–open your mouth wide enough to let out the voice

–avoid shrill and high-pitched tones

–avoid horse and harsh tones

–breathe in regularly and smoothly—take a break when you pause

–finish on one word before starting on another

–pronounce words correctly

Barriers to effective listening

Distractions such as noise and movement of other people

–Failure to pay attention or having a short concentration spun, which occurs when someone is speaking to us and our minds begin to wander.

–Impatience—we get so impatient with a speaker that we begin to guess what he or she wants to say. We end up not understanding what one says because we make wrong guesses.

–Criticising delivery and physical appearance—as listeners, we may focus more on the manner and language of the speaker, for instance, mispronunciation or the manner of dressing at the expense of the message.

–Jumping to conclusions—we may not let the speaker finish to speak; instead ,we react to what we think he is going to say.

–Overreacting to emotional words—when a speaker uses words that provoke us emotionally, we make judgement that block out things that we do not want  to hear.

–Our desire to speak—when someone else is speaking to us, we may be busy thinking about what to say next.

–Physiological and emotional states—sometimes hunger, anxiety, tiredness or sickness can prevent us from listening effectively.

–Day dreaming.

Personal space

Personal space is simply the space around someone whenever they are. A distance of one metre radius could be seen as an ideal personal space.  On the queue, in a bus, at a party, in public or private, everyone has their own personal space no matter who they are. Personal space represents comfort zones for people and not necessarily status.

Examples of tips and thing avoid in respect to other people’s personal space

  1. a) Touching people—avoid touching people with whom you do not have close ties. Touching should be consensual.
  2. b) Standing too close to people—avoid getting too close when talking, greeting etc. and do not hold on to people’s hands unnecessarily. Also avoid sitting too close to someone you barely know.
  3. c) Brushing your body against other people—in situations where you pass each other in a narrow space, it is better to pause and let the other person pass first than to squeeze in. In some situations, this can be seen as sexual harassment.
  4. d) Avoid talking over people—the best thing is to move near and talk; not shouting at a person in the crowd.

–Avoid rifling through someone’s desk without his or her permission—some work should not be accessed without permission.

–Avoid being loud as you speak over the phone, shouting, dragging your feet or chair in an environment where other people are concentrating on something, eating food with a very strong smell, playing music loud etc.

Entering someone’s space usually means that you are defining a new relationship with them, which is mutually agreed.

Question

Identify situations in which it would be courteous for you to maintain a respectable distance as you interact with people.

–When queuing for services, in a bank, while voting,  while waiting for an elevator, food etc.

–While sharing public facilities like transport, urinals and lifts

–When interacting with a stranger

–When interacting with elders, VIPs, leaders etc.

–When other people are being served in an office, when in consultation with a doctor etc.

–While interacting with people whose culture demands it. E.g. No shaking of hands.

–While talking on phone.

Stress on words

Stress is a force placed on a specific syllable in a word or on a specific word in a sentence to change its meaning.  A syllable is a distinct sound in a word. A word can have one to several syllables. For example

Go—one syllable

Trans/fer—two syllables

Edu/ca/tion—three syllables

Change in stress within a word can lead to conversion. Conversion is a process of pronunciation which involve shift in stress to change a word from one category to another like from a noun to a verb or adjective to a verb and vice visor.  For example

‘TRANSport (noun)—trans’PORT (verb)

‘REject (noun)—re’JECT (VERB)

Question

Using a dictionary show how stress changes in these words from noun to verb and adjective to verb where applicable.

Reject    project    conduct    contest    record     invalid

Stress in Sentences

Stress can be used in a sentence for certain effects. Usually, when stress is placed on a word within a sentence, that word will be pronounced with a higher pitch than the rest. This automatically adds weight on it which in effect manipulates the meaning of that sentence.  Consider the sentence below.

 

Carol stole my book and sold it to the hawkers.

We can use stress to manipulate the meaning of this sentence to achieve the following implications. The underlined word in each construction carries the stress.

  1. a) That it was Carol and no one else that stole my book.

Carol stole my book and sold it to the hawkers.

  1. b) Than I am the owner of the book that was stolen and no one else.

Carol stole my book and sold it to the hawkers.

  1. c) That the book was sold and not hidden.

Carol stole my book and sold it to the hawkers.

  1. d) That the hawkers have the book and not any other person.

Carol stole my book and sold it to the hawkers.

  1. e) What Carol did.

Carol stole my book and sold it to the hawkers.

Question

Use stress in the following sentences to achieve the following implications in meaning. Rewrite the sentence with the stressed word(s) underlined in each case.

When Eunice died of malaria, all hopes that John had of marital bliss died with her.

  1. a) That John was Eunice’s fiancé and not any other.
  2. b) What happened to Eunice.
  3. c) What John lost apart from Eunice.
  4. d) The time that John lost hope in marital bliss.
  5. e) What killed Eunice.

Natural Stress

Natural stress would usually fall on the last word in a sentence.  For example:

He talked of going abroad.

But if a sentence ends with a pronoun or a preposition we do not stress either, instead, we stress the word preceding either. E.g

Something came up.       She told him.   It is something to fight for.   They killed her.

If a sentence ends with a preposition preceded by a pronoun or a pronoun preceded by a preposition, then we stress the word that comes before the two. E.g.

The stranger shouted at me.    She led me on.

Intonation in Sentences

Intonation refers to the changing of pitch levels from low to high and high to low in a sentence.

Pitch is the intensity of the voice or sound when you utter a word.

Higher pitch implies louder sound and low pitch implies low sound.

We can use intonation to encourage someone to go on speaking or discourage him.

Rising intonation can be used to encourage someone to go on speaking or show that we are interested.  E.g.

Speaker: One day

Listener:  yes (rising)

Speaker: I met….

We can use falling intonation to discourage someone from speaking or show that we are not interested. E.g.

Speaker:  Yesterday I saw a man…

Listener: Okay (falling)

Rising intonation is also used when you call for the attention of someone. E.g.

Sheila? (rising)  Hey (rising)

–All statements and exclamations have a falling intonation.

I am coming home today. (falling)

What a match that was! (falling)

–Falling intonation also indicates finality.  For example when denying accusations, you can say

I did not do it. (falling)

–All questions that require a Yes/No answer have a rising intonation. E.g.

Did you go home? (rising)  Yes/No

Is your mom around? (rising) Yes/No

–All questions that do not require a yes/no answer have a falling intonation. Such questions would normally begin with h or wh element.  E.g.

What is your name? (falling) My name is John Kimi.

How was your flight?  When will she arrive? Etc

–Intonation can be used to manipulate statements; changing them into questions, expressing certainty, politeness, doubts etc.

Her name is Mary. (falling) certain

Her name is Mary. (rising) doubting.

Have you had your lunch? (falling) polite

Have you had your lunch? (rising) indifferent

–Falling intonation is also used in a list to show that you have reached your final item. E.g.

One (r) two(r) three(r) four(r) five(falling)

Question

Identify the intonation that is used in each of the following sentences and state whether it is a rising or falling intonation. Use a rising or falling arrow respectively.

  1. a) I told her to go home.
  2. b) Did you see your mother?
  3. c) Where is your teacher of English?
  4. d) John studies very hard.
  5. e) How old is your friend?
  6. f) Have you learnt good study skills?
  7. g) Fatimah is a beautiful girl.
  8. h) Oh my God!
  9. i) When were you born?
  10. j) Shut up!

Coordinating Conjunction

A coordinating conjunction such as and, or, and but joins clauses that are equal in importance together to form compound sentences.

We use and to show addition e.g. James and John are missing.

We use but to express contrast e.g. He is clever but arrogant.

We use or to show a choice or option e.g. Tell James or Carol to come.

Correlative Conjunctions

These conjunctions join clauses of equal importance. They usually occur in pairs and both receive the same attention.  Examples.

  1. Both…and… e.g. Both Muli and Musemi sell cloths.
  2. Not only…but also… She was not only stupid but also a stammer.
  3. Either…or… e.g. We were to either kill ourselves or be killed by them.
  4. Whether…or…Sabina doesn’t know whether she will be admitted in the University of Nairobi or Maseno.
  5. Neither…nor… e.g. She is neither beautiful nor hardworking.
  6. Hardly/seldom/rarely/barely/scarcely…when… e.g. It was hardly one o’clock when she arrived.

She seldom eats when angry.     He rarely goes to church when stressed.

  1. Too..to e.g. It was too good a deal for him to be true.
  2. So…that… He ran so hard that he fainted on completion.

Exercise

Combine the following sentences using an appropriate correlative conjunction.

  1. Sarah was devoted to her family

Sarah was kind to her neighbours

  1. The boys lost their match

The girls lost their match

  1. We can go on holiday

We can do community work

  1. We don’t know if tomorrow will be sunny

We don’t know if tomorrow will be wet

  1. Kerendi refused to sing

Karendi refused to say a word

  1. She was young

She wanted to be president

  1. It was noon

She died

  1. It was good

It was not true

Subordinating Conjunctions

A subordinating conjunction joins a main clause within a sentence to a subordinate clause or dependent clause.

A dependent clause is a clause within a sentence that cannot make sense on its own. It therefore depends on the independent or main clause for meaning.  E.g.

She came after four O’clock.

Main                    subordinate

She made it although she almost lost

Main                                  dependent

The most common subordinating conjunctions are  as, because, for, since, whereas, after, before, until, while, as if, as though, except, if, otherwise, unless, although etc.

–Sometimes dependent clauses appear at the end of sentences and other times at the beginning. E.g.

Since it is getting late, we have to walk faster.

Dependent                            main

When the dependent clause appears first, a comma must be used to separate it from the main clause.

–When a sentence has a subordinating conjunction, it immediately becomes a complex sentence. A complex sentence can have one or more than one subordinating conjunctions e.g.

While we were waiting for the bus, an old man came and joined us although we did not know him.

Compound sentences are made up of two or more main clauses joined together by a coordinating conjunction.  E.g. He came home but did not see him.

–Sometimes a compound sentence can occur without the conjunction e.g. Her life was pure, her marriage calm.

A simple sentence has no conjunctions e.g. Joan is sick.

Sentence Structure

A sentence is a group of words usually composed of a subject, verb and object. A sentence can stand on its own as an independent thought.

Joseph wanted to buy the book.

Subj       verb                    obj

–A sentence must name a person or thing that forms its topic (the subject) and make a comment about it (predicate). Thus the subject is the thing or person mentioned and the predicate is the comment made about it.

Ken     is sick

Subj    predi

A predicate contain a verb, object and sometime preposition in a sentence.

She               came for you

–Sometimes the predicate comes at the beginning of a sentence e.g.

Here come the bus

–In some sentences , the subject can be assumed or left out e.g.

(You) sit down.      Sit down.

Exercise

Identify the subject and the predicate in the following sentences.

  1. The boy stood on the burning deck.
  2. The singing of the birds delights us.
  3. Bad habits grow unconsciously.
  4. Nature is the best physician.
  5. Edison invented the photograph.
  6. Borrowed garments never fit well.
  7. I shot an arrow into the air.
  8. On the top of the hill lives a hermit.
  9. All roads lead to Rome.
  10. The early bird catches the worm.

Other types of sentences are

Statement—Most sentences start with a capital letter and end with a full stop. Statements can be

Declaratives if they declare something like I have won.

Affirmatives/Assertives  if they emphasis something e.g. I will take you home for sure.

Commands/Imperatives if they order e.g. Be quiet.

Interrogatives/Questions if they ask e.g. What is your name?

Exclamatory if they end with an exclamation mark. E.g What a shame!

Negative statements if they have the word not or no/never e.g. You do not look tired.

FILLING IN FORMS

Forms help us to collect and give information.  When filling in forms consider the following:

  1. Read the entire form carefully and make sure you understand what is required of you.
  2. Pay attention to instructions
  3. Fill by writing legibly per instructions.
  4. Use capital letters and avoid crossing out by thinking carefully before writing.
  5. If a question doesn’t apply to you write N/A or not applicable: do not leave blank spaces.
  6. When in doubt about any question ask or refer to notes on the margin.
  7. Avoid filling in spaces reserved for others or official use.
  8. When you have filled in the form, proof-read it and make all the necessary corrections.
  9. Distinguish clearly between Sir names (family name), first name (Christian) last name (oft Sir name). On most forms, the Sir name is required first. If the form asks for your full name, start with your first or Christian name and end with your Sir name. Do not use initials.
  10. Home address should be the street name and the block number plus house number in the town or village of your residency.

INTERJECTIONS

An interjection is a word or group of words that express strong feelings. It has no grammatical connection to any other words in the sentence. Interjections are often followed by exclamation marks.

The following are common interjections

Word Alternate/ Similar Translation Example Meaning
aah! aaah, aaaahh “Help!” “Aaaah! It’s eating my leg!” Fright, shock. Sometimes it means “ahh” instead.
aha a-ha “I understand” “Aha! So you took the money!” Understanding, triumph (can also be used as “ahh”)
ahem “Attention, please!” “Ahem! Swearing is against office policy.” The sound of clearing one’s throat. Used to get someone’s attention, especially if they don’t know (or apparently forgot) that you’re there.
ahh ahhh, ohh “Ok, I see” “Ahh, yes, I understand now” Realisation, understanding. Sometimes it means “aaah” or “eh” instead.
ahh ahhh.. “So relaxing” “Ahh… This hot tub is amazing” Relief or relaxation
argh augh “Damn!” “Argh, the car won’t work!” Annoyance, anger, frustration
aww aw, awww “How sweet!” “Aww, what an adorable puppy” Shows sentimental approval (also see next entry)
aww aw, ohh, ahh “That’s too bad” “Aww, it hit him right in the nuts!” Feeling sorry or pity for someone
aw oh “Come on!” “Aw, don’t be like that!” Mild disappointment or protest
bah “Whatever” “Bah, I never liked him anyways.” Dismissive, annoyed
boo booh “That’s bad” “Boo, get off the stage!” Disapproval, contempt
boo! booh! “Scared you!” I jumped out from the closet and yelled “boo!” A noise used to scare people by surprise
boo-hoo boohoo “I’m crying!” Your internet is slow? Boo-hoo, how sad for you. Used, often sarcastically, to imitate crying.
brr brrrr “It’s cold” “Brrr, it’s -20C outside” Being cold, shivering
d’oh doh “That was stupid/bad!” “I just deleted all my files. D’oh!” Homer Simpson’s catchphrase when something bad happens.
duh “That’s dumb” “Duh, you didn’t plug it in.” Expresses annoyance over something stupid or obvious
eek eeeek “Help!” “Eeek, a mouse!” Girly scream. Surprised, scared.
eep “Oh no!” “Eep! I didn’t mean to say that!” Surprise (female)
eh? huh? “What?” “Eh? I didn’t hear what you said.” Misunderstanding. Also see “eh?” below
eh? huh?, eyh? “Is that right?” “So she dumped you, eh?” Stereotypically overused by Canadians
eww ugh, ewww “Disgusting” “Ewww, this apple is rotten” Disgust, dislike
gah “This is hopeless” “Gah, I give up” Exasperation and despair
gee “Really?” “Gee, that’s super!” Surprise, enthusiasm, or just general emphasis.
grr grrrr “I’m angry” “Grrr, I’ll kick his ass” Anger, snarling, growling. Often used for dogs and other animals.
hmm hm, hmmmm “I wonder” “Hmm, I’m not sure about that” Thinking, hesitation.
humph harumph “I don’t like this” “There are kids on my lawn again, humph!” A snort, to express dislike, disbelief or annoyance.
hah heh “Funny.” “Heh, that’s clever” The first syllable of “hahaha”, when something is just a little funny
haha hehe, hahaha, bahaha “Funny!” “Haha, that’s hilarious!” Regular laughter.
huh “Really?” “Huh, you were right” Mild, indifferent surprise
hurrah hooray, huzzah “Let’s celebrate!” “Hurrah, we won!” Generic exclaimation of joy
ick yuck, ich, yak “Disgusting” “Ick, this milk has gone bad” Disgust, dislike
meh eh “I don’t know” “Meh, whatever you think is best” Indifference
mhm mmhm, uh-hu “Yes” “Do you think so too?” “Mhm” Agreement, acknowledgement.
mm mmm, mmh “Lovely” “Mmm, this ice cream is delicious” Pleasure. Sometimes it means “hmm” instead.
muahaha mwahaha, bwahaha “I’m so evil!” “I switched the sugar and the salt! Muahaha!” Evil villain’s triumphant laugh
mwah m-wah “Kiss!” “Thanks, you’re so sweet! Mwah!” The sound of blowing a kiss
nah “No” “Want another beer?” “Nah, I’m good” Informal no
nuh-uh nuh-hu, nu-huh “No, it isn’t!”/”Did not!” “I hit you!” “Nuh-uh!” “Yuh-uh!” “Nuh-uh!” Childish negation or refusal
oh “I see” “Oh, you wanted sugar, not milk.” Realisation
ooh-la-la oh-lala “Fancy!” “A seven layer wedding cake? Ooh-la-la!” An often ironic (or just funny) way indicating that something is fancy or high class
ooh oooh “Wonderful!” “Oooh, it’s shiny!” Wonder, amazement (ohhh can also mean ahhh)
oomph umph “I’m exerting myself” “Push on 3.. 1, 2, 3.. oomph!” A grunt made on sudden exertion. Also used as a noun to mean “power” or “energy” (“This song needs more oomph!”)
oops “I didn’t mean to do that” “Oops, I knocked your cup over” Being surprised at or acknowledging your own mistakes
ow oww, ouch, yeow “That hurts” “Oww, I hit my thumb” Pain
oy oi, oyh “Hey, you!” “Oy! You forgot your wallet!” Mainly British: Used to get someone’s attention, similar to “hey!”. Also used disapprovingly (“Oy, you spilled your drink all over me!”).
oy oy vay “Oh no…” “The bills are biling up. Oy…” Mainly Jewish: Used to express self-pity, similar to “woe is me!”
pew pee-yew “It stinks!” “Pew, that smells so gross!” Used for foul odors
pff pffh, pssh, pfft “That’s nothing” “Pff, I once caught a fish twice that size” Unimpressed
phew “That was close!” “I didn’t do my homework, but the teacher didn’t check. Phew!” Expressing relief
psst Whispering “Hey, you!” “Psst. Let’s skip the next class!” Used to quietly get someone’s attention, often to tell them a secret.
sheesh jeez “I can’t believe this!” “Sheesh, now he’s drunk again” Exasperation, annoyance (corruption of “Jesus”)
shh hush, shush “Be quiet” “Shh, I’m trying to hear what they’re saying!” Used to make someone be quiet
shoo “Go away” “Get out of here! Shoo!” Used to drive away animals or small children
tsk-tsk tut-tut “Disappointing” “Tsk-tsk, he is late for work again” disappointment, contempt (this is a clicking sound. Clip from Futurama)
uh-huh mhm, uh-hu “Yes” “Do you think so too?” “Uh-hu” Agreement, acknowledgement (easily confused with uh-uh)
uh-oh oh-oh “Oh no!” “Uh-oh, I think the bear is inside the house” Concerned for indications that something will happen
uh-uh unh-unh “No” “Eat your spinach!” “Uh-uh!” Refusal, especially if your mouth is full or if you refuse to open it (easily confused with uh-huh)
uhh uhm, err “Wait, I’m thinking” “Seven times eight is… uhh… 56” Indicates a pause in, rather than the end of, a sentence
waah waaaaah “I’m crying!” “I don’t want you to go! Waaah!” Used, often sarcastically, for imitating crying or whining.
wee whee, weee “This is fun!” “Weee! Faster!” Used by children when doing something fun, and often ironically by adults when something is fun but childish
whoa “Hold on.” “Whoa, take it easy!” Can be used to suggest caution as in here, and also stereotypically used by marijuana smokers to express dumbfounded amazement (“whoa, look at the colors!”). Originally a sound used to make horses stop.
wow “Amazing!” “Wow, that’s incredible!” Impressed, astonished
yahoo yippie “Let’s celebrate!” “Yippie! We won!” Generic exclaimation of joy
yay “Yes!” “Yay! We won!” All-purpose cheer. Approval, congratulations and triumph
yeah yeeeeaah! “Yes!” “Yeeeaah! Kick his butt!” Common slang for “yes”, sometimes also used as an interjection.
yee-haw yeehaw “I’m excited!” “Let’s gather some cattle! Yee-haw!” Much like “yahoo”, but almost always associated with cowboys.
yikes “That’s a bad surprise.” “I found out I owed $5000 in back taxes. Yikes!” Fear and alarm.
yoo-hoo yoohoo “Hey you!” “Yoo-hoo, sugercup! Come give me a hug!” The often ironic/comical, seductive call of a woman to get someone’s attention
yuh-uh yuh-hu, yu-huh “Yes, it is!”/”Did so!” “I hit you!” “Nuh-uh!” “Yuh-uh!” “Nuh-uh!” … Childish affirmation, often used to counter “nuh-uh!” (not to be confused with yoo-hoo).
yuck ick, ich, blech, bleh “Disgusting!” “Yuck, I wouldn’t want to touch that” Disgust, dislike

Exercise

Fill the blanks in the sentences below with an appropriate interjection in each case.

  1. __! I forgot my rain coat.
  2. __! We won the match.
  3. __! How are you?
  4. __! Did you see how Komen leapt?
  5. __! That was painful.
  6. __! It really works.
  7. __! We achieved our goal.
  8. __! That will show them.
  9. __! What an exciting experience.
  10. __! Let us try out my new bicycle.

Reminders

A reminder is usually a list of things you want to do and appointments you want to remember. It is a personal document.  E.g.

                                            Saturday 2 October 2016

–Complete English assignment

–wash clothes

–help dad trim the hedge

–visit D. J. In hospital

–Read chapter 4 of Caucasian Chalk Circle—must do.

 

–Sometimes within an organisation, reminders are used to refresh specific people’s memory about impending responsibilities.

The secretary can be instructed to remind a certain worker or even the boss of an upcoming meeting e.g. in form of a memo.

LUGULU GIRLS HIGH SCHOOL

P.O. BOX PRIVATE BAG

WEBUYE

REMINDER

 

FROM: The principal

TO      : the H.O.D languages

DATE : 20th May 2016

SUBJECT: Submission of records

 

You are reminded that on 3rd of June 2016, the county supervision of schools will be underway. Make sure you submit your departmental records in time.

Sign: -h__ysh

Reminders can also be in form of a formal letter e.g.

 

NZOIA SUGAR COMPANY

P.O. BOX 411

BUNGOMA

 

23RD MAY 2016

Joash Malo

P.O. BOX 468

MATUNDA

 

RE: A Reminder

You are reminded to report to work next month on 2nd of June 2016, at 9.00 AM.

Your personnel manager will be waiting with instructions. Be prompt.

 

The Secretary

Jane Wakoli

 

Writing a Dialogue

A dialogue is a conversation between two people or more. A dialogue can be written directly in two forms—play and prose.

Dialogue in composition or prose

When writing a dialogue in a composition observes the following:

–Use speech marks to enclose spoken words and separate them from commentary and description.

–Always start quotations with a capital letter; the opening quotation marks should be before the first letter and the closing quotations after the punctuation mark as shown below.

“Can I talk to him?” asked Moses.     “Tom should go home,” Anne said.

–the commentary words coming after a quotation should always start with a small letter unless it is a name of a person.

“I love you,” he whispered.  “Who are you?”  she asked.  “Go to hell!” he thundered.

–If a quotation starts with commentary words, then a comma must be used to separate them from the direct speech and the speech must end in a question mark, exclamation mark or full stop.  E.g.

He asked, “Where are we going to meet?”   She said, “I can’t cope any longer.”

Jane shouted, “I hate you!”

Writing dialogue in a composition can only be creative if you mix the dialogue with vivid description or dramatic situations. Always provide a context for the dialogue in terms of what was going through the mind of the speaker, body language, the weather, if he or she was nervous, how they said the words etc. e.g.

“Hi?” she whispered to him. She was trying hard to hide her embarrassment. The heat of the day was rising making the streets hostile and inhospitable. She regretted wearing the heavy cotton outfit that was absorbing the rising heat.

“Hey,” he answered drawing her close for a hug. They hugged for long moments before disengaging.

“You look different.”

“I do?” she hadn’t noticed the change he was talking about.

–When writing dialogue, always start the dialogue in a new paragraph. Make sure you space your dialogue by decongesting it from the general narration.

Writing dialogue in play form

When writing dialogue in play form, observe the following:

  1. A play must always start with stage directions. The stage directions are always cantered on the page and enclosed in brackets. They introduce the first characters; detail the setting of the dialogue, the manner of talking, the time and background. E.g.

{Action takes place in a single room that looks like a living room commonplace in rich suburbs. A very comfortable couch is visible and on it a middle aged woman is sitting reading a novel. She is dressed in pyjamas and on the other side of the couch a man who looks visibly annoyed is sitting pensive and uncomfortable.}

  1. Names of characters should be written in capital letters and placed on the left side of the page followed by a colon before their speech. E.g.

KEN: How are you doing mom?

  1. Pronouns should not be used in place of names. Only names should be used or other titles. E.g.

I:  ME:   HE: IS NOT ALLOWED.

  1. The speech of characters should be separated from their names clearly without any overlap. E.g.

SIMON:  Tell me more about the problems you discussed yesterday with His Excellency the president at                               the function you wrote about.

  1. Use stage directions to show emotions and non verbal cues used within the dialogue and to make your dialogue creative. E.g.

KEN: (smiling) Hullo dear.

JANET: (blushing) I am fine Ken. Thanks.  (While ransacking in her bag) I wanted to show you something. Can you spare me a few minutes?

KEN: (Visibly excited)  Yes…er..huh. What is it my dear?

  1. Speech marks are not used in play format and the speakers take turns to speak.

 

 

 

 

Poetry

Poetry is the study of poems and the poetic language. A poem is a creative composition usually written in verse and that uses diction, imagery and economy of words to communicate.

A poet is someone who writes poems. The voice speaking in a poem is called the persona. What the persona refers to or talks to in a poem would be the subject and the issue that is being talked about or being raised is the subject matter or theme.

In many cases the voice speaking in the poem or the persona is different from the poet. The persona can be a female voice denouncing men but the writer of the poem is male.

 

The girl next door by   G.R. Lazarus

 

She was the girl next door

Beautiful booming and shy

Our interaction was measured

Our chemistry guarded

But she was curious and hideous

Then she was of age and I married

But more lustful and hideous

 

In the poem above the poet is Lazarus. The subject of the poem is the girl next door because the persona is referring to her. The subject matter or theme of the poem is love/lust because the persona is attracted to the girl next door and although he later gets married to someone else he still sees her. The persona in the poem is a man who neighbours the girl (she was the girl next door). Remember the persona is different from Lazarus, the poet.

Lapobo by Cliff Lumbwa

Lapobo,

Tall but not too tall

Short but not too short

She is of medium height

Lapobo

Her teeth are not as ash

Nor the colour of maize flour

Her teeth are as white as fresh milk

The whiteness of her teeth

When I think of her Lo!

Makes food drop from my hand

Lapobo

Black but not too black

Brown but not too brown

Her skin colour is just between black and brown

Lapobo

Her feet have no cracks

Her palms are smooth and tender to touch

Her eyes—Ho! They can destroy anybody

The structure of the poem refers to how the lines in a poem are arranged. For example, a poem can have four stanzas and each stanza can carry five lines. In some cases like in this poem by Lumbwa, the structure of the poem is made to resemble a picture of a beautiful woman whose features are well arranged.

In this poem the poet is Cliff Lumbwa, the persona is a lover who admires Lapobo (Lapobo, black but not too black), the subject is Lapobo (Lapobo, her teeth are white as fresh milk), subject matter is love—the persona loves Lapobo (Her eyes—ho! They can destroy anybody)

Clementine by Okot P’Bitek

 

Ocol is no longer in love with the old type

He is in love with a modern girl

The name of the beautiful one is Clementine

 

Brother when you see Clementine

The beautiful one aspires

To look like a white woman

 

Her lips are red-hot like glowing charcoal

She resembles the wild cat

That has dipped its mouth in blood

 

Her mouth is like raw meat

It looks like open ulcers

Like the mouth of an ogre

 

Tina dusts powder on her face

And it looks so pale

She resembles the wizard

Getting ready for the midnight dance

 

Questions

Identify the structure, the persona, the poet, the subject and the subject matter of the poem.

Rhythm in Poetry

Rhythm in poetry is achieved through repetition of words or sounds.

Rhyme is the repletion of sounds at the end of lines in a poem. This repetition can be in form of a scheme where it forms a pattern that runs across the poem or just in a few lines. E.g.

 

They said we should be honest

And taught us to be the best

In staying pure and chaste

But I feel and look like a guest

Because here, to be best

Is to be corrupt with zest

 

In this poem the end sounds /est/ has been repeated several times and therefore the poem has rhyme. When identifying rhyme only sounds shoud be considered not words. The last two sounds whether they constitute a syllable or not. E.g. –est in best, /eid / in made, /et/ in set. A long sound is considered as a single sound and must therefore be attached to another before deciding if it rhymes or not. E.g.

The words bee, see and tea do no rhyme although they all end with /i:/ but the words dear, seer, fear and tear rhyme because they end with two distinct sounds /ia/.

Sometimes words rhyme although they have different spellings, so it important to only consider how words are pronounced and not written. For example, the words day, weigh, grey and bouquet  rhyme for they all end with the /ai/ sounds as in /dei/ /wei/ /grei/ and /bukei/ but they have different spellings at the end.

When a poem has a few words that rhyme then the style in the poem will be use of rhyming words e.g.

 

We suffer from normalcy

And ignorance in our diplomacy

We ought to find normal boring

Life should not get comfortable

Too much comfort kills

In this poem there is use of rhyming words i.e. diplomacy and normalcy but the poem has not rhyme scheme.

Internal rhyme refers to use of rhyming words within a line of a poem if the line is dived into two clauses and they all end with the same sound e.g.

Although they set a target, it was not met

So she devised a different structure, amidst the troubled future

Rhyme scheme is a pattern that is created by repetition of sounds at the end of lines to create rhythm. The scheme can be regular or irregular depending on whether the next set of sounds can be predicated or not. Letters of the alphabet are used to represent sounds in a rhyme scheme. A rhyme scheme is written in a flowing manner without uses of commas or any other punctuation.

 

This the debt I pay (a)

Just for one riotous day (a)

Year of regret and grief (b)

Sorrow without relief (b)

Pay it, I will to the end  (c)

Until the grave, my friend  (c)

Gives me a true release (d)

Gives me the clasp of peace  (d)

 

Slight was the thing I bought  (e)

Small was the debt I thought  (e)

Poor was the loan at best (f)

God! But the interest (f)

The rhyme scheme in the poem above will be aabbccddeeff this rhyme scheme is a regular one because we can easily predict the next sound to be gg. This rhyme scheme creates musicality in the poem and also reinforces the meanings of the words that rhyme.

Alliteration involves the repetition of initial consonant sounds in close proximity in order to create rhythm, for example,

She sang a sad song or   They lasted longer than they had last time

Consonance on the other hand involves repetition of consonant sounds present at the middle or at the end of words e.g.

He fought and thought about it or   She had talked about it a lot

Exercise

Describe the use of alliteration and consonance in the poem below.

Hague

The gloomy gallant faces

Stare sadly at their fate

The silent voices so eloquent

Begging for justice as Jesus justified

‘No love between neighbours

Is the biggest sin on earth.’

Assonance in poetry

Assonance is the repetition of vowel sounds in words that follow each other closely in a poem usually to create musicality.

Question

Describe assonance in the poem below.

 

Politics

All his life James had thanked her

Pleading heaving and leaning on false fortified force

Filth sickly and sinful to her hateful eyes

 

Booing him she looked good—sly fly and likely to puke

She had slept with him and borne him a boy

The boy was buoyant and young

I am their only son  and they are rival politicians

 

Imagery in poetry is the use of Figurative language or language that create mental pictures of situations. Such mental pictures are created by the following styles:

Metaphor which is the direct reference to something using the quality of something else in order to show that they share such a trait. E.g. Joseph is a lion. To show that  Joseph is as strong/dangerous/brave etc  as a lion.

Simile is making a comparison of two things using words like as…as, like, akin to etc e.g. she sung like an angel.

Symbolism refers to the use of objects or things in a poem that have meaning outside the poem. For example a snake is generally considered to be an embodiment of evil and trickery; whiteness a symbol of purity, blood a symbol of violence and death etc. when such things are used in a poem they create symbolism.

Personification refers to giving human qualities to animals and things like plants or stones. A tree whispering, a stone crying, an elephant talking etc.

Exercise

Describe imagery in the poem below.

 

He toiled from dawn to dusk for a piece of silver

He was a lioness in the hunt for meat

Many days the needs grew as the muscles moaned

Six pack albs, triceps and biceps winked

His lean body mysterious like an aphrodisiac

Was a source of lustful admiration to the master’s wife

who wished her husband had such a body

Yet the husband was full of silver

She did not wish her husband to lose the silver

She wanted the lean body and the silver

But it seemed it was difficult to have both

 

The silver in the poem is used symbolically to represent wealth or money. The man is said to be a lioness which means he was very brave and determined as a lioness usually is when it wants o kill a big game.  The six pack albs, biceps and triceps are said to wink which would be personification to show that they were tempting and charming. Also the muscles moaning is personification. His lean body mysterious like an aphrodisiac—this is a simile which shows how sexually attractive the man was.

Irony in Poetry

Irony in poetry occurs when there is a contradiction between what the reader expects and what happens in the poem.

Describe irony in the poem below.

 

They Ran Out of Mud by Miriam Were

 

There is a little hut

Built across from here

They’ve mudded two walls

And the rest stands unmade

For they ran out of mud

 

There is a deep gully

Running along the road

They have filled it halfway

And the rest is still gaping

For they ran out of mud

 

There is a pot y the alter

That they began to mould

They finished the base

But the neck remains undone

For they ran out of mud

 

Mud! Mud!

Who can find mud

Maybe if it were gold

Someone would

 

Answer

Mud is commonplace—it is ubiquitous and hence a lame excuse for not finishing to mud the walls, or fill the gully or complete moulding the alter. The persona suggests that if it was gold which is very expensive they could have found it but not mud. This shows that the workers are very lazy and give inexplicable excuses to hide their laziness. It is thus ironical that they have run out of mud but if it were gold they could have found it.

 

The Beard

 

In the pulpit he swayed and turned

Leant forward, backward,

To the right: to the left

His solemn voice echoed;

Lowly the congregation followed

“Do you love your neighbour?”

Meekly they bow at his keen eye.

Now examining a grey head

Heaving under her sobs

His heart leapt assured—

“Her sins weigh on her”

So with her he chat outside;

“Weep not child, you are pardoned.”

“But, Sir, your beard conjured up

The spirit of my dead goat!”

 

Question

Describe irony in the poem above.

The lady cries and the preacher thinks that it is because her sins weigh on her so he talks to her and thinks that by her repentance she has been pardoned. But in reality the woman was weeping because she saw the preacher’s beard which conjured up memories of her dead goat.

Satire in Poetry

Satire is a stylistic device where a persona uses a mocking language to criticise people, things or situations. The poet might create characters at whom we can laugh, especially by depicting them in a ridiculous way.

Satire is mainly used to expose the wrong or foolish deeds or beliefs of a person or society.

 

Spoiling Our Celebrations

 

When last Jamuhuri day

The ceremonial flag stuffs were laid in our streets

It was soon discovered

Twenty of the new flags had been stolen

“We fear,” said the council

that if the theft continue

the whole of the Jamuhuri celebrations

may be ruined

 

We only recently acquired this new set

Of one thousand from the government

Each cost sh1000, we spent sh 1,000,000 on all

Police are searching for the thieves

 

The flags which are six feet by four

Are not being stolen for display

They are probably used as rags

Or bedcovers by beggars

 

This is misusing a national emblem

In an undignified manner

What a shame that beggars in their beds

Are not dignified with their bedcovers

Question

Describe satire in the poem above.

The persona is mocking the government for putting so much emphasis on the dignity of the flag as a national emblem but ignoring the wants of the poor and beggars who have no beddings and have now resorted to stealing the flags for this purpose. It is funny that the government officials talk about indignity of the beggars when they actually have been abandoned with no self dignity by the government.

 

I Went to Church

 

I went to church today

Yes I went and prayed for all

Friends and foes alike

Dead and those alive

 

I also prayed hard

For the soul of that soldier

Who got shot

Fighting for our motherland

While I shot hot life into his wife

 

And I prayed to God too

That I live long

To go and pray again

 

Question

Describe satire in the poem above

The poet uses the poem to ridicule church goers. That some of them go there to cover up their sins and do not really go with an aim to repent and worship. The persona thinks of carrying on with his adulterer   behaviour which will keep him coming to church.  He says he prays for the soldier who got shot while the persona was shooting hot life into his wife.

 

Western Civilization

 

Sheets of tin nailed to post

Driven in the ground

Make up the house

 

Some rags complete

The intimate landscape

 

The sun slanting through the cracks

Welcome the owner

 

After twelve hours of slave

Labour

 

Breaking rock

Shifting rock

Breaking rock

Shifting rock

Fair weather

Wet weather

Breaking rock

Shifting rock

 

Old age comes early

 

A mat on the dark nights

Is enough when he dies

Gratefully

Of hunger

 

Question

Describe Satire in the above poem.

The poet mocks western civilisation. The received wisdom is that western civilisation is always associated with exotic modern things and ways of living but the persona in his quest for western civilisation experiences hardships working on hot and rainy days until he ages quickly living in a shanty house. This is the darker side of the civilisation that many people go through and that the persona knows well.

Mood Attitude and Tone in Poetry

Mood refers to the feelings you get when you read a poem or the atmosphere that surround events in a poem and that could influence how the reader or the audience feels after reading or listening to the poem.

A poem that centres on a funeral/death will certainly have a sorrowful or sad mood, whereas, one that centres on a wedding or any celebration of an achievement should have a happy, contented or jovial mood.

Attitude refers to the feelings that the persona has towards the subject the persona is talking about. For instance, in the poem the persona may describe someone who is corrupting children and oppressing people using words like disgusting, blemish, rogue etc. The attitude therefore would be resentful or hateful or even malicious. If the persona uses polite and loving terms to describe an event or a person like charming, amiable, kind etc. Then the attitude of the persona towards the subject is approving, welcoming, sympathetic etc.  It is important to use the persona’s words in determining his or her attitude towards the subject.

Tone refers to the nature of the voice used in a poem. It is important to know what the poem is talking about in order to identify the tone of the persona. The tone of the persona is closely influenced by the attitude towards the subject and the general mood of the poem.  For instance, if the persona loved the subject and his attitude towards it was loving; if the subject is dead, then the tone would be sad, if the subject  is around it might be loving tone etc. If the persona is a father talking to a son in a polite way then the tone can be patronizing.

Adjectives for tone in poetry

Sarcastic  remorseful  obnoxious  dull  guilty  alarmed  fresh   dreary   light   startled  sadistic  happy  heavy  horrified  secular  sad  quizzical /inquisitive  disgruntled  political  narcissistic  sardonic/ mocking hurtful  social devoted   foolish loving  liberal/democratic   bitter/ sour  sympathetic  mysterious   conservative  angry intelligent/enlightened /clever  religious   resentful/hateful irritated  despiteful   prayerful    annoyed  suspicious/ doubtful  melancholic

Attitude

Joyous angry   sad cold   Warm agreeable   contemptuous calm delightful kind   trustful sadistic cheerful playful   appreciative   fearful   resentful

 

 

Mood

Serene/calm   respectful happy   fearful sorrowful   sombre   melancholic   jovial   reflective/meditative   angry nostalgic   thoughtful

 

Question

Read the poem below and establish its mood, tone and attitude.

 

A Pregnant School Girl

 

He paid her seat in the matatu

And walked away:

As he disappeared in the city crowd

All her dreams vanished

 

One more passenger squeezed in

And lit a cigarette

She opened the window

And spat cold saliva out

As the cigarette smoke intensified

She wanted to vomit

She remembered the warm nights

When she was her man’s pet

She remembered the promises

The gifts, the parties, the dances

 

She remembered her classmates at school

Who envied her expensive shoes

Lipstick, wrist watch, handbag

Which she brought to school

After a weekend with him

 

The future stood against her

Dark like a night without the moon

And silent like the end of the world

 

As the matatu sped away from the city

She began to tremble with fear

Wondering what her parents would say

 

With all hope gone

She felt like a corpse

Going home to be buried

 

The mood of this poem is sad because when you read you feel sad and a bit sympathetic for the pregnant school girl who has been used by her lover and dumped and who now feels like a corpse with no future.

The attitude of the persona towards the school girl is sympathetic. The persona feels sympathy for the girl and that is why he dwells on the consequences of her condition by saying the future stood against her;  she began to tremble with fear etc.

The tone of the persona is calm/indifferent  because the persona remains calm throughout the poem only showing a bit of sympathy for the girl’s condition but not getting emotionally involved in the life of the girl.

Dramatisation in Poetry

Introduction by Richard Ntiru

 

Perhaps it was his ugly shirt

The missing button

The unassertive collar;

Perhaps it was his knotty hair

That boasted little acquaintance with the comb

Or maybe it was his usualness

–one more impersonal handshake

Along the constant street—

That induced the functional smile

And operated the mechanical handshake.

His name didn’t help either;

Mugambo Mugenge—you’d hear the name

In the out-patient’s attendance queue;

Not in the current telephone directory

 

You certainly needed prompting

I said he was an old-time friend

But you continued to wave to passing cars;

I added that he was a high placed man

And you promptly too you cue

–“A university teacher, author of several works”—

“RE-E-E-ally? Er-um-oh!…”

And you became word and emotional perfect

Like a dog that mistakes a thief for a visitor

And remembers to bark at his mater’s coughing,

You renewed and pumped the handshake

–reshaped your mouth to a proper smile

–recalled his famous public talk

That you had regretfully missed…

And observed, thoughtfully,

How unlike his photograph he looked

 

You were tuned—

Delved deep into his latest novel

And wondered why his main characters

Do not walk on the solid earth

And fail to effect living communication

You’d have rambled on, no longer looking at him

But he quipped: “They are in good company!”

And was about to add when you knowledgeably interrupted

“Society is a market stall

And men goods on display

Where the label is more important than the labelled

And price more fascinating than the value.”

 

We parted hoping to meet again

You went away rehearsing his name

But probably unremembering his face

 

Questions

  1. How would you say the following lines?
  2. a) Perhaps it was his ugly shirt.
  3. b) Perhaps it was his knotty hair.
  4. c) That induced a functional smile.
  5. d) But you continued to wave to passing cars.
  6. e) But probably unremembering his face

 

 

 

 

 

 

Pronouns

A pronoun is a word that can replace a noun in a sentence. E.g. Tom loves Mary but she doesn’t love him. She replaces Mary and him replaces Tom. Nouns that are replaced by pronoun in the same sentence are known as antecedents. To and Mary are antecedents in the sentence above because they are replaced by him and she respectively.

–A pronoun can occur as a subject (come before a verb in a sentence) or an object (come after a verb or preposition in a sentence). If a pronoun occurs as subject it will be in subjective form and if it occurs as an object, it will be in objective form.

Personal pronouns are pronouns that refer to people.

Subjective and objective forms

Singular subjective Singular objective   Plural subjective Plural objective
I Me   WE us
YOU You   YOU You
HE Him   THEY Them
SHE Her   THEY Them
IT It   THEY Them

 

 

First person pronoun refers to a pronoun that is used as subjects or a speaker in a sentence both singular and plural. E.g.

(Subjective)  I went home.  We ate the mangoes etc.

(Objective) She gave me the book.  Bring us the bottles.

Second person pronoun refers to the pronoun that is used as the listener or the person or thing being talked to in a sentence. E.g.

(Subjective) What do you want?  You should go home.

(Objective) She came for you.  The money was for all of you.

You is used in subjective and objective forms and again, both singular and plural forms in the second person pronouns.

The third person pronoun refers to the pronoun that is used as the person or thing being talked about but is not present. E.g.  

(Subjective forms) He went home.  She is not feeling well.  It rained heavily last tight. In plural, they  is used in all cases. They went home. They are not feeling well.

(Objective forms) They gave him the job. John came for her. Ken saw it run. In plural objective form , them is used in all cases. Anne gave them the money.

Possessive pronouns show possession. E.g. This is my book . This is mine.  A possessive pronoun replaces not just a noun but an adjective plus a noun as seen in the above example where mine replaces ‘my book’.

–We use possessive pronouns when it is not necessary to use the possessive adjective and a noun.

Is this his book? No, it is yours.

The possessive adjective, its, doesn’t take an apostrophe.  E.g. The cat drunk its milk.

POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES

SINGULAR

POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES

PLURAL

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS

SINGULAR

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS

PLURAL

MY OUR MINE OURS
YOUR YOUR YOURS YOURS
HIS THEIR HIS THEIRS
HER THEIR HERS THEIRS
ITS THEIR    

 

Possessive adjective means the word occurs before a noun and at the same time shows possession. E.g. My book, your cow, his desk, its bone and in Plural our books, your cows, their desks, their bones etc.

Possessive pronoun means the one word that can replace the possessive adjective above plus the noun in a sentence. E.g. This is my book becomes       This is mine,   This is our books becomes    These are ours.

Yours, his, hers respectively; in plural it would be, yours, theirs, theirs respectively

Reflective pronouns are pronouns that refer back to the subject or doer of the action. They always end with the suffix   -self in singular and  -selves in plural. They are used to show that action of the verb is performed on the doer or on the subject itself by the subject.

–Reflexive pronouns are used for emphasis and are sometimes called emphasis pronouns

Reflexive pronouns can still be left out of the sentence and will make sense.

E.g. She, herself, escorted the boy.

Reflexive pronouns

Singular plural
Myself Ourselves
Yourself Yourselves
Himself Themselves
Herself Themselves
Itself Themselves
One self Themselves

 

–Reflexive pronouns only occur in objective forms.

Subjective and Objective case of pronouns in a sentence

When a pronoun occurs after a preposition, it should be in objective form. E.g.

She came for her/me/them/him/it.  It is between him and me,  between us and them.

When a pronoun comes after a verb, in a sentence, it should be in objective form. E.g.

Sarah helped him/her/them/it/me

When a pronoun occurs before a verb or as a subject in a sentence, it should be in subjective form e.g.

I/We/He/She/They/It  will get it soon.

–A pronoun that comes after the phrase ‘It is’  will be is subjective form e.g.

It is I/they/ she/ he/ it/  that did it and not I/they/ she/ he/ it/  (that did it) although this last part is omitted and only implied.

It was he who came.   It is she that is sick and not I.

–Pronouns after the request word ‘let’ always appear in objective case e.g.

Let us  go home.  Let  me see what I can do.

Unlike pronouns after the word ’shall’ that take subjective case. E.g.

Shall I go home?  Shall we see him?

–Pronouns after the word  ‘than’ take subjective case e.g.

She is better than I am/ She is better than I

Other than he, who else showed up?     You are better than I.

A demonstrative adjective refers to the words like this, that, those and these   that indicate the position of a noun in a given context or demonstrates the manner of action. They occur before nouns they demonstrate in a sentence. E.g.  This book,  that house, those trees etc. These houses are mine.

A demonstrative pronoun on the other hand refers to words such as this, that, those and these that replace a noun in a sentence and that would only be valid in absence of the noun it refers to.  E.g.

That is terrible    This is mine   I saw them.

Indefinite Pronouns

Indefinite pronouns refer to people, places or things in a unspecified way. They therefore do not have specific reference or antecedents.

–There are mainly two types of indefinite pronouns

  1. a) ‘of—Indefinite Pronoun e.g. each of, either of, enough of, one of, many of, all of, any of, several of, none of, much of, another of, neither of, one of, few of, some of, many of,

Each of the boys has been fed.

We had had enough of her complaints.

All of my brothers are married.

Sometimes the ‘of’ phrase may be omitted if what it refers to is clear from the situation given e.g.

After paying for mangoes, we discovered that some were rotten.

Many (of the) problems we face can be solved through dialogue.

 

Although the boys were hungry, many continued walking.

  1. b) Compound indefinite pronouns are called so because they are formed by combining two words such as every +body= everybody.
POSITIVE NEGATIVE
Everyone Anyone
Everybody Anybody
Someone No one
Somebody No body
Something Anything
Everything Nothing

 

Any is used negatively and some is used positively e.g.

Anyone can be defeated in a match. (Negative)

Someone is always watching. (Positive)

Everything will be fine. (Positive)

Nothing will ever work. (Negative)

Exercise

Fill in each blank space below with the correct indefinite pronoun.

  1. __people died during the war.
  2. We have had __ of his outbursts.
  3. __of the above mentioned turned up.
  4. It is __ of his funny books.
  5. __calm down.
  6. __ was said at the meeting.
  7. I will give __ to be you.
  8. __ of his brothers are dead.

The simple past

Simple past tense is used to describe events that took place in the past. Most verbs form their past tense by adding  -d or  -ed at the end. These are known as regular verbs.  E.g.

Play—played.   Pose—posed.  Kiss—kissed.  Cry—cried. Spit—spitted.

–Some regular verbs ending with ‘y’ take ‘ied’ in their simple past tense forms e.g.

Bury—buried.  Study—studied.  Hurry—hurried.

–Some regular verbs ending with a consonant preceded by a short vowel sound double their final consonants before adding  ‘-ed’ to form simple past tense.  E.g.

Nod—nodded.  Stop—stopped.   Step—stepped.

Irregular Verbs

These are verbs which do not follow a regular pattern when changing into simple past tense.

  1. a) There are those that can take ‘-ed’ in past tense or simply add ‘t’ e.g.

Spell—spelled or spelt.  Spill—spilled or spilt.   Dream—dreamed or dreamt.  Dwell—dwelled or dwelt. Bless—blessed or blest.

  1. b) There are those that change the vowel ‘i’ into ‘a’. E.g.

Spit—spat,  shrink—shrank etc.

  1. c) Those that change the vowel ‘i’ to ‘o’ e.g.

Drive—drove,      win—won

  1. d) Those that change the vowel ‘i’ to ‘ou’ e.g.

Find—found.    Grind—ground.

  1. e) Those that change ‘i’ into ‘u’ in simple past e.g.

Strike—struck.  Sting—stung.  Dig—dug.

Simple present tense

Simple present tense is an aspect of the verb in its present state and it is therefore used to express the following situations:

  1. a) Habits e.g. I walk to school every day. She plays football. She swims.
  2. b) To discuss hobbies. E.g. I play football, I write, He preaches
  3. c) To show the condition in which somebody is in. E.g. I am unwell, Eunice is Ok.
  4. d) To state a person’s occupation. E.g. Ken is poet, My father is a doctor etc.
  5. e) To express feelings and emotions. E.g. She hates him.

Perfect tense

A verb is said to be in a perfect tense if it shows that the action in the sentence was completed just before the speech or has been completed just before the speech or will be. To show this form, the word ‘have’ and its variants (had, has) is used.  E.g.

He had finished the test when the teacher arrived.

She has arrived.    They have given her the money.

The main verb in a perfect tense is usually a past participle e.g. given, taken, eaten, said etc or an –ing participle preceded by the word ‘been’. E.g. She has been eating ugali.

A participle is a form of a verb ending  –ed for regular verbs but followed by has, had or have, e.g. kill—has killed, cry—had cried, box—had boxed etc but varies for irregular verbs e.g. has borne, had sought,  has come, had seen etc.

Both regular and irregular verbs use –ing participles in perfect progressive tenses e.g.

She has been cooking rice.    He had been giving her money.  She is cleaning utensils.  We are seeing them off.

Any helping verb apart from has, had and have can be used with an –ing participle.

Remember an –ing participle on its own can act as a noun in a sentence e.g.

Swimming is my hobby.    I love singing.

If an –ing participle acts as a noun as shown above then we call the noun a gerund.

Weeping is a sign of weakness.  Weeping is a gerund because it an –ing participle being used a s a noun.

An –ing participle again can be used as an adjective in a sentence e.g.

You shouldn’t say such annoying remarks or such remarks are annoying.

PUNCTUATION

A full stop, also known as a period, is used at the end of a sentence e.g.

Mary is sick.

–It is also used in abbreviations e.g.  K.N.H.I.F     N.S.S.F

A comma is used to indicate a short pause in a sentence especially in a list e.g.

She went to the market to buy bread, soap and sugar.

–It is used in writing dialogue to separate the speech from commentary e.g.

“I will see you tomorrow,” she said.

–In parenthesis (extra information in a sentence) e.g.

Daniel Arap Moi, the second president of Kenyan republic, is visiting Nakuru National library tomorrow.

A few of the student, by the way, will not attend the ceremony.

–After yes , no and please.  Yes, I know the man.   Please, let us discuss the matters.  No, it is not possible.

–In question tags e.g.  Adhiambo visited you, didn’t she?

–In separating introductory words of a sentence from the rest e.g. therefore, he was forced by the public pressure to resign.

–Before the name of the person being spoken to e.g. Come and help me push this car, John.

Colon and semi-colon are commonly used to connect parts of a sentence that are closely related.

A colon is used to introduce a list e.g. You should bring the following items tomorrow: bananas, spoons, cups, knives and plates.

–To introduce a long quotation or speech e.g. The employment acts states: Wages shall not be paid in a bar or at a place where intoxicating drinks are available for supply.

–To separate two clauses, if the second clarifies the first.  E.g. Oginga Odinga played an important role in Kenyan politics: he agitated for the release of Jomo Kenyatta, participated in the writing of the first independent Kenya’s constitution and became the first vice president.

–To separate two parts of a sentence that compare and contrast. This creates a balanced and elegant effect. E.g. The boy who came in was short and light-skinned: the one who went out was tall and dark.

–To separate the hour from the minutes for example. 10:30 P.M.

Semi-colon is used to

–join two independent clauses that are related and that are not connected by a coordinating conjuction. E.g. This school is the oldest in Kenya; it was built in 1906.

–to join independent clauses connected by conjunctive adverb such as ‘otherwise’  and ‘however’ or transitional phrases such as ‘on the other hand’ or ‘as a consequence.  E.g.

Don’t come late; otherwise, you will miss the party.

In some schools, classes are small; as a result, teachers can give students individual attention.

–to separate items in a series when one or more of these items are tagged to other definitions or subdivisions separated by commas.  E.g. The Kenyan foreign minister visited several African capitals: Lusaka, Zambia; Harare, Zimbabwe; Abuja, Nigeria; Accra, Ghana and Cairo, Egypt.

A dash (—) is used as follows

–in a dialogue to introduce a clarification or further details. E.g.

I don’t know why she hasn’t arrived—I mean, she should have been here two hours ago!

–to indicate hesitation in a dialogue

Jo—John has gone—gone ho—home.

–to set of information that need emphasis e.g.

Boys can be sweet—when they want to be.

–Can replace a colon in a sentence for emphasis e.g.

You have two options—to shut up or raise your hand.

–can be used in parenthesis to show that the information in between dashes is extra and not part of the original structure of the sentence. E.g.

The four boxers—Ali, Joe,Oti and Tyson—won the gold medals.

An apostrophe (‘) is mainly used to show that some words have been left out, for example.  Don’t—do not.

–It can also show possession e.g. Maina’s bag or Moses’ book..

–It can also show elision (where sounds are intentionally left out but the word still makes sense) e.g.

How are you doing—how’re you doin’

–Remember that in plural forms an apostrophe is removed from the possessive e.g.

Lugulu Girls’ High School—LUGULU GIRLS HIGH SCHOOL

–‘Of can be used with the possessive ‘s to show double possession e.g. He is a cousin of Ciru’s brother.

Hyphen is used to link words that form compound nouns but look confusing together e.g. Fatherinlaw—father-in-law.

–They are also used to show the difference in meaning of words that sound or seem similar e.g. re-cover/recover etc.

–Some prefix occur with a hyphen e.g. ant in anti-Christ etc.

Words that occur with a hyphen are said to be hyphenated.

 

PUNCTUATION IN TITLES OF PUBLICATIONS, QUOTATIONS AND HEADINGS

There are rules about how to write titles of publication such as book, short stories, oral narratives, essays, poems, magazines and newspapers. A crucial distinction is made between full length publication and parts of a publication.A novel, for example, exist on its own as a full length publication. These should therefore be underlined as follows    1. Coming to Birth        2. Adavanced Grammar

Short stories, oral narratives, essays and poems are usually part of a larger book. To show this difference, titles of these works are enclosed in quotation marks e.g.

“Tekayo” in Encounters from Africa—short story

“Beijing Beijing” in Echoes across the Valley—poem

“The Hare and the Leopard” in East African Oral Literature—oral narrative

–Magazines and newspapers are treated a full length publications and their titles are therefore underlined as follows:

She was reading the Daily Nation yesterday.

Buy me The Standard on the market.

In all cases, we capitalize the first letter of all important words in the title. Important words are content words or nouns, adjectives and adverbs.  Articles and prepositions are not usually seen as content words and therefore they are not capitalized unless they appear at the beginning or end of the title.  This rule also applies when writing all headings and sub-headings.

The River and the Source is a novel by Margaret Ogolla.

It is normal when writing to quote from various publications. This is meant to lend authority to our writings and reinforce our arguments. Of course, we should not overquote, and other people’s opinion should not overshadow ours. In quoting, however, we should observe the following rules:

–short quotations of no more than three lines are incorporated in the text of our writings and enclosed in quotation marks, for example:

In Things Fall Apart, Obirieka says: “The white man has put a knife in the things that held us together and we have fallen apart.”

–Longer quotations, that is, of more than three lines are set off from the rest of the text, for example:

In the book, How to Write and Speak Better, we are told:

Most writing is a private activity but a public service.  You may dash off a protest letter in the solitude of your study, or compile a report in the office after everyone has gone home for the night, or scribbles a few secret paragraphs of your romantic novel at the kitchen table while the baby is sleeping but in each case your intention is the same—that eventually your writing will become the reading matter of someone else, that your private words will go public.

 

Minimal Pairs

Minimal pairs are words that are almost pronounced the same way but only differ by one sound as shown below:

Pin, kill, pit, cap, bag, load,

Bin, gill, bit, cup, bug, road

Adverbs

An adverb is a word that modifies the meaning of a verb, an adjective or another adverb.

An adverb can be replaced by an adverb phrase in a sentence e.g.  He paid his debts fully.

He paid his debt down to the last penny.

–Adverbs that appear at the beginning of a sentence usually modify the whole sentence rather than any particular words e.g.

Probably, he is mistaken.   Obviously, they don’t love each other.

Types of adverbs

Adverbs of time show when the action happened. E.g. Jane went home today.

Adverbs of frequency show how often something or the action happened. E.g. I have seen him twice.

Adverbs of place show where the action happened or is happening. E.g. stand here.

Adverbs of manner show how something happened or behaved. E.g. She was sitting awkwardly.

Adverbs of degree or quantity show how much, or to what degree or extent something occurred. E.g.

50 Cent was shot 9 times but he didn’t die or  The marriage lasted for a long time.

Adverbs of reason show the cause, consequence or reason why something happened e.g.

He could not afford to pay so he left school.

When adverbs are used in asking questions, they are called interrogatives. E.g.

Where is that boy?

Some words are used as adjectives or adverbs, depending on where they appear in a sentence e.g.

He spoke in a loud voice. (adjective)

Don’t talk so loud. (adverb)

Others are enough, fast, next, well etc.

Some adverbs occur in two: with –ly and without e.g.

Roma works hard   and  Roma hardly works.

Some adverbs are used as nouns after a preposition e.g.

He stays far from here.

He comes from there.

Order of Adjectives

When a noun takes more than one adjective, it is important to note that the adjectives would have to take a specific order usually from more general opinions to specific factual description.  The order is to begin from quantitative or number adjectives like twenty, hundreds, a pair etc. to controversial or subjective opinions like beauty, then general opinions like proud, then size and shape before facts as shown below.

Number—e.g. six, many, some

Less agreeable opinion—e.g. beautiful, ugly, charming, exciting

More agreeable opinions—e.g. proud, clever, mad, promiscuous

Size—e.g. Huge, small, tall

Shape—e.g. round, rectangular, square

Age—e.g. young, old, twelve-year old,

Colour—e.g. red, golden, greenish, brown

Nationality/Origin—e.g. Kenyan, Japanese, Chinese

Material—e.g. Metallic, plastic, china, sliver, steel

e.g.  20,beautiful, small, round, old, red, Kenyan balls.

5 ,ugly, huge, rectangular, Japanese tractors.

Predicative adjectives occur after the noun they modify, for example:

John is sick        Joshua is supportive etc

Attributive adjectives occur before the noun they modify e.g.

He is a tall man.     Beautiful women are tempting etc.

Public Notice

A notice is a small advertisement or announcement in a newspaper or magazine, or notice board; it can also be information or a warning given in advance of something that is going to happen e.g. one may want to announce an upcoming meeting, entertainment event, sports day etc. in such cases you issue a public notice.

Features of Public Notice

  1. The name and title of the group that is to meet e.g. DRAMA CLUB MEETING
  2. The What? The event to take place e.g. INTERCLASS DRAMA COMPETITION
  3. The When? This is the time of the event. E.g. Saturday October 15th 2016 at 10.00 AM

–Depending on the nature of the event, it may be necessary to give two items of time i.e. the arrival and departure time or starting and ending time. E.g.

Arrival—10.00 AM

Match Kick off—10.30 AM

  1. The Where? This is the venue or location of the event e.g. Venue—Assembly Hall

–The notice should be captivating i.e. catch the attention of the intended reader.

–It should be written on white paper so that it can be sen clearly. You can use more than one colour to make it catchy but do not overdo it.

–A formal public notice should have a few decorations.

–It should be written in capital letters especially information on what, whom and where.

–Spellings and punctuations must be accurate.

–Once the notice is ready, place it in a strategic place where crowds tend to gather.

Example

 

 

 

 

 

 

LUGULU GIRLS DEBATING COMPETITION

SATURDAY 23 MARCH 2017

AT THE ASSEMBLY HALL

FROM 10 AM TO 1 PM

FORM 2 R VS FORM 3W

COME ONE COME ALL

 

Posters

A poster is a large printed picture or notice which you stick on the wall or board to advertise or communicate specific information.

When preparing a poster make note of the following:

  1. The poster should have a theme or subject matter that is very brief and clear in capital letters.
  2. Decide on the graphics or pictures to use. They should be colourful and attractive. Bright colours should be prioritized.
  3. The poster should be simple and decongested.
  4. The poster should be displayed at an appropriate place.

NB

Advertisements are like posters but are usually smaller and put on newspapers.  They are usually designed to persuade people to buy or use certain products. Warnings for side effects in adverts should be in small letters.

Question

Imagine the school administration would wish to enrol more students into your school in form one. As secretary to the language Club in your school, the principal asks you to write a notice to be posited in the local newspaper.

Write the notice and with it include the following:

–State the school’s geographical location

–In about 120 words describe the school

–In about 50 words describe the school’s environment

–Inform the public about the academic qualifications required for admission.

The deadline for application.

 

Inventories

An inventory is a detailed document of all the items in a place such as an office, a classroom, a church, a shop, a clinic and so on.

This document gives details of the quantity and condition of whatever is available in a place. An inventory contains columns that show

–Date when the record was entered

–Date of delivery of items

–Quantity of the item

–Description of a particular item

–Date of issue

–Signature of the person being issued with the item.

–Items remaining after issue.

It is an important document in an organisation because it contains information on all items that an institution has and therefore helps to keep records of the stock or stock-taking.

 

               Glory Secondary School                                                                                       Inventory

Date of record Delivery date Quantity Description Date of issue Sign Balance
5/2/1017 4/2/2017 60 Macmillan Bk4 English texts 10/2/2017 _gr 33
13/2/2017 13/2/2017 20 Reams of foolscaps 15/2/2017 Te_js 15
             
   

Importance of an inventory

–Keep check on what is there in terms of stock

–To keep check on what needs to be replaced or repaired.

–To ease the job management

–To give information on items that need constant replacement

Question

You are the School Library assistant and you have received books from a supplier. Record the items in your inventory.

Facts and Opinions

Facts are statements that can be proved, verified and are considered to be true. Facts are indisputable e.g. The first president of Kenya was Jomo Kenyatta.

All humans die.

Opinions are feelings towards an idea. They are not reliable source of information and cannot be verified adequately.  Opinions are therefore debatable and disputable.

Opinions can be identified from a speaker’s choice of phrases such as: it is believed, in my opinion, apparently, seemingly, I think, I feel, possibly, presumably, it should, quite etc.

–Some speakers mix facts and opinions without making a clear distinction e.g. You know that I was the best speaker in last year’s AGM.

Isn’t it a fact that I am the best placed person to represent the people of Bungoma?

Exercise

Pick out and explain five facts and five opinions in the passage below.

We teach students to be obedient, kind, religious and hardworking in order to succeed in life but the reality is that these virtues are not really required in the modern, cruel and materialistic world, especially, if someone is to succeed in getting wealth and power. Majority of rich Kenyans, for example, got their wealth from corrupt deals, grabbing public land or colluding with powerful politicians to get favours. There is evidence that until recently, when the new constitution was adopted, many rich Kenyans were barely paying taxes especially on imports. Another obvious example is those Kenyans who were accused of masterminding crimes against humanity were elected into office and are celebrated. Realistically, vices pay more handsomely than virtues and as Machiavelli once said, ‘the end will justify the means’. Maybe it is time to review what we teach in schools and sanctify any effort to get wealth.

 

Homophones

Homophones are words that have similar pronunciation but different meanings and different spellings.

  1. accessory, accessory
  2. ad, add
  3. ail, ale
  4. air, heir
  5. aisle, I’ll, isle
  6. all, awl
  7. allowed, aloud
  8. alms, arms
  9. altar, alter
  10. arc, ark
  11. aren’t, aunt
  12. ate, eight
  13. auger, augur
  14. auk, orc
  15. aural, oral
  16. away, aweigh
  17. awe, oar, or, ore
  18. axel, axle
  19. aye, eye, I
  20. bail, bale
  21. bait, bate
  22. baize, bays
  23. bald, bawled
  24. ball, bawl
  25. band, banned
  26. bard, barred
  27. bare, bear
  28. bark, barque
  29. baron, barren
  30. base, bass
  31. bay, bey
  32. bazaar, bizarre
  33. be, bee
  34. beach, beech
  35. bean, been
  36. beat, beet
  37. beau, bow
  38. beer, bier
  39. bel, bell, belle
  40. berry, bury
  41. berth, birth
  42. bight, bite, byte
  43. billed, build
  44. bitten, bittern
  45. blew, blue
  46. bloc, block
  47. boar, bore
  48. board, bored
  49. boarder, border
  50. bold, bowled
  51. boos, booze
  52. born, borne
  53. bough, bow
  54. boy, buoy
  55. brae, bray
  56. braid, brayed
  57. braise, brays, braze
  58. brake, break
  59. bread, bred
  60. brews, bruise
  61. bridal, bridle
  62. broach, brooch
  63. bur, burr
  64. but, butt
  65. buy, by, bye
  66. buyer, byre
  67. calendar, calender
  68. call, caul
  69. canvas, canvass
  70. cast, caste
  71. caster, castor
  72. caught, court
  73. caw, core, corps
  74. cede, seed
  75. ceiling, sealing
  76. cell, sell
  77. censer, censor, sensor
  78. cent, scent, sent
  79. cereal, serial
  80. cheap, cheep
  81. check, cheque
  82. choir, quire
  83. chord, cord
  84. cite, sight, site
  85. clack, claque
  86. clew, clue
  87. climb, clime
  88. close, cloze
  89. coal, kohl
  90. coarse, course
  91. coign, coin
  92. colonel, kernel
  93. complacent, complaisant
  94. complement, compliment
  95. coo, coup
  96. cops, copse
  97. council, counsel
  98. cousin, cozen
  99. creak, creek
  100. crews, cruise
  101. cue, kyu, queue
  102. curb, kerb
  103. currant, current
  104. cymbol, symbol
  105. dam, damn
  106. days, daze
  107. dear, deer
  108. descent, dissent
  109. desert, dessert

331.  rouse, rows

332.  rung, wrung

333.  rye, wry

334.  saver, savour

335.  spade, spayed

336.  sale, sail

337.  sane, seine

338.  satire, satyr

339.  sauce, source

340.  saw, soar, sore

341.  scene, seen

342.  scull, skull

343.  sea, see

344.  seam, seem

345.  sear, seer, sere

346.  seas, sees, seize

  1. deviser, divisor
  2. slay, sleigh

sloe, slow

sole, soul

some, sum

son, sun

sort, sought

spa, spar

staid, stayed

stair, stare

stake, steak

stalk, stork

whirl, whorl

whirled, world

whit, wit

white, wight

who’s, whose

woe, whoa

wood, would

yaw, yore, your, you’re

yoke, yolk

you’ll, yule swat, swot

tacks, tax

tale, tail

talk, torque

tare, tear

taught, taut, tort

te, tea, tee

team, teem

tear, tier

teas, tease

terce, terse

tern, turn

there, their, they’re

threw, through

throes, throws

throne, thrown

thyme, time

tic, tick

tide, tied

347.  tire, tyre

to, too, two

toad, toed, towed

told, tolled

tole, toll

ton, tun

tor, tore

tough, tuff

troop, troupe

tuba, tuber

vain, vane, vein

vale, veil

vial, vile

wail, wale, whale

wain, wane

waist, waste

wait, weight

waive, wave

wall, waul

war, wore

ware, wear, where

warn, worn   wart, wort

  1. dew, due
  2. die, dye
  3. discreet, discrete
  4. doe, dough
  5. done, dun
  6. douse, dowse
  7. draft, draught
  8. dual, duel
  9. earn, urn
  10. eerie, eyrie
  11. ewe, yew, you
  12. faint, feint
  13. fair, fare
  14. farther, father
  15. fate, fête
  16. faun, fawn
  17. Fay, fey
  18. faze, phase
  19. feat, feet
  20. ferrule, ferule
  21. few, phew
  22. fie, phi
  23. file, phial
  24. find, fined
  25. fir, fur
  26. flair, flare
  27. flaw, floor
  28. flea, flee
  29. flex, flecks
  30. flew, flu, flue
  31. floe, flow
  32. flour, flower
  33. foaled, fold
  34. for, fore, four
  35. foreword, forward
  36. fort, fought
  37. forth, fourth
  38. foul, fowl
  39. franc, frank
  40. freeze, frieze
  41. friar, fryer
  42. furs, furze
  43. gait, gate
  44. galipot, gallipot
  45. gallop, galop
  46. gamble, gambol
  47. gays, gaze
  48. genes, jeans
  49. gild, guild
  50. gilt, guilt
  51. giro, gyro
  52. gnaw, nor
  53. gneiss, nice
  54. gorilla, guerilla
  55. grate, great
  56. greave, grieve
  57. greys, graze
  58. grisly, grizzly
  59. groan, grown
  60. guessed, guest
  61. hail, hale
  62. hair, hare
  63. hall, haul
  64. hangar, hanger
  65. hart, heart
  66. haw, hoar, whore
  67. hay, hey
  68. heal, heel, he’ll
  69. hear, here
  70. heard, herd
  71. he’d, heed
  72. heroin, heroine
  73. hew, hue
  74. hi, high
  75. higher, hire
  76. him, hymn
  77. ho, hoe
  78. hoard, horde
  79. hoarse, horse
  80. holey, holy, wholly
  81. hour, our
  82. idle, idol
  83. in, inn
  84. indict, indite
  85. it’s, its
  86. jewel, joule
  87. key, quay
  88. knave, nave
  89. knead, need
  90. knew, new
  91. knight, night
  92. knit, nit
  93. knob, nob
  94. knock, nock
  95. knot, not
  96. know, no
  97. knows, nose
  98. laager, lager
  99. lac, lack
  100. lade, laid
  101. lain, lane
  102. lam, lamb
    1. laps, lapse
  103. larva, lava
  104. lase, laze
  105. law, lore
  106. lay, ley
  107. lea, lee
  1. leach, leech
  2. lead, led
  3. leak, leek
  4. lean, lien
  5. lessen, lesson
  6. levee, levy
  7. liar, lyre
  8. licence, license
  9. licker, liquor
  10. lie, lye
  11. lieu, loo
  12. links, lynx
  13. lo, low
  14. load, lode
  15. loan, lone
  16. locks, lox
  17. loop, loupe
  18. loot, lute
  19. made, maid
  20. mail, male
  21. main, mane
  22. maize, maze
  23. mall, maul
  24. manna, manner
  25. mantel, mantle
  26. mare, mayor
  27. mark, marquee
  28. marshal, martial
  29. marten, martin
  30. mask, masque
  31. maw, more
  32. me, mi
  33. mean, mien
  34. meat, meet, mete
  35. medal, meddle
  36. metal, mettle
  37. meter, metre
  38. might, mite
  39. miner, minor, mynah
  40. mind, mined
  41. missed, mist
  42. moat, mote
  43. mode, mowed
  44. moor, more
  45. moose, mousse
  46. morning, mourning
  47. muscle, mussel
  48. naval, navel
  49. nay, neigh
  50. nigh, nye
  51. none, nun
  52. od, odd
  53. ode, owed
  54. oh, owe
  55. one, won
  56. packed, pact
  57. packs, pax
  58. pail, pale
  59. pain, pane
  60. pair, pare, pear
  61. palate, palette, pallet
  62. pascal, paschal
  63. paten, patten, pattern
  64. pause, paws, pores, pours
  65. pawn, porn
  66. pea, pee
  67. peace, piece
  68. peak, peek, peke, pique
  69. peal, peel
  70. pearl, purl
  71. pedal, peddle
  72. peer, pier
  73. pi, pie
  74. pica, pika
  75. place, plaice
  76. plain, plane
  77. pleas, please
  78. plum, plumb
  79. pole, poll
  80. poof, pouffe
  81. practice, practise
  82. praise, prays, preys
  83. principal, principle
  84. profit, prophet
  85. quarts, quartz
  86. quean, queen
  87. rain, reign, rein
  88. raise, rays, raze
  89. rap, wrap
  90. raw, roar
  91. read, reed
  92. read, red
  93. real, reel
  94. reek, wreak
  95. rest, wrest
  96. retch, wretch
  97. review, revue
  98. rheum, room
  99. right, rite, wright, write
  100. ring, wring
  101. road, rode
  102. roe, row
  103. role, roll
  104. roo, roux, rue
  105. rood, rude
  106. root, route
  107. rose, rows
  108. rota, rotor
  109. rote, wrote
  110. rough, ruff

348.  sew, so, sow

349.  shake, sheikh

350.  shear, sheer

shoe, shoo

sic, sick

side, sighed

sign, sine

sink, synch

slay, sleigh

sloe, slow

sole, soul

some, sum

son, sun

sort, sought

spa, spar

staid, stayed

stair, stare

stake, steak

stalk, stork

stationary, stationery

steal, steel

stile, style

storey, story

straight, strait

sweet, suite

watt, what

wax, whacks

way, weigh, whey

we, wee, whee

weak, week

we’d, weed

weal, we’ll, wheel

wean, ween

weather, whether

weaver, weever

weir, we’re

were, whirr

wet, whet

wheald, wheeled

which, witch

whig, wig

while, wile

whine, wine

whirl, whorl

whirled, world

whit, wit

white, wight

who’s, whose

woe, whoa

wood, would

yaw, yore, your, you’re

yoke, yolk

you’ll, yule swat, swot

tacks, tax

tale, tail

talk, torque

tare, tear

taught, taut, tort

te, tea, tee

team, teem

tear, tier

teas, tease

terce, terse

tern, turn

there, their, they’re

threw, through

throes, throws

throne, thrown

 

   

Prepositions

A preposition is a word placed before a noun or a pronoun to show in what relationship the person or thing denoted by it stands in regard to something else.

–A preposition simply means that which is placed before.

–The preposition can join a noun to other nouns e.g. There is a cow in the field.

–The preposition can also join a noun to an adjective e.g.  He is fond of tea.

–A preposition can join a noun to a verb e.g. The cat jumped off the chair.

–The noun or pronoun used with a preposition is called its object. It is the accusative case and is said to be governed by the preposition.  E.g.

There is a dog in the house.  Accusative case

–A preposition may have two or more objects as in: The road runs over the hills and plains.

–Sometimes a preposition is placed after an object.  E.g. Here is the watch that you asked for.

That is the boy I was speaking of.

Simple prepositions are at, by, for, from, in, of, off, on, out, through, till to, up and  with.

  1. a) Place– about, at, against, among, below,
  2. b) Time—at, on, in, from, until
  3. c) Agency—at, by, through
  4. d) Manner—with
  5. e) Cause/Reason—for, of, with, through
  6. f) Possession—on, of, with
  7. g) Standard—at(price), by(inches)
  8. h) Motive—from what I know of him, I did it from gratitude

Complex prepositions consist of more than one word. They express different meanings as follows:

  1. a) Place—close to, away from, out of,  next to,  ahead of,
  2. b) Cause or reason—because of, due to, with a view to, in view of
  3. c) Exception—except for, apart from
  4. d) Contrast—In spite of

Most complex prepositions are made up of two words but some three words like  ‘with regard to’

–Notice that the triple-worded prepositions begin with a simple preposition and end with one.

Exercise

Fill the blanks in sentences below with an appropriate preposition.

  1. No doubt he has achieved much but I cannot give him credit__ all that he boat__.
  2. She was the only hindrance __his achievement.
  3. He is indebted __his friend __a large sum.
  4. It is difficult to agree __those critics who ascribe the work of Shakespeare—Bacon.
  5. The soldiers__ the fort were provided__ provisions to last them a year.
  6. We are accountable __God __our actions.
  7. Measure yourself __your equals and learn __frequent competition the place which nature has allotted –you.
  8. At the eleventh hour he retired __the contest leaving the field open __his opponents.
  9. Dogs have antipathy __cats.
  10. He has been very indulgent __his children.
  11. I purposely refrained __saying more.
  12. I insisted __ going.
  13. I assented __ his proposal.
  14. I am not satisfied __ your explanation.
  15. He did not profit __ his experience.
  16. He is innocent __ the crime.
  17. His views do not accord __ mine.
  18. The avaricious man is greedy __ gain.
  19. He is suspicious __all his neighbours.
  20. He is indifferent __ his own interests.
  21. He is prompt __ carrying out orders.

 

 

 

Antonyms and Synonyms

Antonyms are words with opposite meaning e.g. good—bad while Synonyms are words with similar meaning that can replace each other in a sentence e.g. get—acquire , run—scamper  etc.

 

Note making

Note making entails picking out the most important points from a given piece of writing. The main aim of note making is to condense information in a passage into a brief and simple form and still retain clarity.

When making notes consider the following points

  1. Read the given text carefully at least three times.
  2. Identify the main points by marking them out or underlining them.
  3. Write the marked points down in note form using numbers or bullets.

 

Summary Writing

If you are required to make summary of a piece of text observes the following:

  1. Read through the story and the questions at least two times.
  2. Pick out the main points by underling them or marking them out in their proper order.
  3. Transfer the points on to a rough draft part of the question or any space you can get.
  4. Then from details in the rough draft, write a fair copy in continuous prose; separating the points in the order they appeared in rough draft using a comma and joining them up using co-ordinating and subordinating conjunctions.
  5. Use a topic sentence to introduce your summary at the beginning.
  6. Stick to the word limit and make sure you count the words by indicating the total number at the bottom on the right of the fair copy.
  7. Avoid grammatical errors because they attract penalties

Synopsis

A synopsis is a summary of a piece of writing. In order to write a synopsis, it is important to fully comprehend the theme and subject matter of the source material.  Writing a synopsis will involve the same steps you would use to write a summary. A good synopsis should condense information without omitting any important points. A synopsis, unlike summary, should be expressed in your own words and should include your own voice or opinion. It is advisable to make a draft you can revise until you are satisfied before writing the final copy.

Occasionally, you might be required only to write a synopsis of a part of a text or be given word limit.

 

Question tags

A tag is a special construction in English. It is a statement followed by a mini-question. The whole sentence is a tag question and the mini-question at the end is called a question tag.  A tag is something small we add to something larger. We usually tag a question at the end of a statement to ask for confirmation e.g. She is coming, isn’t she? Or to encourage a reply from someone.

The basic structure is

statement—question,

positive statement—negative tag,  he has gone, hasn’t he?

Negative statement—positive tag,   It wasn’t the boy, was it?

 

The question tag borrows the auxiliary or helping verb in the statement.

E.g. You might see him, mightn’t you?

Most question tags are formed from helping verbs used in the statement whether subordinate of main as follows:

We are here, aren’t we?

She does like him, doesn’t she? Etc.

When the verb in the main sentence is in the simple present or past  tense without the helping verb, we form the question tag with ‘do’ ‘does’ or ‘did’

You play the guitar, don’t you?

Alison like tennis, doesn’t she?

They went to the cinema, didn’t they?

She studied in New Zealand, didn’t she?

He hardly ever speaks, does he?

When the statement contains a word with a negative meaning without ‘not’ the question tag would still need to be positive.  E.g. They rarely eat in a restaurant, do they?

Some verbs have different question tags e.g.

I am attractive, aren’t I?

For commands, the tag ‘will you’ is used  e.g.

Stop it, will you? Or   Don’t make noise, will you?

Requests that begin with ‘let’ take the ‘shall we’ tag. E.g. Let us go home, shall we?

Irregular tags are those that have indefinite pronouns e.g.

No one is here, is there?

No one is unhappy, are they?/is he?

Somebody saw her, didn’t they?

 

ORAL LITERATURE

 

Oral literature, sometimes called orature, verbal arts or oral tradition is a spoken, acted or performed art whose medium is words. It is passed on from one generation to the other by word of mouth.

Functions of Oral Literature

  1. for entertainment
  2. To create self-awareness—oral literature makes us understand ourselves.
  3. Oral literature teaches us about our history and this enables us to understand and interpret it.
  4. The teaching of Oral literature promotes nation building and intercultural understanding, thus helping creating harmony in a nation.
  5. Oral literature sharpens and develops language skills such as speech, listening, creativity, wit etc.

 

Forms of oral literature

Oral literature is categorized into three main forms

1) Narratives.

2) Songs.

3) Short forms.

Narratives

A narrative is a story or prose account of people events and places that may be fictional or factual. A narrative is also called a tale or a folk tale.

Classification of Narratives

Classifying refers to grouping of stories basing on the shared features like the manner of action of main characters and setting.

Narratives are classified into myths, legends, dilemma, explanatory ogre and trickster.

Myths

Myths are stories of creation and always involve a supernatural character.  Myths deal with supernatural phenomena and origin of people.

Characteristics of myths

  1. Myths always seek to explain origin of mysterious things like life and death.
  2. They don’t have opening and closing formulae.
  3. Myths are always regarded as facts by their community of origin.
  4. Myths refer to things that happened at the beginning of time.
  5. Myths involve a supernatural character like God or gods and spirits.
  6. They are always set in the early mysterious or magical world.
  7. People take myths as sacred or religious stories.

Legends

These are stories about memorable historical events and people.

Characteristics of legends

  1. Legends are understood to be stories of true historical events and people.
  2. The characters in legends are always given imaginary details or a bit of exaggeration.
  3. Legendary stories are not treated as holy but secular. That is, they talk about heroes and heroines who inhabited earth and such events deemed to have taken place.

Dilemma

These are stories which have a character or characters burdened with two moral choices which they must choose but such a decision is usually difficult to make. Sometimes the story ends with a debating question which the audience can debate on.

Explanatory or Etiological

These are stories that try to trace or explain the origin of behaviour, both physical and cultural in people and animals.

Characteristics

  1. They seek to explain behaviour of people and animals.
  2. These stories link past decisions or mistakes to present traits in animals and people.
  3. The stories are based on observable features in people and animals but that cannot be explained clearly by the human reason.

Ogre or Monster

These are stories that feature a non-human character that is usually grotesque, frightening and evil.

Characteristics

  1. The character in the story is usually a monster that is imagined as an evil creature.
  2. The monster usually interacts with human beings in a destructive way: eating children, swallowing people etc.

Trickster

These are stories that feature a character that plays tricks on others.

Characteristics

  1. There is usually a smaller or weaker animal that uses its intelligence to trick a foolish, bigger and stronger animal.
  2. In these stories, the animal may simply exploit the opportunity that comes its way that others have failed to see or take advantage of.
  3. In other occasions, the animal may be tricked first but later it uses the same tricks or better ones to outwit the other.

QUALITIES OF A GOOD STORYTELLER

  1. She should be audible and fluent.
  2. Should be able to use gestures and tonal variations.
  3. He should be creative and imaginative.
  4. She should be proud of her culture.
  5. He should be pleasant and entertaining.
  6. She should have a good memory.
  7. She should be confident.
  8. He should be able to connect the past with the present.

ANALYSIS OF ORAL NARRATIVES

Plot

This is the order events in a story. Oral narratives often have simple straightforward plots. Events in a narrative would constitute three parts: a beginning, middle and an ending.

Beginning presents the audience with problems facing the main characters.

The middle shows the attempts by the characters to solve the problems.

The ending shows how the problems are finally solved.

Some stories have complex plots and therefore would not follow this order.

Consider the following questions when analyzing the plot:

  1. How many major characters are introduced at the beginning of the story?
  2. Are there problems or a problem facing major characters in the story?
  3. Through which actions do the characters try to solve the problems?
  4. What kind of resolution is offered?
  5. Do the characters emerge triumphant or they are defeated?

Classification

Classify a narrative and give reasons for your classification. E.g. it is a trickster narrative since the story has or involves tricks; the hare tricks they hyena into killing his own mother.

Characterization

Characters are people or animals involved in a story. In oral narratives, characters include

—human beings    —Animals   —Birds

—Trees   —Mountains   —Spirits   —gods    —monsters

No distinction is made between animals, plants and man in oral literature. They can interact freely. This style of representation is known as personification.

Hence, narratives use symbolic characters as fictional masks so that narratives can actually mimic us, describe us and correct us without causing offence.

Character traits are used to refer to the uniqueness of characters in their speech, behaviour, actions and interactions with other beings.

We can tell the character trait of a character by

  1. What the character does.
  2. What the character says.
  3. What other characters say about her

Character traits do not include the physical appearance of a person e.g. beautiful, fat deformed etc.

We use adjectives to describe character traits e.g. greedy, loving, grateful etc.

In identifying character traits

  1. Identify the trait.
  2. Give illustrations or an explanation to justify your identification.

Do not use general adjectives like good or bad to describe characters. Use specific traits only like cruel.  It is sometimes useful o identify the role each character has in the story in relation to their character traits. The role can provide context and limit your choice of character traits you can assign e.g. if someone who has been mistreated for a long time decides to kill the oppressor, the trait might be vengeful, cruel, brave or inhuman depending on the role and context.

Common roles are

Villain/ Antagonist — the evil character, or the anti-hero in a story.

Protagonist —the good character, or the hero in a story.

Symbolic character—characters that represent other people of concepts in real world.

Caricatures—exaggerated characters.

 

PARALINGUISTIC FEATURES IN ORAL PERFORMANCE

These are features that the narrator employs to effectively deliver the message in a specific piece of oral narration. These paralinguistic features add entertainment value to the performance. These features are

Mimicry

The narrator imitates the action and speech manners of the characters.

Improvisation

This is the ability of the narrator to incorporate in his narration, objects on sight, people and other things and involve them in the narration by pointing at them, inviting some on stage or putting available objects in use as musical instruments.

Facial Expression

They involve moment of face muscles to show contortion, frowning, grimacing, smiling, sneering and flinching. Facial expressions mainly show appropriate emotions at different stages of narration.

Tonal Variation or Intonation

This is the use of a rising and falling pitch in the voice of the narrator appropriately, when asking questions, making statements and for other dramatic purposes.

Pace of delivery

This is how fast the narrator speaks while narrating the story. The pace of delivery can vary depending on the nature of the story and the emotions to be impacted in the audience. For instance, to make the audience sad a slow torturous pace is appropriate.

Onomatopoeia and idiophones  

Onomatopoeia is use of English words in a story that imitates sounds. Words like scratch, screech, whisper, hiss etc. are English words that imitate sound and if used in a story would constitute onomatopoeia. The effectiveness of Onomatopoeia is to create the originality of events.

Idiophones involve use of local or non-English words to imitate sounds in a story. Words such as Puff! Ndo ndo ndo, or Chubwi can be used to capture the sounds heard by a character in the story and would constitute use of idiophones as a style.

Gestures

Gestures can be used to illustrate movements and mimic action.

Body Movements

To show the movement of characters in terms of leaning, running, walking, jumping and sitting.  

Accompanying instruments and costumes

Costumes can be used to make the narration more colourful and entertaining, while accompanying instruments like drums, arrows, placards etc help dramatize and mimic events in a story.

Dance

It is important to cultural dances in the narrative, that is, by use of songs to break the monotony of narration.

Dramatic Pauses

Pausing dramatically can be useful to let the point sink, draw attention to a major development in a story, create suspense or invite a reaction from the audience or applause.

Rhetorical Questions

Rhetorical questions are used to provoke the audience to think critically about something.

Repetition

Repetition of some words or segments to emphasis certain points or drum in more entertainment.

STYLE IDENTIFICATION IN ORAL NARRATIVES

Opening Formula

Common opening formulae include …long ago…once upon a time…long ago etc.

The opening formula has the following uses

  1. Announces the beginning of a narrative.
  2. Attracts the audience’s attention to the narrative.
  3. Separates the world of reality from the world of fiction.
  4. Identifies the narrator.

Closing Formula

Common closing formulae are …since that day …and there ends my story.

Closing formula has the following uses

  1. Announces the end of a narrative.
  2. Momentarily releases the audience concentration.
  3. Clears the way for the next activity.

Allusions

This is where the narrator makes reference to familiar objects or historical figures known to the audience.

Personification

Non-human characters like animals or trees are given human qualities like talking, laughing, gossiping etc.

Hyperbole

Events within the story are exaggerated, for example, a stone shedding tears, a man changing into a snake etc. to make the story interesting.

Timelessness

Time is not defined in a tale by use of vague phrases such as once upon a time, one day, later etc. usually to create a mysterious past.

Direct Translation

The story as narrated doesn’t pay attention to the grammatical rules. E.g. He gave her a stomach.

Use of Vernacular

Non English words from a specific language, that often cannot be translated successfully, are used in a narrative.

Suspense

The narrator withholds information from the audience until the end to increase curiosity or interest.

Irony

Events in the story turn out contrary to our expectations. What happens at the end or within a given context is not what the audience would by and large expect to happen.

Social Economic Activities in Oral Narratives

Oral narratives reflect social economic activities of communities that tell them.

Social activities include circumcision, courtship, marriage monogamy and polygamy, worship and wars.

Economic activities include crop farming, livestock keeping, bee-keeping, fishing, pottery, hunting, trading, blacksmithing/iron smelting and weaving.

Moral lessons

The lessons we learn from oral narratives should be universal. If the question asks for a moral lesson, the lesson stated must be positive e.g. we should respect other people’s property.

All lessons identified must be illustrated to show the action of a character in the story and the consequences of that action.

Generally, oral narratives encourage virtues such as hard work, co-operation, bravery, honesty, wisdom etc.

Functions of Oral Narratives

  1. Entertainment—stories amuse and relax the audiences.
  2. Education—stories educate the audience and teach moral lessons.
  3. Socialization—story telling sessions bring together people to share in artistic and creative affair.
  4. Cultural conservation—stories reveal the way of life of a people, their social economic activities; helping future generation adapt and preserve them.
  5. Oral narratives help in sharpening language skills such as listening, good memory and creativity.

ORAL POETRY/SONGS

An oral poem or a song is a composition in verse form expressing ideas and thoughts verbally. An oral poem can be sung, recited or chanted.

Types of Songs/Oral Poems

Birth/Cradle

These are songs performed when a baby is born or sung to encourage a woman in labour.

Child Naming

Songs sung during naming of newborns. Such names are given in several ways:

  1. after an important event.
  2. Location where the child is born.
  3. According to season.
  4. After the father of the husband, mother etc.
  5. from recurrent dreams.
  6. Inheriting names of important people.
  7. Praise names.

Lullabies

Songs sung to comfort a baby to sleep. Lullabies also

–educate on social values and culture,

–tell more about the social organization of the people, their food and work,

–have simple and repetitive words,

–are sung softly and slowly,

-have a rocking rhythm.

 

Children’s Songs and Games

Songs performed by children during their playtime. They keep children busy and entertain them.

Circumcision

These are songs sung during the season or ceremony of circumcision to encourage the initiates and ridicule the cowards. They are usually full of obscenities in the direct use of sexual language or talk about relationship between men and women.

Courtship Songs

Songs sung by those in love to express emotions of happiness, praise lovers and express romance. Sometimes they are sung by jilted lovers to express sadness or deal with marital problems or unrequited love.

Wedding/Marriage/Nuptial

These are songs performed during marriage ceremonies. They are often sung to praise the bride and groom. They also express the sorrow of leaving home and parting with friends. Some of the marriage songs warm about the problems of living among strangers or in-laws. Some advise on how to cope with married life. These songs also may be sung as farewell to the bride’s beloved siblings and parents.

They may tend to scorn but generally, they are happy songs.

Work Songs

Work songs are sung as accompaniment to some chores like pounding, ploughing etc. They are sung in unison to make strenuous work more bearable. They also sung to discourage laziness and extol the value of working hard.

Some work songs are specific, like hunting songs, fishing songs etc.

Sacred / Religious 

These are songs sung during religious activities like worship, sacrifice etc. They include hymns, praise and lamentations that make reference to supernatural beings.

Political/Patriotic Songs

They are performed during public holiday and political rallies. They are usually sung to create political awareness, promote propaganda, conformity or to protest against injustice and oppression. But mostly they are sung to praise good leaders and satirize bad ones.

War Songs

These are songs sung or performed during war. They are meant to inspire warriors to fight bravery. They are also sung to honour heroes and glorify the achievement of war.

Beer Party Songs

These are songs sung by drinkers together with brewers at a drinking party. They are sung by revellers to express enjoyment, praise the brewers and satirize the lazy or the poor.

Dirges/Funeral Songs

These are songs sung during funerals or memorial ceremonies usually accompanied, in some communities, with loud wailings and sobs. They are sung to mourn the dead, share grief with the bereaved and console the relatives of the dead. Dirges are sometimes sung to satirize the benefactors of the deceased’s wealth.

Characteristics of Songs

  1. They have repetitive segments—songs would have a refrain or chorus to emphasize the mood and create rhythm.
  2. They have direct address of the audience for immediacy of expression.
  3. They carry direct translation of original language for local flavour or authenticity.
  4. Many songs have rhetorical questions to involve the audience and provoke them to think about issues the songs raise.
  5. Songs are populated by idiophones and onomatopoeia to echo local sounds and make them interesting.
  6. Songs are full of exaggerations or hyperbole to create comic or satirical effects.
  7. Songs carry striking imagery, like metaphors and similes to create mental images in the mind of the audience.
  8. Songs have antiphon or call and response mode. Many songs are sung in a way that the soloist call and the choir or group respond, or one person calls and another responds.
  9. Many songs are elastic and flexible; which means they can be stretched during performance to accommodate the time given or shortened on demand. Some songs can be modified to suit disparate situations like the famous Mwana wa mbeli song.
  10. Some songs depend on the tone and texture of the voice of the performer to establish mood and even meaning. The same song can be sad and at another context happy or even spiritual depending on how it is sung and on tone.

Styles in Oral Poetry

When discussing styles in oral poetry, we base on the following aspects

a] The patter of the poem

The pattern f the poem refers to the structure and layout. How many stanzas does the poem or song have an d how many lines per stanza?

b] Diction

Diction refers to the choice of words used in a song. When composing a song, the poet must choose words carefully, by using poetic licence, so as to make sure there is rhythm in the song as well as the message.

c] Imagery

Imagery refers to figures of speech like Metaphor, simile and symbolism that create mental images in the mind of the audience.

Metaphor refers to direct comparison of qualities of two things by referring to one thing using another. E.g. Your father is a lion.

Simile refers to direct comparison of the qualities of two things using words like, like and as e.g. She is as fat as a pig.

Symbolism refers to using objects in a song that have a metaphorical sense or extended meaning and runs throughout the song. E.g.  A song that talks about a snake but the snake in the song represents a corrupt leader in a given society.

d] Satire/Humour

Satire is the use of mocking language in a song which in essence creates humour. The subject in the song may be mocked and ridiculed by the persona as being like an elephant that is scared of fighting a hare, or describing the physical features of the subject in a ridiculous manner e.g. his head has the shape of a mango fruit, his hands resemble long sticks and his stomach, like a tube of toothpaste.

Humour is any use of language that is funny or creates comic relief. Humour can be serious or light.

Sarcasm is another tool that helps creates satire and humour at the same time. Sarcasm is saying something to someone while you mean the opposite of what you say in order to hurt his feeling and create humour. For instance, one can tell a very short man, a pigmy,

”My girlfriend loves tall men; I am afraid of you because you are going to make her fall in love with you.”

Of course what he means is that she will not even notice him because he is a short man.

Any song that has sarcastic statements can be said to have a sarcastic or satirical tone.

e] Irony

Irony occurs when events in a song or a story goes contrary to the expectations of the audience or reader.  Like in a situation where the child in a family is the breadwinner and his parents depend on him for everything. This would be contrary to our expectations that parents provide for their families and children.

Situational Irony occurs in situations where events go contrary to expectations or the outcome is not expected as in the example above.

Dramatic Irony occurs in plays mostly where the audience know something that surprisingly some the characters in the play do not know. For instance if character A steals goods from character B, and later character B, unaware of who the thief is, goes to seek help from character A in searching for the goods when clearly the audience is aware who stole the goods.

Verbal Irony occurs when someone says something while doing the opposite of what he says. E.g.” I am coming,” when he is going away. Verbal Irony is different from sarcasm because it is not meant to hurt the feelings of the addressee.

Suspense

Suspense involve withholding information from the reader or audience as a performer or narrator to arouse their curiosity and enhance their concentration, or even the dilemma situations in a song where no conclusive ending is present to make the audience second guess on the controversial situation presented.

Allusion

Occurs when a song borrows a pattern from another famous song; or makes reference to a famous historical situation.  A song can be sung in the same structure say a famous song like Hallelujah was structured or borrow words from famous songs such as Desiderata. That would be use of allusion.

Rhyme

Rhyme is the repetition of syllables or end sounds of lines in a song to create rhythm. The last sounds the song below carry a rhyme scheme.

e.g . She went away

and saw life

Running the say

she was a wife

with the  pay

Sometimes songs have internal rhyme in lines as shown below

He said, he was made

They said, they made

Alliteration

Alliteration involves repetition of the initial consonant sound in lines of a poem or song as shown below, usually to create musicality or rhythm in the song.

Peter paid their pending salaries

Assonance

Assonance involves repetition of the vowel sounds in lines of a song or poem usually to create musicality or rhythm in the poem as shown below.

She sits around silent and sickly

Consonance

This is the repetition of consonant sounds in lines of a song located either in the middle or at the end of words as shown below to create musicality or rhythm in the poem.

He sat straight and let pets met around him

Idiophones and Onomatopoeia

Idiophones are local or non-English words that describe sounds like tuff! And onomatopoeia are English words that describe sounds like scratch, that are used in songs to create originality of experience and to make the songs more enjoyable and interesting.

How to Analyse an Oral Poem/Song

Analysing a song involves the following:

Classification

  1. Establish the type of the song. That is if it is a dirge, a lullaby, a patriotic songs etc.
  2. Paraphrase the song. Paraphrasing a song is writing the verses in the song in prose and in your own words without changing the intended meaning.
  3. Identify the voice or persona in the song. It is important you establish how many voices are there and who is the person speaking or persona.
  4. Identify the subject matter or the themes in the oral poem or the message that we derive from the poem. Find out what the persona is trying to say.
  5. Identify the structure of the song by looking at the pattern of words, lines and stanzas. How many lines per stanza and how many stanzas in the poem?
  6. Identify styles that the poet employed to convey the message and create rhythm.
  7. Look at the diction, the economy of words in the poem and how the diction best captures the mood, tone and attitudes in relation to the message in the song.
  8. Think about the performance of the poem or song and answer these questions:

–Who would best perform the song?

–What kind of an audience would be suitable for the song?

–What would be the best occasion for the performance of the song?

–Which accompaniments and paralinguistic features/non verbal cues would suit the song?

–Which mode of performance (recitation, chant, choral, solo, etc) would best fit the song?

Exercise

Consider the song below and answer questions that follow.

Mama really loves chicken

 

Mama throws down the pot pwa!

Like a scared dog

She runs after our cat

It runs swiftly swaying and swerving

She emerges in the court

 

Mama throws aside her clothes fwa!

She is a mad cow

Shouting, she giggles and laughs

It had eaten the chicken stew

Mama kills all its young ones

Questions

  1. Identify six styles used in the song above and give their effectiveness on the poem.

 

Question 2

Read the song below and answer questions that follow.

Shaka Honours Muzilikazi

The hills echoed with the laughter of the Zulu army.

At the southernmost point the army rested,

Shaka addressed them:”My brothers, our journey is now pointless.

Everywhere we go we find only those who acknowledge our authority,

Zulu power no longer issues from conquest

But from a bond of an all-embracing nationhood,

We must turn back to our homes.

Perhaps in the north Soshangane and his lot need a lesson.”

 

At Bulawayo they sang and danced for the returning army.

Shaka was still eager to consolidate the nation’s boundaries.

He said to his war councillors,” Our easy life

Shall soon undermine our fighting spirit

I want you Muzilikazi, to head to the north

And there establish peace among the quarrelling nations

And subdue the troublesome people of Ranisi

Who have caused endless wars among friendly nations,

You shall seize from them the loot of cattle

And return it to its original owners.”

The king spoke to Muzilikazi with great warmth and friendliness,

He said:”I give you my own axe, Muzilikazi,

So that when you pass the ruins of your native country

You raise it and pray for guidance of your ancestors.

I give you this so that wherever you are

You may know I shall always honour those who are our heroes.”

Muzilikazi of Mashoba was moved by this act,

He said, his eyes wet with tears;

“My lord, I do not know what great things I have done,

What great heroism I have displayed,

That I should deserve a gift most coveted by all heroes of Zululand?

Long ago you sheltered me when I was orphaned

And now you honour me.”

A] What kind of an oral poem do you think this is?

–Epic; because it is narrated and it is about renown figures such as Shaka Zulu.

–Historical poem because people like Muzilikazi who are subjects in the poem are historical figures.

–Narrative poem because it narrates to us the story of Shaka Zulu honouring Muzilikazi.

–Legendary/heroic/ode/praise/war song because it celebrates the heroic deeds of the Zulu army and its leaders Shaka and Muzilikazi.

B] Briefly describe the culture of the Zulu as reflected in the poem.

–Nationalist/patriotic—they have a strong kinship bond, “Zulu power…issues from an all-embracing nationhood.”

–Warlike/warriors e.g. “the hills echoed with the laughter of the Zulu army”

Pastoralists/kept cattle e.g. “You shall seize from them all the loot of cattle.”

–They are religious e.g. they have a traditional religion in which ancestors are revered/they practise ancestor-worship; pray for guidance from your ancestors.”

–They have a sense of justice; returned cattle to original owners.

–They are artistic e.g. their art includes song and dances, “At Bulawayo they sang and danced for the returning army.”

–They recognise and honour heroism e.g. “Shall always honour those who are our brave heroes.”

–Peace lovers e.g. Shaka Zulu tells Muzilikazi to establish peace in the north.

C] Identify and explain two images from the poem.

–“The hills echoed with the laughter of the Zulu army” this describe how happy the Zulu were for victory in war.

–“Our easy life shall soon undermine our fighting spirit”: meaning that if we relax or concentrate too much on celebrating our victory we might become complacent or lose our power in war.

–“..The ruins of your native country” describe how Mzilikazi’s native country has been ravaged by war.

–“his eyes wet with tears: gives a visual picture to describe the extent to which Mzilikazi was moved by the way Shaka honoured him.

–Battle axe: power or authority symbol.

–An all-embracing nationhood: a symbol of unity.

D] What do you learn about Shaka’s character from this poem?

–Authoritative/dictatorial: the way he addresses his army and his councillors. For example to Muzilikazi, “I want you Muzilikazi, to head to the north.”

–Power-hungry: “Zulu power no longer issues from conquest”

–He is just: he gives Muzilikazi an axe as an illustration of his readiness to honour those who exhibit courage.

Cunning/Manipulative/tactical/wise/intelligent/; the gesture of giving Muzilikazi the axe is just a cunning way of getting him to undertake the difficult mission on which he sends him.

Friendly/Warm: He spoke to Muzilikazi with great warmth and friendliness.

–An orator; the way he talks is creative and seductive e.g. “Our easy life shall soon undermine our fighting spirit.”

–Ambitious: the way he cautions against complacency and then sends Muzilikazi on another mission.

–Warlike: even when they have won the war, he still looks for opportunities to fight.

–Charismatic: the army and the councillors obey him, for example, Muzilikazi is moved to tears when Shaka gives his axe, yet the main reason for the axe is to persuade Muzilikazi to subdue The troublesome people of Ranisi.

–Patriotic—He solicits for “an all embracing nationhood” and tells the army, “We must get back to our homes.”

–Peace-loving: “establish peace among the quarrelling nations”

–Religious: tells Muzilikazi to pray.

–Kind/Caring; took Muzilikazi in as an orphan and cared for him.

E] State and explain a proverb which could be used to warn/caution the people of Ranisi.

–You reap what you sow. They terrorized friendly nations, now they will experience similar/worse terror from Shaka’s warriors.

–Those who live in glass houses should not throw stones.

–Those that live by the sword perish by the sword.

–Every dog has its day.

Question 3

Read the oral poem below and answer the questions that follow.

 

The poor man knows not how to eat with the rich man.

When they eat fish, he eats the head.

 

Invite a poor man and he rushes in

Licking his lips and upsetting the plates.

 

The poor man has no manners, he comes along

With the blood of lice under his nails

The face of the poor man is lined

From hunger and thirst in his belly

 

Poverty is no state for any mortal man

It makes him a beast to be fed on grass

 

Poverty is unjust. If it befalls on a man

Though he is nobly born, he has no power with God.

 

A] What evidence is there to show that this is an oral poem? Identify and illustrate such features.

–Repetition e.g. the poor man/ poverty

–hyperbole/ exaggeration e.g. “it makes him a beast to be fed on grass”

–striking characterization e.g. the poor man cast in extreme terms.

B] Describe a probable situation in which such a poem could be performed.

–A beer party where cheap local brew is consumed by poor people.

–A traditional baraza where the conduct of a poor man is being castigated or ridiculed.

C} If you were to do a solo performance of this oral poem, what elements would you emphasize?

–Dramatisation e.g. eating the fish clumsily/ rushing in and licking one’s lips/upsetting the plates on a table/paint finger nails (blood of lice) walk on all fours to impersonate a beasts being fed on grass.

–Facial expressions e.g. to show hunger and thirst.

–Tonal variation e.g. vary one’s pitch to put special emphasis on words ‘poverty is unjust’.

D} What does the phrase “..with the blood of lice under his nails” reveal about the poor man?

The poor man lives in unsanitary or unhygienic conditions.

E] Describe with illustrations the tone of this poem.

–Compassionate: talks about the injustices of poverty towards the poor

–contemptuous/critical/satirical the poor man is described in contemptuous terms e.g. rushes in licking his lips, upsetting plates etc.

 

SHORT FORMS

Riddles

A riddle is a question, statement or description in a figurative language that is intended to test the listener’s ability to use their wits to unravel the meaning. Riddles are words puzzles in which familiar objects or situation are referred to in a figurative terms for us to decipher what is actually meant.

Characteristics

–Riddles are word puzzles: a game where you have to think about carefully in order to answer.

–They have an opening formula ‘riddle riddle’

–Riddles are short witty statements usually clever and amusing.

–Riddles use the question—answer format e.g. q..I have a riddle?

Ans…  Say it.

Riddles have a hypothetical prize—riddles are based on situations or ideas which are imagined or possible rather than real and true.

Classification of Riddles

  1. Declarative riddles are described in form of a statement. E.g. Catch my tail and we go. Ans. A jembe.
  2. Interogative riddles poses questions to be answered e.g. What is bouncing in the house? Ans. A churning gourd.
  3. Idiophonic/ sound riddles—it employs idiophones that should be unravelled. E.g. Huyu huyu poa! Ans. A night runner.
  4. Simple riddles. They are brief e.g. Water standing up? Ans. Sugarcane.
  5. Epigrammatic/ Complex riddles—Such riddles are presented as a series of puzzles. E.g.

The four-legged sitting on the four-legged waiting for the four-legged.  Ans. A cat sitting on a table waiting for a rat.

6.Riddles on people e.g. Best food for a baby. Ans. Sleep.

7.Riddles on plants. E.g. What tree has only one thorn? Ans. A sisal plant.

8.Riddles on parts of the body. E.g. Thirty-two  seated, one lady dancing. Ans. Teeth and the tongue.

Four gates that produce water. Ans. A cow’s udder.

  1. Riddles on waste products. E.g. A hill on the veranda. Ans. Excrement.
  2. Riddles on modern technology. E.g. A camera on my body. Ans. Eyes.
  3. Riddles on natural phenomena. E.g. When dressed she isn’t as beautiful as when naked. Ans. The moon.
  4. Riddles on animals. E.g. The white lady in the office. Ans. The jigger.

 

Functions of Riddles

–for entertainment or fun and humour

–for sharpening wit/ to enlarge our imagination

–to expand our knowledge of the environment

–To enhance our figurative use of language or creativity e.g. describing things without naming them

–to teach values and morals

–to pass a secret message by old people

Stages in a Riddling Session

  1. Invitation—the challenger or riddler draws the attention of the audience with an opening formula

e.g. Riddle riddle/ I throw a riddle/ I have a riddle

  1. Acceptance—The respondent or audience responds by saying; state it, say it, throw it or let it come
  2. The riddle itself—the challenger states or poses the riddle e.g. I have a house that has no door.
  3. Guesses—the audience tries to solve the riddles by giving guesses. E.g. An orange.

If they are unable to find the solution or if all guesses are wrong then the riddle will have stage 5.

  1. Prize—The challenger asks for the prize e.g. Give me a prize.

She is given a prize, usually a town, a city etc, which he rejects until given the city or prize of choice that she would accept. She will then say she has gone and visited the city and brought the greeting from the people there. The audience would acknowledge the greetings.

  1. The challenger gives the solution/ right answer. E.g. The answer is an egg.

Proverbs and Sayings

Proverbs are wise sayings that hide meaning in metaphors or similes that they employ, Proverbs are slightly different from sayings because sayings do not employ metaphors and similes.

Characteristics

–They are short and fixed

–they have a summative function

–they are incorporated in speech

–they are sometimes used to introduce a story

–they are common within a particular language or community or they are communal

Functions of Proverbs

–They are used to flower one’s speech

–They act as a mirror to society

–They summarize situations

–Can be used for entertainment

When analysing proverbs, you should be able to identify

–the type of the proverb

–objects of reference

–the communal philosophy in the proverb or the general message conveyed

–a similar proverb that can replace it

Types of Proverbs

  1. Proverbs of fate e.g.

— Accidents will happen.

–Absence makes the heart grow fonder.

–Action speaks louder than words.

–Advice is least heeded when it is most needed.

–A chain is no stronger than its weakest link.

–A fool and his money are soon parted.

–Easy come, easy go.

  1. Cautionary proverbs. E.g.

— He who steals with a woman will live in fear till he dies.

–An apple a day keeps the doctor away.

–An empty purse frightens away friends

–An idle mind is a devil’s workshop.

–A bird in hand is worth two in the bush.

  1. Proverbs on communal life E.g.

–Unity is strength.

–A problem shared is a problem half-solved.

–If you fall for me and I fall for you we can call it a game.

–On the way to one’s beloved there no hills.

  1. Epigrammatic proverbs. These are longer than usual. E.g.

— A man who marries a beautiful wife is like another who plants maize near the road in a poor neighbourhood.

–A man stung by a bee doesn’t go around smashing all bee-hives.

–If a gut allows a knife to be swallowed, the anus must wonder how it will get out.

–When trouble knocks at your door and you tell it you have no extra seat, it will tell you not to worry because it had brought its own stool.

–When a rat smiles at a nearby cat, just know that its hole is nearby.

  1. Summative proverbs or those proverbs that best summarize issues and stories

–Beauty is only skin deep.

Change is as good as rest.

–A friend to all is a friend to none.

–A good example is the best sermon.

A new broom sweeps clean.

–A stitch in time saves nine.

–A watched pot never boils

–A man who causes trouble for others also causes trouble for himself.

–A man roasting maize doesn’t wander away from the fireplace for too long.

–A young bull mounts the cow from the head.

–A drum is heavier on the return journey.

However long it takes, a stammerer will call ‘baba’.

–Staring at water doesn’t quench your thirst.

–The pen is mightier than a sword.

–When in Rome, do as the Romans.

–The squeaky wheel gets the greese.

–When the going gets tough, the tough get going.

–No man is island.

–Fortune favours the bold.

–People who live in glass houses should not throw stones.

–Hope for the best but prepare for the worst.

–Birds of a feather flock together.

–Keep your friends close and your enemies closer.

–A picture is worth a thousand words.

–There is no such a thing as free lunch.

 

Similarities between riddles and proverbs

–Both are brief

–Both employ figurative language

–Both are fixed—a riddle has a fixed response while a proverb has a fixed wording.

Differences

–Riddles have an opening formula

–Riddles require at least two performers while a proverb just one to say it.

–Riddles are common with children while proverbs common with adults.

–Riddles are used as preludes to storytelling sessions while proverbs are used in conversation.

–Riddles are witty statements or word puzzles while proverbs are sayings of wisdom.

Tongue Twisters

A tongue twister is a word game that is intended to test a speaker’s fluency to utter without hesitation or faltering a sequence of words with particular problems of articulation.

Characteristics

A tongue twister is a word game that plays on words with problems of articulation

–It employs alliteration, assonance and consonance

–They are mostly ungrammatical or they need not make sense.

–they are brief

Functions of Tongue twisters

–They entertain or create fun

–They aid in learning pronunciation

–Enhances confidence by helping one overcome shyness and enjoy communication

–they help train concentration and memorization

–they promote creativity

–they help develop one’s ability to recite

–They help one to learn a foreign language with particular problems of articulation

Examples of Tongue twisters

–She sells sea shells on the sea shore

–A disorganised organizer cannot organize a disorganized organization

–The red long lorry rolled down the long Limuru road

–Four hundred and forty four frightened fools fought for food

–Peter Piper picked a peck of speckled pepper

–How high up has he heaved his heavy hoe?

–Kantai can tie a tie, untie a tie and dye a tie like Dyre who can tie a tie, untie a tie and dye a tie; so, if Kantai can tie a tie, untie a tie  and dye a tie, why can’t I tie a tie, untie a tie  and dye a tie like dyre?

Exercise

Read the text below and answer questions that follow.

Betty Botter bought a bit of butter

But he said the butter’s bitter

“If I put a bit of bitter butter in my butter

It’ll make my better butter bitter

But a bit of better butter will make the bitter butter better.”

So she bought a bit of butter

Better than her bitter butter

She put it in her butter

And her butter wasn’t bitter

‘twas better Betty Botter bought a bit of better butter

 

  1. Identify three cases of elision in the item above and write the expressions in full.

Butter’s—butter was

It’ll—it will

‘twas—it was

  1. Identify with a reason, the item above?

It is a tongue twister because it has words following each other that are challenging in terms of pronunciation and employs alliteration and assonance.

  1. State five benefits a form one student would get by reading this item.

–Reading the tongue twister would entertain him

–It would help the student learn the pronunciation of /b/ in difficulty situations

–It would sharpen the student’s fluency

–It would promote creativity in the student

–It would develop the student’s ability to recite

–it would enhance the student’s concentration

  1. Identify stylistic features evident in this tongue twister

–Alliteration e.g. Betty Botter bought

Rhyme e.g. butter

Bitter

Butter

–Repetition of words e.g. bitter, butter

  1. This item is a word game. State the rules the performer would apply when reciting this.
  2. a) Recite fluently without hesitation
  3. b) Strictly follow the order of words
  4. c) Say it quickly
  5. e) What would be the effect of translating this item into another language?

–The effects of sound, especially /b/ and /t/ would be lost. One may end up with a sequence of words which may not be recognized as of the same kind as the item above.

Puns

A pun is a wordplay which involve words that have similar spellings but different meaning or homonyms e.g. can(a container), can(auxiliary verb and homophones (words with same pronunciation but different spellings and often different meanings) e.g. some and sum. Puns thrive on ambiguity of words to create fun within a sentence. Puns also employ metaphors and literal meaning of words.

A person who is fond of using puns is called a punster.

Examples

  1. A bicycle can’t stand alone because it is two-tyred.
  2. A will is a dead giveaway.
  3. A backward poet writes in verse.
  4. In a democracy, it is your vote that counts.
  5. She had a boyfriend with a wooden leg but broke it off.
  6. With her marriage, she got a new name and a dress.
  7. A boiled egg in the morning is hard to beat.
  8. When two egoists meet it is an I for an I.
  9. Scientists have finally discovered the wrong thing about a female brain: that the left side has nothing right and the right side has nothing left.
  10. What do you call a sleeping bull? A bull-dozer.
  11. He bought a donkey because he thought he might get a kick out of it.
  12. Why are fish so smart? Because they live in schools.
  13. I was struggling to figure out how lightning works then it struck me.
  14. Time flies like an arrow. Fruit flies like a banana.
  15. Have you ever heard of an honest cheetah?
  16. I have been to the dentist so many times so I know the drill.
  17. Speaking ill of the dead is a grave mistake.
  18. I fired my masseuse today. She rubbed me the wrong way.

Oral Literature Research/Field Work

Field work is the act and process of going out to a community to collect oral literature materials and related information for study and analysis. Field work is necessary for

  1. a) The student to relive the performance of oral literature materials (recordings, videos etc.)
  2. b) Experience firsthand, the community’s customs and beliefs.
  3. c) Recording and storage of oral literature materials to be used by the future generations.
  4. d) To enable a student know and explore new knowledge not covered by earlier researchers.
  5. e) To help the student acquire research skills in academic study.

Key Stages in Field Work

  1. Preparation

It involves stating the purpose and scope of study and objectives or research to guard against digression. It also involves identifying the location for the research, familiarization with earlier works on the study or literature review, establishing contact with useful people like informants, deciding on the key methods to be used in collecting data e.g. questionnaires or interviews, securing permissions to conduct research from relevant authorities, buying or hiring of recording materials and budgeting for accommodation and transport.

  1. Material Collection

This is done through various methods of collecting date e.g. interviews, questionnaires, observation etc.

  1. Recording of Information

Recording is done through writing, typing, using tape recorders etc.

  1. Processing and Analysis of Information

This involves scrutinising of information collected in preparation for interpretation and documentation, transcription, interpretation, classifying into genres, themes, styles and making a conclusion.

  1. Dissemination

This is the spreading the information gathered through media.

 

 

Common Problems Encountered During Field Work

  1. Loss of memory especially for details not recorded.
  2. Outrageous demands from sources of information like payments.
  3. Harsh or unpredictable weather.
  4. Breakdown or problems of transportation, delays, hiked fares etc.
  5. Informants giving wrong or distorted information.
  6. Accidents and misfortunes or ill fate e.g. death
  7. Sickness in the middle of fieldwork.
  8. Prohibitions, lack of access, customs etc.
  9. Loss of equipment like camera etc.

Field work should be carried out in relevant and appropriate places like rural areas where there is ethnically authentic information and performance; elders would give detailed oral testimony or material, display great experience and skill while children would easily perform riddles, singing games and tongue twisters.

 

                                                                      GRAMMAR

Nouns

A noun is a name of anything or simply, a naming word. Nouns are categorized into

–Proper nouns—names of specific people, places or things. Proper nouns always start with a capital letter e.g. Kenya, Peter, Lake Victoria, Nairobi etc.

–Common noun—these are names of people, places and things that are not specific. E.g. desk, boy, river, plate etc.

–Concrete Nouns—names of things, people etc that can be touched.  E.g. book desk, water, James, bottle etc.

–Abstract nouns—names of things or concepts that cannot be touched or seen.  E.g. wind, corruption, love, hate, God etc.

–Collective nouns—names of group of things. These kinds of names usually take a singular verb.

Count and non-count Nouns

Count nouns are names of things that can be counted. They thus occur in singular and plural forms.

e.g. boy—boys  one boy—20 boys.

–Most singular count nouns that end in the sound /s/, /ch/ and /sh/ take –es in plural e.g. bus—buses, church—churches, bush—bushes.

–If a singular count noun ends with ‘y’, the ‘y’ is usually dropped in plural and replaced with ‘ies’  unless the ‘y’ comes after a vowel. E.g. Lady—ladies, cry—cries.

–If the word ends with ‘y’ but the ‘y’ is preceded by a vowel then only ‘s’ is added in plural. E.g. Day—days, Key—keys.

–If the word ends with /f/ we drop the f and replace it with –ves. E.g. Life—lives, Hoof—hooves.

Non-count nouns refer no things that cannot be counted. Things like

–substance—food, sand, dust

–qualities—happiness, kindness

–ideas—knowledge, knowledge

–Liquids—water, milk

–objects—furniture, hair, luggage

Most countable nouns do not have singular and plural forms; they merely occur in their respective nature or quantities.

Water—singular, Water—plural. A lot of water.     20 gallons of water.

Sometimes due to specifications some non-countable nouns are gives the plural  ‘s’ to mean different large quantities like waters in reference to oceans.

Irregular and Regular Nouns

Regular nouns are nouns that take a predictable plural form in relation to singular forms. For example cup—cups, toy—toys, shirt—shirts, Church—churches, bus–buses. Most regular nouns therefore take ‘s’ or ‘es’ in plural.

–Nouns ending with ‘o’ with a vowel before the ‘o’ usually take ‘s’ in plural. E.g. Ratio—Ratios, but if it ends with ‘o’ with a consonant before the ‘o’ then it would take ‘-es’ in plural. E.g. Bufallo—Buffalloes.

–Still a few nouns are an exception, in that they end with ‘o’ preceded by a consonant  but still takes just ‘s’ in plural like dynamo—dynamos.

–Nouns that end in /f/ take /s/ in plural like chief—chiefs, gulf—gulfs but others like dwarf, hoof and scarf can take both ‘s’ in plural or ‘-ves’ that is dwarf—dwarfs or dwarf—dwarves; hoof—hoofs or hoof—hooves and scarf—scarfs or scarf—scarves.

 

Irregular nouns are nouns that do not take ‘s’ or ‘es’ in plural form. E.g. man—men, woman—women, mouse—mice, child—children.

–There are those that change from singular to plural like man—men, goose—geese etc.

–There are those that do not change from singular to plural like swine—swine, sheep—sheep, deer—deer, species—species, series—series.

–Some of them are used only in plural forms like scissors, tongs, spectacles, trousers, jeans, shorts, pyjamas and news.

–There are those that seem plural but are actually singular e.g. Mathematics, physics, measles etc.

Collective Nouns

These are nouns which in their singular forms refer to a set or group of people, animals or things. E.g.

A crowd—a group of people without order

A band—a group of musicians

Choir—a group of singers

Sometimes collective nouns occur in phrases. When a phrase is used to indicate a collective noun we call it a phrasal quantifier because it shows the quantity of the noun present. For example a piece of cake,

A cup of tea—two cups of tea etc.

Some phrasal quantifiers can be used with both count and non-count nouns e.g. a lot of students, a lot of water, a pile of books, a pile of wood etc.

Other examples are

  1. A bundle of books, a pinch of salt, a realm of knowledge, a dose of medicine, a bale of grass, a blade of grass, a bouquet of flowers, a set of people, a heap of rubbish, a lump of sugar, a sheet of paper, a speck of dust, a bar of soap, a load of manure, a piece of advice, an item of clothing, a tonne of sugar, an army of ants, a colony of wasps, a cluster of antelope,a herd of cattle, a troop of apes, a flock of sheep, a kennel of dogs, a shoal of fish, a band of gorillas, a flange of baboons, a congress of baboons, a culture of bacteria, a cloud of bats, a hive of bees, a file of civil servants, a school of dolphins, a swam of flies.

Collective nouns denote singularity in character; that is why they tend to take a singular verb e.g. a crowd has been gathering since morning. But sometimes members within a collective noun might have divergent opinions e.g. The crew have different duties and responsibilities.

 

Compound nouns

A compound noun is a noun that is made up of more than one word.  The noun formed from combining two words can be written as

  1. a) a single word e.g. Shop+keeper—shopkeeper
  2. b) A hyphenated word e.g. Passer-by, father-in-law, attorney-general
  3. c) Separate words e.g. Ice cream, Cow dung, assistant minister etc.

–In most compound nouns the plural ending is added to the last word e.g. boyfriends, deputy heads, commanders-in-chief  etc.

However, the plural ending in others is added to the first word e.g. passers-by, fathers-in-law etc.

–Some words take plural endings on either the first word or second e.g. Attorneys-general or attorney-generals.

–Compound nouns can take a noun +noun e.g. bookshop, noun+verb e.g.  tea break,  adjective+noun e.g. Hot dog, etc.

Conjunctions

 

 

Packing List

When packing remember the following

  1. Order or have a proper organisation of items involved
  2. Have a proper titile e.g. Back to School Packing List
  3. Have a sub-heading indicating the categories of items involved. For example Clothes, Shoes and Cosmetics.
  4. You should show clearly the specific number or quantity of items involved. For example; 3 shirts, one tube of toothpaste etc.
  5. You should also show the type of items involved. For example, shirt—red.

 

Serial no. Items Type of items Quantity Description
1 Clothes a)shirts

 

 

3

 

 

–New yellow

–Old blue

–White—short sleeved

 

b)trousers

 

2

–black official

–blue jeans

2 Shoes a)rubbers 1 pair Black and white
b)leather 1 pair Brown
c)sandals 1 pair Red
3 Bathroom accessories a)towel 1 Brown
b)soap 1 Geisha medium
4 Beddings a)Sleeping bag 1 Manta medium
b)Sheets 2 Red and white
c)blankets 1 Black dotted
5 Camera Sony 1 Digital, 20 megapixels
6. Toiletries a)toothpaste 1 Colgate medium
b)toothbrush 1 Colgate medium
7 Body oil Vaseline 1 Small

 

Before writing a packing list, one must consider

–Where he is going. The location determines the items. E.g. the coast of Mombasa would need light clothes and MT Kenya region heavy ones.

–Means of transport—aeroplanes can limit the amount of luggage to be carried along.

–Length of stay—this will determine the quantity of each item you carry.

–Purpose—e.g. if you are going to swim you will have to carry costumes.

Question

You are a member of the Wildlife Club. The club has organised for a three day camp in the Maasai Mara Park. Write the packing list of the items you would need during the camp.

Etiquette

Etiquette is a set of rules and norms that govern our polite and acceptable way of interaction especially through greetings, requests and commands.

Greetings

It is important to greet people according to their a)age  b)position  c)relationships.

–An older person should be greeted in a formal way. E.g Good morning Mr. Kinuthia.

–A person in a more senior position than you are should also be greeted in a formal way even when they are younger than you. E.g. How do you do Mrs. Kendi?

–Your age mates can be greeted in an informal way if you are friends or relatives, or if they are not your seniors. E.g. Hi Jackie, or Hi bro. Again members of your extended family can be greeted in an informal way. E.g. Hi uncle, Hullo dad.  But people that are not related to you and are not your friends should be greeted in a formal way, unless they are younger/age mates and not your seniors in positions.

Introduction

When introducing someone important or titled, mention their respective titles in the greetings as shown below.

–Start by their titles if you want to introduce them to someone else

Your Excellency, may I introduce you to Mrs. Wanjala. (For presidents)

Your honour, meet Mr. Omori, the manager KCB bank.

When introducing an ordinary person to a titled person, mention the lay person then introduce by mentioning the name of the titled person before giving the title. E.g.

Mom, meet Ms. Anne Waiguru, the Cabinet Secretary,  Ministry of Interior Government.

Common titles are

–prime Minister—The Right Honourable

–Member of parliament—Honourable

–Judge/magistrate—Your Honour, Your Lord/Lady, Your Lordship/Ladyship

–Mayor—Your Worship

King/queen—You Majesty

Members of the royal family e.g.  grand duke, duke, duchess—Royal Highness

–Prince, Princes – Your grace

–Other royals—Lady/Lord

Sir—nights

Sir/Madam—any important person or professional

Professor—Highest University title for a teacher

Mr.—respectful title for any man

Mrs.—Respectful title for a married woman followed by her husband’s Sir Name or her full marital name.

Ms.—a respectful title for a woman whose marital status isn’t clear or known.

Miss.—a respectful title for a lady who isn’t married.

Arrmy titles

Officer cadet—lieutenant—captain—major—colonel—brigadier—major—field marshall.

Semi-formal situations

Sometimes you can introduce or refer to a titled person in an informal occasion. In such a circumstance, avoid the formal titles.

Dear Mr. President, meet Kenneth Owour, Member of Parliament Kanduyi constituency.

–When introducing someone as a guest, it is important to include information about their interests and achievements at the tail end. E.g.  Mr. John Kamau, MD Kenya Seed Company. He is the founder of Salima Electronics Company and a senior member of the Catholic church.

Self Introduction

When introducing yourself, do not start with any title, just greetings then your full name before other details follow.  Examples:

Good morning gentlemen; I am James Barasa, Professor of Mathematics at the University of Nairobi.

Do not start with Mr. or Miss.

Requests

When making requests use polite language. The following phrases would help someone sound more polite:

Please—please tell me the truth.

Excuse me—excuse me lady, have you seen my bag?

Sorry—sorry madam, I am late.

Pardon—pardon me Jane, I didn’t get your instructions.

I am afraid—used when you want to give a disappointing statement or answer to someone who is probably expecting something positive. E.g. I am afraid I do not have the book you wanted to borrow. ]

Acknowledgement

When someone gives you something you say ‘thank you’ and then he can answer in acknowledgement ‘you are welcome’ or ‘it is nothing’ or ‘don’t mention it’. The goal here is to sound as modest as possible.

Telephone Etiquette

When making or answering a telephone call, the person on the other end of the line obviously cannot see you. You will therefore be judged solely by what you say and how you say it.

Points to note

  1. Give a good impression of yourself from the beginning by being courteous, helpful, businesslike and brief.
  2. Use polite language i.e. words such as ‘could you’ ‘may I’ ‘I would like to’ ‘would you please’.

Receiving a personal call

  1. a) Opening words:

Hallo

—good morning/afternoon/evening (choose according to time of the day)

  1. b) Identify yourself:

This is John speaking ( it is considered rude to give yourself a title like Mr/Mrs/ms but professional titles like dr/prof are allowed)

e.g. This is Eng. Wekesa.

Receiving a business call

  1. a) Opening words:

Greetings—Good morning/afternoon/ evening

  1. b) Then identify your institution

You have reached Paradise Hotel or Lugulu Girls High School

  1. c) Ask who you are speaking to —Whom am I speaking to
  2. d) Ask how can help — How can I help you

It is rude to respond by asking the caller  ‘What do you want?’ or ‘Who are you’

Making a call

Your first words are said after the recipient’s opening remarks

–The greetings will depend much on how well you know the caller

Hi Peter, What is up?

This is Christine, how are you doing?

This is Indimuli speaking…

Business call

When making a business call, follow the procedure below

  1. a) Greetings e.g. Good morning
  2. b) Identify yourself e.g. My name is Agness Manyara
  3. c) State the reason for calling e.g. Can I speak to Mrs. Wenani please?

Ending a call

At the end of both personal and business calls, it is customary for the recipient to thank the caller for calling.

When taking a call message in the office follow these steps.

–Note down the message

–Write the name of the caller or his behalf and the institution the caller represents

–note down the date when the call was made

–note down the phone number so that it is easier to call back

–Indicate whether your boss or you, ought to call back and whether urgently

DIARIES

A diary is a private document in which you record activities, events and appointments you want to remember. I t acts as an aid to memory. Many people find diary keeping very useful because it helps them honour appointments.

A diary contains a calendar for a whole year with a space provided for each day of the week and month. The space is usually small, so, you have to be selective and brief.  Many diaries also contain spaces where you can record personal information like your name, address, blood group and the person to be contacted in case of an emergency. At the back of a diary, there is usually space for names address and telephone numbers of people you contact frequently.

In offices, you may find desk diaries where dates of meetings or other important activities of an organisation are recorded.

There are two types of diaries which are also known as personal journals.

Appointment diary is used to record specific time and date of the daily schedule e.g.

Sunday, 1st June 2017

8:00 AM Meet mom at the Afya Centre
10:00 AM Watch the Vampire movie
2:00 PM Visit auntie Jane in Buruburu
4:00 PM Return the borrowed book ‘Sinbad misadventures’

 

A personal diary or journal differs from an appointment diary because a personal journal is a record of events that have already happened and is usually in narrative form.  The title must always be the date in full when the events happened. E.g. Day one, Monday, 23rd October 2016. When wring a personal journal, capture the feelings and opinions that you experienced because they help the writer relive those often exciting moments.  Each day should be in one paragraph whether long or short. Be detailed and imaginative when recounting past episodes.  E.g.

Tuesday, 4th February, 2017

First day in high school. I am excited and frightened at the same time.  I pray that my fears do not show. I have too many questions but I don’t want to appear stupid. So, I keep them to myself. It is the end of the first day and I haven’t made even one friend. I will have to change my tactics. One of the things I have to learn is how to eat hot food quickly. Today, I had barely eaten a quarter of my food when the teacher on duty said it was time to clear from the dining hall. I felt so helpless and sad.

You can use the present perfect tense mixed with present simple tenses as in this example or just simple past tense mixed with past perfect tenses.

CLOZE TEST

A Cloze Test requires one to fill gaps left in a given passage and context so as to make it complete using the most appropriate or suitable words.  The best way to complete a cloze test is by first reading through the passage to establish the context then trying the fill the easier blank spaces as you read through the second time before completing the whole test the third or even fourth time of reading. Filling the blank spaces would involve testing words in their respective spaces to see whether they fit in the context until you pick on the best synonym. It is crucial to be aware of the punctuation marks because any space after a full stop, an exclamation mark or a question mark must be filled with a word beginning with a capital letter. Similarly, spaces that are part of proper nouns—that require you to complete the noun would require a word that begins with a capital letter.  It is necessary to check the tense of the sentence where you have to fill the blank space to make sure you use the word in its proper tense that would fit.  A cloze test only takes one word per blank space.

Exercise

Fill in each of the blank spaces below with the most appropriate word.     10 marks

The Israel—Arab conflicts in the Middle East __ caused by a number of factors, central among them was the Belfast Declaration __ the British government that it wanted to help the Zionists return the Jews who were __persecuted in Europe back to their ‘ancestral’ land.  Of course the British were sure that Palatine land was not Jewish land to be returned or repossessed but they __ the Jews, who had vast resources in Europe, to support the empire and fill indebted to the empire for helping them create their own __ of Israel.

Many of the British politicians did not even like the __ and their presence in Palestine land was obviously to exploit those lands for whatever recourses they could  get. __ the fall of the Ottoman Empire, Britain wanted to get a piece of the Middle East and had succeeded __ to some degree. Controlling the Arabs was becoming a difficult task __ the British wished that by establish a Jewish state in Palestine they would have a better ally. __ did they know that the very Jewish state would turn against the empire and declare its own independence forcing the British soldiers out and pushing the Arabs backwards into their own countries; thereby creating a conflict that would only end with an apocalypse of the Middle East especially by Iran nukes.

Silent Consonants and Vowels

These are consonants and vowels that form part of a word structure but are not pronounced.

A: aesthetic, bread                B: bdellium, debt, and plumber

 

C: indictment, muscle, science               D: djinn, handkerchief, Wednesday

 

E: give, like, name (the ‘e’ here is also known as the ‘magic e’)

 

F: halfpenny       G: gnat, gnaw, gneiss, gnu, high, phlegm, sign, though

 

H: daughter, echo, heir, honest, hour, orchid      I: friend, business    J: marijuana

 

K: knee, knife, knight, knot, know           L: calf, could, talk, yolk

 

M: mnemonic          N: autumn, column, damn, hymn, solemn

 

O: colonel, leopard, people           P: corps, coup, pneumonia, psalm, psyche, receipt

 

Q: Colquhoun (Scottish name), lacquer         R: forecastle, sarsaparilla (GA)

 

S: aisle, bourgeois, debris, island        T: ballet, castle, rapport, listen

 

U: colleague, guard, guesses, tongue         V: Milngavie (Scottish town)

 

W: answer, gunwale, sword, two, wrist, wrong       X: billet-doux, faux pas, Sioux

 

Y: Islay (Scottish island), Pepys              Z: chez, laissez-faire, rendezvous

Commonly Misspelled words

Maneuver   –foolscap    –myopia –diarrhea –wry –surprise –Endeavour –awry –occasion –convenient  –occurrence   –recommendation   –committee   –necessary   –dormitory  –pneumonia  –exercise   –abbreviate  –abundant   –abysmal  –acquiesce –aggressive abstinence allegiance  –privilege   –annoyance  –entrepreneur  –apostrophe   –argument  –urge    –attorney  –auxiliary  –bargain  –bureaucratic  –cheetah   –curriculum  –syllabus  –etiquette  –grateful  –absenteeism  –enmity   –intelligence  –pronunciation   –contemptuous  –laboratory  –liquor  –messiah  –mediocre   –medieval   –nuisance  –onomatopoeia  –paraphernalia  –personnel rendezvous  –gradable satellite  –souvenir  –chauvinism  –silhouette  –tomorrow  –wrestle   –sellotape  –hierarchy –lieutenant  –drunkenness –sergeant rhythm

 

accidentally/accidently     accommodate –    achieve – acknowledge     acquaintance –  acquire acquit     acreage     address –    adultery –  advisable     affect – effect  Aggression     aggressive –    allegiance    almost     a lot   amateur –    annually     apparent     arctic –    becoming     beginning     buoy/buoyant  –    camouflage –    capitol – capital (both words exist, but are distinct)  Caribbean     category     caught  cemetery –    changeable  chief     colleague     collectible – collectable  column     coming –    committed  concede     congratulate     conscientious – conscious     consensus     controversy     coolly    deceive     definite   –defiantly desperate –  difference –    dilemma –    disappoint –    disastrous – embarrass –    exhilarate  existence –    experience –    extreme –    fascinating –    fiery –    fluorescent     foreign –    friend     gauge –    grateful –    guarantee –    guidance     harass –    hierarchy –    humorous     hygiene –  ignorance –    imitate –    immediately     independent     indispensable – indispensible    inoculate     intelligence     jewelry     leisure     liaison –    library –    license     lightning – lightening lose  maintenance –    medieval memento –    millennium –    miniature minuscule – miniscule    mischievous –    misspell –    occurrence –    occurred –    omission –    original     outrageous –parliament –    pastime –    perceive –    perseverance – plagiarize     playwright –  precede –    presence     principle – principal

Prophecy (as noun) – prophesy (valid as verb)    quarantine –    queue –    questionnaire

Receipt     recommend –    referred     reference –vacuum

 

Informal Letters

These are letters written to friends and relatives. They usually ignore the element of formality.

The salutation in these letters should be semi-formal e.g. Dear Mr/Mrs/Miss/Ms/Dr/Prof. For people you barely know and such letters should end with ‘Yours Sincerely’ plus the initials and the name. E.g.

Yours Sincerely

K.l. Wafula.

–Such letters have only a single address—the one that belongs to the writer.

–It is always better to end with your name and just start the address with your box office number e.g.

P.O. BOX 77

KISUMU

For people that are close to you like friends, only use their first name in the salutation. For example

Dear Mercy, or Dear John, or even a shorn version like Dear bro.

–always has the date after the address. Skip a line when moving from one item to another.

Example

Write a letter to your friend in another school. In the letter inform her about life in your school, your ambition and the happy memories you shared in the past.

LUGULU GIRLS HIGH SCHOOL

P.O. BOX 33

NAIVASHA

 

31st January 2017

 

Dear Sasha,

How are you doing? I hope you are as fine as I am or even better.

Life here at school is Ok. I have come to like the school and made many friends. The weather is a bit warmer than what we are used to in Eldoret but I am adapting well. The meals are sometimes delicious and other times bad but that is to be expected.

I want to concentrate on my studies and come the end of my four years here in school; I should get a strong grade. I hope you are working hard too. We used to be competitors in primary school, remember?

I still remember our moments together, how we would skip the rope together, how we would go singing the Christmas chorals in church. Do you remember how you forgot the lines in the middle of your performance?  And I cut in and rescued the situation; everyone thought we had planned that move and praised our genius ha! It was lovely.

Anyway, I miss you so much and yearn to see you when schools close. In the meantime I will be awaiting your reply with eagerness. Pass my greetings to your friends.

Your Friend

Daph

 

 

Formal Letters

Formal letters must be clear concise and complete. The effectiveness of a formal letter determines the kind of response the writer is likely to receive. Good formal letters should have the following qualities:

–They should reflect clarity of thought. Before writing a letter think about the subject matter and make sure you understand what you want to communicate.

–Use a variety of sentences—mix short sentences with relatively long ones to give your writing flavour.

–The right words should be selected carefully to convey the precise meaning required.

–Ideas should be expressed logically.

–Use formal language—avoid using slang.

–Any irrelevant information should be omitted.

–Formal letters should have a polite tone.

Address

Addresses should be written in capital letter. A formal letter has got two addresses. The first address should be the sender’s or writer’s the followed by the addressee’s. Do not start the sender’s address with the sender’s name but you can use the name of the institution the sender belongs to.

–Always skip a line after writing the address before you write the date or salutation. It is advisable to use the block format when writing letter.

Salutation

Formal letters use formal salutations like Dear Sir or Dear Madam and sometimes Dear Mr/Mrs/Ms.

–When you salute using Dear Sir/Madam, always sign off with Yours Faithfully. But if you salute with Dear Mr/Mrs. Always sign off with Yours Sincerely.

RE:____________________________

For Re: or reason for writing do not write ref: only RE: and then write a very brief and summative reason for writing. The statement should summarize what the letter is all about. Always skip a line after and before RE.

Body

The introductory paragraph should clearly state the objective of the letter. It prepares the reader for the main points. The body should be specific; devoid of unnecessary details. A good body should have at least three paragraphs expounding on the introduction and explaining clearly and briefly what is at stake. The last paragraph should conclude the letter by showing optimism or stating the main message.

Letters of Application

When applying for a job consider the following

  1. a) Mention under ‘RE’ the kind of vacancy you are applying for.
  2. b) In your introduction, indicate what informed you of the vacancy e.g. a specific newspaper issue, website or memo.
  3. c) In the body, share your abilities and indicate why you think you can contribute to the improvement of that institution if given a chance.
  4. d) Express optimism in your conclusion that you will get the job.
  5. e) When writing use current dates and be detailed.

Question

You graduated as certified accountant, four years ago and you have been working several accounting jobs. You see on The Standard newspaper of 7th January 2017, an advertisement for a qualified accountant to fill the vacancy of senior bursar Strathmore College. Write a letter applying for the job.

 

P.O. BOX 66

NANDI

 

10TH JANUARY 2017

 

MANAGER

STRATHMORE COLLEGE

P.O. BOX 101

NAIROBI—CODE OO1

 

Dear Sir/Madam,

 

RE: Applying for the vacancy of senior bursar Strathmore College

Following the advertisement appearing on The Standard  of 7th January 2017, I would like to apply to fill the vacancy of a senior bursar.

I am a graduate of Kenyatta University where I studied a bachelor’s degree in commerce—accounting option and I am also a certified accountant, holder of CPA section 5 from Kenya School of Monetary studies. I have a wealth of accounting experience, having worked at Lugulu Girls as an accountant for two years then Kibabii University in the office of Finance for a year. Currently am working in the county government of Bungoma as a procurement officer.

I am a very hardworking individual, punctual and dedicated to my work and this can be verified by the referees that are provided on my CV.  If I get an opportunity to work in your institution, I will bring a wealth of experience, freshness and enthusiasm in your accounting department, as my track record shows.

My main motivation for choosing to work in your institution is the good reputation your institution has cultivated in its treatment of clients, workers and the public. I would feel proud to be part of the Strathmore community that prides itself on excellence of service.

Please find attached my full resume and other documents that attest to my profile as befitting your institution.

I am looking forward to a positive response from you.

 

Yours Faithfully

Sign

Denis K. Barasa

 

Letters of Invitation

Letters of invitations are written to invite people for an event or social occasion. Some letters of invitation can be formal, inviting an applicant to an interview but majority of such letters are semi-formal inviting people formally to a social event like a wedding.

Question

As the secretary of Kalamu Writers Club, write to the Editor-in Chief of a local publication, inviting him to be your guest speaker during your annual party.

 

–Introduction—State directly the message that you are inviting him to be the guest speaker during the club’s annual party.

–In the body state what the club is all about, its membership and why he would be relevant to the members and the objectives of the party. Also state what he should address in his speech.

–in the conclusion, look forward to a reply soon and give contact details like phone number that he can reach quickly.

–As a secretary, write in third person—detach yourself from the group and say, ‘the group would…’

 

KALAMU WRITER’S CLUB

P.O. BOX 2433

NAIROBI

 

12TH JANUARY 2017

 

THE EDITOR IN CHIEF

EAST AFRICAN MAGAZINE

P.O. BOX 6664

NAIROBI

 

Dear Sir,

RE: Invitation to be our guest speaker on our annual party

Members of Kalamu Writers would be grateful if you agreed to be their guest speaker during their annual party which will be held at the Sagret Hotel on Friday 16th January 2017 from 7PM.

Kalamu writers club has a membership of 100. These are people who are interested in writing and would like to improve their skills and knowledge by listening to lectures, attending workshops and writing articles for their club’s monthly magazine. The club has been in existence for five years.

At our last general meeting members selected you to be this year’s guest speaker for the annual party. Members have been impressed by the high quality of your magazine for some time now. It is an objective magazine which has always stood for truth.

The club takes care of the travelling, accommodation and appearance costs at a fixed cash amount of ksh 10,000 for every invited chief guest.

The club is looking forward to hearing from you soon. You can reach the secretary or the chair directly on a call: 0722767889 or email kalamuclub@yahoo.com.

Yours Faithfully

Sign

Muthoni Otieno

Club Secretary

Exercise

As the secretary of Lugulu Girls Journalism Club, write to a famous radio presenter, inviting her to be your guest speaker during your annual party.

Letter of Apology

A letter of apology is a way of telling someone that you are sorry for doing something wrong or causing a problem. The language therefore should be apologetic.

What sets apart the letter of apology from other types of letters is the language used.

Features of a Letter of Apology

  1. It should be short and to the point. If it is long and winding, it sounds as a justification for the wrong done.
  2. It should first be in acceptance or admission of the wrong committed to the offended party.
  3. It should express regret for what has happened.
  4. The tone of the letter must be apologetic.
  5. The apology is usually followed by a short explanation.
  6. Where appropriate, an offer of compensation should be made.
  7. Depending on the relationship between the person apologising and the one receiving the apology, the letter can be formal or informal.

S

Steps

–Admit or accept the wrong done

–If you accept responsibility, offer compensation

–Promise not to repeat the mistake

 

Question

You are a chief accountant of Lolian Flower Limited, you were spotted by the manager coming late to work despite the laid down rules which prohibit lateness. Apologise for your behaviour.

LOLIAN FLOWERS LIMITED

P.O. BOX 33

NAIVASHA

 

10TH JANUARY 2017

 

THE MANAGER

LOLIAN FLOWERS LIMITED

 

Dear Mr. Obudho,

 

RE: Apology

I would like to apologise for being late for work today morning contrary to the laid down rules on lateness.

I have taken this early opportunity to correct the impression my behaviour might have portrayed. While my behaviour today was inexcusable, I was delayed by a niggling family matter concerning my wife which is now under control.

I would like to assure you that this will not happen again.

Yours Sincerely

Sign

Kiprop Songok

Chief Accountant

 

Letters of Requests and Inquiry

As in other business or official letters, letters of requests contain the following information

  1. The reason for writing in the introduction.
  2. The facts you are presenting about your case, organised in a logical fashion.
  3. What you want the addressee to do for you, starting with the most important request.

You need to sell yourself and demonstrate that you deserve what you are asking for. Give good reasons. You need to state that the person who is to grant you the request stands to benefit.  Appeal to the addressee’s sense of fairness and indicate that you have faith in him.

Letters of Inquiry, on the other hand, are written when you want to find out or verify information from a certain institution or ask if a certain firm has specific goods or provide certain services.

Example of Letter of Request

You are in form four. You have not completed paying your school fees although the principal has allowed you to stay on so that your studies in this crucial year are not interrupted. Fortunately, you have read about a nongovernmental organisation that helps intelligent but needy high school students. Write a letter to them requesting for a bursary.

FROM

CHARITY KARIMI—REG. NO. 2345

SKYWAYS HIGH SCHOOL

P.O. BOX 234

VIHIGA

 

THROUGH

THE PRINCIPAL

SKYWAYS HIGH SCHOOL

 

 

30TH January 2017

 

TO

MANAGING DIRECTOR

EDUCATION SUPPORT FOUNDATION

P.O. BOX 465

NAIROBI

 

Dear Mrs. Indimuli,

 

RE: Request for financial assistance

I am writing to request your esteemed foundation to grant me a bursary to enable me clear my fees balance of ksh 98,000.

I am a form four student at Skyways high school. I owe the school this amount but my parents are unable to pay because of the prolonged drought that has hit our Kakamega county and destroyed crops and animals. My family has no money and they are barely surviving.

My performance in exams has been good. I have topped our candidate class for the last two terms with a mean grade of A minus. I am a very hardworking and humble student and I am hoping to get your help so that I can realise my dream of studying Civil Engineering in the university.

I am writing to you because your interest in the education of the disadvantaged Kenya is  well known. I know some of the benefactors of your program and they are ever grateful to Education Support Foundation. I will be honoured to be one of them.

I would be happy if you granted me a bursary of ksh 98000. If you decide to help please write the cheque in the name of the school and if you need further details you could email the principal on skywayrs@gmail.com or call her on 0732456665.

Yours Sincerely

Sign

Student

Letter of inquiry

You are the procurement manager of Carnivore Club; write a letter to Keroche Industries Limited to inquire if they have the three types of alcoholic drinks that they have been advertising on the major television stations; their wholesale prices, quantities they can supply and the respective discounts.

 

THE PROCUREMENT OFFICE

CARNIVORE CLUB

P.O. BOX 764

NAIROBI

 

23RD JANUARY 2017

 

THE SALES MANAGER

KEROCHE INDUSTRIES LIMITED

P.O. BOX 66

NAIVASHA

 

Dear Sir/Madam,

 

RE: INQUIRY ON THE NEW DRINKS

I would like to find out information on the new drinks being advertised by your company on NTV,KTN and Citizen television channels.  According to the adverts, the names of the new drinks are Cesta, Guarana and Zem. Kindly let me know the prices of these drinks at the wholesale price and the discounts attached to each load. Also furnish me with details on alcoholic content of these drinks and their classifications.

We are the leading entertainment house in Nairobi, therefore, we would be glad to get these new drinks the soonest possible so that we can introduce them as part of the many options we have to our patrons.

Please respond the soonest possible by email on carnires@yahoo.com or call me on 0791875262.

 

Yours Faithfully

Sign

George Maina

The Procurement officer

 

Recommendation letter/Confidential Report

A confidential report is sometimes referred to as reference or recommendation letter. This type of report requires the writer to comment in confidence or give an assessment of the suitability of someone or something for a given task or activity. Such reports are expected to mention the strengths and weaknesses truthfully. They are therefore not meant for public readership but for the person requesting for them.

When writing a confidential report consider the following:

–The writer’s address   –date   –recipient address   –reference number or registration number

–The name of the person being recommended   –strengths and weaknesses of the subject

–In the closing tag include name, signature and your title

Example

 

EXCELL HIGH SCHOOL

P.O. BOX 78

MOMBASA

 

11TH FEBURUARY 2017

 

THE CO-ORDINATOR

P.O. BOX 46

NAKURU

 

Dear Sir,

 

RE: Peter Baraka—Admission Numbers 4121

The above named was a student in the school from 2003—2006. While here, he displayed exemplary leadership qualities and served as games captain for two years. Under his leadership, the school was well represented in ball games to the national level. It was in recognition of this that he was voted the outstanding prefect of the year (2005).

Academically, he was of average ability. This saw him score a mean grade of B minus in the Kenya Certificate of Secondary Exams of 2006. In addition, Baraka’s spoken and written English is good, his Swahili even better. He is also good in simple arithmetic and his strongest point is his useful habit of taking down important information for later reference.

Apart from his tendency to keep to himself when ignored, Baraka is reliable, co-operative and industrious.

I recommend him with full confidence that he will not disappoint you if offered a job in your association.

Yours Faithfully

Sign

James Situma

Principal

 

Exercise

Imagine your name has been given as a referee by Miss Jane Watate who has applied for a job as a receptionist and typist at Mombasa Tourist Office because you were her class teacher. Email a confidential report on her suitability for the position to Mombasa Tourist Office.

Consider the following details:

–Academic ability    –performance of her duties   relationship with clients   –other relevant qualities

Idioms

An idiom is an expression whose meaning is different from all the meaning of its constituent words and that is used to summarize situations. Idioms are unique in a given language and community and might not make sense in other languages.

Common idioms

A hot potato

Speak of an issue (mostly current) which many people are talking about and which is usually disputed

A penny for your thoughts

A way of asking what someone is thinking

Actions speak louder than words

People’s intentions can be judged better by what they do than what they say.

Add insult to injury

To further a loss with mockery or indignity; to worsen an unfavorable situation.

An arm and a leg

Very expensive or costly. A large amount of money.

At the drop of a hat

Meaning: without any hesitation; instantly.

Back to the drawing board

When an attempt fails and it’s time to start all over.

Ball is in your court

It is up to you to make the next decision or step

Barking up the wrong tree

Looking in the wrong place. Accusing the wrong person

Be glad to see the back of

Be happy when a person leaves.

Beat around the bush

Avoiding the main topic. Not speaking directly about the issue.

Best of both worlds

Meaning: All the advantages.

Best thing since sliced bread

A good invention or innovation. A good idea or plan.

Bite off more than you can chew

To take on a task that is way to big.

Blessing in disguise

Something good that isn’t recognized at first.

Burn the midnight oil

To work late into the night, alluding to the time before electric lighting.

Can’t judge a book by its cover

Cannot judge something primarily on appearance.

Caught between two stools

When someone finds it difficult to choose between two alternatives.

Costs an arm and a leg

This idiom is used when something is very expensive.

Cross that bridge when you come to it

Deal with a problem if and when it becomes necessary, not before.

Cry over spilt milk

When you complain about a loss from the past.

Curiosity killed the cat

Being Inquisitive can lead you into an unpleasant situation.

Cut corners

When something is done badly to save money.

Cut the mustard [possibly derived from “cut the muster”]

To succeed; to come up to expectations; adequate enough to compete or participate

Devil’s Advocate

To present a counter argument

Don’t count your chickens before the eggs have hatched

This idiom is used to express “Don’t make plans for something that might not happen”.

Don’t give up the day job

You are not very good at something. You could definitely not do it professionally.

Don’t put all your eggs in one basket

Do not put all your resources in one possibility.

Drastic times call for drastic measures

When you are extremely desperate you need to take drastic actions.

Elvis has left the building

The show has come to an end. It’s all over.

Every cloud has a silver lining

Be optimistic, even difficult times will lead to better days.

Far cry from

Very different from.

Feel a bit under the weather

Meaning: Feeling slightly ill.

Give the benefit of the doubt

Believe someone’s statement, without proof.

Hear it on the grapevine

This idiom means ‘to hear rumors’ about something or someone.

Hit the nail on the head

Do or say something exactly right

Hit the sack / sheets / hay

To go to bed.

In the heat of the moment

Overwhelmed by what is happening in the moment.

It takes two to tango

Actions or communications need more than one person

Jump on the bandwagon

Join a popular trend or activity.

Keep something at bay

Keep something away.

Kill two birds with one stone

This idiom means, to accomplish two different things at the same time.

Last straw

The final problem in a series of problems.

Let sleeping dogs lie

Meaning – do not disturb a situation as it is – since it would result in trouble or complications.

Let the cat out of the bag

To share information that was previously concealed

Make a long story short

Come to the point – leave out details

Method to my madness

An assertion that, despite one’s approach seeming random, there actually is structure to it.

Miss the boat

This idiom is used to say that someone missed his or her chance

Not a spark of decency

Meaning: No manners

Not playing with a full deck

Someone who lacks intelligence.

Off one’s rocker

Crazy, demented, out of one’s mind, in a confused or befuddled state of mind, senile.

On the ball

When someone understands the situation well.

Once in a blue moon

Meaning: Happens very rarely.

Picture paints a thousand words

A visual presentation is far more descriptive than words.

Piece of cake

A job, task or other activity that is easy or simple.

Put wool over other people’s eyes

This means to deceive someone into thinking well of them.

See eye to eye

This idiom is used to say that two (or more people) agree on something.

Sit on the fence

This is used when someone does not want to choose or make a decision.

Speak of the devil!

This expression is used when the person you have just been talking about arrives.

Steal someone’s thunder

To take the credit for something someone else did.

Take with a grain of salt

This means not to take what someone says too seriously.

Taste of your own medicine

Means that something happens to you, or is done to you, that you have done to someone else

To hear something straight from the horse’s mouth

To hear something from the authoritative source.

Whole nine yards

Everything. All of it.

Wouldn’t be caught dead

Would never like to do something

Your guess is as good as mine

To have no idea, do not know the answer to a question

 

Phrasal Verbs

 

 

phrasal verb Meaning example sentence
ask sby out invite on a date Brian asked Judy out to dinner and a movie.
ask around ask many people the same question I asked around but nobody has seen my wallet.
add up to sthg Equal Your purchases add up to $205.32.
back sthg up Reverse You’ll have to back up your car so that I can get out.
back sby up Support My wife backed me up over my decision to quit my job.
blow up Explode The racing car blew up after it crashed into the fence.
blow sthg up add air We have to blow 50 balloons up for the party.
break down stop functioning (vehicle, machine) Our car broke down at the side of the highway in the snowstorm.
break down get upset The woman broke down when the police told her that her son had died.
break sthg down divide into smaller parts Our teacher broke the final project down into three separate parts.
break in force entry to a building Somebody broke in last night and stole our stereo.
break into sthg enter forcibly The firemen had to break into the room to rescue the children.
break sthg in wear sthg a few times so that it doesn’t look/feel new I need to break these shoes in before we run next week.
break in Interrupt The TV station broke in to report the news of the president’s death.
break up end a relationship My boyfriend and I broke up before I moved to America.
break up start laughing (informal) The kids just broke up as soon as the clown started talking.
break out Escape The prisoners broke out of jail when the guards weren’t looking.
break out in sthg develop a skin condition I broke out in a rash after our camping trip.
bring sby down make unhappy This sad music is bringing me down.
bring sby up raise a child My grandparents brought me up after my parents died.
bring sthg up start talking about a subject My mother walks out of the room when my father brings up sports.
bring sthg up Vomit He drank so much that he brought his dinner up in the toilet.
call around phone many different places/people We called around but we weren’t able to find the car part we needed.
call sby back return a phone call I called the company back but the offices were closed for the weekend.
call sthg off Cancel Jason called the wedding off because he wasn’t in love with his fiancé.
call on sby ask for an answer or opinion The professor called on me for question 1.
call on sby visit sby We called on you last night but you weren’t home.
call sby up Phone Give me your phone number and I will call you up when we are in town.
calm down relax after being angry You are still mad. You need to calm down before you drive the car.
not care for sby/ sthg not like (formal) I don’t care for his behaviour.
catch up get to the same point as sby else You’ll have to run faster than that if you want to catch up with Marty.
check in arrive and register at a hotel or airport We will get the hotel keys when we check in.
check out leave a hotel You have to check out of the hotel before 11:00 AM.
check sby/ sthg out look at carefully, investigate The company checks out all new employees.
check out sby/ sthg look at (informal) Check out the crazy hair on that guy!
cheer up become happier She cheered up when she heard the good news.
cheer sby up make happier I brought you some flowers to cheer you up.
chip in Help If everyone chips in we can get the kitchen painted by noon.
clean sthg up tidy, clean Please clean up your bedroom before you go outside.
come across sthg find unexpectedly I came across these old photos when I was tidying the closet.
come apart Separate The top and bottom come apart if you pull hard enough.
come down with sthg become sick My nephew came down with chicken pox this weekend.
come forward volunteer for a task or to give evidence The woman came forward with her husband’s finger prints.
come from some place originate in The art of origami comes from Asia.
count on sby/ sthg rely on I am counting on you to make dinner while I am out.
cross sthg out draw a line through Please cross out your old address and write your new one.
cut back on sthg consume less My doctor wants me to cut back on sweets and fatty foods.
cut sthg down make sthg fall to the ground We had to cut the old tree in our yard down after the storm.
cut in Interrupt Your father cut in while I was dancing with your uncle.
cut in pull in too closely in front of another vehicle The bus driver got angry when that car cut in.
cut in start operating (of an engine or electrical device) The air conditioner cuts in when the temperature gets to 22°C.
cut sthg off remove with sthg sharp The doctors cut off his leg because it was severely injured.
cut sthg off stop providing The phone company cut off our phone because we didn’t pay the bill.
cut sby off take out of a will My grandparents cut my father off when he remarried.
cut sthg out remove part of sthg (usually with scissors and paper) I cut this ad out of the newspaper.
do sby/ sthg over beat up, ransack (BrE, informal) He’s lucky to be alive. His shop was done over by a street gang.
do sthg over do again (AmE) My teacher wants me to do my essay over because she doesn’t like my topic.
do away with sthg Discard It’s time to do away with all of these old tax records.
do sthg up fasten, close Do your coat up before you go outside. It’s snowing!
dress up wear nice clothing It’s a fancy restaurant so we have to dress up.
drop back move back in a position/group Andrea dropped back to third place when she fell off her bike.
drop in/ by/ over come without an appointment I might drop in/by/over for tea sometime this week.
drop sby/ sthg off take sby/ sthg somewhere and leave them/it there I have to drop my sister off at work before I come over.
drop out quit a class, school etc I dropped out of Science because it was too difficult.
eat out eat at a restaurant I don’t feel like cooking tonight. Let’s eat out.
end up eventually reach/do/decide We ended up renting a movie instead of going to the theatre.
fall apart break into pieces My new dress fell apart in the washing machine.
fall down fall to the ground The picture that you hung up last night fell down this morning.
fall out separate from an interior The money must have fallen out of my pocket.
fall out (of hair, teeth) become loose and unattached His hair started to fall out when he was only 35.
figure sthg out understand, find the answer I need to figure out how to fit the piano and the bookshelf in this room.
fill sthg in to write information in blanks, as on a form (BrE) Please fill in the form with your name, address, and phone number.
fill sthg out to write information in blanks, as on a form (AmE) The form must be filled out in capital letters.
fill sthg up fill to the top I always fill the water jug up when it is empty.
find out Discover We don’t know where he lives. How can we find out?
find sthg out Discover We tried to keep the time of the party a secret, but Samantha found it out.
get sthg across/ over communicate, make understandable I tried to get my point across/over to the judge but she wouldn’t listen.
get along/on like each other I was surprised how well my new girlfriend and my sister got along/on.
get around have mobility My grandfather can get around fine in his new wheelchair.
get away go on a vacation We worked so hard this year that we had to get away for a week.
get away with sthg do without being noticed or punished Jason always gets away with cheating in his maths tests.
get back Return We got back from our vacation last week.
get sthg back receive sthg you had before Liz finally got her Science notes back from my room-mate.
get back at sby retaliate, take revenge My sister got back at me for stealing her shoes. She stole my favourite hat.
get back into sthg become interested in sthg again I finally got back into my novel and finished it.
get on sthg step onto a vehicle We’re going to freeze out here if you don’t let us get on the bus.
get over sthg recover from an illness, loss, difficulty I just got over the flu and now my sister has it.
get over sthg overcome a problem The company will have to close if it can’t get over the new regulations.
get round to sthg finally find time to do (AmE: get around to sthg) I don’t know when I am going to get round to writing the thank you cards.
get together meet (usually for social reasons) Let’s get together for a BBQ this weekend.
get up get out of bed I got up early today to study for my exam.
get up Stand You should get up and give the elderly man your seat.
give sby away reveal hidden information about sby His wife gave him away to the police.
give sby away take the bride to the altar My father gave me away at my wedding.
give sthg away ruin a secret My little sister gave the surprise party away by accident.
give sthg away give sthg to sby for free The library was giving away old books on Friday.
give sthg back return a borrowed item I have to give these skates back to Franz before his hockey game.
give in reluctantly stop fighting or arguing My boyfriend didn’t want to go to the ballet, but he finally gave in.
give sthg out give to many people (usually at no cost) They were giving out free perfume samples at the department store.
give sthg up quit a habit I am giving up smoking as of January 1st.
give up stop trying My maths homework was too difficult so I gave up.
go after sby follow sby My brother tried to go after the thief in his car.
go after sthg try to achieve sthg I went after my dream and now I am a published writer.
go against sby compete, oppose We are going against the best soccer team in the city tonight.
go ahead start, proceed Please go ahead and eat before the food gets cold.
go back return to a place I have to go back home and get my lunch.
go out leave home to go on a social event We’re going out for dinner tonight.
go out with sby Date Jesse has been going out with Luke since they met last winter.
go over sthg Review Please go over your answers before you submit your test.
go over visit sby nearby I haven’t seen Tina for a long time. I think I’ll go over for an hour or two.
go without sthg suffer lack or deprivation When I was young, we went without winter boots.
grow apart stop being friends over time My best friend and I grew apart after she changed schools.
grow back Regrow My roses grew back this summer.
grow into sthg grow big enough to fit This bike is too big for him now, but he should grow into it by next year.
grow out of sthg get too big for Elizabeth needs a new pair of shoes because she has grown out of her old ones.
grow up become an adult When Jack grows up he wants to be a fireman.
hand sthg down give sthg used to sby else I handed my old comic books down to my little cousin.
hand sthg in Submit I have to hand in my essay by Friday.
hand sthg out to distribute to a group of people We will hand out the invitations at the door.
hand sthg over give (usually unwillingly) The police asked the man to hand over his wallet and his weapons.
hang in stay positive (informal) Hang in there. I’m sure you’ll find a job very soon.
hang on wait a short time (informal) Hang on while I grab my coat and shoes!
hang out spend time relaxing (informal) Instead of going to the party we are just going to hang out at my place.
hang up end a phone call He didn’t say goodbye before he hung up.
hold sby/ sthg back prevent from doing/going I had to hold my dog back because there was a cat in the park.
hold sthg back hide an emotion Jamie held back his tears at his grandfather’s funeral.
hold on wait a short time Please hold on while I transfer you to the Sales Department.
hold onto sby/ sthg hold firmly using your hands or arms Hold onto your hat because it’s very windy outside.
hold sby/ sthgup Rob A man in a black mask held the bank up this morning.
keep on doing sthg continue doing Keep on stirring until the liquid comes to a boil.
keep sthg from sby not tell We kept our relationship from our parents for two years.
keep sby/ sthg out stop from entering Try to keep the wet dog out of the living room.
keep sthg up continue at the same rate If you keep those results up you will get into a great college.
let sby down fail to support or help, disappoint I need you to be on time. Don’t let me down this time.
let sby in allow to enter Can you let the cat in before you go to school?
log in (or on) sign in (to a website, database etc) I can’t log in to Facebook because I’ve forgotten my password.
log out (or off) sign out (of a website, database etc) If you don’t log off somebody could get into your account.
look after sby/ sthg take care of I have to look after my sick grandmother.
look down on sby think less of, consider inferior Ever since we stole that chocolate bar your dad has looked down on me.
look for sby/ sthg try to find I’m looking for a red dress for the wedding.
look forward to sthg be excited about the future I’m looking forward to the Christmas break.
look into sthg Investigate We are going to look into the price of snowboards today.
look out be careful, vigilant, and take notice Look out! That car’s going to hit you!
look out for sby/ sthg be especially vigilant for Don’t forget to look out for snakes on the hiking trail.
look sthg over check, examine Can you look over my essay for spelling mistakes?
look sthg up search and find information in a reference book or database We can look her phone number up on the Internet.
look up to sby have a lot of respect for My little sister has always looked up to me.
make sthg up invent, lie about sthg Josie made up a story about why we were late.
make up forgive each other We were angry last night, but we made up at breakfast.
make sby up apply cosmetics to My sisters made me up for my graduation party.
mix sthg up confuse two or more things I mixed up the twins’ names again!
pass away Die His uncle passed away last night after a long illness.
pass out Faint It was so hot in the church that an elderly lady passed out.
pass sthg out give the same thing to many people The professor passed the textbooks out before class.
pass sthg up decline (usually sthg good) I passed up the job because I am afraid of change.
pay sby back return owed money Thanks for buying my ticket. I’ll pay you back on Friday.
pay for sthg be punished for doing sthg bad That bully will pay for being mean to my little brother.
pick sthg out Choose I picked out three sweaters for you to try on.
point sby/ sthg out indicate with your finger I’ll point my boyfriend out when he runs by.
put sthg down put what you are holding on a surface or floor You can put the groceries down on the kitchen counter.
put sby down insult, make sby feel stupid The students put the substitute teacher down because his pants were too short.
put sthg off Postpone We are putting off our trip until January because of the hurricane.
put sthg out Extinguish The neighbours put the fire out before the firemen arrived.
put sthg together Assemble I have to put the crib together before the baby arrives.
put up with sby/ sthg Tolerate I don’t think I can put up with three small children in the car.
put sthg on put clothing/ accessories on your body Don’t forget to put on your new earrings for the party.
run into sby/ sthg meet unexpectedly I ran into an old school-friend at the mall.
run over sby/ sthg drive a vehicle over a person or thing I accidentally ran over your bicycle in the driveway.
run over/ through sthg rehearse, review Let’s run over/through these lines one more time before the show.
run away leave unexpectedly, escape The child ran away from home and has been missing for three days.
run out have none left We ran out of shampoo so I had to wash my hair with soap.
send sthg back return (usually by mail) My letter got sent back to me because I used the wrong stamp.
set sthg up arrange, organize Our boss set a meeting up with the president of the company.
set sby up trick, trap The police set up the car thief by using a hidden camera.
shop around compare prices I want to shop around a little before I decide on these boots.
show off act extra special for people watching (usually boastfully) He always shows off on his skateboard
sleep over stay somewhere for the night (informal) You should sleep over tonight if the weather is too bad to drive home.
sort sthg out organize, resolve a problem We need to sort the bills out before the first of the month.
stick to sthg continue doing sthg, limit yourself to one particular thing You will lose weight if you stick to the diet.
switch sthg off stop the energy flow, turn off The light’s too bright. Could you switch it off.
switch sthg on start the energy flow, turn on We heard the news as soon as we switched on the car radio.
take after sby resemble a family member I take after my mother. We are both impatient.
take sthg apart purposely break into pieces He took the car brakes apart and found the problem.
take sthg back return an item I have to take our new TV back because it doesn’t work.
take off start to fly My plane takes off in five minutes.
take sthg off remove sthg (usually clothing) Take off your socks and shoes and come in the lake!
take sthg out remove from a place or thing Can you take the garbage out to the street for me?
take sby out pay for sby to go somewhere with you My grandparents took us out for dinner and a movie.
tear sthg up rip into pieces I tore up my ex-boyfriend’s letters and gave them back to him.
think back remember (often + to, sometimes + on) When I think back on my youth, I wish I had studied harder.
think sthg over Consider I’ll have to think this job offer over before I make my final decision.
throw sthg away dispose of We threw our old furniture away when we won the lottery.
turn sthg down decrease the volume or strength (heat, light etc) Please turn the TV down while the guests are here.
turn sthg down Refuse I turned the job down because I don’t want to move.
turn sthg off stop the energy flow, switch off Your mother wants you to turn the TV off and come for dinner.
turn sthg on start the energy, switch on It’s too dark in here. Let’s turn some lights on.
turn sthg up increase the volume or strength (heat, light etc) Can you turn the music up? This is my favourite song.
turn up appear suddenly Our cat turned up after we put posters up all over the neighbourhood.
try sthg on sample clothing I’m going to try these jeans on, but I don’t think they will fit.
try sthg out Test I am going to try this new brand of detergent out.
use sthg up finish the supply The kids used all of the toothpaste up so we need to buy some more.
wake up stop sleeping We have to wake up early for work on Monday.
warm sby/ sthg up increase the temperature You can warm your feet up in front of the fireplace.
warm up prepare body for exercise I always warm up by doing sit-ups before I go for a run.
wear off fade away Most of my make-up wore off before I got to the party.
work out Exercise I work out at the gym three times a week.
work out be successful Our plan worked out fine.
work sthg out make a calculation We have to work out the total cost before we buy the house.

Bowing and Curtsying

People show respect to those who are senior to them in age or position by among other ways bowing and curtsying.

Bowing is done by men and it involves bending part of your body forward especially the neck and head.

You should bow

–When standing before a person you respect or when walking past him or her as a formal way of showing respect.

–An actor may take a bow to appreciate the audience’s applause.

–When praying, or to show respect to someone who has died, or show that you are ashamed in a formal way.

–In a courtroom to show respect to the chambers as representative of the law of the land.

–In parliament when entering as an honourable house that make laws of the land.

–when you are being sworn into office to show respect to the laws and the process.

–During graduation ceremony, when receiving acknowledgement or a certificate.

–When being introduced to an important guest or the guest can bow to acknowledge the hosts.

During festivals, when introducing items on stage.

A girl or a lady can curtsy by slightly bending their knees and holding, very quickly, up their dress or skirt on both sides of their thighs as a sign of respect for an important person.

Curtsying applies in the following situations:

  1. When a girl meets a respectable older person as a formal way greetings.
  2. When a lady receives a present or a certificate during graduation.

English Sounds

Sounds in English are divided into consonants and vowels. A sound composed of two vowel sounds in a word is called a diphthong e.g. dear /ia/ or say/ei/ and a sound made up of three vowel sounds is known as a triphthong e.g. flour/aua/.

IPA examples listen  
ʌ cup, luck AM  
ɑ: arm, father AM BR  
æ cat, black AM  
e met, bed AM 1
ə away, cinema AM 2
ɜ:ʳ turn, learn AM BR 2
ɪ hit, sitting AM  
i: see, heat AM  
ɒ hot, rock AM BR 3
ɔ: call, four AM BR 4 5
ʊ put, could AM  
u: blue, food AM  
five, eye AM  
now, out AM  
say, eight AM  
go, home AM 6
ɔɪ boy, join AM  
eəʳ where, air AM BR 1 7
ɪəʳ near, here AM BR 7
ʊəʳ pure, tourist AM BR 7

 

Consonants IPA examples listen  
b bad, lab AM  
d did, lady AM  
  f find, if AM  
  g give, flag AM  
  h how, hello AM  
  j yes, yellow AM  
  k cat, back AM  
  l leg, little AM  
  m man, lemon AM  
  n no, ten AM  
  ŋ sing, finger AM  
  p pet, map AM  
  r red, try AM 8
  s sun, miss AM  
  ʃ she, crash AM  
  t tea, getting AM 9
  check, church AM  
  θ think, both AM  
  ð this, mother AM  
  v voice, five AM  
  w wet, window AM  
  z zoo, lazy    
    pleasure, vision    
  just, large    

Adjectives

Adjectives are words that modify or provide more information about nouns.

Adjectives of quality refer to words that show the nature of nouns in terms of beauty, ugliness, morals and shapes. For example: She is a nice girl.  He is heavy.   John is a thin boy.  This job is difficult.

Usually such an adjective has a variety of synonyms e.g. Huge—big, enormous, gigantic, vast etc.

Adjectives of quantity are words that describe a noun by showing how many or how much of the noun is there or shows the number of the items. E.g. thirty books, both girls, all students etc.

Gradable adjectives describe qualities that can be measured or graded in some way. For example, something can be less interesting, interesting, quite interesting or very interesting. Therefore interesting is a gradable adjective because it can be graded. Gradable adjectives are usually used with intensifiers like very, quite, fairly, terribly, rather, completely, absolutely and really.

Very sorry, really disappointed, quite sick, terribly happy, fairly ashamed etc

Non gradable adjectives describe either extreme qualities like furious, starving, mad or absolute qualities such as correct, alive, dead, square, round, vast etc.

Non gradable adjectives thus cannot be used with intensifiers like very. You cannot be very correct or quite dead or even absolutely round.

Comparative forms of adjectives are used when we want to compare two people, things or situations mainly by adding –er at the end of the adjective e.g. This is smaller than that. Go higher than she went.

Sometimes the word more is more suitable especially when the adjective is a word with more than two syllables and it cannot take the suffix –er.  E.g. Rita is more attractive than Eunice.

–Comparative forms always occur with the word ‘than’ to bring out the comparison.

She is brighter than I. He is more confused than I.  Etc.

–Adjectives that end with ‘y’ usually drop the ‘y’ in comparative form before taking on –er. E.g. Ken is happy—Ken is happier than Jennifer.

Superlative forms of adjectives are used to compare more than two items, people or situations and show the most dominant or the best of the lot.  E.g. Njeri is the tallest of the four girls.

The word ‘than’ is not used with superlatives. Superlatives are formed by adding –est to the adjective and introducing the article ‘the’ before it. E.g. She is the cleverest girl in class.

Some adjectives form their superlative forms by doubling the last consonants and adding –est but this only occurs when a word with one syllable ends with a single consonant preceded by a single vowel. E.g.

Big—bigger—biggest, Fat—fatter—fattest.  Hot—hotter—hottest.

When an adjective has more than two syllables, we form the superlative by adding the word ‘most’ before it and the article ‘the’ e.g. The most disgusting book.  She is the most hardworking boy in class.

The superlative form ‘most’ is also used with adjectives that end with the suffix –ful. E.g.

Beautiful—more beautiful—the most beautiful

Careful—more careful—the most careful

Irregular adjectives do not have a predictable pattern of forming comparatives and superlatives. E.g.

Much—more—most

Bad—worse—worst

Good—better—best

Little—less—least

Far—further—furthest

Old—elder—eldest

Some adjectives can take both –est and most /er and more in superlative and comparative forms. E.g.

Luke is heavier/ more heavy than Jacob.

Silas is the smartest/most smart boy in school.

Others are brave and pretty. But it would wrong to use both versions in the same sentence. For example saying John is more smarter than Joyce would be wrong. You would have to choose one version.

 

Impromptu Speeches

An impromptu speech is a speech one makes without prior preparations. Speeches made on many occasions involve planning beforehand. For example a political speech to be delivered to a target audience will be written a couple of days before the material day and the speaker would rehearse it several times.  But in some situations, especially informal ones, people are required to say something, give a speech, because of their positions and influence in society or relation to the guest of honour.

To effectively give an impromptu speech, observe the following:

  1. a) Make a habit of talking in front of people so that you get used to it. This will cultivate your public speaking confidence.
  2. b) At your own time practice giving a speech to an imaginary audience to enhance your use of the stage and how to utilize body movements, gestures and other skills when on stage.
  3. c) Learn how to pronounce words correctly and how to control your breath when talking to people.
  4. d) Develop some humorous comments, quotes, proverbs etc that you can employ to ease tensions on such occasions.

–When called upon to deliver an impromptu speech

  1. Settle on a topic or issue you want to talk about.
  2. Make sure you are familiar with the topic you would talk about.
  3. Try to stay calm and relaxed by taking a deep breath.
  4. Visualize your main points in your mind or quickly note them down and stick to the order of how you visualize them.
  5. Expound on your main points in your speech elaborately.
  6. It is better to start with a quote or a proverb and if there is tensions in the crowd make some humorous comments to ease the tensions.
  7. Observe the allocated time.
  8. Maintain eye contact with the audience
  9. Project your voice clearly so as to be heard.
  10. Display necessary facial expressions suited to the occasion like smiling if it is a wedding, looking solemn if it is a requiem mass etc.

Primary Axillaries

Auxiliary verbs are helping verbs. They help the main verbs in a sentence to show tense and mood. E.g.

I am cooking food. (Present tense)    I had gone home. (past perfect tense)   He must go home.  (Imperative mood)

The following primary auxiliaries act as helping verbs:

–Forms of be i.e. am, is, are, was, were, being

–Forms of have i.e. has, have and had

–Forms of  do i.e. do, does, did, done

Auxiliary verbs can be use to form questions e.g.

Have you seen him?     Did she travel? Etc

Auxiliaries do, did, done and does are used for emphasis e.g.

I did win the encounter.      I do like him.      She does cry a lot.   Etc

–Sometimes primary auxiliaries act as main verbs e.g.

She has a book     She had a knife     John is a good boy    The Wafulas are rich.

Modal Auxiliaries

Modal auxiliaries are verbs which help other verbs to express mood in a sentence which include doubt, certainty, possibility, permission etc.

Mood is usually in form of

  1. a) Ability—could and can e.g. I can swim. We could sing back then.
  2. b) Requests—can I, shall we, may I… e.g. Can I use your pen?

May I talk to your dad?    Shall we go.

  1. c) Permission—you can, you may, you could…e.g. You can go home. You may see the doctor now. Etc
  2. d) Willingness—can, could and will e.g. I can give you the money tomorrow. I could steal.  I will come.
  3. e) Wish—may e.g. May God bless you.
  4. f) Obligation or duty—must, ought to, should e.g. I must finish this work before I go. You ought to pay fees for your children. You should respect your parents.
  5. g) Certainty—will e.g. I will come next week. We will all die.
  6. h) Possibility or probability—can, might, may, could e.g. I can win the race. He might come.  She may recover.   We could lose.
  7. i) Reassuring—will g. it will be OK.
  8. J) Threatening—will e.g. I will kill you.

Phrases

A phrase is a word or a group of words within a sentence that plays a particular function e.g. as a verb, preposition, adverb etc.

A verb phrase is headed by or contains a verb—usually a verb and an auxiliary verb as shown.

She is going home.  Auxiliary verb is and the main verb ‘going’.

I can see you.  I could have died.   We would laugh a lot in those days.   You should sing.

An adverb phrase acts as an adverb in a sentence; that is, giving more information about the verb or adjective. E.g.

She sat near the door.   Cover the table with a piece of cloth.

She came last year.  He is handsome like Brad Pitt.

He played quite well. We made it by sheer luck. I was utterly disgusted.  He came forthwith when I called.

A prepositional phrase is headed by a preposition or acts as a preposition in a sentence. E.g.

He lowered the bag to the ground.   He jumped over the fence.

—Most prepositional phrases are actually adverb phrases.

An adjective phrase consist of one or more words one which must be an adjective. E.g.

Most girls like bright clothes.

–If there are more words then the most important is the adjective and the rest would be modifiers (provide more information about the adjective). E.g.

Our classroom is very clean. Is this too high?

The modifier is usually an adverb of degree such as very, quite, too etc.

Clauses

A clause is a group of words that can pass of a sentence but usually part of a longer sentence.

A conditional clause is made up of a subordinate clause starting with the word ‘if’  and a main clause separated from the subordinate clause with a comma.  E.g.

If you eat unripe fruits, you will suffer from stomach ache.

However, if the sentence begins with a main clause then the comma is not used. E.g.

You will suffer from stomach ache if you eat unripe fruits.

You will suffocate if you sleep in a stuffy room.

–Conditional clauses are usually used to persuade, warn and advice people.

A noun clause performs the same function as a noun or pronoun in a sentence. E.g.

What he is telling us is very interesting.

The underlined words can be replaced by a single noun or pronoun.

–Noun clauses usually begin with words such as that, whether, if, what, who and which.

I was angry that he had lost my key

He did not know whether to go or remain behind.

A relative clause is usually a noun clause headed by a relative pronoun. E.g.

The boy who was the top in national exams is here

The cat which was found dead was mine.

Gender Nouns

Gender nouns are nouns that portray discrimination or bias in ones language.  When we use language, we must be careful not to exclude or discriminate against a certain section of people either male or female. In most cases it is the female sex that is affected by the bias which occurs through the use of pronouns.  E.g.

A candidate should be provided with everything he needs.

A good leader is one who respects himself.

These examples have a gender bias towards them. To alleviate this problem we can rewrite them as follows:

A candidate should be provided with everything he or she needs.

A good leader is one who respects himself or herself.

But this arrangement is usually deemed clumsy or repetitive.  The best way is usually to rewrite the sentence in plural; for example:

Candidates should be provided with everything they need.

Good leaders are those who respect themselves.

–Yet another way is the use of the second person pronoun ‘you’ which is gender neutral. E.g.

As candidates, you should be provided with everything you need.

As good leaders, you should respect yourselves.

In spoken or informal language, people tend to use the plural pronouns ‘their’ and ‘them’ as shown.

If anybody rings, tell them I am in a meeting.

But this is ungrammatical because it lacks subject—pronoun number agreement. To avoid this complication, one can rewrite this sentence as follows:

If anybody rings, say I am in a meeting.

–Apart from pronouns, there are also words that tend to be sexist. If the context includes both men and women, it is best to replace such terms with gender-neutral ones as shown below.

Sexist

Foreman

Fireman

Manned

Chairman

Lay man

Spokesperson

Businessman

Mankind

Neutral

Supervisor

Fire-fighter

Run by

Chair

Lay person

Spokesperson

Business person

Humankind

 

 

To accommodate both men and women, some nouns have male/Female contrast in their forms. The feminine forms normally ends in –ess. Note that some people object to use of feminine forms. For example they prefer using hero for both male and female.

Male

Waiter

Host

Actor

Headmaster

Hero

Female

Waitress

Hostess

Actress

Headmistress

Heroine

 

Exercise

  1. a) Fill in the blank spaces in the following passage with an appropriate gender neutral word.

Successful business __ work very hard. Their firms are __by very competent people. For example, they only employ a sales __ who is qualified. The chair __ is normally a very good spokes __ for the firm.

  1. b) Rewrite the following sentences in order to remove the sexist use of pronouns. Do not change the meaning of the sentence.
  2. Everyone has his rights.
  3. Nobody should blame himself for it.
  4. A parliamentarian should articulate the view of his people.
  5. Everybody wants to pass his exams, doesn’t he?
  6. None of the teachers can neglect his students.
  7. c) Rewrite to remove the clumsiness.

1) Whoever did it will pay for his or her actions.

2) Each cashier paid himself or herself.

3) A worker may injure himself or herself on the job.

4) If anyone wants to pass his or her exam, he or she must work hard in his or her studies.

Active Voice

A verb is said to be in active voice when it form shows that the person or thing acting as the subject does something or is the doer of the action.  E.g. Silas loves Mary.  Ken gives offering.

A passive voice refers to the verb when it form shows that something is done to the subject: that the subject is not active and suffers or receives the action. E.g. Mary is loved by Silas.   Offering is given by Ken.

–When you change an active voice into a passive one, the subject of the verb becomes the object of the verb and often the word ‘by’ is used to show this relationship.   Tom kicked the ball. (active)   The ball was kicked by Tom. (passive).

–The ‘by’ word sometimes is not used in active voice when only one agent is known especially if the subject was indefinite pronoun. E.g. someone kicked the ball (active).  The ball was kicked (passive).

Someone stole my pen—My pen was stolen.

–Sometimes obvious objects are omitted in passive voice e.g.

He handed her the chair—the chair was handed to her.   The phrase ‘by him’ is obvious and can be left out but the sentence would retain its meaning.

Somebody hit the dog with a stick—The dog was hit with a stick.

Exercise

Write the following sentences in the passive voice.

  1. He loves babies.
  2. She killed him.
  3. Ken is greeting the guests.
  4. Sally sent him.
  5. Wafula has seen him.
  6. Jane had married John.
  7. You will see Jesus.

Negotiation Skills

Negotiation skills involve holding an amicable discussion with an aim of reaching a favourable agreement over a disagreeable matter or varying opinion.

To negotiate effectively

–be patient

–use polite language

–listen to the other party carefully so as to advance a sound argument

–do not interrupt.

–be pleasant and convincing; if you want something then the reason behind it must be valid and reasonable.

–Compromise in case you don’t get what you want but state clearly your stand.

–Look for win-win situations for both parties or aim to meet halfway.

–Appreciate the other party’s views and let them know this as much.

Exercise

BUYER: How are you this morning?

SELLER: I’m okay.

BUYER: My name is Musimbi.

SELLER: My name is Karani. Welcome.

BUYER: I’m looking for good chickens but your don’t look so good. I’m going to have visitors and this being the Christmas season; I really must give them a feast.

SELLER: These are the right kind of chickens for your visitors. They’re healthy and well fed.

BUYER: On the contrary, they look underfed anyway; what is your price?

SELLER: It depends. I charge more for cocks; they have more meat, you know. (Points at a red cock) This one, for instance, goes for Ksh 400.00. As for the hens, I charge Ksh 250 each.

BUYER:  You are not serious! Much of the weight is a bundle of bones. I’m giving you Ksh 150.00 for each hen and Ksh 300.00 for each cock. I’m buying three of each—three hens for Ksh 450 and three cocks for Ksh900. This will give us a total of Ksh 1,350.00.

SELLER: You know I buy and sell. I don’t get them from my shamba. Your figure doesn’t give me any profit at all.

BUYER: But you also know that money is hard to come by and especially during this Christmas season. Give me a reasonable price unless you prefer I go to another seller.

SELLER: Let me make it Ksh 225.00 for a hen and Ksh 375.00 for a cock.

BUYER: It looks like you’re not interested in selling your chickens.

SELLER: No I’m. Otherwise, why would I be here? My children’s fees come from this business.

BUYER: Okay, take Ksh 175 for each hen and 325 for each cock.

SELLER: No. There would be no profit for me.  You can do better than that. You can surely promote my small business. Just give me 350 per cock and 225 per hen.  This will be 625 for the three hens and 1,050 for the three cocks.

BUYER: (Doing his mental arithmetic) that is a total of Ksh 1,725.00. Okay. At least I’ll be able to feed my visitors (handing him the money) here you are.

SELLER: Thank you (as he ties the chickens together) You’re a good customer. Please come again.

BUYER: See you.

 

Questions

  1. What is the purpose of greetings in this situation?
  2. Identify and explain the negotiation skills of the buyer and the seller.
  3. What does this business transaction reveal about the nature of good negotiations?

SPEECH WRITING

A speech is a formal talk, presentation or delivery of information to a defined audience with a specific purpose.  Most speeches are meant to convince, sway and motivate the audience. Sometimes a speech can be made to refute allegations, reveal a secret or condemn specific people.

Before writing a speech, one should prepare adequately.

A proper speech should have the following:

A relevant title that reflects on the content.

–A speech must acknowledge the guests in attendance by observing the protocol. A protocol should be observed in its own paragraph and should start from the senior most guest to the general audience.  Relevant formal titles of guests should be said.

–Start the speech on the second paragraph by either quoting a relevant philosopher, a past speaker or any relevant book;  or by giving statistics, a short story,  a proverb, a riddle,a thought provoking question etc.  E.g.

“Educate a woman and you educate a nation.”

“Recent statistics show that in every ten 9 Kenyans 2 are HIV positive. “

–The body should occur naturally from the introduction. Involve the audience and the chief guest in your speech by referring to them from time to time.  E.g. Ladies and gentlemen…or Mr. Principal…etc

–Emphasise on important points by providing good examples so that each issue occurs in its own paragraph.

–Space your speech by skipping lines after every paragraph.

–A good speech should have several short paragraphs tackling different issues.

–The conclusion should re-emphasise your motive and direct the audience attention to the main points. Therefore, a short passing summary of the most important points mentioned would do.  A conclusion can also include stating the way forward, providing a solution etc.

–After drafting the speech, go over it or proof-read it aloud to correct mistakes and establish  the tone and rhythm that you would use by altering punctuation to achieve the desired effect.

–A creative speech would involve simple and complex sentences, simple and complex phrases like nevertheless, at any rate, however; use of verbal cues like firstly, secondly; use of gestures and other paralinguistic features etc.

–When writing the speech start with opening quotation marks to show that it is meant to be spoken and then end with closing speech marks.

Example

The Big Picture

“The principal, deputy principal, teachers and students

 

Today I will talk to you about seeing the big picture. I am aware, and I hope you are too, that my title resonates with a published inspirational book by the famous Neurosurgeon, Ben Carson.  Well, we have the same message. It is the message Jesus gave to His faithful, prophet Mohammed gave to His followers and Buddha gave to His pupils: that there is something bigger and better beyond the daily occurrences, that following the road to self actualization and harmony is the ultimate path of an enlightened human being.

 

Students, the message is simple: sacrifice and Invest now for the future. Sleep less now because you will eventually sleep more comfortably in future.

 

Buddha’s life was short, Jesus ministry was short, Mohammed’s teachings were short-lived but their messages live on.  2000 years later these messages have gained bigger followings than envisioned. Why? Because they saw the bigger picture and sacrificed their lives, they lived what they preached; they avoided a life full of comfort, preached love, patience and brotherhood—the people listened.

 

So, students as you study know that you have to be the change you want to see in the world as voiced by the famous Mahatma Gandhi.  You have to believe in yourself, set goals and believe you can achieve them. Do not worry if things don’t work out as you had expected. There are always false starts everywhere; in business, in athletics, politics and even academics.  What matters is—Are you able to persevere to the end? Are you willing to keep trying, again and again till you succeed? Are you willing to suffer now and achieve what you need later?

 

Madam Principal here will tell you that it is not easy rising to the top. It requires time and patience. It requires sacrifice. But you can’t sacrifice if you can’t see the big picture. So, first see the big picture which in your case is what you want to be in future and the grades you need in the national exams in order to achieve your dream.  Again the big picture can be the mark you want to leave behind when you die, the legacy; how do you want to be remembered?

 

Students, let us stay focussed. Keep your eyes on the prize. Be like those great three: Jesus, Buddha and Mohammed who lived lives full of sacrifices and left a big legacy in our world.

 

Thank you all and may God bless you.

Prefixes and Suffixes

A prefix is part of a word (a morpheme) that is attached to a word at the beginning to create a different meaning of that word e.g.  Fore-word, Re-cur, pre-empt etc.

A suffix, on the other hand, is a morpheme that is attached at the end of a word for the same purpose. E.g. educa-tion, govern-ment etc.

–Pre- means before and fix means attach.

–Uusally the words combined do not change their spellings and pronunciation except when using all and well e.g.  All-so—also, Well-fare—Welfare.

–Common prefixes are non-  un-  dis-  ir-  im-  in-  il-  ab-  ig-  mis-

–Adverbs can also be used as prefixes e.g.  out-   over-  up-   down-

–Prefixes be-  en-  em- usually indicates to make or create something mentioned e.g.

Bedevil (create problems for)   encase (put in a case)    empower (give power to)    embitter    entangle

–Prefix re- indicates repetition e.g.  re-organise, reverse etc.

–Suffixes are used to create nouns. Common suffixes are

-acy  -ee  -ette  -ion   -let    -ship  -eer   -ery   -hood  -ism   -ment  -tion     -ar    -ence    -ess  -ian    -ist   -ness   -ure   -dom   -ency   -et   -ics    -ity

e.g. Cigarette   etiquette   kitchenette  leatherette facet   etc.

–Adjectives can be derived by the following suffixes   -able   -al    -esque    -ify    -ful   -ic    -ish    -en    -less   -ly    -ous

–Suffixes can also be used to create adverbs. –ly is the most common e.g. beautifully,   automatically etc.

–Suffixes are also used in the formation of new words by the derivational method e.g.

Anthropology (society)  astrology (stars) gynaecology (fertility)  zoology archaeology (ruins) pathology (diseases) biology  geology   psychology   immunology   etymology   speleology  (caves)  theology  criminology   ornithology (birds)  technology  cosmology (universe)  paleontology (rock)   chronology (order) physiology

Transitional Words and Phrases

These are words and phrases used to link sentences together in the development of a paragraph. Sometimes they are known as connectors.

This transitional words and phrases can be used to show

–Contrast

On the contrary, on the other hand, nevertheless, unlike, there are some exceptions

–To show addition

Besides, moreover, again, and, furthermore, also, in addition

–To show comparison

In the same manner, in the same way, similarly, likewise, corresponds

–To indicate concession or compromise

Even though,  despite this,   in spite of this, in spite of   though, although, albeit

–To indicate emphasis

Actually, in fact, indeed, certainly , as a matter of fact

–To introduce an example

For example, that is, for instance, in particular, in other words

–To introduce a sequence

First, firstly, second, next finally etc

–To introduce a reason

Therefore, then, consequently, so, accordingly, hence, for this reason , thus

–To introduce a conclusion

In summary, In conclusion, to conclude, in short, to sum up, finally

–To link specific sentences

And, but, then

Thank You Note

A thank you note is written to acknowledge a favour done by a friend or any other people. E.g.

P.O BOX 10

WEBUYE

 

23RD JULY 2017

 

Dear Karen,

I am very happy that you made it to my wedding. I felt proud and happy seeing you around. You have always been nice to me and I appreciate that. My husband and I loved your gift (pressure cooker) and we will make good use of it. That was very thoughtful of you.

Thank you for coming and my God bless you.

Best wishes

Eunice.

 

A congratulatory note is written by friends or family to give credit or acknowledge excellence in performance by an individual. E.g.

P.O. BOX 66

KISII

 

26TH MAY 2017

 

Dear Lim,

 

Hearty congratulations on your promotion to the position of sales manager. To me the news did not really come as a surprise for I have always believed you have what it takes. If anyone deserved the post, you surely did. Knowing you, I am sure you will not rest on your laurels and will soon climb a notch higher.

 

Best of luck in your new duties.

 

Your friend

Janet

 

A Note of Condolence is written to console the family of the deceased and share in their grief. Notes of condolences should be

–handwritten to give them a personal and caring touch

–say something in praise of the deceased

–be sincere

–be brief

–be sent as soon as the news is received. In fact all notes should be prompt to the news.

For example

P.O. BOX 45

NAIVASHA

 

21ST OCTOBER 2017

 

Dear Mr and Mrs Kamau,

 

My wife and I were terribly saddened by the death of your daughter. She will really be missed by us and all who knew her.

It is hard to picture our neighbourhood without her as she was very friendly, funny and generous.

Your family is in our thoughts at this trying moment and if there is anything we can do to help, please do let us know.

With deep sympathy

 

Mr and Mrs. Ochieng

 

If the family of the deceased is familiar with yours, there is no need for the inclusion of other formal details like the return address and the subject, but if you only knew the deceased and the parents do not know you; it would be paramount to include the formal details as shown below.  Again, some condolences are more formal and can be read on behalf of the sender who is unable to attend the funeral service especially someone like the president.

Question

A classmate of yours has died in a road accident. You have met the parents several times during visiting days and have even been to their home. Write a letter of condolences to them.

 

P.O. BOX 321

NAIROBI

 

24TH FEBURUARY 2017

 

WAFULA FAMILY

P.O. BOX 11

NAKURU

 

Dear Mr and Mrs. Wafula,

It was with great shock that I received the news of the passing away of your daughter. Allow me to share in your grief although you barely know me.

Your daughter and I were close. She was a great friend. I will remember her particularly for her dedication to education. Her warmth and friendliness will be missed dearly.

Do let me know if there is anything I can do to help.

With Deep Sorrow

Jane Wakoli

0700337766

 

–Thank you, congratulatory and notes of condolences should be written as soon as possible after the event.

Transitive and Intransitive Verbs

Transitive verbs are verbs that are usually followed by an object.  E.g. She admires her aunt.  The verb admire is transitive because you must say what is admired for the sentence to make sense.  Other transitive verbs are kick, discover, receive, see, like etc

–Some transitive verbs have a limited range of objects they occur with; for example, the verb kill must occur with an object that is alive or a concept that is alive. You can’t kill a stone.

Intransitive verbs do not really need objects to make sense in a sentence. The subject does the action but doesn’t affect anybody or anything else.  E.g. I slept.  Others are arrive, squeak, bark, yawn etc.

–Most intransitive nouns are followed by adverbs e.g.   It happened yesterday.  I slept soundly.

–A few verbs can be used transitively and intransitively e.g. ate—she ate.    She ate Ugali.  Others are write, read, drink and play.

–Ditransitive verbs are verbs that can take direct and indirect objects.

An indirect object is usually the benefactor of the action of the verb and the direct object suffers from the action. E.g.  John kicked the ball to James. The ball is direct object because it suffers from the action of the verb and James is the indirect object because he is the benefactor of the action of the verb.

Infinitives

An infinitive is the simplest form of a verb. The verb is said to be in its infinitive form when it does not show or form part of the tense in a sentence.

Bare infinitive—sing

To infinitive—to sing

-ing infinitive—singing

All these forms can occur in all tenses as follows:

She is going to sing, she was going to sing, she will be going to sing.

She is singing, she was singing, she will be singing.

She sings, she could sing, she will sing.

–An infinitive can be used as an object of a sentence e.g.

To eat lots of chocolate would be unwise if you want to be slim.

–If the ‘to’ infinitive is used interchangeably with the –ing infinitive the sentence would not retain the meaning e.g.

She was to score—she was scoring. She was to eat—she was eating.

Newspaper Reports

To write a good newspaper report observe the following:

  1. a) Decide on the topic.
  2. b) Research on the topic to establish the two sides of the story. Research will also enhance your knowledge in the selected topic area.
  3. c) Make sure your title for the report is attractive and catchy—it should be short simple and relevant to the contents.
  4. d) In the introduction or first paragraph, tell the reader about the Who (victims and culprits) , the Where (where the event occurred) and the Why (explaining events). The introduction should be brief and details should be saved for later paragraphs.
  5. e) The body should expound on details or issues and elaborate on people or things mentioned in the introduction. The writer needs to tell the story vividly and objectively.
  6. f) The concluding paragraph should give a perspective or conclusive opinion on the way forward.
  7. g) After the last paragraph, the report should end with the word ‘by’ and the full name.
  8. h) The report should include quotes from players involved and information should be attributed.

Example

By JOHN NJAGI
More by this Author

MPs have tried to disassociate themselves from a report showing that the Constituency Development Fund lost Sh4 billion in one year.

However, officers from the Auditor-General’s office, who appeared before the National Government Constituency Development Fund committee, said the report had not mentioned names.

“The reports are not meant to blame anybody but lead to a dialogue on how the issues raised can be fixed,” Deputy Auditor-General Alex Ringera said.

Committee Chairman Moses Lesonet questioned the method used by Auditor-General Edward Ouko to conduct the audits, accusing him of including projects in schools and police stations as CDF assets.

“Once the CDF gives out money, it should not answer as to whether the school or police station undertook the work. It is up to your office to audit such institutions,” he said.

Another Deputy Auditor-General, Mr David Gichana, said the CDF structure provided that the committees were responsible for prudent use of funds given to institutions, since project committees in schools, dispensaries and others funded from the kitty report to the CDF teams.

FORMAL REPORTS

A report is an account given or opinion formally expressed after investigation.  Reports perform an important function in large organisations. They enable the administrators to keep track of normal operations, to learn about unexpected developments and to judge whether there is satisfactory progress on a new project. In the science and social fields, reports form the link between research and practical use of discoveries. They present a series of facts which enable someone to make a decision based on reliable information. Most formal reports are as a result of a project, an investigation or a commission.

Format of a formal report

Title

The report should have a title which should indicate the content of the report and should be brief e.g.

A REPORT ON THE STUDENTS ATTITUDE TOWARDS PHYSICAL EDUCATION PROGRAMME

Introduction

The introduction to a report should set out clearly the

–specific purpose of the report

–circumstances or events that necessitated the report

The terms of reference of the report which include

–who authorized the report

–if a committee was appointed to carry out investigation and its nature

–when the report is due

–who is to receive the report when ready

Procedure

The procedure should outline how the information was collected mainly through interviews, scrutiny of information, observation, examination, questionnaires and other methods like spying, traps etc.

Findings

This part presents facts, views, illustrations, statistics, experiments and other observations derived from or in accordance to the respective procedures used

–The evidence should be presented in a logical sequence

–Names, places and quotations should be given here

Conclusion

This deals with what can be deduced from the findings, logical conclusions or inferences should be made in a paragraph.

Recommendations

This emanates from the conclusion. This contains means or ways of improving the situation, solving a problem and or the way forward as seen and evidenced from the research.

A good report should have a fairly good number of recommendations, at least four.

–After recommendations, the following ending is appropriate

Report written and compiled by:

NAME:_____                SIGN________      TITLE_______

QUESTION

You are the head of a committee commissioned by the principal of Uzima Secondary School to investigate the serious water wastage and the resulting shortage. The committee is required to come up with solutions to the problem. Write the report.

 

WAYS TO CONSERVE WATER AT UZIMA SECONDARY SCHOOL: WATER COMMITTEE PRELIMARY REPORT

 

INTRODUCTION

Following the frequent cases of water shortage in school, the principal of Uzima Secondary School, Mr. John Kamau, formed a committee to investigate the problem and recommend solutions.

Terms of Reference

The committee was to begin work on 3rd of October 2016 and finalise the report by the end of October 2016. The report was to be handed to the principal on 2nd of November 2016 at 10.00 AM.

The following were members of the committee

  1. Ogot Mageto—Chairperson
  2. Rukwaro Mureith—Deputy Principal
  3. Kironyo Mwara—Boarding master
  4. Salmas Mbori—Teacher
  5. Nyakuri Lumi—Head cook
  6. Wesley Kimoli—School Watchman
  7. Adit Wawango—Head boy
  8. Runga Osori—Student
  9. Kesi Wafula—Student
  10. Keth Kiburi—Secretary

PROCEDURE

The committee developed a questionnaire which was used to gather information from the students and workers on how water is used in school. Forty students were sampled from all classes and dormitories to respond to the questionnaires. Ten workers in the dormitories and kitchen were interviewed by members of the committee.  The committee also visited the school kitchen and the boarding areas to observe the state of the water facilities.

FINDINGS

After analysing the information, the committee found that:

1) Leaking taps

There is a great deal of water going to waste through leaking taps and broken water pipes. The leaking taps are those next to the dining hall and the broken pipes are mainly at the pigsty.

2) Negligence

Most students interviewed admitted to forgetting to turn off taps after tapping water especially when they are in a hurry or late to class.

3) Poor management of taps

When the tanks are empty and water isn’t running from taps, many students who investigate if the taps are running open them and leave and when water is pumped especially at night, usually, there is no one to close the open taps so the water can fill tanks.

4) More tanks

The four tanks currently serving the school population are not enough. The school has a population of 1300 and water gets exhausted fast.

CONCLUSION

The committee concluded that the water shortage is caused mainly by water wastages and that this situation can be solved effectively by the following recommendations.

RECOMMENDATIONS

The committee came up with the following recommendations:

  1. The school should mount an intensive awareness campaign among students on the importance of conserving water and management of taps.
  2. The administration should immediately repair all the faulty taps and broken pipes.
  3. The taps should be put on lock when the tanks run dry.
  4. The school administration should add more tanks to hold enough water for the bourgeoning student population.

 

The report was written and compiled by

Obunga Ratemo

Sign

The committee secretary

Exercise

The electricity bill in your school is very high. Your principal has appointed you the secretary to a team commissioned to investigate the matter. Write a report of the proceedings, findings, conclusion and recommendations of the team.

NOTIFICATION OF MEETING

A notice of a meeting specifies the following details

  1. a) Title of the group that is to meet

2) The nature of the meeting

3) The date and time of the meeting

4) The venue

5) The name and title of the person calling the meeting

6) The agenda of the meeting

Example

 

Lugulu Girls’ High School

P.O. Private Bag

Webuye

 

Notice

 

End Term Staff Meeting

 

A meeting of all teaching members of staff will be held on 2nd November 2017 from 9.30 AM to 2.30 PM in the School Board Room.

The full agenda will be as follows

  1. Preliminaries
  2. Reading and confirmation of previous minutes
  3. Matters arising
  4. Reports on the teaching progress
  5. Student discipline issues
  6. Reorganisation of the school library
  7. Emerging issues
  8. Adjournment

 

Mrs. Lunani

The Principal

Sign__

 

MINUTES

Minutes are records of proceedings in a meeting.  They serve the following purpose:

–As a proof of a meeting taking place and the decisions arrived at.

–They provide a record that can be referred to by those unable to attend the meeting and as a reminder to those who were present.

–They hold members accountable for the decisions and commitments made during the meeting.

–They are legal documents which are admissible in a court of law.

–Minutes give a summary of the main points discussed and the decisions reached. As you take minutes ensure you put down all important points and that you understand resolutions reached before recording.

Minutes are usually written informally, short hand, in order to keep pace with the proceedings and later rewritten as a final official draft as soon as possible. Minutes should be written in a passive voice using formal language. Minutes should also be written in the third person e.g. it was agreed that… members discussed… etc

Structure of Minutes

Heading

There must be a heading containing the name of the group meeting; there must be time, date and the venue of the meeting within the title. E.g.

MINUTES OF THE LUGULU GIRLS END TERM MEETING HELD ON 2ND NOVEMBER 1017 IN THE SCHOOL’S BOARD ROOM FROM 9.00 AM TO 2.00 PM

List of Members

A list of members present is given against their titles first; then a list of apologies against their titles; a list of members absent against their titles before mentioning the gust in attendance.

–Any guest available is listed under the subtitle ‘in attendance’.

–Items in minutes are numbered  as Min 1/11/2017 where the word min stands for minute then the serial number of the item then month and year.

–This would apply for the first meeting where the first minute would have the serial number ‘1’ but subsequent minutes would have respective serial numbers.

QUESTION

You are the secretary of the Talanta Self Help Group. Write minutes of the proceedings of the meeting held on 10th September 2016 from 10.00 AM in Kendum Social hall. The agenda of the meeting had the following items:

–Issuing of loans

–office space and furniture

–office telephone

–A.O.B

–Matters arising

Two members sent their apologies and Mr. John Sikuku the county director attended as a guest.

 

MINUTES OF THE MONTHLY MEETING OF TALANTA SELF HELP GROUP HELD ON 10TH SEPTEMBER 2016 FROM 10.00 TO 3.00 PM IN KENDUM SOCIAL HALL

Members Present

  1. Ken Simiyu—chair
  2. Silas Maina—secretary
  3. Titus Waweru— treasurer
  4. Wamgui Helen—Member
  5. Omondi James—member
  6. Wafula Simon—member
  7. Ruth Kerubo—member
  8. Daisy Matete—member
  9. Anita Seme—member
  10. Geddra Macheo—member

 

Members Absent

  1. William Juma—member
  2. Dan Wanyama—member

 

Apologies

  1. Erick Simiyu—member
  2. Caxtone Simiyu—member

In attendance

John Sikuku—Bungoma county Director (administration)

 

Min 14/9/2016: Preliminaries

The chairperson welcomed members to the meeting. The meeting was opened by a prayer from Anita Seme. The chair received apologies from two members listed above. The chair thanked members for coming and acknowledged the presence of the Bungoma county director of administration Mr. John Sikuku.

Min 15/9/2016: Reading and Confirmation of previous Minutes

The minutes of the meeting held on 10th August 2016 were read through by the secretary. They were proposed by Ruth Kerubo and seconded by Daisy Matete to be a true record.

Min 16/9/2016 Matters Arising

Min 5/8/2016 payment of Dues—the treasurer reported that members had been paying the dues as agreed and promptly and the total shares were at Ksh 250,000. He said the funds were in the joint bank account awaiting a project receipts were tabled as proof.                                                                                                                     Min 7/8/2016 Group Tour—Mr. Wafula, who been tasked with the responsibility of organising the group tour reported that he had already booked a hotel in Mombasa at Ksh 90,000 and the tour would commence of 2nd December 2016. He added that the tour would be for four days.

Min 17/9/2016: Issuing of Loans

It was discussed that loans given are too small and the processing of loan application takes too long. It was resoled that members be given loans three times their number of shares and the emergency loans be disbursed within a week; normal loans would be disbursed within a month from the application date.

Min 18/9/2016: Office Space and Furniture

It was discussed that with the increasing membership, office space is inadequate and the office furniture is scarcely enough. It was resolved that bigger premises be rented with at least six spacious rooms and that tables, seats and cabinets be purchased by the treasurer working with Ms Matete within a month.

Min 19/9/2016: Office Telephone

It was discussed that there is need to install office telephone to ease communication. It was resolved that it will be installed the soonest possible and that the secretary, working with the treasurer will apply for telephone tools  and network on behalf of the group on 23rd of September 2016.

Min 20/9/2016: Emerging Issues (A.O.B)

The county director promised to help the group get a stationary supply tender to all county offices in December 2016.

It was also noted that the new office secretary is a vast improvement upon the last one who was inefficient.

Min 21/9/2016: Adjournment

There being no other business, the meeting ended with a prayer from Daisy Matete at 43.30 PM. The next meeting will be held on 3rd of January 2017 from 10.00 AM TO 2.00 PM in Kendum Social Hall.

 

Confirmed by:                 Secretary____Date_________

Chairperson_____ Date____________

 

 

Remember that minutes are signed in the next meeting so the signing spaces are usually left blank till then.

Exercise

As the secretary of the Evergreen Environmental Club, write minutes of a meeting held on 15th December 2017, whose agenda was as follows:

Agenda

  1. Apologies
  2. Confirmation of minutes of the meeting of 14th November 2015
  3. Matters arising
  4. Review of tree-planting project
  5. Sourcing of club funds
  6. Collaboration with the local community
  7. Emerging issues (A.O.B)

RECIPE

A recipe is a set of instruction that tells you how to cook something and the items of food you need for it. A good recipe should be as precise as possible because a vague one will not help one produce a proper dish.  All the ingredients must be given as well as their respective quantities. The amounts of different items would, of course, depend on the number of people to be served.

It is important to explain how the items are mixed, for how long they should be cooked and, if possible, at what temperatures. Every step should be explained and every detail included. Any omission could be disastrous.

BAKE:
To cook by dry heat, usually in the oven.

BARBECUE:
Usually used generally to refer to grilling done outdoors or over an open charcoal or wood fire. More specifically, barbecue refers to long, slow direct- heat cooking, including liberal basting with a barbecue sauce.

BATTER:
A mixture containing flour and liquid, thin enough to pour.

BEAT:
To mix rapidly in order to make a mixture smooth and light by incorporating as much air as possible..

BLEND:
To incorporate two or more ingredients thoroughly.

BOIL:
To heat a liquid until bubbles break continually on the surface.

BROIL:
To cook on a grill under strong, direct heat.

CARAMELIZE:
To heat sugar in order to turn it brown and give it a special taste.

CHOP:
To cut solids into pieces with a sharp knife or other chopping device.

CLARIFY:
To separate and remove solids from a liquid, thus making it clear.

CREAM:
To soften a fat, especially butter, by beating it at room temperature. Butter and sugar are often creamed together, making a smooth, soft paste.

CURE:
To preserve meats by drying and salting and/or smoking.

DEGLAZE:
To dissolve the thin glaze of juices and brown bits on the surface of a pan in which food has been fried, sauteed or roasted. To do this, add liquid and stir and scrape over high heat, thereby adding flavor to the liquid for use as a sauce.

DEGREASE:
To remove fat from the surface of stews, soups, or stock. Usually cooled in the refrigerator so that fat hardens and is easily removed.

DICE:
To cut food in small cubes of uniform size and shape.

DISSOLVE:
To cause a dry substance to pass into solution in a liquid.

DREDGE:
To sprinkle or coat with flour or other fine substance.

DRIZZLE:
To sprinkle drops of liquid lightly over food in a casual manner.

DUST:
To sprinkle food with dry ingredients. Use a strainer or a jar with a perforated cover, or try the good, old-fashioned way of shaking things together in a paper bag.

FILLET:
As a verb, to remove the bones from meat or fish. A fillet (or filet) is the piece of flesh after it has been boned.

FLAKE:
To break lightly into small pieces.

FLAMBE’:
To flame foods by dousing in some form of potable alcohol and setting alight.

FOLD:
To incorporate a delicate substance, such as whipped cream or beaten egg whites, into another substance without releasing air bubbles. Cut down through mixture with spoon, whisk, or fork; go across bottom of bowl, up and over, close to surface. The process is repeated, while slowing rotating the bowl, until the ingredients are thoroughly blended.

FRICASSEE:
To cook by braising; usually applied to fowl or rabbit.

FRY:
To cook in hot fat. To cook in a fat is called pan-frying or sauteing; to cook in a one-to-two inch layer of hot fat is called shallow-fat frying; to cook in a deep layer of hot fat is called deep-fat frying.

GARNISH:
To decorate a dish both to enhance its appearance and to provide a flavorful foil. Parsley, lemon slices, raw vegetables, chopped chives, and other herbs are all forms of garnishes.

GLAZE:
To cook with a thin sugar syrup cooked to crack stage; mixture may be thickened slightly. Also, to cover with a thin, glossy icing.

GRATE:
To rub on a grater that separates the food in various sizes of bits or shreds.

GRATIN:
From the French word for “crust.” Term used to describe any oven-baked dish–usually cooked in a shallow oval gratin dish–on which a golden brown crust of bread crumbs, cheese or creamy sauce is form.

GRILL:
To cook on a grill over intense heat.

GRIND:
To process solids by hand or mechanically to reduce them to tiny particles.

JULIENNE:
To cut vegetables, fruits, or cheeses into thin strips.

KNEAD:
To work and press dough with the palms of the hands or mechanically, to develop the gluten in the flour.

LUKEWARM:
Neither cool nor warm; approximately body temperature.

MARINATE:
To flavor and moisturize pieces of meat, poultry, seafood or vegetable by soaking them in or brushing them with a liquid mixture of seasonings known as a marinade. Dry marinade mixtures composed of salt, pepper, herbs or spices may also be rubbed into meat, poultry or seafood.

MEUNIERE:
Dredged with flour and sauteed in butter.

MINCE:
To cut or chop food into extremely small pieces.

MIX:
To combine ingredients usually by stirring.

PAN-BROIL:
To cook uncovered in a hot fry pan, pouring off fat as it accumulates.

PAN-FRY:
To cook in small amounts of fat.

PARBOIL:
To boil until partially cooked; to blanch. Usually this procedure is followed by final cooking in a seasoned sauce.

PARE:
To remove the outermost skin of a fruit or vegetable.

PEEL:
To remove the peels from vegetables or fruits.

PICKLE:
To preserve meats, vegetables, and fruits in brine.

PINCH:
A pinch is the trifling amount you can hold between your thumb and forefinger.

PUREE:
To mash foods until perfectly smooth by hand, by rubbing through a sieve or food mill, or by whirling in a blender or food processor..

REFRESH:
To run cold water over food that has been parboiled, to stop the cooking process quickly.

RENDER:
To make solid fat into liquid by melting it slowly.

ROAST:
To cook by dry heat in an oven.

SAUTE:
To cook and/or brown food in a small amount of hot fat.

SHRED:
To cut or tear in small, long, narrow pieces.

SIFT:
To put one or more dry ingredients through a sieve or sifter.

SIMMER:
To cook slowly in liquid over low heat at a temperature of about 180°. The surface of the liquid should be barely moving, broken from time to time by slowly rising bubbles.

SKIM:
To remove impurities, whether scum or fat, from the surface of a liquid during cooking, thereby resulting in a clear, cleaner-tasting final produce.

STEAM:
To cook in steam in a pressure cooker, deep well cooker, double boiler, or a steamer made by fitting a rack in a kettle with a tight cover. A small amount of boiling water is used, more water being added during steaming process, if necessary.

STEEP:
To extract color, flavor, or other qualities from a substance by leaving it in water just below the boiling point.

STERILIZE:
To destroy micro organisms by boiling, dry heat, or steam.

STEW:
To simmer slowly in a small amount of liquid for a long time.

STIR:
To mix ingredients with a circular motion until well blended or of uniform consistency.

TOSS:
To combine ingredients with a lifting motion.

 

QUESTION

A friend of yours visited you recently and thoroughly enjoyed the meal you prepared. He has requested you for its recipe to prepare a similar meal for four people. Write the recipe.

 

Stewed Beef to serve Four People

Introduction

Meat is one of the commonest foods worldwide. Stewed beef is a common meal in Kenya especially served during lunch and supper or any dinner. The meal should not be eaten frequently in large quantities because of health concerns but at most twice a week. In small quantities it can be eaten every day.

Ingredients

500 grams beef

1 large onion

3 medium sized tomatoes

I bunch coriander leaves

Half a teaspoon royco

1 dessert spoon cooking fat

Salt to taste

Two teaspoonfuls of gravy

Procedure

  1. Wash the beef
  2. Remove fats from the beef by cutting it out where possible
  3. Chop the beef into mouthful pieces
  4. Put the pieces in a pan and add cook on a dry pan till the meat is tender
  5. Add cooking fat and fry till it turns golden brown
  6. Dice onions and add to the cooking meat, fry till they also turn golden brown
  7. Grate tomatoes and add to the mixture; fry till they are part of the meat stew
  8. Add royco and coriander cut in small pieces.
  9. Add gravy and salt to taste
  10. Leave the meat to simmer for two minutes

The stewed beef can be served while hot with Chapati

 

Argumentative Essay

In life there are issues such as abortion, alcoholism and sex that require one to form an opinion. And for one to win others over to his side, he needs to argue out or form an argument to persuade others to his side. An argumentative essay is therefore meant to persuade other people or woo them to be part of a certain belief or opinion.

The Structure

TITLE

Just like in speech writing, an argumentative essay should carry a title that summarises its argument.

INTRODUCTION

The introduction should appeal to the emotions of the reader. The tone should be sincere because it is important for the reader to trust what you are saying.

BODY

In the body, you need to emphasise your appeal to reason rather than feelings. Give specific facts, examples and ideas that are logical.

–List advantages and disadvantages

–Include statistics if possible

–Do not exaggerate facts, for example by overgeneralization like all men are unfaithful

–Be prepared to make concessions or compromises if the opposite side has valid points e.g. We acknowledge the fact that politics favours the rich but revolutions do not solve…

–Refer to authority and give references to support your arguments so that it doesn’t look like you rae the only one advocating for something.

–Organise your points from the least to the most important.

CONCLUSION

A good conclusion restates in a memorable way what the argument is about

Essays Based on Set Texts

When writing essays based on set books

  1. The first step is always to read and understand the question well.
  2. Underline the key words in the question and what they command you to do e.g.

Write an essay to show the evils of corruption in a society as brought out in the play Betrayal in the City by Francis Imbuga.

In the above essay question the key words are underlined.

  1. Write an introduction. The introduction should be less than six lines and should interpret the question by giving a general example from real life or paraphrase the question in a general way. E.g.

Societies suffer rising unemployment and lack of development among other evils when individuals charged with managing public funds and resources embezzle or misappropriate the funds for personal use.  This situation is evident in the play Betrayal in the City by Francis Imbuga as argued below:

–Avoid using the same words used in the question when writing an introduction

  1. Construct the topic sentence that would run across the answers. The topic sentence captures the key words in the answer as reflected in the question which means the sentence replaces the underlined words, where necessary, with the issues under discussion in the paragraph e.g.

Unemployment (represents the key word evil) is rampant in Kafira because of corruption.

This sentence will run across the essay with four different issues that represent evil under discussion being highlighted. The topic sentence must be a sentence and not a subtitle like ‘unemployment.  E.g.

Unemployment is rampant in Kafira because of corruption. Then three illustrations to show this

Inefficiency in government is brought about by corruption. Then three illustrations

Some killings in Kafira are as a consequence of corruption. Explanations…

Under-development is caused by corruption…….

  1. The body should carry 4 paragraphs. Each paragraph should have a topic sentence and a detailed explanation and illustrations of the point being argued. Each point can score a maximum of three marks if well explained and with a proper topic sentence. The points are graded by

— Full (well explained)

–Fair (Fairly explained)

— Thin (Not well explained but there is an attempt)

–Unpointed (misunderstood the question)

— Narration (Key words not captured in the answer)

–T.E (You cannot remember details from the story well so you quote or use details that are not in the book)

Vague (whatever is written is not clear or is confusing)

  1. The conclusion of the essay should be brief and concluding words should be used. Such words are

In conclusion… To conclude… In summary… To sum up… etc

The conclusion should agree with the key argument of the question and mention two or three points discussed as evidence. The conclusion should be less than five lines. E.g.

To conclude, it is true that corruption is the source of evils like lack of development and unemployment in societies.  A good conclusion just like a good introduction would score a full ( 2 marks) a fair one will score one mark.

QUANTIFIES

The words few, a few, little and a little are known as quantifiers.

Few and a few are used with count nouns like a few desks, few boys etc while a little and little are used with no count nouns or mass nouns like a little water, little milk etc.

–Few and little have negative meaning and usage. Few means not many or not enough; little means not much or not enough as well. A few and a little have a positive meaning and they do not have comparatives and superlatives.  These words are also used as comparatives and superlatives e.g.

Few—fewer—fewest

Little—less—least /littlest

There are few girls in class. (not enough to be taught)

There are a few students in class. (they are enough for a lesson)

There is little water in the cup. (not enough to quench thirst)

There is a little tea in the flask; you can take. (it is enough)

–Few and little can be used with intensifiers such as quite, too and very but a little and a few cannot. e.g.

The crops dried up because there was too little water in the soil.

We have very little money left.

The matatus that are back on the road are quite few.

Taking Part in an Interview

Question

Imagine that an NGO in your area is looking for a form four leaver to educate the local community on ways of combating Malaria. Briefly explain how you would behave in an interview room.

  1. a) Gather information about the institution that has invited you and their area of interest. Also gather information about the general questions people ask in interviews and their appropriate answers.
  2. b) On the day of he interview, dress smartly, decently and formally. This communicates a lot about your personality—first impression is always important.
  3. c) Practice addressing an imaginary crowd to build your confidence and use of body language.
  4. d) Arrive on time to calm down and familiarize yourself with the area.
  5. e) When ushered into the interview room, greet the interviewers and remain standing till you are offered a seat. Warmly respond to the welcoming gestures.
  6. f) Sit upright and express your confidence by avoiding fidgeting, shuffling of feet etc.
  7. g) Avoid short inadequate answers.
  8. h) Maintain eye contact with interviewers and respond to questions confidently.
  9. i) Do not chew.
  10. j) If you are not sure about answers to some questions, be honest and admit it.
  11. k) Use polite language in your responses; do not feel offended by any question.
  12. l) Observe the interviewers cues—know when to speak like when the interviewer nods his head, and when to leave.
  13. m) Listen keenly to questions and comments.

As an interviewer

–Be friendly and prepared to ask questions

–research on the topic

–Be tactful, especially when asking simple questions.

–Listen to the interviewee—do not talk to much or carry prejudices be open minded and fair.

QUESTION

Your school is recruiting a new school captain. The principal and the prefect body are conducting interviews for this recruitment. You are interested in the post. Write an interview that may take place in the interview room.

Marking scheme

–the interviewee should say something about herself

–the body will have questions and answers concerning duties of a school captain and the role of prefects in the school

–She will be asked how she can deal with specific tricky situations if appointed e.g. a strike.

–She will be asked about why she is interested in leadership and her motivation to apply

–She will answer why she thinks she is the best person and not others

–She will answer what challenges she will be expecting and how to handle them like how to balance academics and leadership

–She will be asked, supposed she is not given the post she wanted but given a lesser one?

— In conclusion, one interviewer can thank the interviewee for coming

–The lead interviewer would inform the interviewee how she would receive communication if successful or not.

e-mail

An e-mail is an electronic mail or letter. These letters are passed electronically by the use of computer network.  Unlike  the postal mail, e-mails are faster and can be accessed by the recipient  at different  geographical locations.

To write an email one needs the following:

  1. An email address e.g. james55@yahoo.com
  2. A password that protects your email from those who are not supposed to access it.
  3. The email address of the one you are writing to e.g. kensili@gmail.com
  4. The subject of the email

When you write an email

  1. a) The message should be brief, clear and relevant
  2. b) Use the right tone
  3. c) It should be free of mistakes
  4. d) Do not write everything in capital letters—write the way you write a letter.
  5. e) Sign off using one name and the word regards e.g.

Regards

Joseph

CC  is carbon copies and is meant to show that the very copy of the email has been sent to other email addresses listed under the title cc. If the email is only one copy the title cc is left blank.

Example

TO: wekulo@yahoo.com

FROM: bwanya@gmail.com

CC:

SUBJECT: Annual Reports

DATE: October 1st 2017

Dear Wekulo,

This is to inform you that our annual marketing report will be due in the Director’s office by the end of the month. I will be grateful if you forwarded your regional reports to reach my office not later than Wednesday 5th 2017.

Thank you for your co-operation.

Regards

Kamau

QUESTION

You have seen an advertisement for several vacancies in the ministry of medical services. Those interested are supposed to submit their applications via email to the head of human resource in the ministry whose email address is mfsmm@gmail.com . You are a qualified nurse and interested. Apply for the job.

Questionnaire

A questionnaire is a set of printed questions systematically arranged for the purpose of obtaining information from respondents.

FEATURES

  1. The title of the project and its sponsorship. This is written on the first page e.g.

HIV AMONG THE YOUTHS—KABATI SUBLOCATION (FIDA)

  1. Introduction—there should be an introduction to the project. It can be used to show the importance of the project and to instruct the respondent on how to answer questions.
  2. Structure
  3. a) Arrange questions in a logical order beginning with personal information such as gender, age, level of education etc. This is factual information and less demanding.
  4. b) Progress towards questions demanding greater details, opinions or thought i.e open questions as opposed to closed questions. g.
  5. Name of your town.
  6. Do you have any street lights?
  7. What would you say are the reasons for incidents of crime in your area?
  8. What advice would you offer the police department on crime management ?
  9. c) Questionnaires can be designed in such a way that the respondents simply tick the response they favour e.g.

Please tick the appropriate box

Gender:  Female □ Male □

Married: Yes □ No □

  1. d) Other questions may be framed in such a way as to grade a respondent’s attitude or feelings towards something e.g.

School uniform should be made compulsory for all learning institutions (Tick one)

Strongly Agree □

Agree □

Disagree □

Strongly disagree □

Doesn’t matter □

 

  1. e) Keep the questionnaire to an appropriate length. People do not have time to keep on turning the pages.
  2. f) Use culturally appropriate language and do not patronize the respondents.
  3. g) Responding to questionnaires takes time and intrudes on the people’s privacy. You should therefore show appreciation for the respondent’s efforts.
  4. h) It is also useful to give your respondent an idea as to how the result of the questionnaire might be of benefit to them.

QUESTION

Imagine you have been asked to look into the effects of romantic relationships on high school students. Prepare a questionnaire that will help you collect information you require.

CURRICULUM VITAE

Curriculum vitae, sometimes called a resume, is a brief account of your education and career. It is a document that gives a potential employer a picture of a prospective employee. It is therefore meant to sell you as a worthy product. To achieve this, it must be planned carefully.

Normally, a CV organises information into the following headlines: Personal details, contact details, education, work experience, special skills and referees.

These headings should be highlighted, for example, by underlining, capitalization or bolding so that they stand out. Whether you place education or work experience first depends on which one is stronger for you. For example, if you have just finished school, put education first. Note that while some people arrange educational qualification and employment experience in the order in which they were acquired, many others prefer to put the most recent ones first.

 

CURRICULUM VITAE

 

 

 

 

PERSONAL INFORMATION

 

Field Economics
Current Address P.O Box 9742-00100, Nairobi, Kenya

Mobile: 0725950083

E-mail: machiopc@yahoo.com

 

Marital status Single
Nationality Kenyan
Identity Number 23358787
Religion Christian
Date of birth 12/05/1983
Languages (Spoken and written) English, Kiswahili
Career Aspiration Economist

 

PROFILE

Proficient in Research, Teaching, Training, Planning, Organizing, Coordinating skills, Administration, Statistical analysis using SPSS, E-views and STATA, Report Writing, Preparation of Presentation material, Leadership skills, Teamwork, Decision Making skills, and Effective Communication .

 

SUMMARY OF RELEVANT WORK EXPERIENCE

  • Teaching
  • Data entry and analysis
  • Writing of scientific papers
  • Report writing
  • Writing of project reports

 

EDUCATION BACKGROUND

 

 

Post-Graduate:

 

University of Nairobi 

 

PhD in Economics

 

Collaborative PhD Programme in Economics (CPP) sponsored and managed by the African Economic Research Consortium (AERC)

 

 

University of Nairobi 

 

Masters of Arts in Economics

 

June 24, 2007 to September 30, 2007: Africa Economic Research Consortium (AERC)

 

Collaborative Masters Programme in Economics (CMAP) for Anglophone countries expect Nigeria; Joint Facility for Electives (JFE)

 

Specialized in:

  • Health Economics

 

  • Corporate Finance and Investments

Year

Institution

Certificate

Qualifications

2003-2005

University of Nairobi

B.A (Economics Major, Sociology Minor)

First Class honors

 

1998-2001

Moi Girls’ Secondary School

K.C.S.E

Mean grade B – (Minus)

1994-1997

Misikhu Boarding Primary School

K.C.P.E

Mean Grade B (Plain)

 

 

Other Certification

  • Computer Literacy (Windows XP/2000, Internet and E-mail, Ms- Word, Ms-Excel, Ms-PowerPoint)
  • Statistical packages (E-views, STATA, SAM and SPSS)

 

 

SPECIAL SKILLS

  • Ability to take initiative and inspire others
  • Ability to mix and adjust quite fast with different people
  • Ability to cope with flexible task, travel long distances and work odd hours.
  • Ability to be proactive and highlight problem areas.

ACADEMIC AWARDS

2006/07-2007/08 Awarded University of Nairobi Scholarship.

2009-2013 Awarded African Economic Research Consortium (AERC) PhD scholarship

 

WORKSHOPS ATTENDED

 

  1. Participated in the Centre for the Study of African Economies (CSAE) workshop from Sunday 20 to Tuesday 22 March at the St. Catherine College, Oxford
  2. Participated in the AERC International Conference on Natural Resource Management and Climate Change in Africa from September 15th 2008 to September 17th 2008 at intercontinental Hotel, Nairobi

 

WORK EXPERIENCE

  1. August 2008-Date Part time Lecturer at the University of Nairobi, School of Economics.
  2. June, 2010 – September, 2010 International Development Research Centre (IDRC) as a consultant in the Eco-health program. Involved in management of concept notes and report writing

HOBBIES

Reading novels, listening to music, watching soap operas and reading educational and professional journals

SPORTS: Netball

 

 

REFEREES 

 

Professor Gamiano Mwabu,

Professor,

University of Nairobi,

P.O Box 30197,

Nairobi.

E-mail mwabu@kenyaweb.com

Tel 0721565387

 

 

 

Dr Damiano Kulundu Manda,

Manager, Research,

African Economic Research Consortium,

P.O Box

Nairobi.

E-Mail damiano.manda@aercafrica.org

Tel. 0721553635

 

Dr. Adolf F. Mukenda,

Senior Lecturer in Economics and Head of the Department,

P.O Box 35045,

University of Dar es Salaam

E-Mail

Amkenda@udsm.ac.tz

Tel +255754489275

 

Question

Imagine that you have done KCSE exam and passed. You see an advertisement in a local daily of a position that you qualify for. You decide to apply for it. Write a resume/CV that would be attached to your letter of application.

Question KCSE 2012

Read the advertisement below and answer the question that follow.

The Electoral Commission is currently seeking to recruit 800 clerical officers, who will work closely with the commission for two months to register voters in preparation for elections. The clerks will be expected to prepare a voters register.

Applicants must be :

Citizens of Kenya

–18 years and above

–Fluent in Swahili and English

–In possession of KCSE grade C and above

–Computer literate

–Able to work with little or no supervision

Interested candidates are required to send their applications to the following address so as to reach the commision by 30th, November 2015. The Chief Executive Officer, Electoral Commision, P.O. BOX 679439-010

Nairobi

  1. a) Write an application letter in response to the advertisement.
  2. b) Write an accompanying curriculum vitae.

Book Review

A book review is an advertisement for the book. It is a report or a critique giving a person’s opinion about a book or a film.

–After publication, a book should be reviewed to

  1. a) Publicize it
  2. b) Get to know its suitability to the readers
  3. c) Know the background information on the author
  4. d) Assess the relevance of the contents to the public
  5. e) Determine the price

When reviewing a book, point out the following:

–the title of the book

–Its author or playwright

–publisher

–Date of publication

–price

–the reviewer

When reviewing the book, a summary of the book should be given. The summary should be done in form of a synopsis. The summary should highlight major themes and state what the book is all about.

The book review should also point out an aspect of the book that is striking or original. This could be: style, characterization, setting etc

–Assess in your own opinion, whether the book is successful or not giving valid reasons e.g. The book is fun for children because it is full of juvenile mischief etc.

Example

BOOK REVIEW

Title: Who am I? The Story of Barack Obama

Author: Phillis Andrews

Publisher: East African Educational Publishers

Reviewer: Okong’o Nyanduki Sheila

Date of Publication: April 23, 2010

Price: Ksh 500

This book, used in more than 600 schools in the US, is a biography of Barack Obama for elementary school children. Using colour photographs and text, it tells how Obama struggled to define himself as a black child in a white world. Starting with his birth to a white mother and a black Kenyan father, it follows the fascinating story from his early life in Hawaii to his move to Indonesia and the rich cultural differences he experienced there. Children will be intrigued by the way Obama dealt with his return to Hawaii at age ten as an outsider. They will learn how he managed to surmount many odds to become President of the United States. This is an inspirational story for children of all backgrounds. The colour photographs of Obama as a child and throughout his life allow children to understand and identify with the 44th President. This book can be read by children as young as seven but is appreciated as a photo biography by children in the upper elementary grades. The actual reading level is grade 3-4.

 

Biographies

A biography is an account of someone’s life history written by someone else. It is normally a true story. The writer of a biography is called a biographer. Writing a biography gives us a sense of setting, time and place of major events in a person’s life. The story usually starts with his or her birth as a major event.

Points to consider when interviewing the subject for a biography

  1. Select a person you are interested in. Be friendly.
  2. Spend time with the subject.
  3. Be creative in setting up your interview so that it doesn’t seem so formal.
  4. Give the subject all your attention. Talk less and listen more.
  5. Be tactful especially when asking tricky or uncomfortable questions especially questions that touch on their weakness.
  6. Do not be afraid to ask dumb questions i.e those that would be touching on someone’s weakness.
  7. Note down facts, especially specific dates of relevant events and where possible verify with other sources.
  8. Make a list of questions you would like to ask.
  9. Do prior research to enable you have background information to enhance your interview.
  10. Read newspapers, magazines, internet sources etc as well as listening to tapes and watching videos about the person if they are available.
  11. Interview family members and friends also to get alternative views on the subject.
  12. Research on the historical period when the subject lived and worked so as to understand the socio-political influences on the decisions he took.
  13. Be objective—tell the truth basing on your on your findings i.e. strengths an weaknesses.
  14. Write a first draft, proof-read then write a final copy in prose.
  15. Try as much to stay creative and entertaining as you tell the story.
  16. You can divide the life of your subject into sections or memoirs i.e Childhood Adulthood etc.
  17. A biographer strives to bring to life the most significant moment of his or her subject.
  18. A eulogy is a short biography.

Autobiography

An autobiography is the history/ story of a person written by that person. The authors of autobiographies describe events and people they think influenced their lives.  They are based on facts and are therefore referred to as non-fiction.

ELEMENTS OF AN AUTOBIGRAPHY

  1. Date of birth
  2. Place of birth
  3. Early childhood
  4. Schools attended
  5. Favourite subjects
  6. Interests in life and dreams
  7. Sports and hobbies
  8. Memorable events in your life
  9. Careers
  10. Family members
  11. Where you lived

The author describes events in the order in which they occurred. Interesting details are highlighted, often humorous stories to enliven the piece of writing.

Auto biographers write to justify their lives—what they have done. They look at themselves as people who have lived interesting and important lives. They are characters in their own works. They select events and details they serve to embrace their artistic purpose of the work, namely making an important statement about life.

EXAMPLE

Biography Mother Teresa

Mother Teresa was born in 1910 in Skopje, capital of the Republic of Macedonia. Little is known about her early life, but at a young age she felt a calling to be a nun and serve through helping the poor. At the age of 18 she was given permission to join a group of nuns in Ireland. After a few months of training, with the Sisters of Loreto, she was then given permission to travel to India. She took her formal religious vows in 1931, and chose to be named after St Therese of Lisieux – the patron saint of missionaries.

On her arrival in India, she began by working as a teacher, however the widespread poverty of Calcutta made a deep impression on her and this led to her starting a new order called “The Missionaries of Charity”. The primary objective of this mission was to look after people, who nobody else was prepared to look after. Mother Teresa felt that serving others was a key principle of the teachings of Jesus Christ.

She experienced two particularly traumatic periods in Calcutta. The first was the Bengal famine of 1943 and the second was the Hindu/Muslim violence in 1946, before the partition of India. In 1948, she left the convent to live full-time among the poorest of Calcutta. She chose to wear a white Indian sari, with a blue border, out of respect for the traditional Indian dress. For many years, Mother Teresa and a small band of fellow nuns survived on minimal income and food, often having to beg for funds. But, slowly her efforts with the poorest were noted and appreciated by the local community and Indian politicians.

In 1952, she opened her first home for the dying, which allowed people to die with dignity. Mother Teresa often spent time with those who were dying. Some have criticised the lack of proper medical attention, and their refusal to give painkillers. Others say that it afforded many neglected people the opportunity to die knowing that someone cared.

Over time the work grew. Missions were started overseas, and by 2013, there are 700 missions operating in over 130 countries. The scope of their work also expanded to include orphanages, and hospices for those with terminal illnesses.

Mother Teresa never sought to convert those of another faith. Those in her hospices were given the religious rites appropriate to their faith. However, she had a very firm Catholic faith and took a strict line on abortion, the death penalty and divorce – even if her position was unpopular. Her whole life was influenced by her faith and religion, even though at times she confessed she didn’t feel the presence of God.

The Missionaries of Charity now has branches throughout the world including branches in the developed world where they work with the homeless and people affected with AIDS. In 1965, the organisation became an International Religious Family by a decree of Pope Paul VI.

In the 1960s, the life of Mother Teresa was first brought to a wider public attention by Malcolm Muggeridge who wrote a book and produced a documentary called “Something Beautiful for God”.

In 1979, she was awarded the Nobel Peace Prize “for work undertaken in the struggle to overcome poverty and distress, which also constitutes a threat to peace.” She didn’t attend the ceremonial banquet, but asked that the $192,000 fund be given to the poor.

In later years, she was more active in western developed countries. She commented that though the West was materially prosperous, there was often a spiritual poverty.

“The hunger for love is much more difficult to remove than the hunger for bread.”

-— Mother Teresa

When she was asked how to promote world peace, she replied,”Go home and love your family”.

Over the last two decades of her life, Mother Teresa suffered various health problems but nothing could dissuade her from fulfilling her mission of serving the poor and needy. Until her very last illness she was active in travelling around the world to the different branches of The Missionaries of Charity. During her last few years, she met Princess Diana in the Bronx, New York. The two died within a week of each other.

Following Mother Teresa’s death the Vatican began the process of beatification, which is the second step on the way to canonisation and sainthood. Mother Teresa was formally beatified in October 2003 by Pope John Paul II. In September 2015, Pope Francis declared:

 

Giving Directions

Directions are explanations on how to carry out a certain task such as preparing a seedbed, mending a bicycle or reaching a certain place.

Qualities of Good Directions

They should be simple and clear

–The instructor should be knowledgeable on the subject matter

–Instructions should be given step by step and in the correct order

–Emphasis the critical points that the listener must know or must handle with caution

–Confirm from the listener if every step is clear

When giving directions

–Note the landmarks along the way

–Give estimates of time and distance from one stop to another

–Give directions in relation to sides e.g. turn left or right

–Advice of the availability of certain means of transport e.g. take a boda boda

–Always give directions from the starting point that is familiar

–Do not give options because they tend to confuse someone—just give the easiest way When receiving instructions

–Be attentive and take notes

–Seek clarification on any area that might not be clear

–Pay close attention to the instructor’s gestures and body language

–Repeat the instructions if possible to confirm that you have understood them.

MEMORANDUM

Internal memo or just memo is an internal communication document within an organisation or institution. It is used to pass information within different offices of the same institution and not beyond. The information could be a short report, instructions, reminders or suggestions.

Usually, a given organisation has a standard form used for internal communications. This form may vary from one organisation to another.

Basically the internal memo has the following:

  1. The name of the organisation or institution printed at the top. This should be capitalized and in bold or underlined. E.g.

GARDEN VIEW HIGH SCHOOL

                       Internal memo

  1. The subheading ‘internal Memo’ printed below the name of the institution.
  2. Below the heading, the following information will appear
  3. a) Reference number of the communication memo
  4. b) The title and name to whom the memo is addressed.
  5. c) Title and name of other people who have been sent a similar copy of information or need to know about the communication.
  6. d) Name and position of the sender
  7. e) Date in full of communication
  8. f) Title of subject of the memo
  9. g) The message itself o r contents

The contents of a memo are usually very formal brief and direct.

 

                        KYANGULI SECONDAY SCHOOL

Internal memo

REF/NO: 33/06/2017

TO: All prefects

FROM: The deputy Principal

CC: Julius Opondo—The Principal

DATE: 12TH JULY 2017

 

SUBJECT: School Uniforms

It has been observed that prefects have stopped wearing their proper school uniforms. This is disturbing as a prefect is a model for the rest of the school community. I request those concerned to stop this habit.

Sign

James Okiru

 

–The date should be written in full

–The subject of the memo should be brief and concise.

–The message should be written clearly.

–There is no complementary closing such as Your Faithfully. All memos must be signed. Write your name without indicating the designation then as you sign off, you need to indicate your designation below he signature e.g. FROM: Head of Physics

Signing off

Sign

Josephat Lagat

EXAMPLE

 

HIGHLANDS ACADEMY

Internal memo

REF/NO: 67/5/2017

TO: Bursar

FROM: Josephat Lagat

CC: Principal

DATE: 10th June 2017

 

SUBJECT: Hire of Transport

Fifteen students from our school will be taking part in the inter-school debating competition scheduled for 18th June at Emeraid High School from 9.00 AM. They will be accompanied by two teachers from the department.

Kindly make arrangements to hire transport for the event.

Thank you.

Sign

Head of Languages

EXERCISE

  1. You are the chairperson of environmental club of your school. You have noticed that many of your classmates are not keeping the compound, dormitories and classrooms clean. You have been authorized by the principal to write a memo to all the prefects on this. Write the memo.
  2. Imagine you are the Head Prefect; prepare a memo notifying other students of changes in the school diet.

 

 

GEOGRAPHY KNEC SYLLABUS NEW PDF

GEOGRAPHY Examination Syllabus

FORM 1

  1. INTRODUCTION TO GEOGRAPHY
  2. Definition 1. Geography 2. environment
  3. branches of geography
  4. physical Geography
  5. Human Geography
  6. importance study of geography
  7. relationship between geography and other disciplines
  8. THE EARTH AND THE SOLAR SYSTEM 1. composition of the solar system
  9. ori, shape,size,and position of the earth in the solar system 3. rotation and revolution of the earth and their effects
  10. structure of the earth
  11. the atmosphere
  12. the hydrosphere
  13. the lithosphere/crust
  14. the asthenosphere /mantle
  15. the core (outer and inner core)

 

WEATHER

  1. definition of weather
  2. elements of weather
  3. factors for siting weather station
  4. instrument for measuring elements of weather condition
  5. recording and calculating weather conditions
  6. structure and composition of the atmosphere
  7. weather forecasting
  8. factors influencing weather
  9. STATISTICAL METHODS
  10. definition of statistics
  11. types of statistical data
  12. source of statistical data
  13. method of collecting data
  14. methods of recording data
  15. analysis of data by working out
  16. arithmetic mean
  17. median
  18. mode
  19. percentage
  20. range
  21. statistical representation through;
  22. simple lines
  23. simple bars
  24. combination bar and line graph
  25. simple wind rose
  26. advantage and disadvantage of each method of data presentation
  27. MAPS AND MAP WORK
  28. definition of pictures, plans and maps
  29. distinction between pictures, plans and maps
  30. types of maps
  31. atlas maps
  32. topographical maps
  33. sketch maps
  34. uses o maps
  35. maral information
  36. map scales
  37. estimations and measurements
  38. calculation of area of regular and irregular shopes
  39. FIELD WORK
  40. Definition of field work
  41. types of field work
  42. importance of field work
  43. field work procedure
  44. problems likely to be encountered during field study
  45. field work within the local environment
  46. MINERALS AND ROCKS
  47. Definition of minerals 1. rocks 2. characteristics of minerals 3. classification of rock according to mode of formation 4. characteristics of rocks 5. distribution of major types of rocks in Kenya 6. significance of rocks in Kenya
  48. MINING
  49. Definition of mining
  50. factors influencing the occurrence of minerals and their exploitation
  51. methods of mining
  52. distribution of major minerals in kenya
  53. significance of minerals in kenya
  54. problems fancing the mining industry in kenya
  55. effects of mining on the enviroment
  56. study of trona on lake magadi
  57. gold amd diamond in south Africa
  58. petroleum in middle east

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

* FORM 2

  1. INTERNAL LAND FORMING PROCESSES
  2. Earth movement 1. definition 2. types of movements horizontal and vertical 3. Causes
  3. Theories of
  4. Continental Drift
  5. Plate tectonics
  6. Folding
  7. definition
  8. Processes
  9. types of folds and the resultant features
  10. World distribution of folds mountain systems
  11. Significance to human activities
  12. Faulting
  13. Definition
  14. Processes
  15. Types of faults and the resultant features
  16. A study of the great rift valley
  17. World distribution of features due to faulting
  18. Significance of faulting to human activities
  19. Vulcanicity
  20. definition
  21. types and the resultant features
  22. World distribution of features due to vulcanicity
  23. Significance of vulcanicity to human activities
  24. Earthquakes
  25. Definition
  26. causes
  27. measurements
  28. Distribution of major earthquake zones in the world
  29. effects of earthquake
  30. MAP WORK
  31. Direction and bearing 1. distinction between direction and bearing 2. Traditional and modern methods of showing direction 3. Calculation of bearing
  32. Location of places using
  33. Direction, bearing, and distance
  34. Places names
  35. Latitude and longitudes
  36. Grid reference system
  37. Methods of representing relief on topographical maps
  38. PHOTOGRAPH WORK
  39. types of photographs
  40. Parts of a photograph
  41. interpretation of a photograph by
  42. Estimating actual size of photographs
  43. Sketching from photographs
  44. Studying physical features and human activities in

photographs

  1. STATISTICAL METHODS
  2. Statistical presentation, analysis and interpretation of: 1. comparative group multiple line graphs 2. Comparative group multiple bar graphs 3. Divided bars rectangles
  3. advantage and disadvantage of each method of data presentation
  4. CLIMATE
  5. Distinction between weather and climate
  6. Factors influencing climate
  7. Distribution and characteristics of climatic regions of
  8. Kenya
  9. The world
  10. Causes effects and possible solution to
  11. Aridity
  12. Desertification
  13. Causes and consequences of climate change
  14. VEGETATION
  15. DEFINITION OF VEGETATION
  16. Factors influencing the distribution of vegetation 3. Characteristics of major vegetation region of – Kenya – The world 4. Significance of vegetation 5. Field work
  17. FORESTRY 1. definition 1. Forestry 2. Forest
  18. Factors influencing the distribution and types of natural forest 3. importance of forests and forest products to Kenya 4. Problems facing forestry in Kenya 5. Management and conservation of forests with specific emphasis to Kenya 6. Related study on softwood in Kenya and Canada

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

* FORM 3

  1. STATISTICAL METHODS 1. statistical presentation, analysis and interpretation of
  2. Compound/cumulative bar graphs
  3. proportional circles
  4. Pie charts/dividing circles
  5. advantages and disadvantages
  6. MAP WORK
  7. INTERPRETATION of physical features and human activities on topographical maps
  8. Land forms
  9. vegetation
  10. Drainage
  11. economic activities
  12. Settlements
  13. Enlargement and reduction of maps 3. Drawing of cross sections 4. calculations and interpretation of
  14. vertical exaggeration
  15. gradient
  16. Intervisibility
  17. EXTERNAL LAND FORMING PROCESSES
  18. Weathering 1. definition 2. Agents 3. Types and processes 4. Significance of weathering
  19. Mass wasting
  20. Definition
  21. Factors influencing mass wasting
  22. Types and processes
  23. Effects of mass wasting on the physical and human environments
  24. Hydrological cycle
  25. Definition
  26. Process
  27. Significance
  28. Action of rivers
  29. Definition
  30. the work of rivers and the development of rivers
  31. The resultant features
  32. River capture and rejuvenation
  33. Drainage patterns
  34. The significance of rivers and the resultant

features

  1. Lakes
  2. Definition of lake
  3. Formation and classification of lakes
  4. Significance of lakes
  5. Oceans Seas and their coasts
  6. distinction between oceans and seas
  7. Nature of ocean water
  8. water movement meaning causes and significance of
  9. Wave action and the resultant features
  10. types of coast
  11. significance of oceans ,coast and coastal features
  12. Action of wind and water in arid areas
  13. Process and the resultant features
  14. Significance of the resultant features
  15. Action of water in limestone areas 1. Process of surface and underground water and the resultant features 9. Glaciation
  16. Definition of
  17. Process of glaciation and the resultant features in

highlands and low lands areas 3. Significance of glaciation

10

Field work

  1. SOILS
  2. Definition of soil
  3. Composition of soil
  4. Soil forming processes
  5. Properties and characteristics of soils
  6. Soil profile and soil catena
  7. Soil degeneration
  8. definition
  9. Types of soil degeneration
  10. Soil erosion
  11. Classification of soils
  12. Significance of soils
  13. Management and conservation of soil
  14. AGRICULTURE
  15. Definition of agriculture
  16. Factors influencing agriculture
  17. Types of agriculture
  18. Crop farming
  19. major cash crops in kenya
  20. study of Tea Sugar cane,and maize
  21. Study of cocoa in Ghana
  22. Oil palm in Nigeria
  23. Related study in coffe in kenya and brazil,wheat in

kenya and canada ,horticalture in kenya and the netherlands

  1. Livestock Farming
  2. Pastrol farming in kenya
  3. Daily farming in kenya and Denmark
  4. Beef farming in kenya and Argentina
  5. Field work

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

* FORM 4

  1. STATISTICAL METHODS
  2. Statistical representation through age-sex pyramids
  3. Analysis and interpretation of
  4. Age-sex pyramids
  5. Dot maps
  6. Choropleth maps
  7. LAND RECLAMATION 1. A study of 1. mwea-Tebera irrigation scheme 2. Pekera irrigation schemes
  8. Definition of
  9. land reclamation
  10. land rehabilitation
  11. Significance of irrigation farming in kenya
  12. Problems experienced in irrigation farming in kenya
  13. Methods of land reclamation and rehabilitation kenya
  14. Related studies on land reclamation in kenya and the Netherlands
  15. FISHING
  16. Definition of; 1. Fishing 2. Fisheries 2. Factors influencing fishing 3. Distribution of major fishing grounds of the world 4. types and methods of fishing 5. Fresh water and marine fisheries in East Africa 6. Problems facing in Kenya and their solutions 7. Comparative study of fishing in Kenya and Japan 8. Management and conservation of fresh water and marine fisheries
  17. WILDLIFE AND TOURISM
  18. Wildlife 1. Definition of wildlife 2. factors influencing the distribution of wildlife in East Africa 3. Distinction between game reserve ,national park and sanctuaries 4. location of national parks major reserves and sanctuaries in East Africa 5. Significance of wildlife 6. Problems facing wildlife in East Africa 7. Management and conservation of wildlife in East Africa
  19. TOURISM
  20. Definition of ;
  21. Distinction between domestic and international tourism
  22. factors influencing tourism in kenya
  23. Tourism attraction in kenya
  24. Significance of tourism
  25. Problems facing and associated with tourism in Kenya
  26. Related study on tourism in Switzerland
  27. The future of tourism in Kenya
  28. ENERGY
  29. Definition of energy
  30. Sources and types of energy
  31. Electric power projects in Kenya and Uganda
  32. Hydro-electric power projects
  33. Geothermal power projects in Kenya
  34. Location and other hydro-electric power projects in Africa 5. Significance of energy 6. The energy crisis 7. Management and conservation of energy
  35. INDUSTRY
  36. definition 1. Industry 2. Industrialization
  37. factors influencing the location and development of industries 3. Types of industries 4. Distribution of industries in kenya 5. Significance of industrialization in kenya 6. Problems of industrialization and their possible solutions 7. A study on 1. Cottage industry in india 2. Iron and steel industry in the Ruhr region of Germany 3. Car manufacture and electronics industry in Japan
  38. TRANSPORT AND COMMUNICATION
  39. Definition 1. Transport 2. Communication
  40. Mode of transport and types of communication 3. The role of transport and communication in the economic development of Africa 4. Problems facing transport and communication in Africa andefforts being made to solve them
  41. A study of the Great lakes and the St Lawrence seaway
  42. TRADE
  43. Types of trade
  44. factors influencing trade
  45. Major exports and imports of kenya
  46. Significance of trade to kenya
  47. problems facing trade in kenya
  48. The future of international trade in kenya
  49. The role played by the following regional trading blocks

in the economic of their respective regions

  1. COMESA
  2. SADAC
  3. ECOWAS
  4. EU
  5. POPULATION
  6. Definition of population
  7. Factors influencing population
  8. Factors influencing population growth in ; 1. fertility
  9. Motality 3. Migration
  10. Population structure 5. Consequences of population growth and structure 6. Related studies on population in kenya and Sweden

10

SETTLEMENT

  1. Definition 1. settlement 2. Urbanization
  2. Factors influencing
  3. Settlements
  4. patterns of settlement
  5. Distribution of major urban centers in East Africa
  6. Factors influencing the growth of major urban center in East Africa
  7. Study of the following towns in kenya
  8. Thika
  9. Kisumu
  10. Eldoret
  11. Related studies with the following
  12. Cities Nairobi and New York
  13. Port Mombasa and Rotter
  14. Effects of urbanization
  15. MANAGEMENT AND CONSERVATION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
  16. definition of; 1. Management 2. conservation
  17. the need for environmental management and conservation
  18. Environmental hazards
  19. Selected environmental hazards the associated problems and measures for combating them
  20. Floods
  21. Lightning
  22. Wind storm
  23. Pest and diseases
  24. Pollution
  25. Environmental management and conservation measures in kenya 6. field work

Grade 6 Term 2 Latest Exams {All Subjects}

Download free Grade 6 Term 2 Latest Exams {All Subjects} here:

G6 SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

G6 CREATIVE ARTS MS

G6 CREATIVE ARTS

MATHEMATICS

G6 SST MS

GRADE 7 SOCIAL STUDIES

G6 MATHEMATICS MS

G6 AGRICULTURE AND NUTRITION MS

G6 CRE MS

G6 ENGLISH MS

G6 HRE MS

G6 ENGLISH B

G6 KISWAHILI A

G6 AGRICULTURE AND NUTRITION

G6 ENGLISH A

G6 KISWAHILI MS

G6 SOCIAL STUDIES

G6 SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY MS

G6 IRE MS

G6 KISWAHILI B

G6 IRE

GRADE 6 KISWAHILI

G6 MATHEMATICS

GRADE 6 AGRICULTURE AND NUTRITION

GRADE 6 INSHA

GRADE 6 MATHEMATICS

G6 HRE

GRADE 6 CREATIVE ARTS

GRADE 6 ENGLISH

GRADE 6 SOCIAL STUDIES RELIGIOUS

GRADE 6 COMPOSITION

GRADE 7 HRE

GRADE 7

CLASS 8 KISWAHILI SCHEMES OF WORK TERM 1-3 UPDATED FREE

AZIMIO LA KAZI

DARASA LA NANE 

MUHULA WA I

ASILIA

  1. KISWAHILI MFUTI
  2. Mwongozo wa Mwalimu
  3. Oxford
  4. Kamusi
JUMA KIPINDI FUNZO MADA MALENGO SHUGHULI ZA MWALIMU SHUGHULI ZA MWANA FUNZI NYENZO ASILIA MAONI
1 MATAYARISHONA KUFUGUA SHULE  
2 1 Kusikiliza na kuzungumza/kongea Maamkizi Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze, kutumia baadhi ya msamiati wa maakizi, k.m. hujambo :sijambo. Habari nzuri. -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-Picha kiabuni

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK 2

MWM UK1

 
2 kusoma

Ufahamu

Chada chema Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma ,  ufahamu chada chema -kueleza

-kutaja

-kuandika

-kuiga

-kueleza

-kutaja

-kuandika

-kuiga

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK 3

MWM UK3

 
3 Maombo ya lugha Shairi ‘saiti kwenda wema’ Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kutamka na kukariri shairi  ‘saiti kwenda wema,’ kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kuandika

-kutamka

-kutumia

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK 4

MWM UK4

 
4 Sarufi Viambishi ngeli Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma ,  kulikariri shairi ‘umuhimu wa kutenda wema’ -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK5

MWM UK4

 
5 Kuandika (insha) Heshima Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kuandika na kutumia  maneno ya heshima ifaayo katika insha -kueleza

-kutaja

-kuandika

-kuiga

-kueleza

-kutaja

-kuandika

-kuiga

-Picha kiabuni

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK5-7

MWM UK5

 
                   
3 1 Kuongea/kusikiliza Akisami Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kubainisha akisami pammoja na maelozo yake, kuandika akisami kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK7

MWM UK7

 
2 Ufahamu Majaaliwa Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kujibu na kuandika maswali yaufahamu kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK8

MWM UK8

 
3 Mapambo ya lugha Misemo na methali Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma ,  kutambua na kutumia misemo na methali katika sentensi -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK9

MWM UK9

 
4 Sarufi Vivumishi visivyochukua viambishi ngeli Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma, kubainisha na kutumia vivumishi katika sentensi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-Picha kiabuni

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK11

MWM UK10

 
5 Kuandika (insha) Siku ambayo sitaishahau Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kumbuni, na kuandika insha akitumia maneno aliyopewa kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK12

MWM UK10

 
4 1 Kusikiliza na kuzungumza tarakimu Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kubainisha tarakimu  milion kumi hadi milioni mia moja na kuandika tarakimu kwa usahihi kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK 12

MWM UK11

 
2 Ufahamu Sayari Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze, kusoma kutaja na kutumia msamiati wa sayari kwa usahihi   kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-Picha kiabuni

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK20

MWM UK12

 
3 Mapabo ya lugha Vitate Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,  kutambua na kutumia vitate katika sentensi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

  -kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK 14

MWM UK14

 
4 Sarufi Vihisishi Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kueleza, kubainisha na kutumia vihisishi katika sentensi kwa usahihi   -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK22

MWM UK26

 
5 Kuandika  (insha) Sayari Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kumbuni, na kuandika isha akitumia maneno aliyopewa kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK 23

MWM UK18

 
5 1 Kusikiliza na kuzungumza Dira Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze  kutambua , kuchora na kutumia msamiati wa dira kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

  -Picha kiabuni

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK 25

MWM UK20

 
2 Ufahamu Nyota njema Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kubainisha na kujibu maswali ya ufahamu kwa usahihi   -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK 26

MWM UK22

 
3 Mapambo ya lugha Silabi- cha Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,  kutambua na kutumia methali katika sentensi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK28

MWM UK23

 
4 Sarufi Vihisishi Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kueleza, kubainisha na kutumia vihisishi katika sentensi kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

  -Picha kiabuni

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK29

MWM UK24

 
5 Kuandika (insha) Barua ya kirafiki Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kuandika insha kwa kujaza mapengo ukitumia maneno uliyopewa -kusikiliza

-kutamka

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK30

MWM UK

 
6 1 Kusikiliza na

kuzungumza

 

Mali ya sili Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kueleza, kuorodhesha na kufafanua  faida za maliasilina wajibu wake kuzihusu -kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK 12

MWM UK25

 
2 Ufahamu Maliasili Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,  kutambua  na kujibu maswali yaufahamu -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusikiliza

-kutamka

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-Picha kiabuni

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK38

 
3 Mapambo ya lugha Methali zinazopingana kimaana Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma, kutumia na kuandika methali zinazo pingana kimaana -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK39

MWM UK

 
4 Sarufi Viunganishi

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kueleza, kubainisha na kutumia viunganishi katika sentensi kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK 40

MWM UK28

 
5 Kuandika (insha) Maliasili Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze  kubunikuandika insha kwa kujaza mapengo ukitumia maneno uliyopewa -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-Picha kiabuni

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK 13

MWM UK

 
7 MTIHANI WA KATI WA MUHULA  
8 1 Kusikiliza na kuzungumza Majina ya wizara mbalimbali

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kutaja na na kueleza shughuli za wizara mbalimbali -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK 40

MWM UK29

 
2 Ufahamu Lau ningekuwa waziri ya elimu

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,  kutambua na kujibu  maswali ya ufahamu kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK41

MWM UK31

 
3 Mapambo ya lugha Visawe

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma, kutumia na kuandika visawe huku akieleza maana -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK  44

MWM UK33

 
4 Sarufi Viunganishi

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma, kutumia na kuandika viunganishi vya chaguo na vya nyongaza kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-Picha kiabuni KS MFUTI

UK  45

MWM UK34

 
5 Kuandika (insha) Lau ninekuwa waziri wa elimu

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kubuni na kuandika kwa hati zinazosomeka kulingana na kichwa alichopewa -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

Kitabu cha wanafunz

-Kamusi

-Kamusi i

KS MFUTI

UK  46

MWM UK35

 
9 1 Kusikiliza na kuzungumza Ngonjera Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kueleza maana ya ngojera, kukariri na kufafanua ujube -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK 47

MWM UK37

 
2 Ufahamu Utenzi

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma ,  kueleza na kujibu  maswali ya ufahamu kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-Picha kiabuni KS MFUTI

UK  5 6

MWM UK39

 
3 Mapambo ya lugha Nimino za makundi

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kueleza na kutumia  nomino za makundi katika sentensi kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK  57

MWM UK40

 
4 Sarufi Viunganishi linganishi

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kueleza kubainisha na kutumia viunganishi linganishi kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-Picha kiabuni

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK  17

MWM UK

 
5 Kuandika (insha) Utungaji mashairi Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kuakifisha, kutunga shairi kuzingatia arudhi kulingana na kichwa na beti alizopewa -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK  58

MWM UK40

 
10 1 Kusikiliza na kuzungumza Msamiati wa mahakamani Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma nakutumia baadhi ya msamiati wa maneno wa mahakamani -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK  49

MWM UK

 
2 Ufahamu Usipoziba ufa

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma ,  kueleza na kujibu  maswali ya ufahamu kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kadi

-picha

michoro

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK  19

MWM UK42

 
3 Mapambo ya lugha Methali Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma ,  kutambua na kutumia  methali na maana zake katika sentensi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-Picha kiabuni KS MFUTI

UK  59

MWM UK43

 
4 Sarufi Manano ya kutiria mkazo(takriri)

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kueleza maana yatakiririna kutumia maneno ya kutilia mkazo katika sentensi kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK  61

MWM UK45

 
5 Kuandika (insha) kumbumbu Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kubainisha na kuandika insha ya kumbumbu -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK  62

MWM UK45

 
11 1 Kusikiliza na kuzungumza Mekoni

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kufasiri maneno ya picha, kujadili nakufafanua baadhi ya msamiati wa mekoni -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-Picha kiabuni KS MFUTI

UK  63

MWM UK46

 
2 Ufahamu Wageni mekoni

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kuandika nakujibu maswali ya ufahamu -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK  64

MWM UK47

 
3 Mapambo ya lugha Methali

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma ,  kutambua na kutumia  methali na maana zake katika sentensi -kusikiliza

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK  76

MWM UK51

 
4 Sarufi Matumizi ya ‘si-’

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kutumia na kueleza matumizi sahihi ya ‘si –‘ -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK  77

MWM UK52

 
5 Kusikiliza na kuzungumza Vipindi vya redio na runinga

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusikiliza redio narununga nakujibu maswali yatayo ulizwa -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusikiliza

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

Redio

runinga

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK  78

MWM UK 54

 
12 1 Kuandika insha Jinsi ya kupika Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kubuni na kuandika insha shahihiya maelezo jinsi ya kupika -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK  79

MWM UK55

 
2 Ufahamu Barua rasmi

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma, kueleza na kuandika barua rasmi kwa hati zinazosomeka na nadhifu -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK  79

MWM UK56

 
3 Mapambo ya lugha vitawe Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma, kutumia na kuandika vitawe huku akieleza maana -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK  78

MWM UK52

 
4 Sarufi Matumizi ya, ‘amba’ Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,  kutambua na kuondosha amba’ na kutumia ‘O’ rejeshi mahali pake katika sentensi kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-Picha kiabuni

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK 80

MWM UK58

 
5 Kusandika insha Barua rasmi Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze  kueleza na kuandika barua rasmi kwa hati zinazosomeka na nadhifu -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK 83

MWM UK60

 
13 MARUNDIO  
14 MTIHANI WA MWISHO WA MUHULA  

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

AZIMIO LA KAZI

DARASA LA NANE 2016

MUHULA WA II

 

 

 

 

               ASILIA

  1. KISWAHILI MFUTI
  2. Mwongozo wa Mwalimu
  3. Oxford
  4. Kamusi

 

 

 

 

 

JUMA KIPINDI FUNZO MADA MALENGO SHUGHULI ZA MWALIMU SHUGHULI ZA  MWANA FUNZI NYENZO ASILIA MAONI
1 KUFUNGUA SHULE NA MATAYARISHO  
2 1 Kusikiliza na kuzungumza/kongea Msamiati wa teknolojia Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze, kutumia baadhi ya msamiati wa teknolojia kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-Picha kiabuni

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK 88

MWM UK61

 
2 kusoma

Ufahamu

Uchungu wa mwana Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma ,  ufahamu uchungu wa mwana na kujibu maswali ya ufahamu kwa usahihi -kueleza

-kutaja

-kuandika

-kuiga

-kueleza

-kutaja

-kuandika

-kuiga

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK 89

MWM UK62

 
3 Maombo ya lugha Misemo Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kutamka na kutumia misemo kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kuandika

-kutamka

-kutumia

-kusoma

-kuandika

-kutamka

-kutumia

-kadi

-picha

michoro

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK 89

MWM UK63

 
4 Sarufi Matumizi ya ‘na’ Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma ,  kubainisha na kutumia ‘na’ katika sentensi kwa namna mbalimbali na kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK90

MWM UK62

 
5 Kuandika (insha) Teknolojia Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kuandika, kujadili  na kutumia  msamiati wa teknolojia kwa usahihi -kueleza

-kutaja

-kuandika

-kuiga

-kueleza

-kutaja

-kuandika

-kuiga

-Picha kiabuni

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK91

MWM UK63

 
                   
3 1 Kuongea na kusikiliza Msamiati wa ukoo Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kubainisha baadhi ya misamiatri ya ukoo. Na kuitumia kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK91

MWM UK64

 
2 Ufahamu Sijafisha Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kujibu na kuandika maswali yaufahamu kwa usahihi kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK92

MWM UK65

 
3 Mapambo ya lugha  methali Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma ,  kutambua na kutumia metheli zenye mizizi ‘ndi’ katika sentensi -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK93

MWM UK66

 
4 Sarufi Matumizi ya ‘ndi’ Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma, kubainisha na kueleza matumizi ya ‘ndi’ katika ngeli zote -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-Picha kiabuni KS MFUTI

UK95

MWM UK67

 
5 Kuandika (insha) Insha ya maelezo Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kumbuni, na kuandika insha akitumia maneno aliyopewa kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK96

MWM UK68

 
4 1 Kusikiliza na kuzungumza Viwanda Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kubainisha kutaja na kueleza aina za bidhaa/ vifaa vinavyo tengezwa katika viwanda -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK 96

MWM UK68

 
2 Ufahamu Kazi ya mkono haitupi Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze, kusoma kujadili na kujibu maswali ya ufahamu kwa usahihi kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-Picha kiabuni

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK 104

MWM UK70

 
3 Mapabo ya lugha Methali zinazo fanana ki mawazo Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,  kutambua na kutumia methali zinazo fanana kimawazo     -kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK104

MWM UK71

 
4 Sarufi Vielezi Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kueleza, kubainisha na kutumia vielezi katika sentensi kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK 107

MWM UK72

 
5 Kuandika  (insha) Mtungo Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kumbuni, na kuandika isha akitumia maneno aliyopewa kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK 108

MWM UK73

 
5 1 Kusikiliza na kuzungumza Matunda, miti na mimea Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze  kutambua , kuchora na kutumia msamiati wa matunda,miti namimea     -Picha kiabuni KS MFUTI

UK 109

MWM UK73

 
2 Ufahamu Mwadani wetu Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kubainisha na kujibu maswali ya ufahamu kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK 9

MWM UK

 
3 Mapambo ya lugha vitawe Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,  kutambua maana  na kutumia vitawe katika sentensi -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK 110

MWM UK74

 
4 Sarufi Viulizi Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kueleza, kubainisha na kutumia viulizi katika sentensi kwa usahihi     -Picha kiabuni

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK 11

MWM UK

 
5 Kuandika (insha) Miti Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kuandika insha umuhimu wa miti ukijaza  mapengo ukitumia maneno uliyopewa -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK 11 1

MWM UK76

 
6 1 Kusikiliza na

kuzungumza

 

Vitabu vya maktaba Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kueleza, kuorodhesha na kufafanua  na kuchangamkia kusoma vitabu vya maktaba -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

Kitabu cha

-Kamusi wanafunzi

KS MFUTI

UK 112

MWM UK78

 
2 Ufahamu Tuzungukaje mbuyu? Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,  kutambua  na kujibu maswali yaufahamu na kujadili mafunzo katika ngojera hili -kusikiliza

-kutamka

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusikiliza

-kutamka

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-Picha kiabuni KS MFUTI

UK 113

MWM UK79

 
3 Mapambo ya lugha Vitendawili Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma, kutumia nakutega na kutegua vitendawili -kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK 114

MWM UK99

 
4 Sarufi Matumizi ya: ‘katika’ kwenye’ na ‘ni’

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kueleza, kubainisha na kutumia ‘katika’ kwenye’ na  ‘ni’ -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK 123

MWM UK81

 
5 Kuandika (insha) Mtungo Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze  kubunikuandika insha kwa kujaza mapengo ukitumia maneno uliyopewa -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-Picha kiabuni

-Kamusi

KS MFUTI

UK 122

MWM UK82

 
7 MTIHANI WA KATI YA MUHULA  
8 1 Kusikiliza na kuzungumza Miti na mimea

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kubainisha, kueleza na kutumia msamiati wa wa miti na mimea kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK 129

MWM UK86

 
2 Ufahamu Mstahimilivu hula mbivu

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,  kujadili funzo,kutambua na kujibu  maswali ya ufahamu kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK 129

MWM UK87

 
3 Mapambo ya lugha Vitate

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma, kutumia na kuandika vitate  huku akieleza maana -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK  131

MWM UK88

 
4 Sarufi Ukubwa wa nomino

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kueleza, kutumia na kuandika ukumbwa wa nomino -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-Picha kiabuni KS MFUTI

UK  138

MWM UK90

 
5 Kuandika (insha) Wasifu (mekatilili)

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kubuni na kuandika insha kuhusu mutu mashuhuri kwa hati zinazosomeka kulingana na kichwa alichopewa -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK  138

MWM UK91

 
9 1 Kusikiliza na kuzungumza Majina ya kike na kiume Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kueleza kumbainisha na kutumia  msamiati wa kike na kiume -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK  139

MWM UK92

 
2 Ufahamu Mjadala: wanafaa kusoma pamoja

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma , kujadili ,kueleza na kujibu  maswali ya ufahamu kwa usahihi -kujadili

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kujadili

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-Picha kiabuni KS MFUTI

UK  143

MWM UK92

 
3 Mapambo ya lugha Visawe

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kueleza maana na kutumia  visawe katika sentensi kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK  143

MWM UK93

 
4 Sarufi Hali ya udogo

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kueleza kubainisha na kutumia hali ya udogokutoka hali ya kawaida kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-Picha kiabuni KS MFUTI

UK  144

MWM UK96

 
5 Kuandika (insha) mjadala Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kuandika insha ya mjadala kulingana na kichwa ulicho pewa -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK 145

MWM UK97

 
10 1 Kusikiliza na kuzungumza Majina ya wafanyikazi mbalimbali Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma nakutumia baadhi ya msamiati wa majina ya wafanyi kazi mbalimbali -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK  146

MWM UK98

 
2 Ufahamu Uhaba wa kazi

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma ,  kueleza na kujibu  maswali ya ufahamu kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK  145

MWM UK97

 
3 Mapambo ya lugha Shairi : ‘nitafanya kazi ngani’ Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma ,  kukariri na kujadili funzu la shairi hili -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kukariri

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kukariri

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-Picha kiabuni KS MFUTI

UK  146

MWM UK97

 
4 Sarufi Usemi wa taarifa

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kueleza na kubainisha usemi wa taarifa na kubadilisha kwa usemi halisi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK  147

MWM UK98

 
5 Kuandika (insha) kazi Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kubainisha na kuandika insha akitetea hoja kikamilifu -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK  147

MWM UK99

 
11 1 Kusikiliza na kuzungumza Mekoni

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kufasiri maneno ya picha, kujadili nakufafanua baadhi ya msamiati wa mekoni -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-Picha kiabuni KSMFUTI

UK  21

 
2 Ufahamu Wageni mekoni

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kuandika nakujibu maswali ya ufahamu -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK  22

 
3 Mapambo ya lugha Methali

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma ,  kutambua na kutumia  methali na maana zake katika sentensi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK  23

MWM UK

 
4 Sarufi Matumizi ya ‘si-’

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kutumia na kueleza matumizi sahihi ya ‘si –‘ -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK  23

MWM UK

 
5 Kusikiliza na kuzungumza Vipindi vya redio na runinga

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusikiliza redio narununga nakujibu maswali yatayo ulizwa -kusikiliza

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusikiliza

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

Redio

runinga

KS MFUTI

UK  24

MWM UK

 
12 1 Kuandika insha Jinsi ya kupika Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kubuni na kuandika insha shahihiya maelezo jinsi ya kupika -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK  24

MWM UK

 
2 Ufahamu Barua rasmi

 

Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma, kueleza na kuandika barua rasmi kwa hati zinazosomeka na nadhifu -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK  25

MWM UK

 
3 Mapambo ya lugha vitawe Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma, kutumia na kuandika vitawe huku akieleza maana -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK  23

MWM UK

 
4 Sarufi Matumizi ya, ‘amba’ Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,  kutambua na kuondosha amba’ na kutumia ‘O’ rejeshi mahali pake katika sentensi kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-Picha kiabuni KS MFUTI

UK  25

MWM UK

 
5 Kusandika insha Barua rasmi Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze  kueleza na kuandika barua rasmi kwa hati zinazosomeka na nadhifu -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuunganisha

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK  26

MWM UK

 
5                
13 JARIBIO LA PILI  
14 MTIHANI WA MWISHO WA MUHULA  

 

 

 

 

 

AZIMIO LA KAZI

DARASA LA NANE 2016

MUHULA WA II

 

 

 

 

               ASILIA

  1. KISWAHILI MFUTI
  2. Mwongozo wa Mwalimu
  3. Oxford
  4. Kamusi

 

 

 

 

 

JUMA KIPINDI FUNZO MADA MALENGO SHUGHULI ZA MWALIMU SHUGHULI ZA MWANAFUNZI NYENZO ASILIA MAONI
1 KUFUNGUA NA MATAYARISHO  
2 1 Kusikiliza na kuzungumza/kongea Mihadarati Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze, kutumia baadhi ya msamiati wa mihadarati na kufafanua adhari zake. -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-Picha kiabuni KS MFUTI

UK 154

MWM UK100

 
2 kusoma

Ufahamu

Sibaguami Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma ,  kujibu na kujadili ujube uliko katika msakala haya -kueleza

-kujadili

-kuandika

-kuiga

-kueleza

-kujadili

-kuandika

-kuiga

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK 155

MWM UK101

 
3 Maombo ya lugha Misemo Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kubainisha na kutumia misemo katika sentensi -kusoma

-kuandika

-kutamka

-kutumia

-kusoma

-kuandika

-kutamka

-kutumia

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK 156

MWM UK102

 
4 Sarufi Usemi halishi Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma ,  kubainisha usemi halisi na kubadilisha usemi wa taarifa kuwa usemi halisi -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK157

MWM UK103

 
5 Kuandika (insha) Mazungumzo na methali Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kuandika ya mazungumzo kutumia  methali kwa ushahihi -kueleza

-kutaja

-kuandika

-kuiga

-kueleza

-kutaja

-kuandika

-kuiga

-Picha kiabuni KS MFUTI

UK157

MWM UK104

 
                   
3 1 Kuongea na kusikiliza Mazingira Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kujadili namna ya mazingira na njia za kukinga na kuzuia uharubifu -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK4157

MWM UK103

 
2 Ufahamu Hotuba Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kuzingatia na kujibu maswali yaufahamu kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK155

MWM UK104

 
3 Mapambo ya lugha Methali Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma ,  kutambua na kutumia  metheli katika sentensi -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK156

MWM UK105

 
4 Sarufi Myambuliko wa vitenzi Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma, kubainisha na kutumia vitenzi katika sentensi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-Picha kiabuni KS MFUTI

UK154

MWM UK100

 
5 Kuandika (insha) Hotuba Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kumbuni, na kuandika isha akitumia maneno aliyopewa kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK156

MWM UK102

 
4 1 Kusikiliza na kuzungumza Ajira ya watoto Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kufasiri ujumbe wa michoro, kueleza na kubainisha ubaya,hasara na madhara ya ajira ya watoto -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK 157

MWM UK103

 
2 Ufahamu Krismasi Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze, kusoma kutaja na kutumia msamiati mpya  kwa usahihi kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-Picha kiabuni KS MFUTI

UK 160

MWM UK105

 
3 Mapabo ya lugha Vitawe Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,  kutambua na kutumia vitawe katika sentensi     -kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK 161

MWM UK105

 
4 Sarufi  ‘a’ unganifu Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kueleza, kubainisha na kutumia vihisishi katika sentensi kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK 162

MWM UK159

 
5 Kuandika  (insha) Sherehe Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kumbuni, na kuandika isha akitumia maneno aliyopewa kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK 163

MWM UK 106

 
5 1 Jaribio la kwanza Dira Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze  kutambua , kuchora na kutumia msamiati wa dira kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kuchora

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kuchora

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-Picha kiabuni KS MFUTI

UK 164

MWM UK107

 
2 Ufahamu Nyota njema Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kubainisha na kujibu maswali ya ufahamu kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK 164-165

MWM UK108

 
3 Mapambo ya lugha Silabi- cha Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,  kutambua na kutumia methali katika sentensi -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

Kitabu cha wanafunzi KS MFUTI

UK 165

MWM UK110

 
4 Sarufi Vihisishi Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kusoma,kueleza, kubainisha na kutumia vihisishi katika sentensi kwa usahihi -kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-kusoma

-kutumia

-kueleza

-kuuliza

-Picha kiabuni KS MFUTI

UK 166

MWM UK112

 

 
5 Kuandika (insha) Barua ya kirafiki Kufikia mwisho wa kipindi mwanafunzi aweze kuandika insha kwa kujaza mapengo ukitumia maneno uliyopewa -kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kusoma

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kutambua

-kuzungumza

-kadi

-picha

michoro

KS MFUTI

UK 167

MWM UK112

 
6 1-5 Jaribio la kwanza Marudio Mwanafunzi aweze:

–        kujibu maswali aliyoulizwa

–        kukumbuka yale aliyo funzwa haponawali

–        kubuni na kuandika kwa hati ilyo someka

–        kustawisha ukakamavu wa kukabiliana na mtihani

-kueleza

-kuongoza kujibu maswali

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

 

 

-kueleza

-kuongoza kujibu maswali

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

 

 

-Kitabu cha mwana fuzi

-mitihani yajaribio

KS MFUTI

UK32-37

MWM UK115

 
                 
6   Jaribio la pili   Mwanafunzi aweze:

–        kujibu maswali aliyoulizwa

–        kukumbuka yale aliyo funzwa haponawali

–        kubuni na kuandika kwa hati ilyo someka

–        kustawisha ukakamavu wa kukabiliana na mtihani

-kueleza

-kuongoza kujibu maswali

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

 

-kueleza

-kuongoza kujibu maswali

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

 

Kitabu cha mwana fuzi

-mitihani yajaribio

KS MFUTI

UK 66-67

MWM UK25

 
7   Jaribio la tatu   Mwanafunzi aweze:

–        kujibu maswali aliyoulizwa

–        kukumbuka yale aliyo funzwa haponawali

–        kubuni na kuandika kwa hati ilyo someka

–        kustawisha ukakamavu wa kukabiliana na mtihani

-kueleza

-kuongoza kujibu maswali

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

 

-kueleza

-kuongoza kujibu maswali

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

 

Kitabu cha mwana fuzi

-mitihani yajaribio

KS MFUTI

UK 98-103

MWM UK48

 
8   Jaribio la nne   Mwanafunzi aweze:

–        kujibu maswali aliyoulizwa

–        kukumbuka yale aliyo funzwa haponawali

–        kubuni na kuandika kwa hati ilyo someka

–        kustawisha ukakamavu wa kukabiliana na mtihani

-kueleza

-kuongoza kujibu maswali

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

 

-kueleza

-kuongoza kujibu maswali

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

 

Kitabu cha mwana fuzi

-mitihani yajaribio

KS MFUTI

UK 132-137

MWM UK60

 
9 1 Jaribio la tano   Mwanafunzi aweze:

–        kujibu maswali aliyoulizwa

–        kukumbuka yale aliyo funzwa haponawali

–        kustawisha ukakamavu

-kueleza

-kuongoza kujibu maswali

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

-kueleza

-kuongoza kujibu maswali

-kusikiliza

-kuandika

 

Kitabu cha mwana fuzi

-mitihani yajaribio

KS MFUTI

UK 148-153

MWM UK80

 
10 1 Jaribio la sita   Mwanafunzi aweze:

–        kujibu maswali aliyoulizwa

–        kukumbuka yale aliyo funzwa haponawali

-kueleza

-kuongoza kujibu maswali

 

-kueleza

-kuongoza kujibu maswali

-kusikiliza

 

Kitabu cha mwana fuzi

-mitihani yajaribio

KS MFUTI

UK 168-172

MWM UK99

 
11 MTIHANI WA KCPE